JP6587322B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as can be seen, for example, in Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a game lottery for the progress of a game is performed when a game ball enters a starting port.

  That is, in this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball entering the starting port. When there is a ball entering the starting port, a determination process related to the progress of the game is performed so that the winning or the number of rounds in the winning game, the gaming state after the winning game, and the like are determined. As a result, when a win is won, a lot of game balls can be paid out to the player by performing a win game, and after the corresponding game, the game state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player. .

  Further, when a determination process related to the progress of the game is performed, a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal screen. Next, an expected effect is made as to whether or not the plurality of symbols variably displayed in this way are stopped and displayed in a special symbol combination that suggests that the winning symbol is won. As a result, the player enjoys the above-mentioned expected production about whether or not to stop display with a special symbol combination and enjoys this, and the winning result about the above winning from the symbol combination finally stopped and displayed Will be able to recognize and play games.

JP 2012-213502 A

Above Symbol conventional gaming machine, Yu Technical interest is concern that a decrease.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: a game board provided detachably with respect to the gaming machine main body,
A determination means for performing determination based on acceptance of a game medium in a start port provided in the game board;
Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on a result of determination by the determination means;
When a predetermined mode appears in the symbol variation, a privilege granting means that can grant a privilege to the player;
Production control means for performing control related to production,
A plurality of movable bodies operable by control by the effect control means,
The plurality of movable bodies include at least a first movable body and a second movable body provided at positions where the player cannot contact, and a third movable body provided at a position where the player can contact. And
The production control means includes
The specific state in which the movable body operation timing at which each of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body is operable is set in advance is related to the determination result by the determination means. Specific state generation means that can be generated based on the fact that no specific condition is satisfied,
When the movable body operation time comes within the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body, which are provided at positions where the player cannot contact, are sequentially operated among the plurality of movable bodies. However, with respect to the third movable body provided at a position where the player can contact among the plurality of movable bodies, the sequential movement by the first movable body and the second movable body is performed sequentially. It can be executed in parallel with the movement,
If the third movable body is not in a normal position when the movable body operation time comes within the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body even if they are within the symbol variation execution period. executable der processing for processing for sequentially operating the body to perform a restore operation with respect to the third movable member in the form of parallel to be successful is,
further,
The process for causing the third movable body to perform a restoring operation can be executed when a specific time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived when the specific movable state is not in the specific state, but is in the specific state. Sometimes, the game machine is not executed when a specific time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in Fig.51 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the game panel of the form different from FIG. 63 from the front with the front structural member, the board | substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 90 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a LOCKN signal log | history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection malfunction determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arrange | positioned at the game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows a circuit structure when the several sensor signal input part each connected to each of several magnetic detection sensor is connected in parallel with the base terminal of the transistor of a detection circuit part. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the example. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the example. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the magnetic sensor input circuit of another Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of a circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage raising part and the detection circuit part on the same board | substrate, and has arrange | positioned the voltage output part to another board | substrate (sensor board | substrate). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board | substrate, and has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part to another board | substrate (for example, main control board). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected the several sensor to the voltage output part in parallel. It is a figure which shows typically a mode that integration was achieved only in components (discrete components) with high security performance with respect to fraud in 1st control part MCG. It is a figure which shows the partial area | region in this base substrate about the base substrate of the main control board concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the vicinity of an opening window. It is AA arrow sectional drawing in FIG. The figure which shows typically the relationship between the special operation receiving part when the pachinko machine 1 is seen by a front view, and the various effect members arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with this special operation receiving part by a front view. is there. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control aspect with respect to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a control about the detection information analysis process of the physical object performed in a periphery control part regular process. (A) is a time chart which shows the control when production | generation reception generate | occur | produces in several operation site | parts, (b) shows the mode of generation | occurrence | production of production | production operation | movement when production | generation reception each generate | occur | produces in several operation site | parts. FIG. It is a figure showing example production 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure showing example production 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 2nd starting port passage process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about jackpot determination processing (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a jackpot determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a gate part passage process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) referred by the said effect symbol variation start process when it is in a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process sequence about the lottery (notice lottery performed within an effect symbol variation start process) regarding the notice effect which appears within the execution period (design variation time) of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice determination table T2 referred when the said fluctuation | variation (pending to be digested) is not the object of a timer prefetching effect in a normal game state (2nd timer notice lottery). (A) is a figure which shows an example of 1st mission effect determination table T3a (1st mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is performed in a normal game state, (b) is a normal game. It is a figure which shows an example of 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (2nd mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is not performed in a state. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice side timer type determination table T4 referred in notice side timer type lottery (step S5505). The reach type and processing status (when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) has not been made) It is a figure which compares and shows the upper limit number of appearance of the timer object candidate effect determined according to the below-mentioned 5th processing status and 6th processing status etc. besides the 1st-4th processing status. Step S5508 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and when it is in the first processing state where a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5a referred in the process of. Step S5523 is in the second processing state that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that has been determined to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5b referred in the process of. Step S5533 is in the third processing state that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and that is determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5c referred in the process of. If it is in the fourth processing state that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and has been determined to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), step S5543 It is a figure which shows an example of table T5d referred in the process of. In the first processing situation that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined (YES in step S5507), the process of step S5508 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6a-1 referred when it is determined to make the number of notices into 1 as a result of performing (step S5509). In the second processing situation that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507), the process in step S5523 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing (step S5524). In a fourth processing situation that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and has been determined to not execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), the process of step S5543 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 2 as a result of performing (step S5544). Corresponds to character reach in the second processing situation that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined not to be executed (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the fluctuation number to select is selected. Corresponds to SP reach in the second processing situation where it is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the fluctuation number to select is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of table T7a referred by 1st timer non-target advance notice lottery (step S5512). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b referred by the 2nd timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). When it is in the fifth processing situation in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5e referred in the process of step S5553. In the sixth processing situation in which the notice timer performance is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5f referred in the process of step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552) is made, step S5553 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6e-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing this process (step S5554). In the fifth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552) is made, step S5553 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6e-2 referred when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of performing the process of (2) (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (NO in step S5552) is determined to be executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6f-1 referred when it is decided to make the number of notices into 1 as a result of performing the process of (step S5564). In the sixth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (NO in step S5552) is determined to be executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6f-2 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 2 as a result of performing this process (step S5564). (A) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and three hold information in which the variable display is not executed (all are the first special symbol). It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred in the 1st special figure prefetch process when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in a state. Further, (b) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and two hold information (both being the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not yet executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred in the 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the state which is in the state. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about the table T8a-1 and table T8a-2 which are referred when determining the execution aspect of a timer prefetch effect in the situation where the number of prefetch fluctuation | variation is four. . (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about the table T8b-1 and table T8b-2 referred when determining the execution aspect of a timer prefetch effect in the condition where the number of prefetch fluctuation | variation is three. . Usually referred to when there is nothing that causes a big hit symbol to appear in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) It is a figure which shows the time holding | maintenance change table T9a. Special that is referenced when there is something that causes a big hit symbol to appear in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) It is a figure which shows the time holding | maintenance change table T9b. It is a figure which shows an example of the process sequence about the process performed in order to implement | achieve a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed. Timer target advance performed in the second processing situation in which it is a single timer mode (YES in step S506) and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of production. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination process about whether to generate | occur | produce a timer object advance effect, and also at which timing a timer object advance effect is generated. When a timer target advance effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3, it is a diagram illustrating an example of the content of a determination process regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at the timing. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination process about which type the production | generation aspect to generate | occur | produce at those timing, when performing timer object advance production at any two timings of timing Ta1-Ta3. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination process about which kind of effect form to generate | occur | produce at those timings, when performing timer object advance effect at all timings of timing Ta1-Ta3. In the second processing situation in which it is a single timer mode (YES in step S506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507), the number of notices is 2. Revival timer effect that is performed when it is determined (step S523) that the “conversation notice” is performed at the previous timing and the “object A action 1” is determined at the later timing. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object suppression control performed. (B) is a figure which shows the example about the table referred in the timer object suppression control when changing the ratio which a suppression period generate | occur | produces with the kind of effect aspect which appears as a timer object effect. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed the effect object. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed the effect object. Timer mode effect that is a single timer mode (YES in step S506) and that is performed in the second processing situation in which the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined not to be executed (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of. (A) to (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S506), and the second is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count output stop control performed in the processing condition of. It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process sequence when implement | achieving count output stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer plus production. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer stagnation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the progress effect connected with a timer object effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the operation effect in a timer. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer concealment effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the periphery control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search process in the case of performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions which select the channel which replaces sound output (stops sound reproduction) when the channel is not empty at the time of output of new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half fluctuation | variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound effect, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the fluctuation | variation second half of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control process which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effect which shows volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is the latter half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished according to the kind of alerting | reporting sound illustrated in FIG. (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (B) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (C) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (D) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining according to the information state of the pachinko machine 1 about the contents of information processing under production progress. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when a channel special release process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when an operation sound output process under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when the process relevant to channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. An example of the allocation status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination, and the situation on the movable decorative body side It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected not within the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit judgment, It is a time chart which shows an example about the condition by the side of a decoration body. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at the specific timing in the period when pattern change is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. . In the time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at two different timings in the period in which symbol variation is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement | achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example about the display content when operation is performed in multiple times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement | achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of production using the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of production using the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform a sword production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition production according to the classification of a fluctuation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword book effect. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in a sword part (blade part) itself, (A) A sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd Indicates the extracted state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword ornament in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, (A) Sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd sword state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period which concerns on an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament of the modification 1, and the operation timing of an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament (the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. Like the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the second suggestion pattern being performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword ornament is not activated and the operation button is activated once, then the sword ornament is activated It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related effect. It is a figure explaining the example about an effect when "the specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of a timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of production for every production about a production when a plurality of types (prediction production A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a production of indication. It is a figure which shows those production examples about the production content when the precursor production which is not a specific operation relevant production is performed, and the production content when the precursor production as a specific operation related production is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the content of the effect when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific effect aspect) to which the princess character was added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when a 1st sign production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when the 1st sign production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decoration body when specific conditions are satisfied. FIG. 356 is a time chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol fluctuation | variation starts comes in the condition where a specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special production pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process until a sword ornament 5001 returns to an original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation check periods. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the period other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation | movement state of a sword ornament in an operation reception period, (B) is a time chart which shows the relationship between the operation state of a sword decoration in other than an operation reception period, and abnormality detection. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of an operation button, (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the movable decoration provided in the game board. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of normality, (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the normal button production at normal time, and (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the button normal production at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation reception period, and (B) is the operation button when the abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between an operation state and a notification mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the production at the time of abnormality occurrence of a movable decoration body. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button in the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-short-time state, and (B) is the operation button cover and the operation button when the abnormality occurs in the time-short state. It is a time chart which shows an operation state.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320 Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for low sound inside attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is accommodated, and a payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. A payout control board box 950 There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot, and places the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 on the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement cutout portion 11, an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right fixing member 87 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a symmetrical shape in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the rear side position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow space are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the upper fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from an end side from the left end of the front extension portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-plate-like lock body 66a that extends in the front and rear directions with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion that projects rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and then diagonally left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending plate-like horizontal portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 vertically so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism of upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being pinched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and forward through the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and the left and right sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right upper reinforcing metal plate 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left and right middle reinforcing member attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending vertically and attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a right reinforcement extending up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 in front view. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement part 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that engages the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Hinge member on door frame side]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A column-shaped door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of protruding pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame And a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of a position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, so that the gravity center position of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The open / close cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened and closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are opened and closed.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34A, and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 39A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 39B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back after being broken down as every main member. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side from the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a is formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and is arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the game. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, so that when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player is relatively easy to press (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player who presses the operation button 410 is operated. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the production operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross hatched portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative part 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative part 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), and thus the first button decoration portion 411a By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are disposed, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent element disposed in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is mounted on the left unit. A left unit lower decorative base 535 that is shorter than the decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape, and covers the front end of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that is erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, an inner side surface that is formed to be flat and faces the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. In addition to providing the inner surface of the left reflecting vertical wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, the reflecting surface may be provided by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. Is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective upright wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion that bears a part of the reflective upright wall portion 33 (left side portion) described above.

  The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed in a saw-like shape in which the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a peak portion between the grooves is pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Substantially all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens part 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection part 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens part 532b. It is possible to irradiate light from the front surface of the lens to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly.

  In the front lens diffuser 532d and the front reflector 532f, the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves with a plurality of radially extending lines, and then concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light radiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the square lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light irradiated from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front of the circular decorative portion. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially vertical center of the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 51C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 55A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51A. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-like right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes the right diffuser and the right unit left diffusing lens in front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 when viewed from the front. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends shallowly in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a box shape with a square tube shape that is short in the front and rear direction and closed in the vicinity of the center in the front and rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, an inner side surface that is flat and faces the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. In addition, this reflective surface is provided with a reflective material such as metal or resin, as well as the inner side surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, as well as the inner side surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the reflection standing wall portion 33 described above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left / right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the front side in the left / right direction center, and mounted on the front side in the left / right direction center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A storage recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflection parts 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens part 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a is moved to the right from the rear end side toward the front, so that the main body 553a as a whole moves to the right in front view with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is passed from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concaved forward, the input lens portion 553e is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 553e is within the main body portion 553a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light reflected through the main body part 553a and irradiated through the main body part 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body part 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the left surface of the main body 553a (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of concentric stripes. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (side where the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern including a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Accordingly, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right side on the right side in front view of the main body portion 556a. An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 556a is moved to the left from the front end as it moves forward from the rear end side, and the whole body portion 556a is entirely perpendicular to the front vertical line of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is concaved toward the front, the input lens portion 556e is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate the light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern including a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends rightward from the right surface and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. Accordingly, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 positioned in front of each space , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides in the vicinity of the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. This makes it possible for a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 to have the illusion that he is playing in a private room, and allows the player to play in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. can.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By causing the member 561 and the like to be decorated with light emission in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the failure and recognize it, and to respond quickly to the failure. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center A plurality of slips (three each on the left and right sides) extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart in the vertical direction. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, each of the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) has an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space, the outer peripheral light emitting part 34 (left outer peripheral outer light emitting part 34a, right outer peripheral outer light emitting part 34b) provided to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the outer periphery of the opening window The outer periphery outer light detection unit 35 (the left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a and the right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b) that detects the light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer peripheral light emitting section 34 and the outer peripheral light detecting section 35 are disposed outside the outer periphery of the opening window, and thus the opening in front view. It is possible to make the entire area of the window function as a portion (operation receiving portion) that receives an operation by the player. Further, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not disposed in a dew state, but is disposed in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. As a result, in detecting the light by the outer periphery outside light detection unit 35, it is possible to suitably eliminate the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and the LEDs are respectively mounted on the portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plural (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271 pass therethrough. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right and a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the left and right directions and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely forward from the front portion of the trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out squarely from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut out from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has the front surface behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a state that the front middle decorative board 577 is inclined to move downward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevennesses formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the light guide members 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. In addition, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a, 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. with the inner proceeds toward the center, is reflected to sequentially forward from an end portion side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, the light from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a is irradiated forward. In front of the light guide member 578 and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed, sites that are forward of the straight portion 578a of which is caused to emit light decoration.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is near the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a quadrangle in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the opened part is closed by the unit main body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is a surface of a portion where the front surface is formed with the three slits 574b on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side from the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a, so that a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are bent backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The upper speaker 573 is provided, and the speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Accordingly, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front front lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed (dish unit) 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and a sense of expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently easy. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320 and bulging out in a forward direction, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Moreover, since the operation button 410 having a large diameter and bulging forward is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation buttons 410 can be operated well from the front or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the stage operation unit 400 mounted in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations in the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine can easily recognize that it is different and appeals strongly to the player. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball release hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower dish first region A1, the game balls circulating in the lower dish 322 are not shown to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, vibration due to heavy bass from the lower speaker 921 outputted forward from the lower speaker port 326e can be felt tactilely by the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  The door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, Recessed shape so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. Accordingly, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. It is possible to make the player recognize at first glance that the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing to the player and to make the player enjoy a good stereo sound with the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Each projecting greatly at the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can show a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and by the sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line extending vertically at the center of the front of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a part of the function display unit from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows game balls to be received either in accordance with the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the out port 1126, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning ports 2001, and a side unit that is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 that are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left side in front view, and the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000 and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member which is rotated only in a rotating direction and is only rotatable between an open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower ends thereof, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by inserting them into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if a fault nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. It is equipped with. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Moreover, the panel board 1110 is provided with the step-shaped engagement step part 1115 which the front side became depressed in the both ends of an upper side, and the both ends of a lower side, respectively. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a, like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 includes a holding step 1121 that detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front surface. The holding step 1121 is formed such that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a predetermined clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A plurality of projecting pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper portion of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement pieces 1125.

  Moreover, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the out port 1126 penetrated in the front-back direction in the site | part used as the lowest position in the game area | region 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and between the front component member 1000 and the panel holder. 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1150 according to an embodiment different from the gaming panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front component member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board such as a veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The gaming panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

  The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 includes an out-port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower rear side of the out port 1151 has the same width as the out port 1151 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side when viewed from the lower end and is opened downward. And a square insertion hole 1153 into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front and rear directions in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating front and rear at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the game panel can be connected to the front component member 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating forward and backward for attaching the front unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above. ing.

  The gaming panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  Note that the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. Yes. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various functions and effects related to the countermeasures against fraud described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402 made up of, the normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate 2003, and the game ball received at the first starting port 2002 are selected by lottery. The first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and the first special reservation composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 2002 Number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or second It is mainly provided with a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (rounds) of the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the special lottery result is “big hit” or the like.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that enables the reception of game balls in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning ports 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first start opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning ports 2001, and a side unit that is attached to the upper left end of the side unit bottom 2200 in front view. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004, which are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

  In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the big winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and can be opened and closed according to the gaming state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

  In the game area 5a, the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a To the center in the left-right direction).

  In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the effect unit provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has its entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that releases the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases the game ball into the game area 5a. The start opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately below the stage 2530. When a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received at the first start opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a front opening and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the left and right directions and accommodates the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The movable effect unit 3100 and the lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b, and two fixed grooves 3010c into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the left side in the back view of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal attaching part 3010b.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-like fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions for mounting each movable effect unit and the like.

  The back unit 3000 is appropriately used using a rear-under-bottom movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back-left movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is obtained by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be struck harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, that is, A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball is used as an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow velocity of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that has been thrown into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game ball is positioned immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn to the center side in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning port 2001 and the first 1 There is a possibility that it will be received in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided flows down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it is in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if it is more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate part 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability fluctuation”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R big hit "," perpendicular change (probability change) per "," shorter time (shorter time) per "," shorter per probability change "," short per chance at the time of probable change ", etc.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special prize opening 2005 when the special prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) of gaming balls from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the winning prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the winning prize opening 2005 to receive game balls, a lot of gaming balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the grand prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the big prize opening 2005 is opened. When one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeats the number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 15 rounds for “15R big hit”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the lighted LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence varies) The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorative bodies of center actor 2500, various decorative bodies of back unit 3000, rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect The unit 3300, the back / upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back / under front movable effect unit 3500, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. The player can be entertained, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided in the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are provided in the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  Further, the decorative member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention. The second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. LED 477a of 477 is a light emitter of the present invention, door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, unit base 431 of base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic operational effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the rendering operation unit 400 (or the second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button internal decoration portion 432g of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Of the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective that is not perspective and can attract the player's attention strongly. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  Further, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the operation of the player by the unit base 431 (unit base 451), the player operates the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will approach or separate from each other, First button decoration 411a and second button decoration 432g (or peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) due to the change in the distance from the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc. , Etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration) The decoration (cross mode) by the members 478, etc. can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button internal decorative member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will vary greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be satisfactorily viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be seen through. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the operation button, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame are passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed toward the side effect display device 460.

  Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 includes the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g stand out can be surely exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that is visible in the center of the operation button internal decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Furthermore, each LED (or sub-screen decoration board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 is provided. When the LED 477a) is caused to emit light, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) can be illuminated with the light, and the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button internal decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner area by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, the second button inner decoration section 432g has the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button upper part. While the inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a has the second button inner decoration. The light is decorated with indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button inner decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly luminescent decorated, while the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly luminescent decorated, so the operation button left inner decoration board 433, In the state where the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 emit light, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration section 411a Looking at the two-button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration with a greater sense of perspective and to attract the player's attention. A high pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame). The side second effect display device 460A) can be widened to the outside and made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device can be enlarged). 460A) can stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 is disposed outside the button lens 411, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 is arranged. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can enhance the decorativeness, enhance the appearance, and attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is made flat. Compared with the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be hardly broken (hard to break). Therefore, the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, so that the game is interrupted, and it can be avoided that the player feels frustrated and deteriorates the interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, the bottom of the through hole 111 is provided. On the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, the outer diameter is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing and retreating) by a player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ˜30 cm, and an operation button interior that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. The frame-shaped frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage ball of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (the second Since the production operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize that the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 includes a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are provided on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. The first button 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. Inside the frame body 416 that partitions the decoration portion 411b Since the cylindrical portion 416d, the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that partitions the second button decoration portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. Illumination can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated to emit light. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a light emission effect with good appearance can be performed. Moreover, various patterns of light-emitting effects can be performed by appropriately combining the turn-off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the first LED 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by emitting light are decorated as one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared to the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LED 422a, 423a can be moved away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LED 422a, 423a is sufficiently The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. . Accordingly, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's attention is strongly attracted. In addition, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved forward and backward. In addition, the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Accordingly, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be operated. The player can entertain the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 are provided. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached to the second button decoration part 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light appropriately so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. Since the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 decorating the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated with various patterns as described above, the player's interest is controlled by the operation buttons 410 and The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). It is possible to entertain an effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be displayed to the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By making it operate, it is possible to entertain the player to operate the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by lighting the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 and to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with a light-transmitting main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411f of the operation button 410 is provided. A portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged at the rear side by becoming brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being difficult to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect are provided) through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b is received at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder 416d. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d from the diffusion range is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. Never do. Therefore, light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go through the rear end of the main body 413a, and completely prevents the light from entering the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can do. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can be used to decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a favorable state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second) is formed from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect is produced with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light as appropriate, so that the light rotates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since the player can show the player a light-emitting effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can get tired of the player by various light-emitting effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is obtained by placing the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and a predetermined installation space is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 in the lower plate body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside, and a lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower plate 322 looks small, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's interest strongly. it can.

  In addition, at the part of the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 abut or press against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and to reduce the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  Also, lower plate covers 340 and 340A that restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall 325b and the mounting space 326j in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. Therefore, the game ball can be prevented from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling injured or uncomfortable by intruding the game ball into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 jumps in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion of the lower plate main body 325). 326d), when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips or the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Can prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), etc., and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can do.

  Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the lower dish ball hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A is provided as described above, the game ball of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is provided. Since it can be prevented from coming into contact with the rear side, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be prevented from being damaged, and the interruption of the game is reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be reduced, the lower tray cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower plate cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower plate cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate cover 340, 340A. The increase in the burden on the side of the game hall in which 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface swells most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game that allows a game ball to be received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 that has been taken out is provided with the stage operation unit 400 and the second stage operation unit 400 </ b> A detachably attached to the most bulging portion of the tray unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower tray 322 that can store a game ball and can be stored in the storage tray (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) outside the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in a front view. Lower space of the lower plate first area A1 and the space behind the installation space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. The second stage operation area 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be made conspicuous when viewed from the front, and the storage dish (upper dish 321). And the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it less noticeable. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that is conspicuous can be seen in the portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power capable of attracting the player's interest strongly can be obtained.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, a portion of the surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is open is provided. The first lower pan body 325 having a lower pan second region A2 located in the rear space of the attachment space 326j that is behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range (the lower plate second region A2) that cannot be seen from the front in the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured against the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate body 325 and the main body 325A having the lower plate first area A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second area A2, the first extension part 325B and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, a first extension portion 325B, a second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension unit 325B, and the second extension unit 325C of a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size of the installation space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be rearranged (replaced), so that the space of the rear part of the attachment space 326j can be accommodated. Since the size of the rear space depends on the rearward projecting amount of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), various rendering operation units 400 (second second) having different rearward projecting amounts. It can be set as the lower plate 322 which can respond to production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 has a container shape that is depressed downward, and a game ball Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover upright wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. The lower plate covers 340 and 340A having a shape corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear portion of the installation space 326j are combined (attached) so as to correspond to various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

  In the lower plate 322 constituted by the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the lower plate cover 340, 340A is combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, the part on which the game ball is placed in the lower plate 322 is the lower plate body 325, and therefore, the portion where the load of more game balls is applied due to the storage, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A The boundary (joint, dividing line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if many game balls are stored. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from being detached from the lower plate body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate that can store the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the front plate (player) is difficult to see from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be refreshed to improve the appearance of the player. Can be made a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power. In addition, since it is difficult for the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to visually recognize the game ball from the lower dish ball supply port 323c toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a game in the lower dish 322 is made to the player. This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball release hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It is possible to make an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to view more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is smaller than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating so as to go around in the lower tray 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 can be surely made difficult to see from the front (player). Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are immediately noticed by the ball guiding unit 322c and the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Can do. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to view more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower dish 322 from the front, the lower dish visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than double the size of the size that can be seen with respect to the size of 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured in the same manner as the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Due to the shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a. But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, On the other hand, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be obtained. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the dish unit base 323), the lower dish cover 340 and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 is difficult to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity for a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, and to make the player feel at ease and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even when the front side is small. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. In comparison, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the side and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player is placed in the lower plate 322. When a hand is put in, it can be prevented that a fingertip or the like touches the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interests, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decoration by the stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball opening hole 322a that can be opened and closed vertically, a conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a simple feeling, and to entertain the player by dedicating the player to the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball opening hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 bulging forward under the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the player. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached and the outer operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded so as to surround the outer periphery. The diameter is about 15cm and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. It is possible to reduce the appearance of the outer edge, the rear side (rear side), and the like of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the member 432 (the screen unit 470). And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit) are increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be satisfactorily concealed. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body part 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an oblique direction, the inner wall of the button base 413 can block the objects outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being visible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 is located near the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 Therefore, the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 The side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or movable, and the door frame side effect display device that can entertain the player through the operation buttons 410. 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining can be realized.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, design (decoration) is imparted to the operation button 410. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made conspicuous and the player is interested. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  In the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411, and in cooperation with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b, Since the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be hardly seen from the side, the main body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to move. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directivity compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since the player can touch the operation button 410 to facilitate the pressing operation, the player can easily participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained and the entertainment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by actively engaging the player in the player participation type production. In addition, it is possible to think that there is something good for some players by performing the production in the operation button 410, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation buttons 410 are enhanced. And a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) is arranged so that the operation button 410 surrounds the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (main body part 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are provided. At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a sticker or a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a bottom plate that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around the rear. You may make it.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the shape of the lower dish 322 in the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the dish lower front portion 326c) is curved backward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a polygonal columnar surface or a front surface recessed in a polyhedral shape.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on the surface "," equipped with a decoration having a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration "," game " Characters, items, logos in accordance with the machine concept, and decorations that mimic a scene (diorama), etc. "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns in line with the gaming machine concept , Etc., which are decorated by stickers, printing, etc. ", etc." Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) is not necessarily one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

  In the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is formed with the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a that opens to the front for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not limited thereto. A space corresponding to the attachment space 326j (or the remaining space of the attachment space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to apply decoration such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine to the front surface of such a dish unit cover by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. The second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect that are arranged on the rear side. Although the display device 460A and the like such that the rear member is always visible is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is a predetermined condition. It is good also as a structure which has the variable light transmission means which can visually recognize a rear side by satisfying. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, “the rear side can be visually recognized due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, like a magic mirror”, “transparent by turning the power ON / OFF like a liquid crystal film Or the like so that the rear side can be visually recognized. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By having variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in the normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state. The player can show the decoration of the visible member to the player. And in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member disposed on the rear side of the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can be overlapped. Accordingly, various decorations (decoration effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, which can make the player hard to get tired and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interests.

  Specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member is made by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear is passed through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and a decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

  Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. It is possible to show the player the decoration with the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the rear member of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The player can show the decoration with the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED (or the light between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED. ) And the satisfying conditions of the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting a portion that is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened, so on the surface of the front member or the rear member. You can show the glittering decorations to the player.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror. However, even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (having translucency), so that it can be provided between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or light-decorated) by the light from the light-emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player various effects such as light-emitting effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is the payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays an electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a control power source (for example, +5 V). And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game proceeded by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The controller SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a command, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage, Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this nonvolatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 1310an ”). The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value as the initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, again, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured such that the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is output to the information. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  60, a first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Further, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects a fraudulent act using a magnet attached thereto is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a driving signal from the output terminal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403 A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information about the game (game information) to the board 951, or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020 use contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switch are used for the general winning award opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa as a center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like is connected to the bus 1310ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of a payout control board 951 (described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this is triggered, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also functions as various functions. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls relating to payout, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout are respectively received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Create 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send the error occurrence command and error cancellation navigation command respectively to the payer serial data As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed to the various signals. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Payout control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from its various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function includes the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like, and is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information is output. The signal based on this is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-game detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-game balls in the supply passage of the in-use ball guide unit 820 of the out-of-payout unit 800, and out-of-game detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from the out-feed outlets 831b and 832b of the out-feed device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 for the purpose of explanation.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 952b. Via the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or an operation signal (detection of the operation switch 954). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, thereby providing the payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, output a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port as an error LED indicator. By outputting a drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby providing a payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Also, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 for proceeding the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the lending device connection terminal plate for game balls, etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the sphere rental return display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display section 330. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and in addition to the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The ball is supplied to the payout control board 951 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit 330 that is a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game It is input to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The data is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like of the hall is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a single payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply substrate 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility. Power factor correction circuit 935b, smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and to output it to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, the display control drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, while controlling the drawing of the frame side effect display device 460, calendar information specifying the date and time, and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the second, and a lower speaker 92. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ), And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Transmission from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 or the like. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs away using both peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e. It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I, and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written through the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag and a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between the devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like without using the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. -It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab reads / writes from / to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to transfer data independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af within a predetermined period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count, and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than the LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the 1024 stage values are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and from the mute to the maximum volume Can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages.
Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraud due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or copied to various control program copy areas in the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of various control programs that are copied, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b, etc. Various control data copy area 1511ce for storing copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing various information updated by executing various control programs, which are not backup targets And a work area 1511cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 is set. ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the presentation display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  In addition, Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when a peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is added to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) The information is stored in a bank 0 (SRAM) exclusively for backup purposes. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. The production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the production backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a for performing control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various data such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the serialized drawing data to the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that is arranged near the lower portion of the device 460 and transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e And a signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various kinds of data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae and has a built-in sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 through a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display that is disposed in the lower vicinity of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, and thus the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short by being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is accommodated in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
In contrast to the serial interface differential interface (Signaling), the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the built-in sound source VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to the setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually obtained from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used; Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used The maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to control the flow of the notification sound so as to notify the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the subvolume value set for the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually It amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound to auto And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute until now is generated. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data for use is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to adjust to the setting mode, the sub volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are used. It comes to flow.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to notify the clerk or the like of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. Then, when it stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period elapses after the notification sound starts to flow. It starts to flow again from where it has progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b draws the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The signal and the three synchronization signals, the clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 is arranged which can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full.
Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, and this differential 1-pair cable is composed of two wires. Is not a parallel line provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is employ | adopted as a differential 1 pair cable which electrically connects between a transmitter and a receiver is demonstrated easily. For the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if it is a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of the corporation, it is only due to electrostatic discharge of a game ball with such a hardware configuration. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., an effect display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the shiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data to be received is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being disturbed different from the normal one. In the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm-like image is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a In the transmitter IC1512d for production, the differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make it difficult to be affected by noise, and in addition to such hardware configuration Even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when receiving by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After connecting the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the receiver cancels (removes) the noise. The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver spans a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is used. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, it is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the power supply wiring is red and the other plural wirings are gray. . Note that the power supply wiring may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, generates an image for notifying the fact by controlling sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputs it to game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal to be described later is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Via the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. 320, it can be determined that there is no malfunction in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320. On the other hand, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a problem has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. ”) Is controlled by the VDP1512a with built-in sound source. In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thus, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and time and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. Yes. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as the date, time, hour, minute, and second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to do.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the setting mode can be entered to adjust the luminance of the backlight to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated during the period of the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 in the waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the year / month / day. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is more likely to be changed to a more advantageous game state) Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display controller 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated during the period of the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 in the waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. Yes. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source of the sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not in a state where a game is not performed continues for a predetermined period of time and becomes a customer waiting state, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the player is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that generates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) that matches the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feed unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and performs control to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launcher 650 side.

  The power generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system supplied with + 5V is a + 5V power supply line, a power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with a + 12V power supply line, and a power supply system supplied with + 24V is a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. A current flows toward the positive terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951, and then returns again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Can be done. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When the charge is lost, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral voltage is supplied. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are shown in FIG. 76A. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creating circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to various decorative boards and the like of the door frame 3.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 12V to + 3.3V. + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V power failure or signs of instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board or the like of the door frame.

  In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 1310. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  69 and 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz )) Mainly.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Is smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is not a power failure or a momentary power failure at the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end thereof is a capacitor MC4 which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and + 5V is generated. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V inputted to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input thereto. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period elapses from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, if the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control board 1310 receives a logic from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) without inverting it). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform RAM clear that erases information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, an operation signal that has been pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, it is higher than the control reference voltage + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general prize opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failures or momentary power outages, and detects a power outage notice signal as a power outage notice in addition to the main control MPU 1310a when detecting a power outage or momentary power outage sign. This is output to the payout control MPU 952a 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitor voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V is blacked out or momentarily stopped, and the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 78, the positive terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied, one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and one end as shown in FIG. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR25 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above, so one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal having the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively. The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal PR terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A) without inversion). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 as its logic becomes HI. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. As a result, the power failure warning signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous-stage transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And is electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 72, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function for outputting a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal has one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is paid out to the payout control board 951. Main system without reset function that outputs as a power failure warning signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a wiring Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, and the main serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is outputted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information about the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the control output circuit 1310ca.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when electric power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V that is higher than + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (No. 3 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is used as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal as a serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When power or instantaneous power failure occurs, +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all configured as main peripheral serial data, including a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without missing them. It is possible to receive without fail.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, to which + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied and whose one end is grounded (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply substrate 931 is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component folded on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the discharge control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM includes the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and Each is input to the reset terminal. The SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V inputted to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the blackout monitor circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. The full detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is substantially the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, one end of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuation from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 1310 is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. It is input to 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 4 does not occur during the normal game, and the outer frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer edge is designed to be entered The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Or it is impossible to determine whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, but there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the payout power failure notification signal that is input to the payout control board 951. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. In some cases, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The full-tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. The terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to the first terminal, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thus, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is inputted to the payout control board 951, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When a signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, when the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration has been adopted, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball breakage detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are transmitted through a T-type filter circuit such as a three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes very long and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. If it is determined based on the detection signal from 279 that the storage space is full of the game balls stored, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop paying out the game balls by the payout rotating body. Control is to be performed. That is, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not filled with a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the driving control is forcibly stopped to stop paying out the game ball by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls stored. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-described prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotator to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is rotated. The dispensing motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signals from operation switches]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43, and the signal changes as an RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input.

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeatedly flickers for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is a transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned off, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If it is determined that the command is not instructed and the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power is turned on), error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 954 and the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation that the logic becomes LOW by pulling the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is an instruction to perform RAM clear that erases information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. 3 is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 using + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal and supplied to the dispensing motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63, A drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60 as a protection. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one payout operation start request signal BRQ via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, one end of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line in the power supply substrate 931. Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inversion). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR78 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  A PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via a resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 has one end electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) For example, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. 70, and detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the voltage switch signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or a payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and a payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to , A payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is main controlled from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. And so on.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the payout control board 951 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, the payout control board 951 has a main winning ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, Games such as jackpot information output signal such as 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal that is output every time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability changing information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed through) the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). ) And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. For example, a big hit of 15 rounds may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of jackpots and the number of rounds of big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of rounds of big hits of 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming states, which may increase the player's gambling feeling more than necessary. Absent.

  In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until the round-end jackpot is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot information output occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 15 round jackpot information are output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot is generated. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, and the two round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the short time medium information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A signal indicating that a state has occurred. The prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize-ball number information output signal is a signal indicating the effect, and the various prize-winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls that entered the ball, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal generates a 15 round jackpot In a state 2 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that reports that 2 round jackpots are occurring, and the probability changing information output signal is in a state where probability fluctuations are occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that there is a change, and the special symbol change display is ended by the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the award ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 as the prize ball for the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the award ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls are paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls paid out.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is opened.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is completed (stopped) from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and then the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted to count the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start opening winning information output signal is a signal to notify that every time a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first start port 2002 or second of the pachinko machine 1 every time the start port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the start port 2004 and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of game balls entered can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 15 round jackpot has been generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15 round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates 15 round jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15 round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal has been input and to grasp the total number of times that the 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 when the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal and then the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol has been finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. As described above, the time reduction / medium information output signal is a signal that informs that the time reduction state has occurred, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time reduction state is occurring. ing. When the time and medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time and short state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 when the time and medium information output signal is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-short state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color and outputs a probability changing information output signal. As described above, the probability variation in-progress information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the probability variation information output signal is output while the probability variation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability change from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state in which the probability change occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability change is input. It is possible to grasp that there is a certain number of times, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that game balls are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and to determine the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As with one continuous signal, it is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 have the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784 By arranging in a line from the center left side toward the right side, also in this respect, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs output on the main control board 1310 side. Wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When a 15-round big hit happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when there is a little remaining, the number of game balls stored in the award ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as award ball is insufficient, so it is paid out (In addition, for example, when a ball clog or a ball is generated in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless it can be resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since this is a signal that informs the player every time, the payout control board 951 can output the award ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the Pachinko Island facilities to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the ball clogging (for example, occurs in the payout device 830) In this case, the game ball is returned to a state where the game ball is paid out by identifying and eliminating the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball bowl.

  However, even if the hall clerk is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and the game ball is paid out by the hall clerk after the 15 round round hit. Returning to the state, the payout control board 951 pays out unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15th round big hit ends and the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Outputs an award ball number information output signal indicating that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, in spite of the fact that 15 rounds have not occurred, a very large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of passing to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (troubles such as ball clogging in the replenishing nozzle, ball clogging or ball smearing in the dispensing device 830) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Stage display drive board circuit]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is accommodated in the dish unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 mainly includes a door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and minus signal from which the noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from reflecting at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 includes three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, It is restored to three synchronizing signals, that is, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits each of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals obtained by differentiating a certain LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forcible switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. The serial signal (serial data) by the differential method “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. from the side effect transmitter IC 1512d is converted into a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a request to output the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Note that the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, as described above. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the state of waiting for a customer and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, In order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the signal, the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is intentionally transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1511. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has a VDD terminal, a VDDO terminal, an LVDSVDD terminal, a PLLVDD terminal, and a PDWN terminal supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is a ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as a ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V through the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, a rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal instructs whether to allow the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, the output is always enabled by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal) of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 through the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and enters a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door It may be directly electrically connected via the relay terminal plate 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This terminal outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the effect display driving board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, ie, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 to D17 terminals are provided with three video signals (18, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected, and are the same ground. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component included in the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
Incidentally, it is generally known that when electronic components are surface-mounted, it is beneficial in that the hardware circuit can be suitably downsized by integration. However, in the case of integrated circuit components (components encapsulated in a relatively large package in the form of integration of multiple types of single function elements (such as resistance elements, diode elements, or capacitor elements)), By nature, a package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which a single functional element is enclosed in a relatively small package), thus creating a relatively large space on the back side of the package. In addition, the space on the back side of such a package becomes a place (a place where electronic parts (illegal parts) are easily mounted illegally) that is difficult to visually confirm in a surface-mounted state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate or the like) for many years instead of surface mounting.

  That is, the electronic component to be inserted and mounted tends to generate a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, even in the mounted state, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place where it can be easily confirmed by visual recognition. It is made to suppress suitably.

  However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the size of the space used for production has been further increased, and while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components, the hardware circuit has been downsized. There is a need to plan.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second control unit that only performs effect control relating to the game among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and is unlikely to be fraudulent, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

  That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment includes the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform the effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process. Can be executed.

  Here, various integrated circuit components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Examples of various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 include resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, and an electrolytic capacitor AC10 shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, the lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510). Only the surface mounting area to be mounted in a form is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are also used as the above-described various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits that the player gets and are not subject to fraud, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is not affected. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be downsized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of these substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to control the power supply for control (for example, + 5V). Processing related to the game including generation processing and payout of prize balls can be executed. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG is likely to be illegal. Therefore, although it is required to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and amusement entertainment The decline is inevitable.

  However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on the base plate (the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, the base board of the power supply board 931). Of the various electronic components, the discrete component has a smaller package than the integrated circuit component, and even if the electronic component is improperly mounted on the back side, it can be easily confirmed by visual recognition. It can be said that this is a component having relatively high performance as security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

  That is, the inventor mixed electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG with components with high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components with low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components). Focusing on the fact that further integration as a hardware circuit is made only with parts with high security performance against unauthorized use (discrete parts), even on the first control unit MCG side, which is prone to fraud, It has been found that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically illustrating a state in which the first control unit MCG is integrated only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud. In the following, referring to FIG. 117, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent. This is explained.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. For example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate. A base substrate 951 and a base substrate of the power supply substrate 931 are configured to have three base substrates. An example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. As such, here, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the description will be given assuming an example in which they are configured by one base substrate.

Here, the base plate BB includes
-An insertion mounting area TH that is mounted in a form in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB, and that is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance;
A surface mounting region SM that is mounted in a manner in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate BB and has excellent integration performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, etc., but is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are provided in the form of being divided.

  According to such a configuration, while it is possible to mount an electronic component that is difficult to be fraudulently mounted on the surface mounting region SM, an electronic component that should be pursued for fraud suppression rather than integration is mounted on the insertion mounting region TH side. Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts while making it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
-Integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance against illegal mounting, enclosed in a relatively large package in the form of integration of multiple types of single function elements;
A single-function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and includes a discrete component D2 with high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

  In this regard, as a characteristic first technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance is referred to as the insertion mounting region TH and the surface. The mounting area SM is mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance, and only the discrete component having high security performance is mounted in the surface mounting area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent.

  Further, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, as the discrete component D2 having a high security performance, a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the surface mount region SM is used. And an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting region TH.

  That is, as described above, with respect to electronic components, in general, it is possible to achieve integration by using a surface mounting type instead of an insertion mounting type. However, when both the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are provided separately as the base plate BB, for example, a position where the integrated circuit component D1 to be electrically connected is provided in circuit design. Further, in view of the balance with the space provided with the wiring pattern related thereto, the integration can be reversed if the electronic components are arranged not in the surface mounting area SM but in the insertion mounting area TH. Cases can also arise.

  In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, not all of the discrete components D2 are used as the surface-mount type discrete components D2a, but so as to be the most suitable mode for integration. In some cases, an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is intentionally used. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit is more suitably reduced in size while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppressing performance is not formed on one side (back side) surface of the board and is formed on the other side (front side) surface to provide discrete components. And integrated circuit components are both mounted. On the other hand, the surface mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is not formed on the one side (back side) surface of the substrate, and is formed on the other side (front side) surface so that the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are not formed. It is desirable that only the discrete components are mounted without mounting the integrated circuit components. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back side, which is likely to be a blind spot when confirming whether the illegal component is mounted, is excluded. On this basis, in the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent and discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. In the inferior surface mounting area SM, since only discrete components that are not subject to fraud are to be mounted, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of fraudulent components. It becomes like this.

  Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even in the discrete component D2 having the high security performance, a capacitor element having a large capacitance value among the capacitor elements (backup) For the power supply, etc., the surface mount region is considered to have a relatively larger shape than other elements (such as a resistance element, a diode element, and a capacitor element with a small capacitance value (such as a filter circuit)). It is not used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insertion mount type discrete component D2b-C mounted in the insertion mount region TH. As a result, when miniaturizing the hardware circuit, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components can be more suitably maintained.

  However, although a capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete parts), there is no large gap between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit part D1. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount region SM, and even in this case, security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

  In addition, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a characteristic second technique based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). As a discrete circuit (a hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC that is electrically constituted by the discrete component D2. However, the discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure constituted by a plurality of discrete components D2 each mounted in a manner divided into an insertion mounting region TH and a surface mounting region SM.

  That is, in this case, although the circuit is a single discrete circuit DHC intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), mounting on the insertion mounting region TH is performed on the base plate BB. An electronic component D2b having a shape that can be mounted and an electronic component D2a having a shape that can be mounted on the surface mounting region SM are mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to recall the current situation, and it is expected that fraud can be suppressed even if the difficulty in understanding the circuit is increased. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting region SM, it is possible to expect a reduction in the size of the hardware circuit.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud to electronic components.

  However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principle of two characteristic techniques according to the present application. Next, an example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application. explain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. And three base substrates. These base substrates are provided so that both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separated.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the three base boards, only the insertion mounting region TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931, and the base of the main control board 1310 is formed. In the board and the base board of the payout control board 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided so as to be separated from each other.

  Of the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 (FIG. 75) of the “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM” described above. Is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base substrate of the main control board 1310 as a surface mount type discrete component D2a. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) in the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM” is mounted on the surface of the base board of the payout control board 951. The surface SM is mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a.

  According to such a configuration, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) among the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance is the surface mount type discrete component D2a. It is mounted on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side, which is likely to be fraudulent. A characteristic first technique according to the present application).

  In addition, in the example applied to this embodiment, the surface mount region SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG has a specific type of discrete component (here, both the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are Schottky). Only a plurality of diode elements) are mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance have the same shape, it is expected that the effort required for fraud confirmation is saved.

  Further, in the above configuration, discrete components (electronic components that bear a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have are mounted on a board (main control board 1310) side different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mounting region SM on the power supply substrate 931, the surface mounting region SM is formed on another substrate and mounted as a surface mounting type discrete component D2 there. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom for circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, a single discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. The plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are mounted separately in the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and the surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I am going to do that.

  According to such a configuration, in spite of the single discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) intended to exhibit the backup power supply function, the insertion mounting region TH (power supply board) is formed on the base plate BB. 931) and an electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting region SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) are mixed. become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to recall the situation, and it is possible to expect fraud suppression even if the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased (the second characteristic technique according to the present application).

  Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function are inserted and mounted region TH (capacitor element). And the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), and the discrete component D2 is divided into two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board) In this case, electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. As a result, the difficulty of understanding the circuit has increased. So incorrect suppression can be further expected.

  In the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting region SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as the insertion mounting region TH on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. The area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting region SM having inferior fraud suppression performance is provided, and suppression of fraud can be expected.

  In the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in BB. Therefore, the types of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for whether or not fraudulent acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is relatively inferior in security performance are relatively reduced. Thus, the visual check can be facilitated.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as that in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a surface mounting area that is relatively inferior in security performance is relatively reduced. The load on the visual check can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting region SM is provided on the base substrate of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951, respectively. You may form.

  Further, the surface mounting region SM is formed only on a specific base substrate, and the surface mounting type discrete component D2 that should be originally mounted on the other base substrate is collectively arranged on the specific base substrate. Also good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not unauthorized mounting has been performed, it is only necessary to focus on the surface mounting region SM formed on a specific base substrate. It will be expected that it will save time and effort.

  However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting region TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to appropriately suppress fraud. I must.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is configured by three base substrates, as schematically shown in FIG. 117, they may be configured collectively on one base substrate.

  In addition, the “base plate BB of the first control unit MCG” according to the present application may be anything as long as the surface mounting region SM and the insertion mounting region TH are separated, and this is provided by a plurality of base substrates. Alternatively, it may be provided by one base substrate.

  For example, the base board of the main control board 1310 includes a first base board in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, and the second base board By inserting and mounting the board on the insertion mounting area TH of the first base board, the electronic components inserted and mounted on the first base board are maintained while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It may be assumed that a structure in which the component and the electronic component surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other is adopted, but in this case, the “base of the first control unit MCG” The “plate BB” is a concept including at least both the first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and the second base substrate in which only the surface mounting region SM is formed. . That is, this aspect is also one of the aspects in which “the insertion plate mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are both provided in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG”. It is included as an aspect.

  When the first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and the second base substrate on which only the surface mounting region SM is formed, the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are provided. It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so as to face different directions (preferably, orthogonal directions).

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is an electronic component enclosed in a relatively small package as a component (surface-mounted component) mounted on the surface-mounted region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting unauthorized components (reducing the space on the back side).

  However, even with such discrete components (surface mount components) with excellent security performance, there are places on the back side that are difficult to confirm by visual inspection when mounted on the surface mount region SM, although it is a small space. Still left. Therefore, the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1 understands that “there is no space left on the back side of the discrete parts (surface mounted parts) to mount unauthorized parts”. However, it is impossible to completely abandon the anxiety such as "It is possible that an extremely small fraudulent part will be created and improperly mounted". There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will be complicated, such as forced confirmation.

  Therefore, it is more desirable to provide the base substrates of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 in the following manner instead of the above-described manner.

[Modifications of the base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating a partial region of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 118, a modified example of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 will be described. Note that description of modifications of the base board of the payout control board 951 is omitted, but it is possible to make modifications with the same contents as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB that is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

  And also in the insertion mounting board | substrate THB concerning this modification, it mounts in the form in which several types of electronic components (insertion mounting parts) are inserted similarly to the insertion mounting board | substrate TH of the said embodiment. Similarly, these electronic components (insertion mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance and the discrete component D2b having a high security performance.

  However, as apparent from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. The electronic components to be mounted in this way are only provided. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example has a surface mounting area and a surface mounting component mounted in the area, any of them can be seen at first glance. It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided.

  More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is not limited to the integrated circuit part D1 and the discrete part D2b as the above-described mounting parts, but also the special mounting part D3 (in the figure, the special mounting part). D3a, special mounting component D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in a surface mounting region inferior to the anti-fraud performance, it is concealed with respect to the insertion mounting board THB. It is inserted and mounted via a special insertion mounting lead portion TL described later.

  According to such a special mounting component D3, fraud suppression is performed even though a surface mounting region described later and an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting region are respectively provided therein. Since it has an external appearance that looks as if it is a single insertion mounting component mounted on the insertion mounting board THB with excellent performance, it is expected to be removed from the target component for improper purpose by a malicious person Can be done. In addition, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion on which the special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting board THB is the surface mounting on which the surface mounting component is mounted. It will function as an area.

  Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged in one place (adjacent), but are arranged at a plurality of places on the base board MB. In addition to being distributed, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (special mounting component D3a in the figure) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large region (insertion mounting region) in which the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. We are going to establish.

  That is, in this case, the surface mounting area inferior to the anti-fraud performance and the electronic components (surface mounted parts) mounted on the surface mounting area are subdivided and become inconspicuous, and combined with the above-described external shape, The surface mounting area exists when a malicious person views the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it is well mixed in the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area. In particular, it is possible to make the hardware circuit more difficult to notice, and thus, it is expected that the hardware circuit is reduced in size while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts more appropriately.

  As will be described later, inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed. As described above, the diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, also in this modification, for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit), an insertion mounting region (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and a surface mounting region (Schottky diode element) (Diode MD0)) and mounting. In addition, for the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) that is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position that is not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area (such as the power supply board 931). It is made to be implemented with.

  As described above, it is difficult to recall that the electronic component incorporated in the special mounting component D3a exhibits a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), thereby increasing the difficulty in understanding the circuit. Thus, even when it is noticed that there is a surface mounting region inferior to the fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

  Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted so that the internal structure is exposed. The figure (portion surrounded by a dotted line) is included.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification includes a special surface mounting substrate SMB as a surface mounting substrate on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted, A surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB, and a special insertion mount lead portion that is inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the insert mount substrate THB. TL and the outer package OP which molds each of these parts with mold resin are provided.

  Here, the special surface mounting substrate SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mounting type discrete component D2a) mounted on the substrate and the special insertion mounting lead portion TL. The wiring patterns HP are formed so as to be connected to each other, and the mounting surface thereof is provided so as to be substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

  The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB is limited to a size that allows the surface mounting type discrete component D2a to be mounted. For example, it is necessary when mounting an integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a. The mounting surface has an area smaller than the assumed area. In other words, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required to operate the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is a surplus space for mounting other electronic components further, while a special space is left. In the surface mount substrate SMB, in order to reduce the size, there is not enough space to mount another electronic component in a state where the electronic component to be mounted (the surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted. Not left.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes difficult to perform any fraud on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, further downsizing of the hardware circuit can be achieved while suppressing the mounting of unauthorized parts. Expected.

  The surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) molded with a mold resin. Inside, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin). Other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB are electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB. The Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected to perform processing in cooperation with each other.

  Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with a flat external shape (package shape), and is soldered so that the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. By surface mounting. However, as described above, the special surface mounting substrate SMB on which the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is mounted has a mounting surface that is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting substrate THB. Therefore, the surface mounting type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 is opposed to the insertion mounting board THB, not the flat surface but the surface to be thinned (thin surface). It will be implemented in a form.

  In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area, not a flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (for two through holes) is left on the insertion mounting board THB so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be disposed in the small area (for two through holes).

  The size of the surface mount type discrete component D2a according to this modification itself (the length in the horizontal direction in the figure) is determined when the special mounting component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The pitch is smaller than the pitch between the through holes into which the special insertion mounting lead portions TL are inserted (specific insertion hole installation interval).

  The special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mounting substrate SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed in the special surface mounting substrate SMB. By being soldered at a certain location, it is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered in a state inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and the insertion mounting board THB side It is electrically connected to various electronic components through the wiring pattern.

  Further, the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by a mold resin, but is different from the mold resin. Thus, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double-molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

  With such a configuration, it is extremely difficult to perform any fraud on a surface-mount substrate that is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

  In particular, in the specially mounted component D3a according to this modification, the external shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of a specific type of surface mounted component that is surface-mounted inside. . That is, in this case, the discrete component D2a itself can be mounted in a concealed form, so that a specific type of surface mount component built in the special mount component D3a is not mounted. As a result, the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased, and fraud suppression can be expected.

  In addition, the outer package OP includes only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL among the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided in the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded together with the special surface mount substrate SMB so as to be drawn out to the outside of the lead. The electronic component having the lead portion TL) is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB.

  According to such a configuration, even though the surface mounting substrate inferior in tampering suppression performance and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the substrate are provided inside, the special mounting component D3a is Since it can function as if it were one insertion mounting component mounted in the insertion mounting area with excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from malicious targets by malicious persons Can be done. In addition, since it can be handled in the same way as a discrete component of one insertion mounting type in terms of logistics and mounting, it can be said that it is excellent in terms of such handling.

  Still further, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By molding together with the special surface mount substrate SMB that is the object, an external appearance as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes is provided.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left in an external shape smaller than the pitch between the through holes in the insertion mounting region (insertion hole installation interval), the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base substrate MB 1310, which may promote fraud.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes is an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after having an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, there is no electronic component having an external shape having a lateral width smaller than the pitch between the through holes on the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310. Since only the electronic component of the type (insertion mounting component) can be viewed as being mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized components.

  Still further, the external shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of the electronic component that is internally mounted on the surface, and all the insertion mounted components (specialized) mounted on the insertion mounted substrate THB. It has a unique external shape different from any of the electronic components except the mounting component D3). In other words, the specially mounted component D3a according to this modification has an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin against a mere discrete component D2a that has only a limited function compared to an arithmetic processing unit or the like. In addition, it is unique as an appearance shape that attracts the attention of a malicious person and has a relatively large appearance shape.

  According to such a configuration, since excessive security performance provided on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, the willingness to perform fraud is reduced. Can be expected.

  Furthermore, an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a is attached to the outer package OP. In this modification, the content of the identification number (◯ 3213) is assigned to the inner package ( The content is different from the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB.

  According to such a configuration, the content (SD) of the identification number assigned to a specific type of surface mounting component does not appear, so that the external shape generated by the outer package OP and the surface mounting are internally performed. This makes it possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mount component is not mounted, coupled with the fact that the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component is different (in combination with the structure of the double mold). In addition, it is possible to make it appear as if only an electronic component of an insertion mounting type (insertion mounting component) is mounted, and it is possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of an unauthorized component.

  Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting substrate SMB is set to be smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. On this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the mold resin is directly attached to the back surface thereof. It has become.

  That is, by adopting such a configuration, the length of the special mounting component D3a in the thickness direction is mounted in the insertion mounting region TH as well as forming a unique and asymmetrical external shape. This is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. This eliminates the necessity of securing a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the insertion mounting board THB, coupled with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other. The special mounting component D3a can be inserted while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

  As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example appears as one insertion mounting type discrete component in appearance, but in actuality, the special surface mounting substrate SMB and the surface mounting type discrete component are actually used. D2a is included in each of them. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB inside and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. In contrast, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire.

  Further, in the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a to be surface-mounted, a special mounting component D3b for internally mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

  That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element among the discrete components D2b of the insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting region TH. A circuit is formed. Even in such a configuration related to a filter circuit, it is recalled that the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrical close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make fraud difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, fraud can be suppressed.

  As for the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be surface-mounted on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, respectively. However, in this case, the electronic components having the highest height among the electronic components (insertion mounting components) inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting board THB (for example, the electronic components are arranged side by side in a line) For example, in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310, it is desirable to keep the appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element omitted in the drawing.

  The special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may include a plurality of one type of electronic components. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are incorporated, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted side by side and in a row with respect to one special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the electronic components are mounted. It is desirable to package the component and the special surface mounting substrate SMB together by molding with a molding resin.

  However, when a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the external shape naturally increases, and “It is an electronic component of the type that is inserted and mounted in this size and shape. There is a concern that it will no longer be possible to expect a dazzling effect using preconceptions, such as "Is it an insert-mounting type discrete part?" Therefore, in order to suitably obtain such a dazzling effect using preconceptions, one surface-mount type discrete component is made alone, the appearance shape thereof is changed by the above-mentioned double mold structure, and the thinness is reduced. It is desirable to mount the surface so that the surface faces the insertion mounting substrate TH.

  In addition to forming the outer package OP of the above-mentioned double mold with a non-transparent material such as a mold resin, the outer package has an identification number different from the identification number assigned to one surface mount type discrete component itself. It can also be said that it is important to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding by adding OP.

  The special mounting component D3 according to this modified example has a structure having “one surface mounting type discrete component” smaller than “one insertion mounting type discrete component” therein. The size when double-molded is about the same size as “one discrete mounting type discrete component”, and it can be expected that the above-mentioned excellent effects can be obtained. . Therefore, in a configuration in which “one insertion mounting type discrete component” is included and double-molded, the size becomes larger than “one insertion mounting type discrete component”. Therefore, it is impossible to expect the above-described excellent effects.

  The techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized below. Unless otherwise specified, the contents described below can be adopted by either the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 or the example thereof, or the technique described with reference to FIG. 118 or the example thereof. This is an effect that can be achieved.

As described above, the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG.
・ Has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using these electronic components, in addition to generating a control power supply (for example, +5 V, etc.), a game progress process including award ball payout A first control unit MCG that performs control related to the game, and a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and effects related to games that are advanced by the first control unit MCG by using those electronic components Second control unit SCG
The purpose of the game machine is to solve the problem of "reducing the hardware circuit size while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting". .

  More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, first, the effect control related to the game is performed among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. In view of the fact that the second control unit SCG, which is only to be performed, is not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and is difficult to be fraudulent. One of the technical features is that this is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface mounting type components (SMD) are also used as the above-described various mounting electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, but these mounting electronic components are obtained by the player. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 without degrading the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting because it is not directly related to the privilege and is not subject to fraud. The size can be reduced.

  On the other hand, since the process on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG is likely to be an illegal target. Therefore, although the size reduction of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of the mounting electronic components is significantly reduced, The reality is that a decline in the amusement interest is inevitable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, on the substrate of the first control unit MCG,
-An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate BB, and is inferior to the integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance;
・ Surface mounting area where the lead part provided on the electronic component for mounting is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB and the integration performance is excellent due to the multi-layered wiring pattern, but the injustice suppression performance is inferior Both are to be provided first. On this basis, the following two types of mounting electronic parts with different properties are selectively mounted in the insertion mounting region or surface mounting region having the above properties in such a manner that the above-mentioned problems can be solved. One of them.

・ Multiple types of single function elements are integrated in a relatively large package, and integrated circuit components with low security performance against unauthorized mounting ・ Single function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package Discrete parts with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

  More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component having the low security performance is mounted only in the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance in the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region. At the same time, in the surface mounting region inferior to the fraud suppression performance, only the discrete component having the high security performance is mounted. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the mounting electronic component even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent.

  However, even if it is configured to maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting in this way, the board included in the first control unit MCG is likely to be targeted for fraud. There is no change. Therefore, the substrate of the first control unit MCG basically has a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7, FIG. It is desirable that the mounting surface (flat surface) be directed to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in a state of being covered with a). That is, in this case, the illicit act on the mounting surface (flat surface) can be made difficult by the transparent cover member, and the first control unit MCG can be simply performed by opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Therefore, it is possible to monitor (visually) whether or not an illegal component is mounted, so that an illegal component is used as a substrate (first substrate) on which an integrated circuit component that is likely to be illegal is mounted. It is possible to suitably ensure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring with respect to the mounting of each.

  In order to obtain such effects, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the mounting electronic component is mounted on one side (back side) of the board of the first control unit MCG. First, the mounting electronic component is mounted only on the other side (front side) and covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). It goes without saying that the surface on the other side (front side) should be directed toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Moreover, in view of the fact that the main control board 1310 is a part of the first control unit MCG that performs processing directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG has the above-described components. Among the substrates, it can be said that it is particularly desirable to apply to each of the substrates included in the main control substrate 1310.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components, first, an insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed as a substrate included in the main control board 1310, and the integrated circuit component and At least a first substrate on which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which surface mount regions inferior in fraud suppression performance are formed and integrated circuit components are not mounted but discrete components are surface mounted are prepared. To. Among the substrates, the first substrate is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) and the one side surface (the electronic component is not mounted). With respect to the second substrate, the other side surface (the back side surface) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) are arranged so that the other side surface faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Both the one side surface (the back side surface on which the electronic component is not mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are orthogonal to this It is desirable to arrange so as to face the direction. That is, in this case, the presence of the surface mounting region (second substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance can be made difficult to visually recognize from the rear side, so that the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components is more suitable. Will be expected to maintain.

  However, even in such a configuration, if a malicious person sticks to "whether a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed somewhere", the surface inferior in fraud suppression performance There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting region is formed will be noticed. In this case, in the surface mounting area of the second board, although only the discrete component with high security performance is mounted among the integrated circuit component and the discrete component, the hall side has not yet recalled the fraud If a small illegal chip is used (for example, a very small illegal chip is developed), a loss may occur.

  Therefore, the other side (front side) of the first substrate on which both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is not limited to the insertion mounting area, and fraud suppression The surface mounting area with inferior performance is also formed on the same surface (front side). Then, no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is left exposed, and the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is connected to the pachinko machine. It is desirable to arrange it so that it faces the rear side of 1. That is, in this case, the surface mounting region of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first board arranged to face the rear side is when a malicious person tries to perform an illegal act from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, it plays a role as an advertising tower that appeals that “no mounting electronic parts are mounted in the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance, and the pachinko machine 1 has high fraud suppression performance” As a result, it is possible to lose the willingness of a malicious person to find the second substrate on which the surface mounting region having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed. Note that the surface mounting region formed on the first substrate is preferably provided at a position (such as an end of the first substrate) where the presence of the surface mounting region is easily noticed when the first substrate is viewed.

  The pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate has an independent shape that is not electrically connected to the surface mounting area and the insertion mounting area formed on the same plane. Although it is electrically connected to the insertion mounting area, even if an unauthorized part is mounted on the surface mounting area, the insertion mounting area side is not affected (the game is advanced) It is important to form on an output signal that does not need to be used above. On the other hand, in the second substrate according to this example, unlike the first substrate, only the surface mounting region inferior in tampering suppression performance is formed between the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region. A mounting electronic component (here, a discrete component) is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region.

  Even if each of the above-described configurations is adopted, a “second substrate on which a discrete component is surface-mounted on a surface-mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance” may be found by a malicious person. Sex cannot be completely excluded. Therefore, among the surface mounting regions of the main control board 1310, the “surface mounting region that is formed only on the other surface of the first substrate and on which no mounting electronic components are mounted” On the other hand, with respect to the “surface mounting region formed only on the other surface of the second substrate”, the pattern wiring as shown in FIG. Is molded with a mold member (non-permeable member) together with the second substrate in a state where only the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is surface-mounted. Both the back side where no electronic components are mounted) and the other side (front side) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but face the direction perpendicular to this. It is desirable to be disposed. In other words, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mounting area is formed on the second substrate and which type of discrete component is mounted on the surface mounting area. In addition, the improper act on the mounting surface is made difficult by the mold member (the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area where mounting of illegal parts is virtually impossible, It is possible to remove from the target that needs to be monitored for mounting), and “to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected to solve the problem of “good” appropriately.

  However, more preferably, for a mounting component (in this case, a discrete component) that is surface-mounted in the surface mounting region, as shown in an example of the mold structure in FIG. It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area TH of the first substrate in a state where it is molded with a non-permeable member. According to such a configuration, the first substrate disposed so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (the surface mount area that impresses that “the surface mount component is not mounted in the pachinko machine 1”, and the electronic component In the insertion mounting area, the "discrete component", the "integrated circuit component", and the "second board together with the mold member (non-transparent member)". The “surface-mounting regions in a state molded by the above” are inserted and mounted, and are electrically connected between the electronic components. In other words, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted, and the surface mounting region (second (2 substrates) is difficult to see with the mold member, and it can be inserted into the inserted mounting parts and functioned electrically so that it can maintain the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting. However, it is expected to solve the problem of “reducing the size of the hardware circuit” more suitably.

  In addition, for the second board on which the surface mount component is mounted, the board is inserted and mounted to the first board so that the thin surface of the board faces the rear side (the board surfaces are orthogonal to the first board). Therefore, the molded second substrate can be mounted without generating a large blind spot with the first substrate.

  Here, even when each of the above configurations is adopted, “the second substrate itself in a state of being molded by the mold member (non-permeable member) is used as a mold member (non-permeable member) together with illegal parts. The hall side is required to periodically check whether or not an illegal act such as “replace with another substrate in a molded state” is performed. In this regard, if the above-described mold structure is simply adopted, the fraudulent act is performed when the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed in which the color or material of the mold member is replaced with another substrate having the same configuration. It may be difficult to detect that the electronic device is in a broken state, and the security performance against improper mounting of mounting electronic components may also be reduced.

  Therefore, only a specific type of discrete component (mounting electronic component) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate included in the main control substrate 1310 is included in the surface mounting region of the second substrate to be molded. It is preferable that the surface mounting is performed, and the other types are not mounted on the second substrate, but only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only the discrete component having a specific shape is molded on the surface mounting region of the second substrate while being surface-mounted, so that the shape of the undulating portion ( The degree of swelling of the mold member at the discrete component mounting position (see, for example, FIG. 118) is unified. In other words, when another substrate on which an illegal component is further mounted is molded by a mold member in addition to a specific type of discrete component, the degree of swelling of the mold member at the mounting position of the illegal component is the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Therefore, it is easy to monitor for the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior by the shape difference appearing on such a mold member (the swelling state is not single), and against the illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that the security performance is suitably maintained.

  In this case, in the first control unit MCG, at least on the board included in the main control board 1310, discrete components of a specific type are mounted collectively only on the surface mounting area of the second board, It can be said that it is more desirable not to be mounted on a board different from the two boards in order to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit.

  However, since the “specific type discrete component” for obtaining the above-described effects is required to be the same mounting electronic component in shape, for example, as the “specific type discrete component” If the “Schottky barrier diode” is surface-mounted on the second board, the “PN diode” is a “discrete component different from the specific type” and is not mounted on the second board and is a different board. It will be required to be mounted on. Strictly speaking, when a “Schottky barrier diode” as a “specific type of discrete component” is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the “Schottky barrier diode” of the same product is mounted on the second substrate. The “Schottky barrier diode” of a different product is preferably not mounted on the second substrate but mounted on a different substrate.

  However, on the board included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to more favorably reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit, only the type of discrete component to be surface-mounted is different, and other structures (the insertion mounting area is not formed, The third board is the same as the second board described above, and only one type of discrete component different from the specific type is surface-mounted. It is desirable that the third substrate is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region of the first substrate so as to be electrically connected to other mounting electronic components. According to such a configuration, the substrates (second substrate and third substrate) having the above-described mold structure for each type of discrete component are different electronic components (in the example of FIG. 118, special mounting component D3a, special component It is prepared as a mounting component D3b), and the shape to be monitored for each substrate having a mold structure (the degree of swelling in the mold member) is unified to monitor for the above-mentioned fraud (on the corresponding substrate). It is possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not a type of electronic component that should not be mounted is mounted), so that “hardware is maintained while maintaining security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting. The problem of “reducing the circuit size” can be preferably solved. In addition to the second substrate and the third substrate, a substrate on which only a discrete component of a type different from the discrete component mounted on the substrate may be similarly prepared.

  If only one discrete component is mounted on the surface of the second substrate or the third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, the monitoring can be further facilitated and the above-described double mold structure can be used. In combination, it becomes possible to more suitably solve the problem of “reducing the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components”.

  When a plurality of substrates thus molded (here, the second substrate and the third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided. It is desirable that each surface mounting surface (the other surface described above) is disposed so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to collectively check the degree of swelling in the mold member of each substrate from the same direction, it is possible to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding substrate). It is possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not electronic components are mounted.

  Furthermore, each component (mold member) that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition, it is desirable that each of the surfaces with the component side identification display is arranged so as to face the same direction. That is, in this case, it is possible to have a one-to-one correspondence between the “type of component side identification display” and the “shape to appear on the mold member” attached to the second substrate and the third substrate, respectively. This makes it possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred. At this time, the component side identification display may be attached to the mold surface opposite to the side on which the surface mounting region is formed (the surface on the side where the mold member does not bulge) It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification display so as not to cause a confirmation error.

  Further, according to the above configuration, for the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting region inferior in tampering suppression performance is formed, one electron molded together with the discrete components that are surface mounted on the substrate. Each component is provided as a component, and is inserted and mounted in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. That is, in this case, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted is as if it is an insertion mounting component without creating a large space between the first substrate and the second substrate. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

  However, in order to favorably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts, the appearance of the electronic board inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion mounted part is the second board or Each of the third substrates is required to be hidden from the substrate on which the surface mounting region is formed. Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, a plurality of types of discrete components are prevented from being surface mounted, an integrated circuit component is prevented from being surface mounted, and as shown in FIG. For example, the surface mounting of only one discrete component is to suppress the size of the substrate and to connect it to one insertion mounting component (a structure in which an electrical element is connected to the insertion mounting lead by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it appear as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component). That is, the surface mounting region formed on the second substrate or the third substrate is at least an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate or an empty state formed on the first substrate but nothing is mounted. It is required that the area be smaller than the surface mounting area.

  Further, the second substrate and the third substrate can be made compact in this way, and the second substrate and the third substrate are each one electron with respect to the first substrate. Insertion mounted components (discrete components (general electronic with a structure in which an electrical element is connected to an insertion mounting lead by a bonding wire) mounted at a lower mounting height than those electronic components when inserted and mounted as a component Components)) and insertion mounting components mounted at higher mounting heights than those electronic components (discrete components (general electronic components having a structure in which electrical elements are connected to the insertion mounting leads by bonding wires))) It is more desirable to arrange each of them. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in the tampering suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region in the first substrate that is excellent in the tampering suppression performance. It becomes possible to make it look more suitable as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second substrate or the third substrate is provided as an electronic component (mold component) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first substrate, or inserted into the first substrate. It can be said that it is important to provide the electronic component (molded component) smaller than the largest discrete component to be mounted.

  Further, in general, a substrate corresponding to the type of electronic component to be mounted on the substrate on which the electronic component is mounted, including the substrate (first substrate) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed. For example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is provided near the place where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, for the second substrate and the third substrate according to this embodiment, it is possible to conceal which type of electronic component functions to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding. It can be said that it is desirable to suitably maintain the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Accordingly, different board-side identification displays are attached in the vicinity of positions where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the insertion mounting surface of the first board. However, any of these board-side identification displays includes any board-side identification display attached to the same type of mounting electronic component, and any board-side identification within the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable to have a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”). That is, in this case, even if the board side identification display (mounting surface of the first board) attached near the position where the second board or the third board is inserted and mounted, the mode is the same kind of mounting electronic Since it is a unique aspect different from the board side identification display attached corresponding to the component, which type is mounted as a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate, respectively Can be made difficult to recognize.

  However, when a structure that increases the difficulty of circuit understanding is adopted by concealing which type of electronic component the second substrate or the third substrate functions as described above, In order to grasp the above, there is a concern that a malicious person may perform an act of cutting the mold member and trying to check the internal element.

  Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, first, the substrate side identification display is not attached to the surface mounting surface (surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on the substrates. However, even if a malicious member removes the mold member and attempts to confirm the inside of the mold member, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. Is desirable.

  Still further, with respect to each discrete component that is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region formed on the second substrate or the third substrate, many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate Is formed by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted by the second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color Further, it is desirable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion mounting components, and the first substrate is molded. Even in the case of insertion mounting, the administrator on the hall side can easily find where the second board and the third board are, and fraud has been made to the second board and the third board. It becomes possible to facilitate the confirmation of whether or not there is.

  In this case, even a malicious person can assist in grasping information on which surface mounting region (second substrate or third substrate) inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided. It can be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the type of the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component that is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region with the second mold member together with the second substrate or the third substrate. In addition to increasing the difficulty of circuit understanding, the second mold member is provided in the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside. Even if it is, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded with the second substrate or the third substrate is in a state of being cut or whether the first mold member in the inside is being cut. As a result, it is expected that the difficulty of understanding the circuit is suitably maintained by keeping the type of the electronic component secret.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are each inserted and mounted as one electronic component, on the same mounting surface. A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”) different from any board-side identification display is added. However, if only the board side identification display having such a unique aspect is attached, it is impossible to grasp which type of electronic component functions on the hall side, and maintenance / There are concerns that this will adversely affect management. Therefore, a board having a unique aspect at a position that is relatively easily visible in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are each inserted and mounted as one electronic component among the insertion and mounting surfaces of the first board. In addition to the side identification display, the same type of mounting electronic components (or different) on the same mounting surface at a position that is relatively difficult to see (such as directly under the molded second substrate or third substrate) It is desirable that the board-side identification display having the same form as the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component on the board) is also secretly attached.

  Further, as described above, in this example, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate included in the main control substrate 1310 is used. Only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) are surface-mounted. In addition, the surface mounting area of the third board has one type (for example, a relatively small specific capacity) different from the specific type among various discrete components mounted on the board included in the main control board 1310. Only discrete components (mounting electronic components) of the capacitor are surface mounted. According to these configurations, it is obvious that the second substrate or the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit) having a specific function. That is, a mounting electronic component that is surface-mounted on a surface mounting region formed on a molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate) and a substrate different from the substrate (second substrate or third substrate) (here Then, a specific discrete circuit is configured by mounting electronic components that are surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), thereby increasing the difficulty in understanding the circuit or molding the substrate. (Second board or third board) It is difficult to replace itself (because the structure in the mold is concealed and it is necessary to make a mold part that does not have a specific circuit function). It is expected to be used for countermeasures.

  As described above, in summarizing the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, configurations having several technical features have been described in the order in which synergistic effects can be expected. About each structure, it was only what was described as the best embodiment, and when implementing, it is not always necessary to use all of those structures, and those structures are appropriately combined regardless of the order in which they are described. Can be implemented.

  Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above-described embodiments and modifications will be described below.

[Technology 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate,
A surface mounting area on which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is mounted in a manner placed on the surface of the base plate,
Of the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mount components mounted on the surface mount region is formed by molding the surface mount component itself with a mold resin. The game machine is characterized in that it is molded together with the surface mounting area to be mounted by another mold resin.

[Technology 1-2]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using the electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, the gaming machine can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting area where a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate, and a lead portion provided in the electronic component. Of the surface mounting area to be mounted on the surface of the surface, only the surface mounting area is provided,
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area,
Among the plurality of electronic components, a first side surface mount component mounted on the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the first control unit and a surface mount region provided on the base plate of the second control unit The second side surface mounted component to be mounted is one of the first side surface mounted component and the second side surface mounted component, although both are molded by a mold resin. The gaming machine, wherein the first side surface mounting component is molded together with the surface mounting region using a molding resin different from the molding resin of the first side surface mounting component itself.

  In such technical thoughts 1-1 and 1-2, the surface mount component mounted in the surface mount region inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed by molding resin itself, Since it is molded integrally with the surface mounting area to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin, it is possible to apply some fraud to the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It becomes extremely difficult.

[Technology 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in such a manner that the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mounting board mounted in a manner that a surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting component of the electronic component is placed on the surface;
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
On the special surface mount board,
A wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mounting component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead portion is provided,
Surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are:
Of the surface mounting lead portion and the special insertion mounting lead portion, only the special insertion mounting lead portion is molded integrally with the special surface mounting plate so as to be drawn out of the mold resin, A gaming machine that is mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a special insertion mounting lead portion.

  In such a technical idea 2, the surface mounting component mounted in the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is caused to function as if it is one insertion mounting component mounted in the insertion mounting area excellent in the fraud suppression performance. Therefore, it can be expected that a malicious person is excluded from the target of fraud.

[Technology 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in such a manner that the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mounting board mounted in a manner that a surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting component of the electronic component is placed on the surface;
In the surface mount component,
It includes at least discrete surface mount components in which a single function element is molded with a mold resin,
The discrete surface mount component is:
The discrete surface mount component has a relatively large external shape by being integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete surface mount component itself, and the base of the specific control unit A gaming machine having an appearance shape different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

  In such a technical idea 3, an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is given to a mere discrete surface mount component that can only have a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. It is unique as an external shape that attracts the attention of a malicious person and has a relatively large external shape. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to show the third party the excessive security performance performed in the specific control unit, it is possible to expect a decrease in the willingness to perform fraudulent acts.

[Technology 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate,
A surface mounting area on which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is mounted in a manner placed on the surface of the base plate,
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting area is distributed in a plurality of locations so that each area is a relatively small area, whereas the insertion mounting area is distributed. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

  In such a technical idea 4, the surface mounting area inferior to the anti-fraud performance is not concentrated in one place, but is divided into small portions to make it inconspicuous. It is arranged so as to be inserted into an insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, when a malicious person looks at the base plate of the specific control unit, it becomes difficult to notice that the surface mounting area exists, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts, It is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

[Technology 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progress processing by using these electronic circuits,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The plurality of electronic circuits include
A backup power supply circuit that supplies a backup power supply to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off is included as a discrete circuit that includes at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of a single function element. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate,
A surface mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate;
The insertion mounting area is
Provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area, so that electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area are adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area,
The backup power supply circuit is
Despite being provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function for supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power is shut off, the capacitors and diodes of the discrete circuit are provided. One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting region surrounded by the insertion mounting region, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting region of the insertion mounting region. A gaming machine that is mounted at a position that is not adjacent to a component.

  According to the technical idea 5 as described above, although it is a discrete circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on the base mounting area on the base plate. An electronic component having a shape to be smoothed and an electronic component having a shape capable of being mounted on the surface mounting region are mixed. Therefore, it is recalled that when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of a specific control unit, they have an electrical close role to exert a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is placed in a form that is inserted in the insertion mounting area that is excellent in fraud suppression performance and is provided as a relatively large area. The capacitor and the diode included in one discrete circuit aiming to exhibit the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance, and even if the presence is noticed, the electronic component mounted in the surface mounting area cooperates with other electronic components. Thus, it becomes difficult to recall what electrical functions are implemented so as to make it difficult to suppress fraud by further increasing the difficulty of understanding these circuits. It can be expected.

[Technology 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in a manner in which an insertion mounting lead provided on an electronic component is inserted;
A surface mounting lead mounted on the surface of the surface mounting lead provided on the electronic component.
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
The special surface mount board is
The wiring part is formed so as to electrically connect the surface mounting lead part of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead part, and with respect to the insertion mounting board. The special insertion / mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion / mounting board and disposed so that the mounting surfaces thereof are substantially orthogonal to each other.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In general, a component mounted on a surface mounting board often has a flat shape. In this regard, in the above technical idea 6, the special surface mounting board is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insertion mounting board are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, an electronic component is mounted as an insertion mounting board because a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area. The special surface mounting board can be disposed even in a situation where only a small possible region (surface area) remains.

[Technology 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in a manner in which an insertion mounting lead provided on an electronic component is inserted;
A surface-mounting board mounted in such a manner that a surface-mounting lead provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface of the base board,
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within an installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided in the insertion mount plate. And
The specific surface mount component is:
Despite being a size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mount component is integrated with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A gaming machine having an appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within an installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

  That is, when a specific surface mount component is left in an external shape smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insertion mounting board, a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It becomes easy for third parties to notice and, in turn, can promote fraud.

  In this regard, in the above technical idea 7, a specific surface mount component is integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole appears, a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit This makes it difficult for third parties to notice this.

[Technology 8]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and capable of executing a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using the electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The base plate of the first controller is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is inserted into the base plate; and
A surface mounting area where the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate,
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mounting region is formed,
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is left exposed and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. It is arranged in
The second substrate is
The integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the surface mounting region, and only the discrete component is mounted, and faces in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged.

  In such a technical idea 8, a first substrate on which a surface mounting region in which no mounting electronic components are mounted and which is in an empty state is prepared is prepared, and the first substrate is provided in the surface mounting region. The pattern wiring as described above is arranged in a state where it is exposed to the rear side of the gaming machine. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, “There is no mounting electronic component in the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance, and it is highly illegal as a gaming machine. It comes to play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that “suppression performance is provided”, and it is expected to suppress the mounting of unauthorized parts.

  On the other hand, the second board is arranged in a different direction from the rear side of the gaming machine so that the presence of the second board is not easily noticed, and the integrated circuit is mounted on the surface mounting area. Of the components and discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent are not mounted, and only discrete components that are less likely to be fraudulent are mounted. That is, in this case, in addition to the presence of the first substrate, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the second substrate itself, and even if it is noticed, the fraud suppression performance is inferior. Since only discrete components that are not subject to fraud are mounted in the surface mounting area, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while favorably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

[Technology 9]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region is formed in which a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate A second substrate having a surface mounting region mounted thereon and a special insertion mounting lead portion that extends outward and can be inserted into the insertion mounting region of the first substrate. And
The first substrate includes
An insertion mounting area where insertion mounting lead portions provided in the insertion mounting component can be mounted and a surface mounting lead portion provided in the surface mounting component are placed on the surface. Both the surface mount area that can be mounted are formed, but no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mount area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mount area is not formed. It has been left in the dew,
In the second substrate,
Only the surface mounting region is formed of the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region, and only the discrete component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is to be mounted. As the one electronic component molded into the first board, the special insertion / mounting lead portion is inserted into the insertion / mounting area of the first board, so that various insertion / mounting parts mounted on the first board can be obtained. A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected between.

  In such a technical idea 9, as a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance, a surface mounting region in which no mounting electronic components are mounted and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting region is exposed ( A first substrate), and a surface mounting region (second substrate) in which only the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is surface-mounted and molded together with the substrate. It has. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, the surface mounting area on which the mounting electronic component is mounted is difficult to see, and any mounting Since only the surface mounting area on which no electronic components are mounted is made visible, the surface mounting area is said to be “no mounting electronic components are mounted on the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance. As a gaming machine, it has a role as an advertising tower appealing that it has a high fraud suppression performance as a gaming machine, and as a result, it is expected to suppress the mounting of illegal parts.

  In addition, the first substrate on which the surface mounting region serving as the advertising tower is formed has an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance in addition to the surface mounting region. Thus, the surface mounting region (second substrate) that is molded together with the substrate is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area (first mounting) that is inferior in fraud suppression performance in the insertion mounting area that is excellent in fraud suppression performance in the board (first board) that impresses that “the surface mounting component is not mounted”. (2 substrates) is inserted into the mold in such a way that it is difficult to see, so that it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts. Become.

[Technology 10]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate in which an insertion mounting region is formed in which a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate A second substrate on which a surface mounting area is mounted to be mounted on the substrate;
In the first substrate,
The electronic component for mounting is not mounted on one surface, and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the other surface, and the other surface is behind the gaming machine. Whereas it is arranged in the direction facing the side,
In the second substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on the one side surface, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other side surface, and only the discrete component is mounted. In the molded state, the one side surface and the other side surface are mounted on the first substrate in a direction facing a different direction from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine.

  In the technical idea 10 as described above, with respect to the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on the one side surface, and the discrete component is integrated on the other side surface. Since both the circuit component and the circuit component are mounted, the other side surface is arranged so as to face the rear side of the gaming machine, so that an integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent is mounted. As a substrate (first substrate), it is possible to suitably ensure the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized components and the ease of monitoring.

  In addition, for the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on the one side surface, and the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent is mounted on the other side surface. Since only discrete parts that are not subject to fraud are mounted, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts. Become.

  In addition, in the second board, both the one side surface and the other side surface are the gaming machine in a state where a surface mounting region on which the discrete component is mounted is molded with a molding member together with the board. It is arranged so that it faces in a different direction from the rear side. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area in which mounting of illegal parts is substantially impossible, and an object that requires monitoring for mounting of illegal parts (game machine) It can be removed from the object to be confirmed from the rear side.

  In addition, regarding the surface mounting area (second board) thus excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of the unauthorized parts, the thin portion of the board faces the rear side (both the one side surface and the other side surface are the relevant). Since it is mounted on the first board so that it faces in a different direction from the rear side of the gaming machine), the molded state without creating a large space with the first board. It becomes possible to mount the second substrate.

[Technology 11]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed;
A second substrate on which a surface mounting region is formed in which the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, and a specific type of mounting electronic component is surface-mounted among the discrete components; and A third substrate on which a surface mounting region is formed in which the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, and the mounting electronic component of a type different from the specific type is mounted on the surface of the discrete component. Have
The second substrate and the third substrate are:
By being provided as separate electronic components molded together with discrete components that are surface-mounted on the respective substrates, and being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, respectively. It is possible to be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
Each member that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component that is mounted on the surface of each member. A gaming machine, characterized in that each surface with an identification display is arranged so as to face a specific direction.

  According to the technical idea 11 as described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Thus, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulently mounted on the second and third substrates on which the surface mounting regions inferior in fraud suppression performance are formed are respectively mounted in different types for each substrate.

  Therefore, for mounting electronic parts mounted on the insertion mounting area side with excellent fraud suppression performance, not only the conventional fraud suppression function is maintained but also mounting on the surface mounting area side with inferior fraud suppression performance As for electronic components, confirmation is made as to whether the mounting electronic components having the type corresponding to each of the second and third substrates are mounted (electronic components of a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding substrate) It will be easy to detect even if fraud is made, and it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit. become.

  In addition, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components that are surface-mounted on those substrates, respectively. In addition, by being inserted and mounted in each of the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, it is possible to electrically connect to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate. Yes. That is, in this case, a specific type of discrete component originally provided as a surface mounting component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are inserted and mounted on the first board as if they were insertion mounting components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Furthermore, each component that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on each of the substrates. Each of the surfaces with side identification indications is arranged so as to face a specific direction. That is, in this case, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the “type of component side identification display” and the “shape that should appear on the mold member” attached to the second substrate and the third substrate that are respectively inserted and mounted on the first substrate. Since it becomes possible to cope with it, it is possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technology 12]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed; and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
Provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate, and inserted and mounted in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. By doing so, it is possible to be electrically connected to various insertion mounted components mounted on the first substrate,
The first substrate includes
When the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, the mounting component is mounted with a mounting height lower than that of the electronic component, and is mounted with a mounting height higher than the electronic component. An amusement machine characterized in that an insertion mounting component is provided.

  According to the technical concept 12, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is not likely to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the inserted mounting region. In other words, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted does not create a large space between the first substrate and the first substrate as if it were an insertion mounting component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Still further, an insertion mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a mounting height lower than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and the electronic component Since the insertion mounting components mounted at a higher mounting height are respectively disposed, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in the anti-fraud performance is formed is the illegal one formed on the first substrate. It becomes difficult to recognize that it is mounted in the insertion mounting region with excellent suppression performance.

[Technology 13]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed; and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The discrete component that is surface-mounted on the second substrate is configured by being molded by a first mold member having a specific color different from many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate is
Insertion mounting region provided as one electronic component molded with a second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and formed on the first substrate The gaming machine can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first board by being mounted on the board.

  According to the technical idea 13 as described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed on the inserted mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion mounting component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  In addition, for discrete components that are surface-mounted in the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate, the first mold member has a color different from that of many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. And configured as one electronic component that is further molded by a second mold member having the same or similar color to the specific color together with the second substrate to be mounted. I have to.

  Therefore, even if the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion mounting components and inserted and mounted on the first substrate, The administrator on the side can easily find where the second board is, and can easily check whether the second board is fraudulent. However, in this case, even a malicious person may help grasp information on which surface mounting region (second substrate) inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, it is difficult to understand the circuit by concealing the type as the electronic component by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting region with the second mold member together with the second substrate. The second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color disposed on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface as well as improving the performance. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of the discrete component that is surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside thereof. Even so, it can be difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is in a state of being cut or whether the first mold member in the second substrate is being cut. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component is kept secret and the difficulty of understanding the circuit is suitably maintained.

[Technology 14]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed; and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. It can be electrically connected to various insertion-mounted components mounted on
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate side identification display corresponding to a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the substrate, and the one electronic component is not mounted on the mounting surface of the first substrate. A specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the same kind of mounting electronic component. A gaming machine characterized by having a unique aspect different from any of the board-side identification displays attached within the insertion mounting area of the gaming machine, including the board-side identification display.

  According to the technical concept 14, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed on the inserted mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion mounting component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Furthermore, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate side identification display corresponding to the discrete component that is surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is not provided. Is provided with a specific board side identification display corresponding to the position where the second board as the one electronic component is inserted and mounted. The specific board side identification display is the same kind of mounting electronic component. Including the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the above-mentioned, a unique mode different from any of the board-side identification display attached in the first control unit or the second control unit is provided. That is, in this case, even if the specific board side identification display attached to the mounting surface of the first board is confirmed, the mode is different from the board side identification display attached corresponding to the same kind of mounting electronic component. Because of the unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the second substrate. In addition, in order to grasp the type of discrete parts that are surface-mounted to the surface-mounted area, even if an act such as trying to confirm the inside of the mold member is scraped to a malicious person, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technology 15]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and that can use each of the electronic circuits to perform control power generation processing and game progression processing;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and capable of executing a progress process of performance according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic circuits;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit,
Consists of electronic components for mounting single-function elements, includes specific discrete circuits intended to demonstrate specific electrical functions,
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting area and a surface mounting area formed on different substrates,
In the specific board on which the surface mounting area is formed in the base plate, only a specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted and the specific type Various electronic components that are mounted on the different substrates by being mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate, provided as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic components. It can be electrically connected to the inserted mounting parts.
Of the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit, other mounting electronic components different from the specific type are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

  In such a technical idea 15, only a discrete component (a mounting electronic component constituting a specific discrete circuit) that is difficult to be fraudulent is mounted on a specific substrate on which a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed. For this reason, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  In addition, in the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only the specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted, and the specific type Various electronic components that are mounted on the different substrates by being mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate are provided as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic components. It is possible to be electrically connected to the insertion mounting component.

  In other words, in this case, the specific board on which the surface-mounted component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion-mounted component. It is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the above. In addition, on the above-mentioned specific board, since only a specific type of mounting electronic components among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted, check whether the surface mounting area is fraudulent. Can be made easier. In addition, since the specific board is molded together with a specific type of mounting electronic component, it is inserted and mounted on another board on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit for a specific discrete circuit formed over a surface mounting area formed in a substrate and an insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate, and to be used as a countermeasure against fraud Is expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning port sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage dishes. When the game ball as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H is designated. In the example, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), a payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, common figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special figure 1 tuning production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning production termination, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. Note that the probability and short-time state include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a short-time state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the short time state is, for example, a normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared with the non-short-time state (normal game state), the time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. In addition to increasing the number of stop displays compared to the non-short-time state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is made longer than that of the non-time-short state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained without reducing the number of possessed balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, a non-short-time state) In addition, the number of times of determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is lengthened. The state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the mouth 2004).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect is started. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands with names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 synchronization effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closing display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These various commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the big winning opening 1 is started while the big winning opening 1 is being opened for the 1st to 16th rounds (the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). The winning prize mouth 2005 is closed during the round or the closing start is instructed, and the 1 prize display command for the big prize opening counts the number of 0 to 10 game balls (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command is used when a small hit middle / large prize winning prize winning effect (when a game ball that has entered the big prize winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (in the start opening unit 2100). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100). The grand prize winning 1 count display command is a game ball that has entered the big prize winning opening 2005 when the big winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count to the big winning prize opening 1 is changed (when the big winning prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of a small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands at the time of power-on and the name of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. When the power is turned on, the power-on status command is used when the power supply is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure )), The information indicating which state (probability and short-time state) to recover from among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, what kind of game is copyrighted, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to specify the series code for identifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability change with a limited number of special symbol changes) And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The power-on main control return destination command indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also included.) Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The command 1402 is composed of commands with the names of general figure synchronization effect start, universal symbol designation, universal figure synchronization effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (normally As the gaming state, a low probability non-short-time state is set).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), and the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hitting opening, public power open display, and ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command for general power is open during open power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2107). State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start-up solenoid 2107) The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display section includes commands having names such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating) (a game ball is entered into the big winning port 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification, the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical signal on a path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, and a count sensor. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005, etc. occurs. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Further, the door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state that has been made, the door opening notification end is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, an instruction to end the body frame opening notification is given.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the terminal, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command) and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and when the error is canceled, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error is canceled, and the frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Inspects various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned “9 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002. , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and informs the number of balls that have not been used yet for the variation display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 Reservation 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command instructs the start of the pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol indicator 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold. Before using the second special symbol display 1405 to display the variation of the special symbol, pre-read and instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is transmitted. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the elapse of the stoppage period), and the special symbol 1 storage command is stored. When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 and there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol change display in the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the first special symbol display unit 1403 to display the variation of the special symbols) The special symbol 2 storage command is sent to the special symbol 2 when the number of the special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400). In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the variable display, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, the special number display unit 1405 displays a special number from the number of reserves. Design The normal symbol storage command is used when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is transmitted). In the state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display in the symbol display 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, the normal symbol indicator is displayed from the reserved number. 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and when the number of reserved symbols decreases), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is received when the number of special symbol 1 actuated reserved balls increases (game ball at the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number). But Sent when it increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are transmitted mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not make a sound notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, each command from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), a ball breakage, full tank, connection abnormality and CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) is prepared with a ball seeing, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error. In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated The random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for display pattern, a big hit symbol for use in determining the big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the big hit gaming state is generated, and the big hit The first special symbol display 1 for generating the big hit symbol initial value random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the small hit gaming state 03 and a small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol indicator 1405, and an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random symbol for the small hit symbol A random number for determination is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine a normal random number per symbol for use in determining whether or not to move the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 and an initial value of the random number for normal symbol determination. For determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the check sum value (sum value) does not match, the initial random number for determining the normal value per symbol is determined by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and always updates the random number for determination per symbol based on the extracted ID code. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who attempts to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the start port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  The main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and time counting is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this electric power clear process, first, the output of the power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clear processing, first, output of a power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, thereby starting output of the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input as a power failure notification from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  When the power supply warning signal is not inputted even after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilize after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 being operated to the main control MPU 1310a. Depending on whether or not Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that an instruction to perform RAM clearing is given, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information relating to games such as probability fluctuation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when game information is erased and a value of 0 when game information is not erased. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, a system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until. In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for the inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which the power is turned on after being turned off, a state in which power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. Therefore, the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when erasing game information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates a random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the above-described normal symbol per-symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial per-symbol determination random number. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state by hardware And setting the acquisition of the random number by latching, and setting the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 5, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect a detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error release unit) that should have been originally used to release an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. Step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program reads the start port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure is performed, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally terminated. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The electric charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. That is, even when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island facility is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power is shut off until about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility When the power is shut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Just before the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots) starts to wait (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) and immediately before reaching the waiting time. Thus, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control side timer interruption process described below is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process may not be completed. . For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication of the clearing of the RAM by the hall clerk. ).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input (that is, step S22). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination of step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and stored immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine Even when the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information based on the progress of the game by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main system constituted by the processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing at the time of the side power cut-off, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the checksum calculation result of step S28 And the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in step S64) match, so the instantaneous interruption stored in the main control built-in RAM The game information just before a power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, the main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the power supply VDD terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after that, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to clear the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the set value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to start the time measurement again. . The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT 1310af, so that an interrupt initial setting is performed after step S24 (specifically, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to avoid updating the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM by setting the interrupt permission and preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing (to be described later). The mechanism is adopted. In this way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the main control-side power The contents of the main control built-in RAM (the contents of the main control built-in RAM are divided into two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information for instructing the driving state of the start solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on at the time of power-on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored. Starting to drive the solenoid 2108 and shifting from the state in which the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the opened state. That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned based on the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. In other words, for example, a winning prize 1 count display command is transmitted to inform the number of gaming balls that are detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. The main prize-winning port 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, starting the closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 between rounds) from the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, the attack solenoid 2108 starts to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. To shift from the state to the open state (that is, 5 of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and the short time state, and displays it on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece is expanded) that indicates that the gaming state in which the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 has become advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Thereafter, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that it is present in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he plays.

  Thus, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that it was not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine will misunderstand that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a clumped state, that is, a so-called frozen state when a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310 and the big prize opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, A screen (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game is played in the big prize opening is started.) The driving of the casoleole 2108 is started and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. “Please play the game to make the ball enter.” Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored. Later, a game can be instructed to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 2005. For example, in the above-described example, a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is entered. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a game state advantageous to the user and then power is restored, the start-up solenoid 2107 serves as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction after driving is started (for example, “The movable piece has been expanded. After the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine. The game can be instructed to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 at. As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers after power failure, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared in step S38. Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are generated. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Will be stored in the state. For these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by a power-on main control return destination command in a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when power is turned on (including when power is turned on and when power is restored by power failure or instantaneous power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the indicated payout control board 951 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of power recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether to do so, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the game will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbols variation (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur). As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, an operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is changed to the second register bank. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, a magnetic detection sensor that detects fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. 69, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 notifying that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has successfully received a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. And stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening command shown in FIG. 90 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And a corresponding start opening command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the gaming balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005. , A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 And the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are respectively read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning award opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are displayed. Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are stored in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached ten, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to output that information and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to inform the fact, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls In order to notify that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified into the status display in FIG. 90). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game state is not a big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Whether or not the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) that is set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is performed based on whether or not is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is set so that the indicator 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified into jackpot relations shown in FIG. 89 (jacket opening command, winning prize opening 1 open Nth display command, winning prize opening 1 Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times, 2 to turn on the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. When the output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1407a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be lit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence / absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate value storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as the gate information by extracting the value of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above. To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is to be opened and closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is obtained, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1402 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol taken out matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start-up solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When the extracted random number for normal symbol determination does not match the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The transmission information described above as transmission information is determined by determining the display pattern and creating various commands classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. In addition to storing in the storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacking solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning prize opening 2005, or a driving signal is output to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to the main winning ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game such as time and medium information output information, starting entry prize information output signal, etc. And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process which is this routine and shown in FIG. Commands and various commands categorized as jackpots (for example, when a game ball that has entered a big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, a big prize is awarded based on detection signals from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). 90 winning command 1 count display command corresponding to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands related to ordinary drawing synchronized effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric character effects, FIG. The various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) categorized into notification display and status display shown in Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least a command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Furthermore, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Constituting the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data, transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently configuring the main control return destination command at power-on, The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM reads out the game information from the game backup information in accordance with the game information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. 89, the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 for instructing the drive state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is set to the peripheral control board 1510. Can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 performs main setting in the work area setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery), the power-on status command and the main power-on time are shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 to indicate the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, so-called freeze Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the failure due to the appearance of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, thereby providing two commands: a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and sum value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. Thus, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms) and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the effect backup information which is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and the Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and comparison of effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511 dc. When the compared contents match, production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. 0 is forcibly written and a cold start is made. Subsequent to such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  Specifically, in the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information, and the luminance stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. To prevent it

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side for 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by this every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1 byte data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in which various types of information acquired are set, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is determined as a game effect. It is determined appropriately whether or not to reflect in

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and a sound data output process described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects tailored to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, in addition to music and sound effects adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number of light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, from the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various kinds of information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The production control program is based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of a start opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, A winning prize 1 count display command output every time a game ball is received (a winning prize count command), or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating a full state shown in FIG. (Command for generating full error) is analyzed (command analyzing means) to recognize which gaming state is currently in effect. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that a command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands classified, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning processing, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priorities registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transferred. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred because another anomaly has occurred after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, on the game board side Visually warn the outside using an effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device), or audibly warn the outside using a speaker ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month which is calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board, and various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby producing a game board side effect display device. 1600 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and audio data is transmitted as audio data that is serialized sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in the program from the mute level to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb up to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as a request factor of the A controller 1511ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and Bank0 from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank 3 (1 fr) of backup second area 1511cc The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in sequence by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy to the Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and Bank 0 (SRAM) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) from the content stored at the head address of the bank) (SRAM), the bank 3 (SRAM) head address of the second area 1511 dc in the backup second area 1511 dc continuously. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. P2 is specified, and the backup second area 1511dc is continuously stored in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 are performed. Finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received as shown in FIG. 72 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control part steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Forcibly canceling in the middle and starting execution of the peripheral control unit steady process from the beginning. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady process cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called process failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is calculated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times until. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is used as the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MP1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. 72. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral I / O port continuous transmission for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c to be externally attached. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 1511caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). 1 byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the serial I / O port for motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c is externally configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus received is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , The movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, thereby determining history information (for example, operation signals) from the various detection switches. Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. The control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c attached externally are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450; , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display driving board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information obtaining storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d provided externally are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up. Further, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the top address of) in the backup second area 1511 cc, Bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts main transmission of main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a when various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data. The board serial I / O port captures 1 byte (8 bits) of information into the reception buffer. When this capture is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are considered as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for main control board incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data is set. When the value is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, after the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Judgment is made. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the received command storage area 1511cac in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral ring reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Remember. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the received data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), and a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification). It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive at least the period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are stored in the Bank1 (1fr) and the backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb Then, from the contents stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified content are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the received command storage areas included in the bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc are copied in order starting from the start address of the backup second area 1511cc.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this manner, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are provided. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creating process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). The data) No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined.

  If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, the same process as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift process in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST includes the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination processing, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72. In this embodiment, it is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the display and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected, that is, there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. (Counting the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. The communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the value immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a value of 1 is set in the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This flag indicates whether or not a failure has occurred. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. A failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, with the value 0 being set, but is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure. At this time, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, it is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Output a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 95 in the peripheral control unit steady process as illustrated in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is When the presentation is completed along with the data and the updating of all the pointers is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state of the customer It is possible to determine whether or not the current period is based on the schedule data for screen generation, and displays a startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. If the game board is in a waiting state or a period during which a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. The period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the waiting state for the customer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540, the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the presentation is completed and all the pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Yes (count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred is even once.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S 1542, that is, when the number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is not once, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. This flag indicates whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is finished. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is used to notify that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective. Process to draw on. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk” is displayed. Further, in the communication error display process, a period during which the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in the waiting state. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period of being performed, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred, as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is set to LOCKN. As a response signal for the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460. A notification image (for example, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, a process in which a notification sound (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper platen side liquid crystal display device”) repeatedly flows from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 is performed. At this time, you may make it perform the process which lightes all the various LED mounted on the various decoration board | substrates with which the LED for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are equipped.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, briefly described decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95 the part steady process, etc. are adapted to change the display of decorative designs is executed, the main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 main processing and Figure 94 the main control side timer interrupt processing or the like first special lottery result of the lottery by the game ball of acceptance of the first start hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by illustrating in, or the second, shown in FIG. 8 When the second special lottery result of the lottery by accepting game balls to the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", (the number of rounds) number of repetition of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is a round Becomes a total of 15 rounds of up to 15 rounds, each round a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) within, and then ball entrance gaming ball into the special winning opening 2005, the sphere number a predetermined number (e.g., 9-ball) comes to being adapted to the round to digest, every time the game ball into the special winning opening 2005 to 1 sphere entering sphere, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) game ball is adapted to be paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second start port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative graphic is in the center. On the right side, the change display of the right decorative design is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result and so can the player to recognize, this time, the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed variably, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible. From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped decorative display. left decorative pattern as the background image at the position becomes difficult viewing, central decorative design, and the right decorative pattern has become such that the opaque manner. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball into the second start port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the result of the special lottery, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set in cae, the pointer is used to indicate what number of screen data is output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Because it is updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 102 in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT of the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver) is one, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process The communication error display process of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the presentation is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not started and the screen generation schedule data is not started, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Warning in step S1024 in the peripheral processing routine processing of time processing The determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process proceeds to the process in step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter When it is determined that there is no failure in the connection with the receiver, the routine is terminated as it is, but when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is determined to be in a state where there is a failure is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0. When the connection between the transmitter and receiver is faulty. If the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the communication abnormality flag CC- When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the process, and the communication error display described above is performed. Processing is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even when there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process must be performed, so that the connection between the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, This means that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is restored, while the transmitter is When the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk. LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. Since the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the interval period until the game is started, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect transmitter are used. There is a problem with the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. By performing the pattern output process without fail, while performing the process of restoring the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is a fault in the connection between the two has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the fault between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred) For example, by performing the communication error display process, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative design and the central decorative design are activated. And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in connection recovery processing is performed The process for recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate LCD device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side transmitter transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The door frame side effect display device 460 invalidates the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the fact that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has received the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display an image based on.

  As described above, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. In the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is informed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the transmitter for the door frame side effect is transmitted. Door frame side effect receiver ICSD that informs that drawing data received from IC1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the combination result in which the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed is the information most interesting to the player, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the big hit gaming state to which the game is given occurs, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the rendering is not interrupted in the middle and the process of recovering the drawing correctly is performed. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a waiting state. Thus, during the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, it is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a waiting state. In the period of time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the merging circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to a circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, so that the two signals are transmitted. One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, the rendering display drive board 4450 has malfunctioned as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted to the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and a notification sound (for example, “upper plate side” Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thus, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN The signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. Hall clerk and the like can very easily check whether there is a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays a game, and the check is not time-consuming. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without taking time and effort.

  In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output in order to convey the fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal that is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The receiver ICSDIC0 is a door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When the image transmitted from the terminal cannot be normally received, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. For this purpose, the LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for notifying that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to the communication malfunction between the image communications at an early stage, and can act on the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the malfunction. It is like that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by discovering and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception is impossible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511 can output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and communication failure occurs. Telling you The message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk.” Is generated, and the generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. Can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can tell the hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the hall clerk who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk etc. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by early finding and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. Even if there is a failure in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for the side effect, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state of being not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication problems between image communications From the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is to be started to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be continuously output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and stopping, it is possible to move toward a direction in which communication problems are eliminated.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. This is a case where there is a failure in the connection between the production receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication malfunction between image communications is displayed. Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door When the connection confirmation signal informing the start of transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the connection confirmation When the signal output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and no connection confirmation signal is input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame. Controlling liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 for side effects The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not started by displaying the start and stop, the communication failure can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 and stops and displays it. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if ten main control MPUs 1310a start changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start executing the game again, the door frame When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the game again and ends (period of timing K1 to timing K2), the distortion of the image (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460. Every time (interval period), it can be made to go away.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 or a second start which is a start area in which a game ball fired by the ball striking device 650 is directed toward the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball 2004 entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 88A and 88B that are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. If the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. Period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or the power supply) 82 is used as an error canceling signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after a period of time during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of entry. The game control microprocessor uses the RWMCLR signal of FIG. And an error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed, The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; The determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed 82 (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after power-on) has passed, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error cancel signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830. It also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is a game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, ie, an error canceling function. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input part of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning port sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

  In a gaming machine, try to obtain an unfair advantage by manipulating the flow-down state of a game ball as desired by bringing a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) closer to the game ball that is driven into the game area. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by sound. Yes.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. Do not (0V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thereby, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  The transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off when the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thereby, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR2. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b includes a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 through the connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. Thereby, when the previous stage transistor ITR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 is connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied. The detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and is configured by a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

  In addition, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Thus, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are provided on the panel relay board 4161.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. In addition, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table form in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, if the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work etc., the pin contact The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust or the like easily enters from this portion.

  Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing right-handed, when slight sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific part of the game area where many game balls continuously concentrate and flow down, However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when the contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. In addition, the magnitude | size of contact resistance RR becomes 100 times-1000 times when the contact of a connector is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which no magnetism is detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Will be lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR is generated, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board. The main control input circuit 1310b 1310 has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  The magnetic detection sensors 4024 are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, near the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than a voltage (second voltage) that lowers the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR to the ground side is applied to the detection circuit unit 4164 even if a predetermined voltage lower than the first voltage is applied. The voltage raising part 4166 is provided, and the voltage output part 4163 and the detection circuit part 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising part 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the voltage raising part 4166 is an example constituted by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR built in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection part. It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conductive state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS unit is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511 and a process of outputting a signal indicating that from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, an alarm lamp, voice, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 105, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR increases.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  As in the prior art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. Notification that an illegal gaming act using the computer is performed, or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected is provided by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, voice, etc. To do. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end grounded. The second resistor IR3 is included. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged downstream of the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by the resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit constituted by the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 106, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current with a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost falls to the ground, and the second resistor Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes a magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage that is higher than the second voltage and higher than a predetermined voltage that is lower than the first voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared to the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded are respectively connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4. The other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 while + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. In addition, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Accordingly, the transistor ITR0 is turned off and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and a pull-up resistor IR0 and a resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. As a result, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the previous transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

  When the succeeding transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the succeeding transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. In addition, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 107, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Do not flow. Therefore, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is not turned on. Also, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the voltage raising portion 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit portion 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is disconnected, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on when the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on. The transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and each provided voltage output unit 4163 is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercial product, TOSHIBA Corporation). It can be used by connecting to the product.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, but a connector member. As long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor, various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact, etc. A sensor or the like can be applied.

[Application example to which sensor signal input unit 4162 of panel relay board 4161 is applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments described above has been described as preventing the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance generated when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable part of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, there are circumstances in which the detection sensor has a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, arranged in the vicinity of a start opening, a winning opening, a big winning opening, an out opening, etc.). . For this reason, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and a detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on the panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor is varied depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. Is appropriately selected. About this point, it will take various forms by the difference in the model of a game machine.

  By the way, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes as the resistance value changes due to the aging of the electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and the wiring pattern used, and the length of the wiring (harness). If the value is different, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes due to a specification change during development, for example, when the design of the type of the detection sensor, the arrangement location, or the length of the wiring (harness) is changed. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. In addition, depending on the location where the detection sensor is arranged, the length of the harness being extended, or the location where the harness is routed changes, there may be locations where noise is easily picked up, and the influence of noise also changes.

  If a current flows through a resistance value that changes due to such reasons, the current flowing through the detection sensor may be different from the original design value. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor is erroneously detected. In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and the detection sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 according to the first to third embodiments is used for electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) used over time, wiring patterns, and wiring (harness). Even when the resistance value varies depending on the length, erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In the conventional example of FIG. 104 and the example of FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  Hereinafter, a case where noise is placed on the harness will be described as an example. 110A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 110A is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise is present.

  As shown in FIG. 110A, in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is at a low level (0.4 V) when the magnetism is not detected, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. Can be maintained at a level lower than the voltage (0.8V). When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V), a level higher than the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is applied, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform has a voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as shown by the hatched portion. ), The transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  Further, not only noise but, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), when overshoot occurs, in the state where magnetism is detected, no false detection occurs, but when undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. As a result, the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 105 to 2V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8V. Has been. When there is no noise, the detection operation is at a low level (0.4 V) in a state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, and is lower than the raised voltage 2 V. Therefore, the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on A level lower than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12 V) and is higher than the raised voltage 2 V, so that the voltage raising portion 4166 is turned on and the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. 8V), the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism. However, since it is lower than the raised voltage 2V, the voltage raising part 4166 maintains the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  Next, for example, a case where a voltage increase due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change will be described as an example. FIG. 111A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 111A is a signal waveform that is input when it is normal, and the right side is a signal waveform that is input when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change.

  In the conventional example, when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage as shown by the hatched portion is a transistor. Since the voltage (0.8 V) at which ITR0 is turned on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage is turned on by the transistor ITR0. Even if it exceeds the voltage (0.8V) to be operated, it is lower than the raised voltage 2V, so that the voltage raising part 4166 maintains the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  Thus, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise. In addition, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 includes a voltage raising unit 4166, noise may be caused by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the place where the harness is routed. Even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up, the sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise. For this reason, the circuit parts (the sensor signal input part 4162 and the detection circuit part 4164) arranged on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a margin for design changes during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162 ′ of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in the first to third embodiments described above includes a built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is not detected, while the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is detected. Although the transistor STR is turned off, in other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a signal whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected. Instead, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when magnetism is not detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when magnetism is not detected and turned on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

  FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and is turned on when magnetism above a predetermined value is detected.

  The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

  As the voltage raising portion 4166, the one described in the first to third embodiments can be used. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage raising part 4166 is an example constituted by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection part.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is composed of a transistor ITR0. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and + 12V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied to one end. Yes. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, a sensor signal winning unit 4162 ′ is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166, and a detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is configured by the transistor ITR0.

[Detection when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. Thereby, the voltage pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on and applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality due to resistance value change]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. Thereby, the voltage pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on and applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, so the Zener diode ZD0 The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 via the anode terminal of the transistor ITR0 is not affected, and the transistor ITR0 is still turned on. In other words, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 ′.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. The predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the OFF state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example in which a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 are arranged on the panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration according to the first aspect of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which three of the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and the voltage output unit 4163 is arranged on another substrate (for example, a sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

  In FIG. 115, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is arranged on another board (for example, the main control board 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the performed circuit structure. Thus, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be variously changed.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes due to aging and wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. In FIG. 113, the detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is configured by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments.

  The voltage output unit 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and a second voltage that is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. When this happens, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

  The detection circuit unit 4164 switches on / off the output of the detection signal corresponding to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. In the detection circuit unit 4164 in FIG. 113, the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments is used. Therefore, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to the previous stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

  Then, with respect to the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (for example, 12V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage lower than (a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111 as an example) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising part 4166 is provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163, and a plurality of voltage raising portions 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161). . In this example, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 disposed at the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163. Further, the plurality of voltage raising portions 4166,... Are electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit portion 4164.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or magnetic sensors MGS are connected to the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  In FIG. 113, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is. Therefore, it is possible to detect the detection signal without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to consider a resistance value that varies as illustrated. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) for various types of gaming machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to the reduction of man-hours related to design changes and manufacturing during development.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS according to another embodiment described in FIG. 112 are provided, and a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. In FIG. 116, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is used. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12V).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ described in another embodiment is used, there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V, and + 12V is connected to one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which is applied.

  In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and effects will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. Also, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) The display mode and operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) contributing to the production are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second start opening winning processes are performed. In the first and second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning is made, a process of increasing the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. Done.

  If the process flag is 0 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, after the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested and executed on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 1 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the stored jackpot determination result or the current gaming state ( The processing flag is updated to “2” after determining and setting a stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) after a special symbol variable display is started and stopped.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 2 when the first and second start opening winning processes are completed, the changing process is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time-out. Stop. After that, when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit (losing) The processing selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 3 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the big hit game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game is operated, and the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of winning jackpot is set. Based on this, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, processing to stop the operation of the condition device is performed, or when the winning big hit type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a short time state or a probable change state. As shown, after the game state flag is updated, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as variation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends, and when the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a jackpot variation variation pattern, a deviation reach variation variation pattern, and a variation variation variation pattern. The big hit fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after reaching the reach effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed in a fixed stop state. Production is performed. The loss reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach determination is performed based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 performs the decoration through the reach effect. An effect is developed in which the change display of the symbols is finally lost and the symbols are displayed in a fixed stop state. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number is not determined to reach, and the effect display device 1600 does not reach the reach effect. Then, the effect is developed so that the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally deviated and the symbol is confirmed and stopped. The variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the game information such as the result of the big hit determination is obtained from the main control board 1310 and is referred to so that such a variation pattern of the decorative design can appear. In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the decorative pattern variation pattern to appear, and the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control is performed to change the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and to operate a movable member such as the after-behind movable effect unit 3100.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information for the operation button 410 and player operation information in the vicinity of the opening window, and can also perform control related to effects according to the information.

  Here, the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the operation information acquisition principle in the vicinity of the opening window. In addition to omitting unrelated members in explaining the operation information acquisition principle, These are shown schematically. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along arrow AA in FIG.

  In other words, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 in which the game area 5a in which the game ball flows and which is stored in the main body frame 4 is formed, and the game area 5a are visible. And a door frame 3 that has an open window and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective upright wall portion 33 erected along the outer periphery of the opening window so that light can be reflected at least on the inner surface thereof. It has been. The opening window is a portion on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192 in the through-hole 111.

  Here, the reflection standing wall 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflection standing wall 33 is formed by a lower reflection standing wall 338 formed by the lower dish unit base 323, a left reflection standing wall 538 formed by the left unit base 531, and a right unit base 551. The right reflective upright wall portion 568 is provided, and these members are arranged in a substantially U-shape along the outer peripheral edge of the open window (a mode in which no reflective upright wall portion is installed above the open window). It is configured by In the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right reflection standing wall portion 568, the inner side surfaces thereof are all substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). The light reflecting surface is provided.

  According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is provided among the reflection standing wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U shape. The portion (the upper side of the opening window) is “light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and as a result, a reflecting vertical wall portion It functions as a first part that makes it possible to “reflect at 33”, and “the light reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and outside the outer periphery of the opening window”. It will also serve as a second part that makes it possible to “be detected”.

  Furthermore, in the reflection standing wall 33 according to this embodiment, one reflection is performed across the inner side surfaces of three separate members (the lower reflection standing wall 338, the left reflection standing wall 538, and the right reflection standing wall 568). A structure to which a member 36 (for example, a reflection seal) is attached is adopted, and thereby the reflection performance as the reflection standing wall portion 33 is suitably ensured including the joints of three separate members.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a provided on the upper left side outside the outer periphery of the opening window in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 23). The inner space 3435a includes a left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a and a left outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35a. Note that the left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflection standing wall 338, the left reflection standing wall 538, and the right reflection standing wall 568, respectively, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side, allows light to travel toward the opening window side, and receives light from the opening window side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573, but in order to suppress fraud from the back of the speaker 573, it is between the opening window. A transmissive member 3436a designed so as to have extremely high transparency and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

  Further, the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is unitized with the left outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35a, and emits light toward a wide range at least on the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so that it can proceed.

  The left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a is unitized with the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33 to form the internal space 3435a. Incorporated. In this respect, in the internal space 3435a, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a, so that the disturbance from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a can be suppressed while the disturbance is suitably suppressed. The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer peripheral outside light detector 35a.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b provided on the upper right side outside the outer periphery of the opening window in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 23). In the internal space 3435b, a right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b and a right outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, like the internal space 3435a, the internal space 3435b includes the one specific virtual plane P at a position where it intersects with the lower reflective vertical wall 338, the left reflective vertical wall 538, and the right reflective vertical wall 568, respectively. And is opened as a space where only the opening window is provided so that light can travel toward the opening window, and light from the opening window can be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, but in order to suppress fraud from the back of the speaker 573, it is between the opening window. A transmissive member 3436b designed to have a very high transmittance and a very low influence on the light traveling direction is arranged.

  In addition, the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is unitized with the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35b, and emits light toward a wide range at least on the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so that it can proceed.

  The right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b is unitized with the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b, and can detect light from the side on which the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33, and is reflected from the reflective vertical wall portion 33 to become the internal space 3435b. Incorporated. In this regard, in the internal space 3435b, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b, so that the disturbance from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34b can be suppressed while disturbance is suitably suppressed. The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outside right outside light detecting portion 35b.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the region (3) surrounded by the lower reflective upright wall portion 338, the left reflective upright wall portion 538, and the right reflective upright wall portion 568 from the three directions by their height widths ( 120 is a special operation receiving portion 3333 that can detect an operation by the player, and the player's operation mode for the special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. Thus, the production control according to the determination can be executed.

  For example, when the player does not perform an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, the light irradiated in a wide angle range from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is not blocked by any physical object, and is reflected from the reflecting vertical wall portion 33. The reflected light from various angles at (a variety of angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) travels toward the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a. That is, in the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a, a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) that reflects light from various angles using an optical lens or the like. The special operation receiving unit 3333 outputs information indicating that no physical object is present to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  At this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b in a wide angle range is also not blocked by any physical object, and various angles (at least one specific virtual plane P on the specific virtual plane P) without being blocked by any physical object. Angle) to be reflected toward the right outer peripheral outside light detector 35b. That is, the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b also uses a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) to reflect light from various angles using an optical lens or the like. The special operation receiving unit 3333 outputs information indicating that no physical object is present to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  On the other hand, when the player performs an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the manner shown in FIG. 119, a part of the light emitted from the left outer periphery light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is a player's finger ( Only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range) becomes reflected light on the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the left outer peripheral outside light detection unit 35a. That is, in this case, the left outer periphery light emitting unit 35a is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the size of the physics in which direction as viewed from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  At this time, a part of light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting part 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and light directed in the blocked direction (angle range). Only the other light becomes reflected light at the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the right outer peripheral outside light detection portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P), and the right outer periphery outside light emitting unit 34b. By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the physical quantity of which direction in which direction when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the information from the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b are respectively obtained and analyzed, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 performs physical analysis. In addition to information on whether or not an object exists (whether an operation has been performed on the special operation receiving unit 3333), when a physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333, its coordinate position (x, y) and size It becomes possible to acquire information related to the situation. As will be described later, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, such information is periodically acquired. This allows the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the size of the physical object. An operation gesture such as a change can be determined, and an effect control corresponding to the determination is executed.

  Note that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, but are performed by an external unit that acquires information from the left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a and the right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis result from the external means, or the external control means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis results.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a and the light emission from the right outer periphery light emitting unit 34b are respectively blinked, and the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b is in an extinguished state. A certain period and a period in which the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a is in the off state and the right outer periphery light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state may be alternately generated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected. If the light is detected on the side of the external light detection unit 35b and analyzed based on such information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b do not interfere with each other. Accordingly, it is expected to obtain detection information with higher accuracy.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer periphery light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer periphery light emitting portion 34b are respectively blinked, and the left outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34b is in the off state. , A period in which the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a is in the off state and a right outer periphery light emitting unit 34b is in a light emitting state, and a left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is in an extinguished state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b is also in the off state. One cycle in which the periods in the extinguishing state occur sequentially may be repeated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected. If the detection is performed on the side of the external light detection unit 35b, the offset amount when the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a and the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 35a are in the off state is also detected and analyzed based on these information, The light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b do not interfere with each other, and the detected offset can be eliminated before determination can be made. It is expected to obtain high detection information.

  Further, visible light may be used as light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, in view of the fact that the light is being produced in various places, it is possible to use invisible light rays such as infrared rays, the disturbance from the effect light and the effect light. It is more desirable to suitably suppress adverse effects on

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. A first portion that makes it possible to “reflect the reflection standing wall portion 33”, and “light reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and outside the outer periphery of the opening window”. The second portion that makes it possible to “be detected” is provided as the same portion of the reflection standing wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. However, a plurality of areas where the light is allowed to travel between the outer periphery and the outer periphery of the opening window are provided with respect to the reflection standing wall 33, and the outer periphery light emitting section and the outer periphery light detection section are separately provided for these areas. And may be arranged respectively.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an upper opening, but the inner space 3435a and the inner space 3435b of the upper part of the opening window are formed. You may make it form the reflection standing wall part 33 also in the periphery of between. However, it is desirable to provide a direction in which the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b are opened downward in order to suppress disturbance due to direct light from illumination or the like. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a and the left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a, the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b, and the right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b are used to specially Although the operation in the operation receiving unit 3333 can be detected, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure that can detect an operation in the special operation receiving unit 3333 may be used. For example, the reflected light from the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a and the reflected light from the right outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35b are reflected on one outer periphery. The detection may be performed by the light detection unit, and the coordinates (x, y) and size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer-periphery light emitting unit 34 (the left outer-periphery light-emitting unit 34a and the right outer-periphery light-emitting unit 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window As the reflected light from the reflection standing wall 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light at least on the inner surface thereof, the outer-peripheral light detection unit 35 (the outer periphery on the left side) is provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window. By detecting the external light detection unit 35a and the right outer peripheral external light detection unit 35b), the vicinity of the opening window functions as the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 produces an effect according to the operation mode of the player. It can be executed.

  Further, the outer periphery outside light detection unit 35 is not disposed in a dew state, but is disposed in the inner space 3435 of the side base 572 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. It has also been described above that when the light is detected by the unit 35, the effect light that can be a disturbance can be suitably excluded.

  However, even if it is such a structure, the light from the outer periphery light emission part 34 was reflected by the reflection standing wall part 33 from the part opened toward the opening window side of the internal space 3435. Since the effect light can be taken in addition to the light, there is a concern that such effect light may become a disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer-periphery light detection unit 35.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame side light emitting unit L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is first on the one specific virtual plane P. It is made to arrange | position in the position which cannot irradiate the light which progresses. More specifically, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving portion 3333, and the light transmittance is extremely low (or 0) with respect to the base portion BL1. Is attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 is wider than the frame side light emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). As a result, light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 is not easily taken into the internal space 3435.

  Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decoration base portion 551a provided by a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side And a second right decoration base portion 551b provided by a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right decoration base portion 551a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 can contribute as effect light, whereas the second right decoration The base portion 551b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, the second right decorative base portion 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the player side through the first right decorative base portion 551a. The right decorative base portion 551a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably suppressing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 from traveling to the opening window. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decoration base portion 551b. However, only one of them is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  On the other hand, the frame side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2 having a very low light transmittance (or 0). It is in the position which can irradiate the light which advances on the specific virtual plane P. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is provided with the opening window. Therefore, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  However, since the reflection member 36 has a low width, there is a concern that light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member and heads toward the opening window. Therefore, even in the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment, the first left decorative base portion 531a provided by a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side A second left decorative base portion 531b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left decorative base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as effect light. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, the second left decorative base portion 531b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel to the player side through the first left decorative base portion 531a. The left decorative base portion 531a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably suppressing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 from traveling to the opening window. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b. These members do not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, the effect light is hardly taken into the internal space 3435 as described above. When the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b are not provided, the reflection member 36 is not provided with the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a. Rather than being attached to the outer surface (surface that can be contacted from the outside), if attached to the inner surface (surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a, from the outside It is expected to avoid the deterioration of the reflection performance due to the direct physical contact. In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting part 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting part 34a, the right outer peripheral light emitting part 34b) passes through the first left decorative base part 531a and the first right decorative base part 551a and then the above. The light is reflected by the reflecting member 36, passes through the first left decorative base portion 531 a and the first right decorative base portion 551 a again, and is taken into the internal space 3435.

  When the second left decorative base portion 531b is provided in the left unit base 531 and the second right decorative base portion 551b is provided in the right unit base 551, the reflecting member 36 is omitted, and the second The left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b themselves may function as a reflection member using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, the effect light from the frame side light emitting portions L1 and L2 is disturbed only by including the reflecting member (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b). While being suitably suppressed, the detection accuracy by the outside ambient light detection unit 35 can be suitably ensured by the reflected light from the reflecting member (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b). Become.

  The peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment can obtain information such as the coordinates and size of a physical object located near the aperture window by using the operation information acquisition principle near the aperture window. As a result, a more dynamic and highly flexible operability using the entire area of the opening window (approximately the entire area visible in the front view of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving portion 3333. It is possible to realize a performance suitable for this.

  Hereinafter, operability and performance that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving portion 3333 will be described. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for explaining the operability and the rendering that can be realized by using the special operation receiving portion 3333, and are related in explaining the operability and the rendering. In addition to omitting members that are not present, these are also schematically shown for related members.

  121 shows a special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed in front, and various effect members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 in front. Is schematically shown. In addition, the arrow in the figure simply shows the movable range of various movable bodies among effect members A to E.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, the back side across the glass plate 192 can contribute to the effect according to the result of the big hit determination. As members, a movable body A1, A2, B, C, a display portion D, and a board surface light emitting portion E provided so as to be able to emit light at a portion where the game ball can flow down or at other portions are disposed. . The arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

  Note that these members are shown as examples for explaining the technology of the present application, and do not necessarily match the embodiment described above with reference to FIG. Basically, however, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are “movable effect unit 3100 after lower back, left movable effect unit 3200, upper left movable effect unit 3300, upper and lower movable effect unit 3400, The display portion D corresponds to the “effect display device 1600”, and the board surface light emitting portion E corresponds to “various decorations provided in the game board 5”. This corresponds to “various LEDs mounted on a substrate”. In addition, the board surface light emission part E does not necessarily need to be provided in the game board 5, For example, the member (light guide plate etc.) provided in the front side rather than the game board 5 may be sufficient.

  Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display unit D on which the effect display according to the result of the big hit determination is performed is positioned as the target of the operation effect, and the display unit D of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is viewed from the front. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate area and this is detected as a physical object, it can be controlled so that an effect change corresponding to the operation appears on the display unit D.

  Hereinafter, an example of effect control in the case where an effect change is caused on the display unit D by an operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described.

[First Operation Control Mode for Display Unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (a), when the first performance condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect and displayed. The specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the part D. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation (strictly on the glass plate 192) with respect to somewhere in the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. If a finger or the like is required in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it is not always necessary to touch it))), and when this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. The reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated, an effect change is caused in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed by the type of the effect change that has occurred.

  At this time, when producing an effect change based on an operation performed on somewhere in the first coordinate area Z1 in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect change is at least displayed on the display unit D. It is desirable to generate it in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to view the first display area in front view with his / her finger or the like, an effect change occurs at least in the first display area. In the first display area until the first display area is visually recognized from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) instead of shifting their fingers or from a front view. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the change in production. Alternatively, the player keeps his finger on the first coordinate area Z1 and advances the game without confirming the effect change in the first display area, or is positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to select a way of enjoying such as having a third person who has not confirmed the effect change in the first display area, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that if no operation by the player is detected after the specific operation instruction image S1 appears and until a predetermined period elapses (specific timing comes), the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed. In addition, the reception of effects for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 may be generated, or an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 is generated. You may make it complete | finish the production reception with respect to the 1st coordinate area | region Z1.

[Second Operation Control Mode for Display Unit D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving portion Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed in front view, “second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display section D” and “third display of the display section D” In addition to setting (controlling) both the area and the third coordinate area Z3 facing the area, the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display unit D, and the third display area The third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, in a predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the special operation receiver 3333 in the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3. An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly, a finger or the like may be provided in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is not necessarily required)) is performed as a physical object. When detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the reception of the effects in the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated, and the display unit D A specific effect (effect according to the selected side (coordinate region side where the physical object is detected)) is generated, and the expectation degree for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect is Thereby enabling executing the instigation that may be controlled.

  It should be noted that no operation by the player was detected until a predetermined period has elapsed (a specific timing has arrived) after both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 appear. In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is ended. ing. At this time, a specific effect that appears when an effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or a specific effect may not be generated. However, when a specific effect that appears when an effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, an operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is received prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable that a display (such as an effect) that is generated when the operation is performed, or a display (such as an effect) that is generated when an operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the effect on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while neither the second coordinate area Z2 nor the third coordinate area Z3 is operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest without knowing what production is being executed.

  Moreover, in the 1st operation control aspect with respect to the display part D, and the 2nd operation control aspect, not only the production | generation reception with respect to 1st coordinate area Z1, 2nd coordinate area Z2, and 3rd coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but the same. Within the period, the same effect reception may be permitted for other operation means such as the operation button 410.

  For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first production condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate region Z1 and the operation button 410 can be produced and the specific operation instruction image S1 is received. Even when a pressing operation (button switch detection) is performed on the operation button 410 instead of an operation (physical object detection) on the first coordinate area Z1 during the predetermined period in which is displayed The operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, the reception of the effects of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and an effect change is caused in the display portion D. Expectation for the result of the big hit determination is caused by the type of the effect change that has occurred. It is possible to execute a control whose degree can be suggested.

  Even when an operation (physical object detection) is performed on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the reception of the effects of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated. An effect change is generated in the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination is enabled by the type of the effect change that has occurred.

  Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second presentation condition is satisfied, the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 can all be received. To do. Then, in a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the operation is not an operation (physical object detection) for either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3. When a pressing operation on the button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. The display is switched to and from the third selected image indicating that the image is in the state of being. Then, when either of the second selection image and the third selection image is displayed, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the selection image A display (effect or the like) that can be grasped that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where the symbol appears is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are selected. All the images (second selection image and third selection image) are not displayed, and the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 is ended. After that, a specific effect (selected side effect) is generated in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

  It should be noted that, within the predetermined period, an operation for another operation means (operation for accepting any determination) can be accepted, and a selection image appears when there is an operation for the other operation means. In addition to generating a display (effect) that enables the user to grasp that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side has been accepted, the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection) Both the image and the third selection image) may be hidden, and the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and another operation means may be terminated. After that, a specific effect (selected side effect) is generated in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

  In addition, as long as it is within the predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate can be used regardless of whether the second selection image or the third selection image appears. The region Z3 can accept an effect. When an operation on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, it does not matter which of the second selected image and the third selected image appears, The display (effect etc.) on the side where the reception is made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image, third selection image) are not displayed. Thus, the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and further operation means is terminated. At this time, an operation is detected prior to hiding all of the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image, third selection image). Switching display may be performed so that the selected image (second selection image, third selection image) on the other side appears. After that, a specific effect (selected side effect) is generated in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, not only is it allowed to receive an effect on the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410, The same production reception is possible. In this regard, in the second operation control mode, when the same effect can be received but the operation on the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is performed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate By only accepting a single operation (physical object detection) for the area Z3, it is possible to generate an effect on the side according to the preference of the player. That is, when other operation means are used, “the side according to the preference by the player until a predetermined period after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed. Can not be generated "or" perform at least two operations using a plurality of operation means ", but when a specific operation receiving portion 3333 is used, The display mode according to the player's preference can be made to appear with only a few operations (one time in this production example), so that more complicated performance can be realized with simple operability. Expected.

  In addition, while providing such an efficient operability, at the same time providing an operability that can achieve a desired operation by performing at least two operations using a plurality of operation means, The player can worry about which one should be selected as the desired operation while performing the operation in the process stage until reaching the desired operation. That is, in this case, while performing the operation in the process stage until reaching the desired operation, it becomes easy to imagine the production situation after the selection, and it is troubled which operation should be performed with a margin within a predetermined period. Will be able to. As described above, since the player can selectively use the operation means with different number of required operations depending on whether the player is ready to make a decision or is in trouble, the gaming interest can be maintained. It becomes like this.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, the display unit D is the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, so that an unprecedented effect can be realized. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving unit 3333 has a larger operation reception range in front view than the display unit D (the coordinate range to be detected is that of the glass plate 192). By providing an effect using such a special relationship, it is possible to realize a more dynamic and highly flexible operability and an appropriate performance. .

[Third Operation Control Mode for Display Unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 123 (a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect and displayed. The specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the part D, and the specific image that prompts the user to operate to move the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B in the other display area of the display part D indicate.

  Then, during a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation with respect to the glass plate 192) on the fourth coordinate region Z4 in the special operation receiving unit 3333 ( Strictly speaking, it is sufficient if there is a finger or the like in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it))) and this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. 123 (b). The coordinate area in which the production can be accepted is not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display unit D, but a large fifth coordinate area including at least the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display unit D. Change the setting to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 of this example is opposed to the movable body B provided outside the display unit D from the coordinate area facing the fourth display area (not necessarily coincident with the fourth coordinate area Z). Up to the coordinate area to be set, and is set in such a manner as to straddle the movable body B, the display unit D, and the panel light emitting unit E.

  At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that an operation has been performed anywhere in the fourth coordinate area Z4 in the special operation receiving unit 3333. Or may be displayed in a vibration mode) so that the specific operation target image S4 can be recognized as being movable by an operation by the player.

  That is, in the third operation control mode, the coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5 with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is retained. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display unit D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display unit D, and the production on the movable body B is started. Realization of directing.

  Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and moved in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object, and the Control that moves the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the detected movement of the physical object is enabled. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the middle of the movement in which the physical object has not yet moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B. The inside of the display part D is moved so as to follow the movement in the front view.

  More specifically, with a physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiver 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the fifth coordinate area Z5 to FIG. 124 (a). In the peripheral control board 1510, the specific operation target image S4 is moved in the display unit D so as to follow such movement of the physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is located at the position shown in FIG. 124A, if the specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the display area facing the position, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed. A part of the display portion D protrudes from the display portion D, and the whole cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed only on a portion that can be displayed on the display portion D, and the portion that protrudes from the display portion D is present. Is controlled so that the corresponding part of the panel light emitting part E emits light. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the portion where the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the board surface light emitting unit E Thus, control is performed to increase the number of portions corresponding to the light emitting region.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to express a state in which the specific operation target image S4 on the display unit D is about to jump out of the display unit D by an operation by the player. More dynamic and more flexible operability that does not fit in this single unit and performance suitable for this will be realized.

  In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124A, a physical object such as a player's finger is positioned at a coordinate position facing the display unit D in the fifth coordinate area Z5. In spite of being placed, effect control is performed not only on the display unit D but also on a member (panel light emitting unit E) different from the display unit D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the plurality of members in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement has appeared. A performance suitable for dynamic operability can be suitably realized.

  When a physical object such as a player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124 (a) in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the physical object is not the display unit D but the game board 5 (Here, it is in a state of being placed at a coordinate position facing the board light emitting portion E). However, in this case as well, not all of the specific operation target image S4 are suddenly hidden and only the panel light emitting unit E is caused to emit light, but the specific operation is performed as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D. Control is performed so that the portion of the target image S4 displayed on the display portion D is reduced, and the portion corresponding to the light emitting area of the panel light emitting portion E is increased. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated from the coordinate position facing the display unit D by a specific distance, an effect (here, light emission) is produced only on the panel light emitting unit E of the display unit D and the panel surface light emitting unit E. As a result, an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display unit D can be expressed.

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 124 (b), the peripheral control board 1510 has a position facing the physical object. The board surface light emitting section E and the movable body B located in are controlled to emit light. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-described effect control performed between the display unit D and the panel light emitting unit E is performed between the panel surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B. Like to do. More specifically, when a physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light emitting unit E) approaches a predetermined distance from the coordinate area facing the movable body B, the physical object In spite of being in the coordinate area facing the board light emitting part E, the effect control is performed not only on the board light emitting part E but also on a member (movable body B) different from the panel light emitting part E. I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved within the coordinate area of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing both the panel light emitting portion E and the movable body B, an effect corresponding to the movement (here, the display) It becomes easy to recognize that a specific operation target image S4) that has moved out of the part D has appeared (moved), and thereby it is possible to suitably realize a performance suitable for dynamic operability. .

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the specific operation target image S4 as the movable body B. It is determined that the operation as if it has been moved to the appropriate position, and the condition reception in the third coordinate control mode is satisfied, and the acceptance of the effect on the fifth coordinate region Z5 is terminated. In addition, a display capable of recognizing that the condition in the third operation control mode (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) is satisfied is displayed on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Control to start production is executed. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, as an effect of causing the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined manner or an effect of operating the movable body B in a predetermined manner. So that the degree of expectation for the result of can be suggested.

  In addition, when the physical object moves out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 while the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the third operation control mode, a finger is removed from the special operation receiving unit 3333. It is desirable to redo from the state shown in FIG. 123 (a). That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically acquires the position information of the physical object periodically regardless of the execution state of the effect, and thereby the physical object moves within the fifth coordinate area Z5. Information indicating that the user has moved, information indicating that the user has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

  Further, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object. However, the specific operation target image S4 is not limited to this. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

  Further, the fifth coordinate region Z5 may be the entire coordinate region of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Also, if there is no portion that can be rendered to suggest that the specific operation target image S4 exists on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, it is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. You may make it perform the production | presentation expression which suggests that specific operation target image S4 exists in a site | part.

  Further, in this example, a board surface light emitting part E capable of effect presentation (light emission) is placed between the display part D and the movable body B, but the board surface light emitting part E is not necessarily provided. Good. That is, in this case, after the specific operation target image S4 is no longer displayed on the display unit D, until the physical object is moved to the coordinate position (or a nearby coordinate position) facing the movable body B, the player Will continue the operation while holding in the head an image in which the specific operation target image S4 is moving.

  Further, the display unit D displays a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and indicates in which position the specific operation target image S4 exists according to the movement of the physical object. You may make it perform the effect display suggested by.

  In addition, although each coordinate area | region Z1-Z5 is described in the figure of FIGS. 122-125, actually, a player cannot visually recognize.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in which the effect operation according to the result of the big hit determination is performed are also positioned as the targets of the operation effect. When the player performs an operation on the coordinate area overlapping the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in the front view of the operation receiving portion 3333 and this is detected as a physical object, an effect operation according to the operation appears. Control is possible. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate mode (speed, amount of movement) while selecting any one of a plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth Operation Control Mode for Movable Body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 126 (a), when the fourth effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate area Z6 that faces a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect. At this time, a specific display image appears on the display unit D, or the movable body can be recognized so that the player can recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 can be accepted for production to operate the movable body C. It is desirable to emit C in the first mode (for example, flash in a flash mode) or vibrate.

  Then, during a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be able to receive an effect, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (specifically, a special operation) If there is a finger or the like in the operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it))), and this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to receive an effect as shown in FIG. 126 (b). The coordinate area to be set is changed not to the sixth coordinate area Z6 but to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C. Here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. When moved to a coordinate position facing the part, an effect is achieved in which the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

  Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 126 (b) is reached, a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that makes it possible to recognize. In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the movable body C emits light in the second mode (for example, light emission in the normal mode).

  However, from the player's side, the movable body C does not know what movable range CT is provided, and the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 after the physical object is detected. There is a concern that even if the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be properly performed. As a result, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves out of the seventh coordinate area Z7 even though there is an intention to perform an operation along the movable range CT of the movable body C (a special operation receiving portion) (Including the case where the finger is released from 3333), the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is re-executed against the player's intention, and the gaming interest may be lowered.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and (b), the seventh coordinate region Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the control target. The sixth coordinate region Z6 is set in an enlarged range for at least the first distance in all directions in the front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. I am going to do that.

  According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, the direction shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C. When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the production is accepted (even though the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is not redone). Since the phenomenon occurs, the operation can be performed by estimating the movable range CT of the movable body C through confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, within the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions (first positions (shown in FIG. 126 (b) ( Original position), second position shown in FIG. 126 (c), third position shown in FIG. 127 (a), and fourth position (end position) shown in FIG. 127 (b)) Control to be executed. Then, on this, the seventh coordinate area Z7 includes a first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position), and a second drive coordinate area including a portion facing the second position. Z7-2 can be classified into a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position. By determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate area corresponding to the determination. Control can be executed.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position) in the movable range CT is controlled. The movable range C is set as a range that extends at least by the first distance from the sixth coordinate area Z6 in the left, right, and lower directions except the upper side in which the movable range CT extends.

  According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object remains within the single first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Since the movable body C does not move, the movable body C continues to stay at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 where the physical object is detected. Become. In other words, in this case, the phenomenon that the movable body C does not move occurs even though the player's operation has been accepted (even though the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) has not been redone). Therefore, it becomes possible to perform an operation by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object is movable. When the body C is moved in the direction in which the movable range CT extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object only needs to move a second distance shorter than the first distance. The second drive coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126 (c) is reached from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. That is, in this case, based on the detection of the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 (FIG. 126 (FIG. From b)), it moves to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 including a portion facing the second position in the movable range CT also has a vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. As for the left and right directions orthogonal to each other, there is a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the up-down direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the left-right direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is The movable body C does not move and corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without being moved in the single second drive coordinate area Z7-2. Will continue to stay at the second position. In other words, in this case, the phenomenon that the movable body C does not move occurs even though the player's operation has been accepted (even though the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) has not been redone). Therefore, it becomes possible to perform an operation by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  In addition, since the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is set so as to extend to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)). In this case, after a physical object such as a finger is detected, a criterion that is determined to be appropriate as an operation for moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C is relaxed. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving a physical object while guessing this without knowing what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. It will be possible to maintain interest.

  When the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. You may make it light-emit by the aspect (for example, green) different from the light emission aspect (for example, blue). At this time, when a physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (movable If the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts to move toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2), the player's operation has been properly received. It becomes possible to recognize from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress an irritated feeling due to a behavioral delay of the movable body that cannot be avoided in response to a quick operation by a player's finger or the like.

  In addition, when a physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control to move to the latest detection position is performed.

  Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126 (c)) is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like, and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (FIG. When detected within a)), the movable body C corresponds to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2. It will move to the 3rd position (Drawing 127 (a)).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position in the movable range CT is the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. As for the left and right directions orthogonal to each other, there is a range that extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

  That is, as described above, when a movable body that does not have a technique capable of instructing the operation direction is used as an operation target, unlike the display means, this is performed without knowing what movable range is provided. You must move the physics object while guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the reception of the production is performed up to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C in the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate region Z7-2. As described above, by expanding the range, the criterion that is determined to be appropriate for the operation when moving the movable body C along the movable range CT is relaxed.

  However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6. The deviation from the movable range CT tends to increase as the distance from the distance increases. Therefore, in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)), the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second drive region C7-1 and By having a range that extends over a longer distance than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 is increased, and the deviation from the movable range CT is gradually increased. However, this can be accepted as an appropriate performance operation. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while guessing this without knowing what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that does not oppose the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

  When the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position. You may make it light-emit by the light emission mode (for example, red) different from any of the light emission mode (for example, green) when it was located in. Further, when a physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C finishes moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (movable body C (When starting to move toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3), the light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green).

  And, for the same reason, the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is further leftward and rightward orthogonal to the up-down direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends further than the third drive coordinate region Z7-3. It has a range that extends over a long distance. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's operation of a finger or the like, and the fourth drive coordinate area Z7- 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)) to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127 (b)). In addition, if a physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by a player's finger operation or the like and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, it is movable. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the big hit determination. In such a case, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. When the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the player's operation with a finger or the like, the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 ( b)) Expectation (specific result is obtained) depending on whether an effect that moves to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) appears without moving to the fourth position. (It may be a definite one).

  In the peripheral control board 1510, a physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by a player's finger operation or the like and detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. In such a case, assuming that the condition in the fourth operation control mode is satisfied, the effect reception for the seventh coordinate region Z7 is ended. When it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the movable body C is set in the area where the effect can be accepted. Will be controlled to move to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the movable body C is set in a region where the production can be accepted. Control to move C to the first position is performed.

  However, at this time, even when it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, the movable body C temporarily moves downward (the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127). (B)) even if it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, or the movable body C is temporarily moved upward. It is desirable to show the moving movement (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b))) in order to improve the game entertainment.

  When the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position. The light emission mode (for example, green) and the light emission mode (for example, red) at the third position are different from the light emission mode (for example, red). However, unlike the case of the first to third positions, the timing is not the time when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but a timing later than that (movable body C). It is desirable to make it appear after the timing at which it is possible to definitely grasp the movement from the first movement to the fourth position. Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, it is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is preferable that the light emission is terminated after a later timing (a timing at which it is possible to definitely grasp that the movable body C does not move to the fourth position).

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs control to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed after moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is ended.

  By the way, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body is movable from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit. C can be moved freely. For example, when the physical object is moved back to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 after the movable body C is moved to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)), the peripheral control board 1510 performs the first drive. Based on the physical object detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) to the first position (FIG. 126 (b)). . Further, when the physical object is moved back to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 after the movable body C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)), the peripheral control board 1510 performs the second drive. Based on the physical object detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)). It will be.

  According to such a configuration, as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)), a driving mode in which the movable body C is moved up and down in small increments is selected by the player. It will be possible to make it appear according to the player's preference, and it will be possible to perform only for the time that suits the player's preference, so that it will be possible to manipulate the “between” until the final result appears in the production, improving the gaming interest It is expected to plan. In addition, after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the effect reception for the fourth operation control mode is ended, and the movable body C cannot be freely operated.

  It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is set after the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing comes). When the physical object is not properly detected, the effect reception for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 may be generated, or the movable body C may be generated without causing such behavior. Control may be performed so as to be positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126 (b)).

  Further, in the fourth operation control mode according to this explanatory example, the first to third positions (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit. In the meantime, the movable body C can be moved freely, but instead, within the range of the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) of the movable range CT. You may make it the expectation degree of the big hit suggested so that it is located in the upper side become high. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different jackpot expectations based on the result of the jackpot determination, and positions (first position to fourth position) defined by the selected effect pattern. The movable body C is controlled so as to be operable. At this time, the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. Sometimes, an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position (a behavior to come and go) may appear.

  Moreover, in the 1st-3rd operation control aspect with respect to the display part D, when making image S1-S4 receivable production | presentation, when generating coordinate area Z1-4 larger than these images S1-S4 by front view. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, the sixth coordinate region Z6 smaller than the movable body C is generated in front view when the movable body C is allowed to receive an effect. In other words, the movable body often includes a part having a relatively large amount of movement and a part having a relatively small amount of movement, for example, producing a part having a relatively small amount of movement. It is desirable to exclude from the object of reception in order to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. On the other hand, in the display unit, when trying to set the coordinate area in accordance with the size of the image that can accept the production, it is required to make a large image in order to favorably maintain the operability. Since there is a concern that the balance with the display image may be deteriorated, it is desirable that the size of the image that can be accepted for presentation be set independently from the set range of the coordinate area.

  However, when control is performed to detect the movement of the physical object in a specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and to produce an effect corresponding thereto. For example, the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 moves and the fourth drive coordinate area does not pass through the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 or the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. It is also assumed that there is a situation where a sudden detection occurs at Z7-4. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is set as the detection target in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and then the left hand is set as the detection target in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, it should be determined that the physical object has not moved, and an effect (such as movement of the movable body C) corresponding to the movement should not be executed.

  In this respect, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms) is being executed. Within the timer process, the information from the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b are respectively acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. A specific coordinate region is analyzed by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) pieces of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is completed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described above. It is determined whether or not the physical object is properly moving in (for example, the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4), and control data for the actuator is determined according to the determination result. Set. Then, in the interrupt process every 1 ms, the control for driving the movable body C based on the control data set in this way is performed, so that the movable body C moves from the physical object to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. From the time when the movement has not been completed, the movement of the physical object follows the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 in front view. Note that the coordinate information is stored in chronological order in which the coordinate positions are acquired.

  For example, even if a physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the inside of the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 The coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 at the timing before the physical object is detected in step S3 and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. If there is no coordinate information indicating that it has been detected, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and control is performed so that the movable body C is not operated.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. The physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. 4 is detected in chronological order, for example, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C does not move. Thereby, only when there is an appropriate operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, an appropriate effect can be made to appear.

  In the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C depending on whether a physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4. In the movable range CT of the movable body C, control is performed to move the movable body C depending on whether movement of a physical object having a vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is detected. It may be. That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in time series.

  In addition, regarding the setting control of the coordinate area, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C used in the fourth operation control mode, for example, in the above-described third operation control mode, You may make it apply with respect to image S4.

  Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (production reception) regarding the movement after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not ended yet. While being performed, control is performed to move the production target (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of the physical object that has already been detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a performance as if the player himself has created a production, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  By the way, in the 1st operation control mode, the 2nd operation control mode, the 3rd operation control mode, and the 4th operation control mode, production reception to special operation receiving part 3333 is coordinates set at that time Limited to area. However, the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 itself is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position and movement of the physical object based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, one of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed, Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating a control example of the physical object detection information analysis process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

  That is, the peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not it is in the operation effect reception period that occurs based on the fact that the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied (step S3301). As a result, when it is in the operation effect reception period, as described above, based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received. And if a physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted, the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis results for such effects, control (re-setting or termination) regarding the coordinate area where the effects can be accepted, control for causing effect changes to the effect objects such as display images and movable bodies, The control for maintaining the effect state is performed (step S3303). As a result of the processing in step S3302, even if no physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received, control (re-setting, (End), control for returning a production target such as a display image or a movable body to the original position (for example, control for moving the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126A) may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S3301 that there is no operation effect reception period in which a coordinate area where the effect can be received with respect to the special operation receiving unit 3333 is set, the analysis content for the effect described above Analysis is performed with contents different from (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided so as to face the entire area of the game board 5. Accordingly, in order to illegally facilitate the winning of the game ball, the act of placing a magnet at the coordinate position facing the various winning openings in the special operation receiving portion 3333 or the wire from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192 It can be assumed that an act of destroying a speaker that makes an intrusion and emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud is performed.

  Therefore, in the process of step S3312, an analysis is performed as to whether there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. I am doing so. For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333. When a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the movement mode and size of the physical object are detected. Is analyzed whether it matches the movement mode or size that can appear when fraudulent activity is performed. If it is determined that there is a possibility that fraud is being conducted as a result of the analysis for fraud countermeasures, an external output indicating that the fraud is being performed is performed, an alarm sound or a warning light is output. Control is performed such that fraud countermeasures are performed (step S3313). If it is not determined that there is a possibility that fraud is being performed, control is performed so that such fraud countermeasures are not performed (step S3313). ).

  As such an analysis procedure for fraud countermeasures (step S3312), for example, when a physical object is first detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as an analysis reference position ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range including the analysis reference position and extending from the analysis reference position by a predetermined distance is set, and the detected physical object is within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) To stay on (physical objects hardly move). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some illegal act has been performed in the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method for determining that there is. At this time, if the size of the physical object is a size that cannot be cheated (such as an extremely thin shape), the cheating is performed even if such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility of being. As a result, it is possible to suppress false notifications when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

  According to such a configuration, when it is in the operation effect reception period, even if any action is performed, it is not determined as an illegal action, and the analysis is performed only as the effect and the result of the analysis In contrast, if the operation control is not in the operation effect reception period, any action is determined as an analysis target of fraud, and control for fraud countermeasures according to the result of the analysis may be performed. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs and is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, depending on the production situation, It can be regarded as a staging act and cause a specific staging change, or it can be regarded as a fraudulent act and be misreported. In this way, by using one detection information for different purposes (in this case, production purpose and fraud countermeasure purpose) according to the situation of the game and the production, more purposes can be achieved with less detection information. Can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

  In this explanation example, when there is no operation effect reception period that occurs based on the fact that a specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is satisfied, no effect change is caused by an operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333. Although described as a thing, even when it is not in the operation effect reception period (always), the display image is changed by detecting the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333, or the movable body is caused to emit light and move. Also good. However, in this case, when it is not in the operation effect reception period, in addition to determining any act as an analysis target of fraudulent activity, it is also determined as an analysis target of the act and performing control according to the results of these determinations, respectively. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333, both the production change and the fraud notification can appear.

  Also, in the middle of monitoring whether the physical object stays within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a specific performance condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is satisfied. If the operation effect acceptance period occurs based on this, monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) without ending the fraud countermeasure analysis processing, It is desirable to continue the operation after the operation effect reception period occurs. That is, in this case, during the operation effect reception period, in addition to performing the analysis process for the effect and the control according to the result, whether the physical object remains in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Monitoring is continued, and fraudulent notification is performed depending on the result of the monitoring.

  By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first production period in which the production reception related to the first production event (for example, the production of moving the movable body) is allowed, the operation means different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 ( For example, the operation button 410) may be controlled to further generate a second effect period in which an effect reception regarding a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) is allowed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), at timing t1, the special operation receiving unit 3333 is allowed to receive an effect (panel operation reception) regarding the first effect event (for example, an effect of moving the movable body). Assume that the first performance period has occurred. Note that in this first effect period, until the timing t2 when the first reception time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period, the special operation receiving unit 3333 has started moving the physical object. Control that moves the movable body in a manner corresponding to at least the moving direction and the moving amount of the physical object that has already been detected (analyzed) while detection (analysis) relating to movement has not been completed and is still being continued. (For example, control for moving a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of the physical object) can be executed.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the specific effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the first effect period is generated and is continued without being ended yet. In addition, the second effect in which the effect reception (button operation reception) related to the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image) is allowed in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333. It is possible to execute control for setting an effect pattern or a notice effect that is determined to generate a period.

  That is, in this case, when the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the operation button 410 accepts the effect reception (button operation reception) related to the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image). The control for generating the second production period is performed. And when operation with respect to the operation button 410 is received before the timing t12 when the 2nd reception time passed after the 2nd production period generate | occur | produces in this way, the said 2nd production period will be complete | finished at that time. Let Alternatively, if the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted before the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period ends when the timing t12 arrives.

  According to such a configuration, the first reception period in which the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is allowed to receive the production related to the first production event, and the production reception related to the second production event. However, both the second production period allowed by the second operation part (in this case, the operation button 410) occur simultaneously (timing t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129 (a)). Moreover, in the above-described configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period that occurs later than the first effect period is ended earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, whether the operation is interrupted and the second operation part is operated even if the first operation part is being operated? Therefore, it is required to operate the first operation part and the second operation part in different modes at the same time, and it is possible to provide an unprecedented presentation performance operability and suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest. Expected.

  In order to suitably realize such performance operability, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the production reception related to the second production event (the production on the side finished in a relatively short period of time) The reception is performed when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (finite amount of operation) is performed with the second operation part (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second effect event (for example, an effect operation that changes the display image) without requiring any operation thereafter. For example, when one pressing operation is detected with respect to the operation button 410, the second effect period ends before the timing t12 arrives, and after that, no operation is required and the effect changes to the display image. This is the case for the control that causes the problem.

  On the other hand, with respect to the production reception related to the first production event (the production reception on the side that is terminated after a relatively long time), at least until the second production period is over and further thereafter. Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operation for one operation part, the production reception for the first production event is continued without ending, and each time the operation on the first operation part is performed while the operation is being continued, It is desirable to perform control that reflects the change in performance according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without terminating the effect reception according to the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object, and thus the physical object This corresponds to control that repeatedly executes a process of moving the movable body to the latest coordinate position analyzed each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms).

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation for the first operation part is interrupted when the second effect period occurs behind the first effect period, the operation opportunity for the first operation part is lost. Since it can be suitably ensured that the game is not interrupted, a decrease in gaming interest due to the interruption is suppressed. In addition, if the second operation part is operated after the operation on the first operation part is interrupted, the second effect period can be terminated at a relatively early stage, and thereafter the operation on the second operation part is performed. Since the production change (second production event) corresponding to the operation occurs without requiring the operation, the operation on the first operation part can be resumed at a relatively early stage. This is suitably ensured for an operation opportunity for one operation site.

  In this case, in the situation where the operation on the first operation part is resumed, an effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation part is just started, and the first operation It is possible to generate a special production situation in which the second production event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, “a production event in which the size of the specific display image changes when an operation is performed on the second operation part is generated, and when the operation on the first operation part is performed, the specific display image reaches the specific position. If it is set to affect (change) the aspect of the production target of the second production event as the first production event, such as “to make a moving production event occur” In a special production situation, the second production event can be enjoyed while changing the aspect of the production target of the second production event by an operation on the first operation part. High operability and performance suitable for this are realized.

  Here, as an example of influencing (changing) the aspect of the production target of the second production event when an operation is performed on the first operation part, for example, production of the second production event To change at least one of the moving amount, moving direction, moving speed, light emission mode (light color, traveling direction, light amount, etc.), size, or shape of a target (display image, movable body, etc.) However, the present invention is not limited to these, and any object may be used as long as it can have some influence on the effect object (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.) of the second effect event. That is, while the target of the operation effect for the first operation part and the target of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same effect target, an aspect of the effect (for example, the first operation part) The size may be changed in the operation effect for, and the display position may be changed in the operation effect for the second operation part). Moreover, about the 1st production period, it does not necessarily need to be set as finite time, and after the 2nd production period ends, operation with respect to the 1st operation part is received, and 2nd production What is necessary is just to be able to perform an operation on the first operation part when an event occurs.

  Moreover, in the period where both the 1st production period and the 2nd production period occur simultaneously, it is related with the 2nd production event among the production reception regarding the 1st production event, and the production reception concerning the 2nd production event. Only for the production reception, the display for prompting the operation instruction and the display for suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second production period are preferably encouraged to interrupt the operation on the first operation part. Desirable above.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to suitably realize such a relationship of effects, there is a case where control is performed to generate the second effect period after the first effect period. Control is performed such that the first production period is not generated behind the second production period.

  In the example described above, both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously. However, when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the first effect period is changed to the first effect period. The first production period may be generated again when the second production period ends. Even in this case, it is possible to realize the above-described operability and performance so as to affect the aspect of the production target of the second production event when an operation is performed on the first operation part. Is possible.

  In the example described above, each time an operation is performed on the first operation part, the control is performed to reflect the change in effect according to the operation. However, a plurality of operations are performed on the first operation part. If there is, control for reflecting the change in performance according to the operation may be performed.

  In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the following various operation reception effects can be realized by appropriately using the control method according to each of the above-described examples.

[Example 1 using special operation receiver 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the effect pattern of the effect example 1 (the variation pattern of the effect example 1) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of the effect example 1 is displayed on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decoration pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is set to be capable of receiving the effects within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears. An operation effect period to be controlled is generated.

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 determined to operate the movable body A1 and the effect example 1 determined to operate the movable body A2. Production pattern A2. However, the movable body A1 is provided so as to be visible from the player side on the front side of the game board 5, whereas the movable body A2 is difficult to view from the player side behind the game board 5. And provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if any production pattern A1, A2 is performed as the production pattern of the production example 1, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. In FIG. 5, a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, even if any of the production patterns A1 and A2 is performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light and suggest that a coordinate area (not shown) opposite to this should be operated. ing.

  Then, when such a slide operation is properly received while the production pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 follows the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (b). Control is performed so as to start the leftward movement of the movable body A1. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a manner to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (a). After the body A1 is moved to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A1 is allowed. In this situation, the display unit D displays a display indicating that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and has a high expectation for the big hit determination, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable to produce effects such as changes in the form and shape.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the information shown in FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the reception of the effect on the movable body A1 is allowed so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted is ended, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move it back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears indicating that the failure to move the movable body A1 to the specific performance position and the expectation level for the big hit determination is low, and the light emission ends in the movable body A1. Will be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the performance pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (c). Control is performed so as to start the leftward movement of the movable body A2 in the form of following. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a manner to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (c). After the body A2 is moved to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A2 is allowed. In this situation, the display unit D displays a display indicating that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and is expected to have a very high degree of expectation for the big hit determination. In the movable body A2, It is desirable to produce effects such as changes in the form and shape of light emission.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the information shown in FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the reception of the effect on the movable body A2 is allowed so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted is ended, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move it back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears indicating that the failure to move the movable body A2 to the specific performance position and the expectation level for the big hit determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Is controlled to be terminated.

  According to such a production example 1, when the player performs a slide operation while the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a) is shown as if the movable body A1 is operating, the movable body A1 is displayed. However, since the movable body A2, which has been made difficult to see, will move in the form of sudden appearance, it is possible to suppress the fall of the game entertainment by a surprised moving effect as if such a production target has been replaced. Can be done.

  Although illustration is omitted, according to such production example 1, the player performs a slide operation within a period from when the situation of FIG. 130 (a) appears until the situation of FIG. 130 (c) appears. Although the movable body A2 has started to move, it is still in a position where it is still difficult to see (behind the game board 5), and when viewed from the player side, there appears to be no change in production. It can appear. That is, in this case, the movable body A2 moves to the front side of the display unit D after causing the discouragement that no effect change has occurred even though the slide operation by the player is properly performed. Therefore, the fall of the game entertainment can be more preferably suppressed by such a surprised movable effect.

  Further, in the production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to the position overlapping the decorative symbol SZ in the changing state. Then, the player is prompted to shift the gaze by the player from the decorative symbol SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, and it becomes difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the manner of overlapping the decorative design SZ is different between when the movable body A1 appears and when the movable body A2 appears, so that the decorative design SZ changes to the movable bodies A1 and A2. Even if it is a failure to shift the gaze by the player, it is predicted which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by confirming the size and position of the part in which the decorative symbol SZ is difficult to see As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when missing one of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In the production example 1, the movable body A1 is disposed on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 5, but the front side of the game board 5 is provided. Both of the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged, or both of the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged behind the game board 5.

  Here, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are disposed in front of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is disposed in front of the movable body A2 so that it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body A2. It is desirable to maintain difficulty in visually recognizing the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (the non-moving portion) and the like continuously located on the front side of the movable body A2 even when A1 moves.

  On the other hand, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged behind the game board 5, it is possible to give pleasure about which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation of the player. It becomes like this. In this case, the part located on the front side of the movable bodies A1 and A2 in the game board 5 is caused to emit light, and the operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving part 3333) facing the part is encouraged. It is desirable.

  Moreover, in the said production example 1, although it decided to set so that the movable direction (left direction) of movable body A1, A2 might become the same, it is not restricted to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the game is directed to the left by being prompted by an operation instruction (suggestion image HG1) that suggests the left direction. The movable body A2 moves upwards regardless of the slide operation performed by the person, and the fall of the game entertainment can be more suitably suppressed by such a surprised movable effect. Or, even though the operation on the movable body A1 whose moving direction is set to the left direction is urged, an operation instruction suggesting an upward direction is made to appear, and the player performs a sliding operation in the upward direction. If performed, the movable body A2 that has been made difficult to visually recognize may move upward and appear.

  Moreover, in the said production example 1, when movable body A2 appeared by operation by a player, movable body A1 was not operated, but it is not restricted to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by an operation by the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position after the movable bodies A1 and A2 have moved by a predetermined distance, the fall of the game entertainment is more preferably suppressed by the surprised movable effect. Become moist. Alternatively, when the movable body A2 is moved by an operation by the player, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, after the movable body A1 moves by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player. A certain mobile effect can more appropriately suppress the decrease in the game entertainment interest. However, when the operation target by the player is exchanged between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is kept at a predetermined position for a predetermined time (time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined position). It is desirable to perform the production.

  In the production example 1, while the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c)), the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are caused to emit light. In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily emit light. That is, in this case, the timing when the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the movable body A1, or the movable body A2 starts to advance to the front side of the display portion D and returns to the original position. Control to end the light emission of the movable body A1 is performed at a timing (a timing at which the movable body A1 has been moved to a predetermined position) that is easier to visually recognize than a certain time.

  Further, in the production example 1 and other examples thereof, the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view, but the board surface light emitting unit E is disposed instead of the movable body A1. You may do it. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a)), the movable body in a state that is difficult to visually recognize is caused by causing the surface light emitting portion E located on the front side of the movable body A2 to emit light. An operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing A2 is prompted.

  Further, in the display unit D according to the above-described effect example 1, in each situation shown in FIGS. 130A to 130C, the effect image HG1 has one effect regardless of the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located. The situation (the initial situation where none of the movable bodies are operating) was shown. However, instead of this, the display state of the suggestion image HG1 is changed according to the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located, and the movement state of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized only by looking at the suggestion image HG1. It may be.

[Example 2 using special operation receiver 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the effect pattern of the effect example 2 (the variation pattern of the effect example 2) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of the effect example 2 is displayed on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decoration pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets (controls) the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the special operation receiving portion 3333 so that the effect can be received within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears. ) To generate an operation effect period.

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 that is determined to operate the movable body A1, and the movable object A1 and the movable object B are respectively operated. The production pattern AB of production example 2 is included. And in the production pattern A1 of the production example 2, as in the case of the production pattern A1 of the production example 1 described above, FIG. 130 (a), (b) and FIG. 131 (a) (or FIG. 131 (b)). An opportunity for accepting an operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided in the manner shown in FIG. 5 so that the movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after the opportunity for accepting the operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided, the opportunity for acceptance of the operation effect for the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if any of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. In FIG. 5, a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, in any case where any of the production patterns A1 and AB is performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light so as to indicate that a coordinate area (not shown) opposite to this should be operated. ing.

  However, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, when an operation on a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), a specific production event is performed on the movable body A1. First, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), control is performed to hide the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D and interrupt the effect reception in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative symbol SZ in the display unit D is displayed in a manner that is visible but difficult to visually recognize (such as semi-transparent display), and the light emission state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to make it.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the display unit D in which the suggestion image HG1 is hidden in this way, an operation is performed on an operation means (such as the operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333. The prompting operation instruction image SG is displayed, and an operation reception period for a specific effect using the other operation means (such as the operation button 410) is generated. Then, when an operation for another operation means (such as the operation button 410) is received during the operation reception period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG on the display unit D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133 (a). At the same time, control is performed so that the movable body B different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the production target is operated. In this production example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display unit D for a predetermined time.

  Then, in the production pattern AB of production example 2, after the movable body B operates in this manner, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display unit D is movable in a coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. A suggestion image HG2 suggesting that an operation of sliding the body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is displayed, and a coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable body A1. The operation effect period for setting (controlling) to be receivable is generated again. At this time, the opportunity for the production operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132 (a) appears, the movable body B operates without operating the movable body B. It is desirable to set the expectation level higher in the production pattern AB of the production example 2 in which the movable body A1 operates after the movable body B is operated than in the production pattern A1 of the production example 2. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display mode of the suggestion image HG2 is different from the suggestion image HG1 shown in FIG. It is desirable that the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is different from the light emission mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) so as to suggest that the production pattern is highly expected. .

  In the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIGS. a) (or FIG. 131 (b)) provides an opportunity for accepting an operation effect for the movable body A1 in the manner shown in FIG. 131 (b), so that the movable body A1 moves. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the effect example 1 described above, FIG. 130 (c) and FIG. 131 (c) (or FIG. 131 (b)). ), An opportunity for accepting an operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided, and an effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

  In particular, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the suggestion image HG2 that suggests that the production pattern has a high expectation appears, or the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is changed. Since it is made different, this is also a movable effect that appears when an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is performed in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is preferably performed in a special execution manner different from the case of the production pattern A1 of the production example 2.

  According to the production pattern AB of the production example 2 as described above, the first production opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is first granted (in this situation, the second operation is performed). Regardless of the part (for example, the second production opportunity for the operation button 410), if the first operation part is operated and the production is accepted, it differs from the first operation part. The second presentation opportunity for the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is given, and the first presentation opportunity is once lost. Then, when the first production opportunity is received by operating the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) in a situation where the first production opportunity is once lost, the second production event ( Here, the operation of the movable body B occurs. In other words, in this case, it is possible to produce a presentation as to whether or not the second presentation opportunity for the second operation part is given when the presentation is accepted for the first operation part. A novel operability using the operation part is provided.

  In order to suitably realize such a novel operability using a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable that the second operation part is always provided in a form that is difficult to physically operate. And when it is judged that the 2nd production opportunity with respect to the 2nd operation part is given, it is difficult to physically operate the 2nd operation part based on having received the production reception with respect to the 1st operation part. It is desirable to control the mode from the mode to the mode that is easy to operate, and allow the reception of the effect to the second operation site when the mode is easy to operate. Here, the “mode that is physically difficult to operate” is, for example, a mode in which the second operation site (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member and is difficult to operate, or the second operation site. Is a state that is positioned in a state when it has already been operated, and “control from a physically difficult mode to an easily operable mode” means, for example, that the second operation site itself is Control to operate to a position not covered by other members, control to operate another member covering the second operation part to a position not to cover the second operation part, and operation to the second operation part It can be realized as a control for operating to a position different from the state when it is performed. Also, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation part from the physically difficult operation to the easy operation aspect is not necessarily the time when the presentation is accepted for the first operation part. It may be when a specific time elapses after the production pattern is executed. In any case, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity thereof is operated to give the second presentation opportunity for the second operation part when the presentation for the first operation part is received. This is desirable in order to suggest that the operation target has been changed from the first operation part to the second operation part and that the expectation is increased by the change.

  Further, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, the first operation site (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is given a first production opportunity, and then the first operation site is operated. Based on the reception of the production, the second production opportunity is given. However, after giving the 1st production opportunity using the 1st operation part (here special operation receiving part 3333) (or displaying suggestion picture HG1), after the 1st progress, the 1st A second presentation opportunity for a second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation part may be given and the first presentation opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, until the predetermined time elapses, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation part, but the first effect event is ended based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (When the production target is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to the original position). Alternatively, the first operation part using the first operation part is not given, and a second operation part (for example, different from the first operation part after elapse of a predetermined time after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed) You may make it give the 2nd production opportunity with respect to the operation button 410). In other words, in this case, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the presentation is not accepted by the operation on the first operation part even though the suggestion image HG1 is displayed.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the suggestion image HG1 is displayed and then the suggestion image HG1 is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation instruction image SG shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to depict a state in which the suggestion image HG1 changes to the suggestion image HG2 having a higher expectation level, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. However, at this time, when the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state where the presentation of the first operation part is not performed, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black and white display, translucent, etc. It is desirable to make the display mode relatively invisible. In addition, a timekeeping image indicating the remaining display time of the suggestion image HG1 (remaining time for which an effect is accepted for the first operation part) is displayed together, and no effect is accepted for the first operation part. If the state image shows that the remaining time does not decrease in the state, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period during which the presentation reception for the first operation part is performed does not decrease. As a result, a game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be enjoyed with peace of mind. In this case, the remaining time does not decrease after the remaining time during which the reception of the effect is received is reduced by a predetermined amount even though the reception of the effect for the first operation part is not performed. If it is shown by the said time-measurement image, more interesting performance can be provided.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed based on the effect reception for the first operation part. A period is generated, and the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed during the predetermined period (for example, from a color display to a black and white display or a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize, such as semi-transparency). You may make it show that a remaining time does not reduce with an image (a display meter does not reduce, but will be in a stationary state etc.). At this time, it is desirable that the display mode of the image different from the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D is also changed. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second presentation opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with higher expectation, and the stage reception for the first operation part is performed again. You may do it.

  Further, in the effect pattern of the effect example 2 described above, after the suggestion image HG1 that prompts the operation for the movable body A1 as an effect target is displayed (or in a state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. Although the movable body B does not have to be operated by an operation by the player, for example, based on the fact that a special result is obtained by determining whether a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. It may be a non-operating movable body that operates. When such a non-operation movable body is adopted, even if it is decided to operate (a special result is obtained), an operation instruction for the non-operation movable body is not performed and an operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination as to whether the predetermined operation condition for the non-operation movable body is satisfied is appropriately generated regardless of the execution state of the production pattern, other production targets (movable body and display image) Etc.), it is possible to secretly make a decision to operate the non-operation movable body in the state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed. It is possible to have the possibility that a non-operating movable body unrelated to this suddenly operates and the possibility that a special movable body and other production targets may operate simultaneously. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment will be improved by such unexpected operation effects.

  When the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the target operation region (a specific coordinate region in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the operation button 410, or the like) ) Is not allowed to be rendered, but can also be rendered in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the portion where the operation instruction image SG appears. Also good. According to such a configuration, even when the operation site cannot be recognized, it is only necessary to operate the specific images (the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the operation instruction image S) that appear in the display unit D. A similar effect can be generated, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, at least one of the physical objects that have already been detected while the detection related to the movement after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not completed yet. Although it is possible to execute control to move the production target (display image or movable body) in a mode according to the movement direction and movement amount, the movement speed of the physical object is detected when performing control related to the movement of the production target. Then, the moving speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when realizing an operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, the special operation receiving unit 3333 produces an effect in a coordinate area facing the portion to be operated. Although the reception is made, it is not necessarily the coordinate area facing the part to be operated, and the production reception may be made in a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Good.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, a change in light caused by an operation (physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333 is detected by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35, and this is detected by the peripheral control board 1510. By analyzing, it is decided to determine the operation mode (movement information of a physical object such as a finger) for the special operation receiving unit 3333. For example, the special operation reception is performed using a touch panel installed on the glass plate 192. You may make it determine the operation mode (The touch operation mode with respect to the glass plate 192 in this case) with respect to the part 3333. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 is adversely affected.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal from one start port sensor 4002 is in an ON state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is acquired from the random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). On the condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number (second special symbol) A second start-port passing process is performed such that the second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" or "8R normal big hit", the big prize opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (round game) which is closed when the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 or not, and is controlled to a 16R big hit game state that repeats 16 times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is received by the count sensor 4005 after 9 game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to an 8R big hit game state that is repeated eight times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled to a 2R big hit game state that repeats twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-shortening control is executed, the right-handed strike is advantageous to the player over the left-handed, and in the situation where the time-shortening control is not executed, the right-handed is preferred. As described above, left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a big win is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a maximum of 8 rounds of long-open big hit game Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, if the big hit is won, the probability (allocation rate of the winning species) is approximately 50%. ) Is a 16-round long-open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained), etc., and the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained when winning a big hit Therefore, when the shift control is performed to the right-handed state, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is left-handed.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, first, a process for starting the operation of the condition device, a process for resetting a later-described variation number counter, and the like are performed.

  Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 140, a high probability is obtained according to the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Each set process of a flag and a time reduction flag is executed.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 139 described later. 144. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 or a second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later, is set when the big hit gaming state based on the probability variable big hit and 8R probability variable big hit B) is finished. To reset.

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and as shown in FIG. 140, the time reduction control (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. Is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit B, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the big hit is next, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not shown in figure. Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a jackpot after a low probability time-short state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not shown in figure.

  The variation counter is a counter indicating the number of variations of a special symbol since the variation counter is reset, and is used in a first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142 described later. It is updated when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes (for example, counts up) and at least a specific type of big hit (16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) It is reset when the big hit gaming state based on is started.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set in step S5236. Is determined. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the short time flag, the short time Each set process such as a count counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the big hit determination is not won.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is “0” (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, when the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), A second special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is performed so that the lottery for the second special symbol placed on hold is not lost (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is “0”), the first special symbol Regardless of the lottery hold status, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number is continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can maintain the game ball shot (right strike) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the short time state (high probability short time state). Only the lottery (determination process) for the big hit determination random number can be performed continuously without interruption.

  The special game (design variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to a game executed in preference to the special game using the first special diagram (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) through the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be able to decide.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S5232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (a big hit determination random number, a reach determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, a variable display pattern random number) ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in step S5242 that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the first special symbol change display (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the processing of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is used as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Next, the first special figure prefetch process for executing the prefetch effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the prefetch effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the contents of the effect, etc. Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information related to the special symbol stop symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information before the final decision such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group in the variation pattern, and the latent hit group and the small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5242 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5243 to S5245, the first special symbol variation display is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S5234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol use) in step S5251. A random number and a random number for the second variation display pattern) are obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” (step S5252). If it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold number is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, as the processing of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S5254, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S5251. To store.

  Then, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining the presence / absence of prefetching production and the contents of the production on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information before the final decision such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group in the variation pattern, and the latent hit group and the small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing a change effect described later can be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command for instructing the number of reserved special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the number of retained special balls changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002. (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of second special symbols held changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) indicates the number of second special symbols held. A command to be performed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). The first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

  1. A lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for big hit determination read out the big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM, etc. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. The variation pattern of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 corresponding to the special symbol The first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

  4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The first special symbol display unit 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control mode is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol that is in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302 next. First random number related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in first-out (First-In, First-In) random numbers (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped First, the shift operation is performed.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), and the first winning slot 2002 is a start winning prize. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol occurred can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process which is a determination process for the big hit is based on the read first big hit determination random number. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability short time short state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. 140 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 140A is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the game state is low in probability for each type of special random numbers (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). (Low probability non-short time state, low probability short time state) and low probability jackpot judgment table and high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-time short state, high probability short time state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers have won the jackpot, 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the first big hit determination random number of the type matches the loss determination value indicating that it is the loss (a big hit probability at a low probability; “1/321”). On the other hand, in order to compare with the jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing In the jackpot determination table that is referenced at the time of low probability, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned lost. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately “1/321”).

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at high probability referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value, and 63634 types of first jackpot determination The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random number matches the loss determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 63396 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). Note that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) The number of jackpot judgment values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the jackpot determination table at the low probability and the jackpot determination table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S5315). ), A jackpot flag indicating that the change is won by the jackpot is set (step S5316), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the player has lost the jackpot, based on the selected jackpot determination table, the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. Is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit is not won (judgment is determined).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-short-time state and when the gaming state is in the high-probability short-time state And a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-time short state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state, a reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number is reached, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers are not reached, is reached. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match. However, the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach in order to maximize the game progress speed in the short-time state. Thus, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 reach reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than that in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random number for reach coincides with the reach determination value indicating that reach and the 67 reach reach random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach in the high probability non-time-short state is the same as the low probability non-time-short state.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and determines that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). Then, a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. Are compared with the selected symbol determination table to determine the big hit symbol as the mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, a random number for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) Of the first big hit symbol) is stored in an associated manner. As shown in FIG. 140 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second big hit symbol (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the probable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the regular jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state are the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot design random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of the specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 8 is repeated 8 times to control the game ball to the 8R big hit game state that can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state Controls the high probability time-short state until the next big hit game state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) that a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state. Are controlled to the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 8 is repeated 8 times to control the game ball to the 8R big hit game state that can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and after this 8R big hit game state Is controlled to a low probability short-time state until the special symbol variation display is digested 100 times (or wins the big hit within the period until 100 times is digested), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state An effect display device that performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated and is relatively unfavorable in a low-probability short-time state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round game) that are closed when detected in 16 are repeated 16 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) to the 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and during the period of execution of the 16R jackpot gaming state, an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it will be 16 rounds) (successful performance) ) Will be added, and a relatively advantageous state will be given after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high probability short-time state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4). The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 8 is repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit game state, and after this 8R big hit game state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds eight (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state (failure effect) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the control was performed in a high-probability time-short state, this is a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit gaming state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit gaming state, Controls to a low probability short-time state until the symbol change display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until 100 times it is digested) and a specific character during the 2R jackpot gaming state execution period The effect display device 1600 is a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability short-time state. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 is executed, and the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a first special symbol holding ball. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and big hits (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol are generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), and the opening / closing pattern is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. With a big hit related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 game balls can be paid out by repeating an open / close pattern that opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 8R probability variable big hit A is determined, the 8R probability variable big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R normal big hit is determined, the 8R normal big hit symbol is changed to the 8R normal big hit symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is decided, the 8R probability variation big hit is decided as the big hit symbol. When the symbol B is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the processing of step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small special symbol ( After the specific symbol stop mode is determined (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is lost as the mode when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. To do.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 as one of the lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach lost, or lost). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may instruct a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and left decorative symbols → right decorative symbols → Stop display in the order of middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle and right decorative symbols may be synchronized and displayed in the same symbol, and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols when a type other than 2R normal big hit is won as the big hit. On the other hand, when 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined as a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols with left and right decorative symbols “0” to “9” and different middle decorative designs; reach lose In the case where the symbol is determined to be out of order, the symbol is determined to be a symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change time specified from the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends).

  In any case, when a winning is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes a winning effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the game is started, an effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S5346). If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation display pattern random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of this fact is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), the processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 1403 performs the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 controls the effect in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a big hit determination random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and a big hit symbol random number (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result. The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The first variation display pattern random numbers are stored in association with each other. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process in step S5302 among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number. The above-mentioned special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the random number for the variable display pattern and the variable time information associated with the read random number for the variable display pattern from this table. Determine the variation pattern. Thereby, the determination process about the fluctuation pattern of the said special symbol (a 1st special symbol, a 2nd special symbol) comes to be performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, in this example, since a small hit is not won, a variation pattern table at the time of a small hit is not used. In this example, the small win is not won, but the small win may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is executed with the random number for the variable display pattern. Has been. For example, in the non-short-time state, 164 types of random display pattern random numbers among the 241 types of random display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the random numbers for the variable display pattern is to execute any one of the super-reaching effects having a low jackpot expectation level, and the 18 random display pattern random numbers have a high jackpot expectation level. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

  The super reach production (SP production) is higher in the expectation of a big hit than the normal reach production, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit gaming state, the player for the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. The expectation of is becoming higher. That is, such a super reach production has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of big hit, and even if a losing is finally displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state Can be increased. However, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state, a highly anticipated notice effect that is a lottery separate from the variation pattern appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-short-time state and the short-time state And 12 seconds of variation time are set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds to The variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short-time state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-time-short state, and in the short-time state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is performed during the variation of the first special symbol. In addition to prompting, a time for the player to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004 is secured.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of the second special symbol loss, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) It is possible to suppress the discharge without being subjected to the lottery process.

  In other words, the right-handed game ball is supplied to an area directly above the gate unit 2003. When the game ball is received from this area into the gate unit 2003 when in a short time state (such as a high probability short time state), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a state where it can be successively received one after another at the second starting port 2004 (a short time state in which almost all of the game balls thrown to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if these game balls are accepted, a control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of “approximately 1/32”. It becomes possible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) Game balls are often received at the start port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely variable as the variation time of the short time state (high probability short time state etc.). It can be set to a short 0.1 second. In other words, in this case, when the losing is obtained, the symbol variation will be completed only in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are successively received by the second start port 2004, it is suppressed that these game balls are discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variation pattern is set. As a result, if it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, that the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), the process is terminated.

  When the variation timer is not 0 even though 1 is subtracted from the variation timer (step S5371), until the variation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display unit 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S5387), The waiting time until the start of the big hit gaming state (the time for displaying to the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, When the time-short flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is further reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process that is the initial value (step S5389). In step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control processing (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R positive change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R positive big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, the jackpot gaming state effect (battle effect or extra challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is set (step S5390). And when it is in the low probability short time state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low probability short time state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability short-time state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability short-time state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short gaming state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time reduction function is performed in this manner, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S5394). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When updated to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hitting execution flag is set in the processing of step S5236, and in the above-described small hitting control processing (step S5240b). The small hit gaming state is executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the gaming state is not changed when the small hit gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing relating to the big hit or the small hit as being lost. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag or the small hit execution flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is determined according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in an on state and a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process to control the process (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S5402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it has been determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control in the hold state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S5421. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal control stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S5422. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbols of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal control MPU 1310a in the storage area are stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the hold of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the variable display control hold can be canceled in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal time hit table determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S5426) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( In step S5427, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the common figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure determination table used when the gaming state is short time (high probability short state) and the gaming state is non-short time. And a non-time / short-time ordinary figure determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, the 255 common kinds of random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment values indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003, the winning ball is always won by the time of drawing, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. The acceptance is controlled. Instead of all 255 types, a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time-short state may be matched with the per-normal determination value indicating that the per-normal is won.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement judgment value indicating that the usual figure is misplaced. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won per hit, so the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second start port is opened. It is not possible to control the acceptance of game balls to 2004. However, as described above, the normal symbol hit may be obtained even in the non-short-time state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the short-time state, and the normal symbol lottery result is the win. When the movable piece of the second start port 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the time-shortening state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004, the movable piece is moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball in the second starting port 2004.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol is per unit (step S5429). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (ordinary symbol stop symbol) The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected normal symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined that they are out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-usual symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

  While the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby obtaining the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation in process, effect symbol variation stop process, jackpot display process , One of the big hit game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting processing: It takes effect (demonstration effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in a fluctuation state and control related to big hit is not performed until the fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a. When the control is performed and the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process.

  Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on a change pattern command, etc., and the decoration symbol change is started based on the determined effect contents. To control. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process.

Effect symbol variation processing: Various effects determined in the effect symbol variation start process are controlled at each timing during the symbol variation period, and the process flag value is determined when the variation time ends. Update to a value corresponding to the change stop process.
Production symbol variation stop processing: Control of deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) by stopping the variation of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped. If the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative symbol is stopped at the loss symbol symbol, the process flag value is changed to a waiting process for receiving the variation pattern designation command. Update to a value corresponding to.

  Big hit display process: Controls effects during a period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started (such as a display effect that informs the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of the big hit). Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing.

  Big hit game processing: Control related to various effects during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

  Big hit end effect process: In the effect display device 1600, an effect (such as a display effect that notifies the player that the big hit game state has ended) is controlled in the period from the end of the big hit game state to the variation allowed state. . Then, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an effect pattern (variation effect) determination table T1 referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (variable effects) are associated with each of the change numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the change pattern command. Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern Based on (variation effect), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative design is started.

  Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may make it do. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is also configured such that a plurality of effect patterns are associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  Further, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a notice lottery (a notice effect determination process) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern after determining the effect pattern (change effect) in this way. By performing the control (process during effect symbol variation) for causing the notice effect won in the notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variable effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. The expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested by the appearance mode etc. as those that can be combined.

  Conventionally, in such a combined effect, there are cases where a plurality of appearances are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed while the same specific notice effect (for example, a timer effect), As a result, it is expected to maintain amusement interests. However, since the announcement effect can be combined only when the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. Therefore, it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the game entertainment.

  As will be described later, the “timer effect” refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of an effect pattern (variable effect), and a first predetermined numerical value is displayed for the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed. (E.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (e.g., "0 seconds") or a count effect display, or a standby display (such as in preparation) before starting the count display It is. In other words, in this case, when a count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or cut-in A) that causes either a relatively unfavorable effect mode (a low-expectation effect mode) or an advantageous effect mode (a high expectation effect mode) to appear to the player. , B, etc.) are targeted for timer production, it is guaranteed that an advantageous production result will surely occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the notice timer effect performed as a result of the notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the effect at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. The “timer effect target” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing when the effect object is generated.

  In the “timer effect” according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect. If it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning in the notice lottery, the effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the change effect. In other words, in this case, only the notice timer effect that executes the count effect display as “the effect content of the notice effect that functions so that the expected degree of jackpot is added to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command”. First, it is also executed as “the production contents of the production pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command”, so that the expectation degree from the jackpot expectation level indicated by the production pattern determined based on the variation pattern command Count effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without wastefully accumulating (the expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in advance notice lottery”). For example, when the jackpot expectation level when a specific performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is “20%”, if the notice side timer effect is further executed, the jackpot expectation level is increased by the function of the composite performance. For example, it becomes “40%” and the appearance frequency is inevitably lowered. On the other hand, when the variable timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit expectation is expected. The timer effect can be executed with the degree being “20%” (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

  Note that the degree of jackpot expectation when an effect pattern (variation effect) appears in the determination table T1 varies depending on the variation number (and also the effect pattern), and basically the jackpot expectation as the variation number increases. There is a tendency to become higher. For example, in the production pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variation timer production in which “conversation notice” is the production target is executed as the production content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), while the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table that is referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail, but in the determination table that is referred to in the low-probability short-time state or the high-probability short-time state, As described above, an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the variable timer effect can be executed is included, and can appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can be performed on the variable side timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice. This is different from the variation numbers 3 and 4. The variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. However, the variable numbers 9 and 10 execute the variable timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice, 12, the variable side timer effect with cut-in A as the production target is executed, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in A and the variable side timer effect with these as the production target is executed. It is different in that it can be done. Further, the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 are performed on the variation side timer production with the conversation notice as the production target. 20, the variable timer effect for cut-in B is executed, and the variable numbers 21 and 22 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in B, and the variable timer effect for them is executed. It is different in that it can be done. It should be noted that the big hit expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A and B as the effect target is executed than when the variable timer effect with the conversation notice as the effect target is executed. Is set so that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  Note that “conversation notice” is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after an effect pattern (decorative effect of decoration pattern) is executed, and often has a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, the cut-in A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (decorative production of the decorative design) is executed, and the expectation level is relatively high. This is often an effect (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always made). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than other productions (cut-in A and B, and the later-described accessory A action, B, etc.) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be. In addition, “cut-in” that appears as the content of the fluctuating effect is executed so as to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as production contents of the production.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the content of the effect (effect pattern) for a plurality of change patterns (change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ) Is assigned as the variable timer production. On this basis, when the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (such as variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a low-expected normal reach effect”, a count effect display as a notice timer effect is displayed. While the effect is not selected (by increasing the premium level) and the expected level UP when the notice timer effect appears, the change pattern is “change pattern (execution of change side timer effect ( Variation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) ”, the variation pattern is the above-described predetermined type (for example, variation) compared to the case where the variation number is not such a count variation pattern. The ratio corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) is made low.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is executed, but two of them (0) Since only the variation pattern (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to the number corresponds to the predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation timer presentation is not executed, and four variation patterns (variations) Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (variable numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect of the variation pattern is a count effect display (variation side timer effect) that can be performed (count variation pattern effect), a notice is given more than when the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. The ratio at which it is determined that the count effect display (notice timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect contents of the effect is low. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) without unnecessarily accumulating expectations and reducing the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ), The proportion of occurrence of the notice side timer effect varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

  Note that when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. Even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the notice timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, it is actually a bigger hit than in the case of a loss. The notice pattern timer effect is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern that is won, and the variable number 22 is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is displayed in advance according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the production contents (notice timer production) is different. Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type thereof Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if it is an effect pattern in which the effect content of the same reach type appears (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation timer effect is not included as the effect content. The ratio of the appearance of the effect (the ratio determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the notice lottery) is increased. In other words, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation-side timer effect, notice-side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern, just by requiring a big hit expectation level to win the one notice-side timer effect in the notice lottery. As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasting a big hit expectation.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in such a case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “conversation notice” is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “cut-in” is the effect target Then, the mode of count display (the form and color of count numbers) is made different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. In combination with the fact that “the rate of occurrence of the notice timer effect is different depending on which count variation pattern is present”, the ease of appearance of the notice timer effect is recognized. You can expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), regardless of whether the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side) It may be different from (or at least different from) the count display mode (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display), or the same (or at least the same as) the same mode. .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (notice side count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be produced. This is useful for improving the sense of expectation by allowing the player to recognize that the notice timer effect that is set to a high degree appears. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable timer effect (variable side count effect display). For the common aspect as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different expectations are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

  Moreover, in order to make it possible to more suitably recognize that the notice timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice timer effect is executed, and a count display when the variable timer effect is executed, It is desirable that the counting speed (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or counting down) is made different. In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the timer display is kept in focus even during the period in which the count display is in progress, and the relative timer effect is relatively low. It becomes possible to give an interest in which of the high-expectation notice-side timer effects is being executed, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

  At this time, in the variation timer production, the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer production according to the production target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count display is performed in the form (cut-in) and the display mode (conversation advance notice) at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer presentation, whether or not the notice timer presentation is being executed. It is possible to add interest by changing the difficulty of the determination. In addition, in the variable timer effect (or notice side timer effect), the count number is displayed by repeating appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count display may be performed by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer presentation and the count display of the preview timer presentation are performed at the same time, it is easily grasped whether or not the notice timer presentation is being executed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is provided for the change patterns (count change patterns such as change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) corresponding to the change-side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total count or time required for all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. When the variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is obtained, the count display of the variation timer effect and the notice timer are determined so as to determine one of the plurality of effect patterns based on a random number for the effect. By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the performance different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap) Let ’s give it some fun

  In this embodiment, the count display start timing or end timing (total count, or time required for all counts) differing from one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect targets and reach) The content of the production is the same), but multiple production patterns with different count display start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for all counts) (however, they are subject to production of timer production) A plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and corresponded one-on-one with the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern.

  Moreover, even if the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing between the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different for the side timer effect, it becomes possible to add interest by making it difficult to determine whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed. .

  Also, if the notice timer performance is executed in the countdown display, the variable timer effect is executed in the count up display. It is expected that it will be possible to greatly improve the fun of gaming. In addition, the timer side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, while the variable side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice) is executed in a count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for cut-in) is executed in a countdown display, the difficulty of determining whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed will vary depending on the effect, making it interesting. Can be granted.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there may be a case where the same effect is targeted for the effect on the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and a case where a different effect is targeted for the effect. To control. And, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, compared to the case where the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are different. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the big hit expectation is lowered is high, and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  In other words, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is the predetermined numerical value first. However, at this point, it is assumed that a different effect is to be produced (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation manner). Looks like). After that, since the other count display that has been continued reaches a predetermined value in a manner that makes it clear that the same production (for example, conversation notice) is the production target, it is ended first. Even if it is clarified that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for the production by the timer production on the end side, a different production that can appear afterwards is targeted for the production ( It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved while maintaining a sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a mode with relatively high expectations.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice timer effect is determined in advance. It is desirable that a separate count end corresponding display (for example, “count success!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) appears at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect for the effect of “conversation notice” executed as the effect on the variable side or the notice side are caused to appear in one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect are simultaneously performed. In the variable timer effect, the variable side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production that occurs (such as “count success!” And effects that match the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice side timer production is related to the “conversation notice” A count display is displayed in accordance with a notice side specific effect ("chance UP!") That occurs as a notice side effect, or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of a conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect). By proceeding, separate count end corresponding displays appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the conversation announcement and the cut-in effects are always executed when they are targeted for the effect of the variation timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, when the count display reaches a predetermined value relative to the effect on the variable timer effect, Therefore, it is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effects to be effected by the variable timer effect are incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable timer effect and the effect object are simply executed by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable that each of the produced effects (a mode with relatively high expectation) can appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to control so that the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) targeted for the effect is selected in the notice lottery. .

  In addition, if each of the conversation notice and cut-in effects is not subject to the effect of the variable timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the notice contents of the notice side in the notice lottery described later. A determination is made as to what aspect (a relatively high expectation aspect or a low expectation aspect) is to appear as the production content of the side, and control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination .

Hereinafter, the effect pattern determination process using FIG. 148 will be summarized.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variation pattern command or a symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation when a specific effect pattern appears or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. become.

  Next, as the production pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of production patterns (a plurality of production patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the variation timer production) can be selected. If it is determined, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different count display start timings or end timings is selected based on the success of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit determination is won, the production pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed is increased, and thereby the start timing or end timing of the count display The slower the is, the higher the probability that a jackpot symbol will appear.

  Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) is acquired when a special performance condition is established. Even in this case, an effect pattern that is set so that the variable timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) is selected in this way, what kind of notice effect is performed within the execution period of the effect pattern. In such a mode, it is determined whether to additionally execute (combination) (notice lottery).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for a lottery (notice lottery performed in the effect symbol variation start process) related to the notice effect that appears within the execution period of the effect pattern (the symbol variation time). Note that the notice lottery processing procedure described below is merely an example, and the notice lottery process procedure is not limited to this as long as the intended purpose as the notice effect is achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in the lottery for the advance notice, first, it is determined whether or not the change that is waiting to be started (holding to be digested) is a target of a timer prefetching effect to be described later (step S5501). ). As a result, when the timer pre-reading effect is targeted, the first timer notice lottery is performed (step S5502), whereas when the timer pre-reading effect is not targeted, the second timer notice lottery is performed (step S5502). S5521).

  That is, when the timer pre-reading effect is applied (first timer notice lottery), the notice side timer effect is executed as compared with the case where the timer pre-read effect is not provided (second timer notice lottery). The rate at which decisions are made is set to be high. Note that the ratio may include a ratio determined at 100%. Also, in both the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different decision tables are prepared for different game states, thereby making a decision to execute the notice side timer effect according to the game state. The percentages made (for example, in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the decision to execute the notice timer effect is made at a lower rate (including the percentage determined at 0%) than in the normal gaming state) is different. It has become.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example of the timer notice determination table T2 that is referred to when the change (holding to be digested) is not the target of the timer prefetching effect (second timer notice lottery) in the normal gaming state. .

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer notice lottery according to this embodiment, when a predetermined type of change pattern command (here, change numbers 1 to 6) is acquired, a notice timer effect is provided. The decision to execute is not made. The same applies to the first timer notice lottery and other game states.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, even in the second timer notice lottery, even in the production pattern in which the production contents of the same reach type appear (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22), the fluctuation side In the effect pattern in which the timer effect is included as the effect content (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), compared to the effect pattern in which the variation-side timer effect is not included as the effect content (for example, SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 and 16). Thus, the ratio of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation-side timer effect, notice-side timer effect) can appear in one effect pattern without winning the double timer effect described later in the notice lottery, As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasteful accumulation of winning expectations (winning the double timer production). The same applies to the first timer notice lottery and other game states.

  However, in the first timer notice lottery, the proportion of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is generally higher than the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer notice lottery, even if any of the variable numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the notice side is compared with the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer notice lottery. The rate at which the timer effect is determined is high.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the timer prefetching effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (low expectation mode, high expectation mode, finalization, etc.) in which the ratio of the notice side timer performance to be executed in the variation to be prefetched is different. (Aspect) is executed. In the first timer notice lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer prefetch effect is being executed, and even if the prefetch is being executed in the low expectation form, the second timer notice lottery is performed. As compared with the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in FIG. 1, the ratio of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is set to be generally higher. In addition, when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the high expectation mode, the ratio of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is generally higher than in the case of the low expectation mode, and the timer prefetching effect is increased. When executed in the fixed mode, it is set so that a determination to execute the notice side timer effect is always made regardless of the variation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 22).

  If it is determined that the timer side timer effect is to be executed as a result of such timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) (YES in step S5503), the process in step S5504 If the decision to execute the notice timer effect is not made (NO in step S5503) while the first mission effect lottery is performed, the second mission effect lottery is performed as the processing in step S5551.

  That is, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the count display number (total count) displayed when the count display is started (the longer the time required for timer consumption), the higher the big hit expectation Is set to have However, in this case, when the count display number (the total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is small, the big hit expectation degree tends to be low, so that the game is performed even though the timer effect is executed. There was concern about a decline in interest.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment displays a “specific display related to the first effect” such as “Make the first effect appear” on the effect display device 1600, and the specific display. When the first effect is generated (appears) during the display of, a special display such as “Mission Success” appears, thereby making it possible to execute a mission effect that confirms that the player has won the jackpot.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, an effect type (here, a conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types to be effected by the timer effect is set as the first effect. We are going to adopt it. That is, in this case, if the timer effect is executed while the specific display such as “Make the conversation notice (first effect) appear” appears (the mission effect appears), the count display Even if the count display number (the total number of counts) displayed when is started is small, the effect subject of the timer notice is “conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage”. It can be expected that the winner has been confirmed), and the count display will continue even after the end of the conversation notice because the count display count (total count) displayed when the count display starts is large. Even if it is a case, it can be expected that the degree of expectation of jackpot will be high, so that it is possible to stably enhance the game entertainment at the time of timer production Kill as to become.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in order to achieve a synergistic effect caused by such a timer effect and a mission effect more appropriately, a specific display related to the first effect (a conversation notice should appear) ) Is displayed, the notice lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) so that the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Is going to do. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed simply by displaying the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), so it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the game entertainment interest. Will be able to. The first effect targeted for mission display may not be “conversation notice”, and may be executed instead of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

Note that when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Any method may be adopted as a method of increasing the value, but for example, it can be realized by adopting any of the following methods.
a. First, determine whether to perform the mission effect. When it is determined to perform the mission effect, the timer effect is set so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when the mission effect is not determined. Method for determining whether to appear b. First of all, it is determined whether to perform the timer effect, and when it is determined that the timer effect is performed, the mission effect is set so that the appearance rate of the mission effect is higher than when the timer effect is not determined. A method to determine whether to appear

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment employs the above method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) in the case where it is determined in step S5503 that the notice timer effect is won, it is not determined that the notice timer effect is won in step S5503. As compared with the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case of the event, the ratio of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is increased. It is determined whether or not the mission is displayed within the variation (effect pattern).

  It should be noted that a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) and a timer pre-reading effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode, and third preceding mode) that suggest that the timer side timer effect is executed. (Mode) can be displayed at the same time. In addition, under a predetermined condition, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed in which a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) increases when it appears.

  In addition, regarding the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), for example, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (hold information that generates the mission effect) is obtained, You may enable it to display over a plurality of fluctuation displays until digested. Also, at this time, if the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (the hold information that generates the mission effect) is the hold information that is a big hit, the change that is executed before the hold information that becomes the big hit is digested A special notice (successful mission) may be displayed by causing a conversation notice to appear in the display. However, when the special display (mission success) is displayed in advance as described above (when the mission success is displayed when the hold information for generating the mission effect is not yet digested), the loss variation display is executed. It is desirable to be limited to when you are. That is, in this case, although the special display (mission success) is displayed, the variation display in which the special display appears will cause a losing pattern (lost effect) to appear, and thus the special display (mission successful) is displayed. In this state, the hold information that is the target of the mission effect is digested and the jackpot symbol (the jackpot effect) is displayed in the variation display, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the timer effect count display is started while the mission effect and the timer look-ahead effect are executed over a plurality of variations, It is possible to realize an effect as if the variation display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over until the variation display in which the count display of the timer effect starts is displayed.

  FIG. 151 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) that is referred to when a notice timer effect is performed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 151 (b) These are figures which show an example of 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (2nd mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is not performed in a normal game state.

  As is clear from FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, when the notice timer effect is not performed. Compared to the referenced second mission effect determination table T3b, it is set so that the proportion of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is set higher. Yes. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired even though the variation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the variation pattern in which the “conversation notice” appears as the variation effect. Is set so as not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. Has been. That is, since the variable numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach production (reach type with low expectation), both the timer production and the mission production occur in such a low expectation reach production and the mission is successful. In that case, there is a concern that the amusement interest will be lowered because the desire of “I wanted to see such a production with a type of reach production with higher expectation” was not satisfied. For this reason, in the variation numbers 5 and 6, in the first mission effect determination table T3b and the second mission effect determination table T3b, although it is a reach effect in which the variable side timer effect with “conversation notice” as the effect target is performed. Also, it is desirable to set so as not to execute an effect in which a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) is displayed. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the variation pattern that causes the “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect. However, these variation numbers are acquired. Even when the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b are set, the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed. Has been. This is because change numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 are change patterns at the time of losing, and it is not possible to display the success of the mission (determining that you have won the jackpot) for production. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 correspond to the hit variation pattern that causes the “conversation notice” to appear as the variation effect, and these variation numbers 10, 14, When a specific display related to the first performance (make a conversation notice appear) is displayed when 18 and 22 are acquired, a message indicating that the mission has been successful (confirmed that the jackpot has been won) is displayed. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 18) that causes “conversation notice” to appear as the effect content of the change effect. 22) is acquired, the execution probability is set (three times) so as to be significantly higher than the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the timer side timer effect is not performed. Yes. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  On the other hand, during the execution of the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, 20) that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect, a specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) When the message is displayed, there may be a production situation with a sense of incongruity, such as “The conversation notice cannot be displayed even though the mission is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed after the mission fails.” Absent. Therefore, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect. ) Is acquired (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high as compared to the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) referred to when the notice timer effect is not performed. Yes. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  However, as will be described later, when it is determined that a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect is acquired and the mission effect is executed, a relatively high probability. Thus, the control is performed such that the probability that “conversation notice” is executed as the content of the notice effect is increased (steps S5509 and S5534 described later). In view of the fact that such control is performed, the “conversation notice” is used as the effect of the fluctuation effect even for the hit fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that do not appear as the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect. You may make it perform mission effect with the execution probability comparable as compared with the hit fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) made to appear as contents.

  On the other hand, variation numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are reach effects at the time of losing that “conversation notice” does not appear as the effect contents of the change effects. Such reach production can be executed in the form of a missed mission production without causing a “conversation notice” to appear. In the first mission effect lottery, the execution probability is set (three times) so as to be significantly higher than that of the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the timer side timer effect is not performed. Yes. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  As will be described later, it is determined that the mission effect is executed by acquiring the reach effect (variation numbers 7, 11, 15, 19, etc.) at the time of losing that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as the effect content of the change effect. In some cases, the probability that “conversation notice” will be executed as the content of the notice effect is controlled to be zero. This is because the reach production at the time of losing cannot display the success of the mission (determining that you have won the big hit) for the production.

  According to such a configuration related to the mission effect, the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) is always the second effect (conversation notice) rather than the first effect (conversation notice) when the mission effect does not appear. It is more desirable to obtain a sense of anticipation than a production with a higher expectation (for example, cut-in or a later-described accessory action), and the production of the timer production (count production display) is the first production. When it is (conversation notice), the expectation cannot be obtained suitably. However, if the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (display the conversation notice appears) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the effect of the timer effect is the first effect. Since either the (conversation notice) or the second effect (cut-in) can be at least expected more than the expectation obtained in the second effect (cut-in), the timer effect You can enjoy with confidence.

  In addition, when such a specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) in the design effect (make the conversation notice appear). Since the appearance ratio of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when no icon is displayed, the game is simply displayed with the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice). A decrease in interest can be suitably suppressed. It should be noted that in realizing such effect control, the variable-side timer effect is not necessarily prepared so as to be executable, and may be realized only by the notice-side timer effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, both the conversation notice and the cut-in (or later-described actor action) can be executed within one production pattern, and the conversation notice is cut-in (or the later-described role). Appears at a timing before (object movement). Therefore, when the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, the mission may be successful even if the count display number (total count) displayed when the timer effect count display is started is small. Decrease in expectation is suppressed from being conscious. In addition, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started, the expectation can be suitably maintained by itself, so that the game entertainment when the timer effect appears can be improved. It is expected to be maintained stably.

  In addition, as will be described later, the timing for displaying (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is the period during which the symbol change targeted for the specific display is being performed. It is possible to appear not only in the middle but also in the period in which the symbol variation that is the target of the specific display is still in a suspended state. In addition, in the situation where the specific indication related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed during the period in which the symbol variation that is the target of the mission effect is still on hold, It will be described later that a special display such as “Mission Success” may appear when it occurs (appears).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) is performed in this way, the notice timer type lottery is performed to determine the execution mode of the notice timer effect as the processing of step S5505. .

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the notice timer type determination table T4 referred to in the notice timer type lottery (step S5505).
As shown in FIG. 152, in this notice side timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the notice side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode or the notice side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode. Random numbers are assigned with different distributions for each variable number. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment refers to the notice-side timer type determination table T4 based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and the obtained effect random number value is the single timer mode and double timer. The notice timer type lottery (step S5505) is executed by determining which one of the modes is assigned.

  The “single timer” to be determined in the notice side timer type lottery corresponds to “a mode in which one notice side timer effect is executed in one effect pattern”, and “double timer”. "Corresponds to" a mode in which two notice side timer effects with different effects are executed in one effect pattern ". In this notice side timer type determination table T4, effect random numbers are assigned for each variable number so that the big hit expectation is higher when the “double timer” appears than the “single timer”.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment can execute the above-described variation timer effect depending on the type (variation number) of the variation pattern. Therefore, if it is determined that the notice timer presentation is to be executed in a single timer mode when such a count fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation appear in one production pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in a double timer (or triple timer) manner. Similarly, if it is determined that the notice-side timer effect is to be executed in a double timer mode when the count variation pattern is selected, the change-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect are included in one effect pattern. By appearing, the timer effect is executed in a triple timer (or quadruple timer) mode.

  In other words, in this case, if the number of appearances of the notice timer effect (single, double) is determined regardless of whether the count variation pattern is selected, “appearance of timer effect appearing in one effect pattern” The relationship that “the larger the number, the higher the expectation of jackpot” may collapse, and this makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the effect when the timer effect is executed (which aspect is the higher expectation) There is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest.

  Therefore, in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice side timer effect can appear. When a variation pattern (variation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) that does not execute the variation-side timer effect is selected, the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation) Accordingly, the SP reach having a relatively high degree of expectation makes it easier to select the double timer mode.

  On the other hand, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice timer effect can appear, variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22) for executing two variation-side timer effects with different production targets. Is selected, only in the case of a SP reach with a relatively high expectation according to the reach type (a character reach with a relatively low expectation, a SP reach with a relatively high expectation). Is selected. In other words, in this case, if two quadrature timer effects and two notice timer effects with different effects appear in one effect pattern, the type of SP reach that has a relatively high expectation appears when the quadruple timer mode appears. In this way, it is definitely suggested that the production pattern is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment interest. However, instead of this, if two quadrature timer effects and two notice-side timer effects with different effects appear in one effect pattern, if a quadruple timer mode appears, it is definitely determined that a jackpot symbol appears. It may be suggested.

  When a variation pattern (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22) for executing two variation-side timer representations with different representation targets is selected, the single timer mode is selected in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505). Even when is selected, the appearance of a triple timer appears when two variable timer effects and one notice timer effect with different effects appear in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer mode appears, the above-mentioned timer notice lottery (the first timer notice lottery, the second timer notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation. When the change numbers 13 and 14 to be selected are selected, the notification that the notice side timer effect is executed only with a relatively low probability compared to the change numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to make a triple timer) (See the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

  On the other hand, a variation pattern (variation numbers 9-12, 17-20) for executing one variation-side timer effect is selected from among variation patterns (variation numbers 7-22) in which the notice-side timer effect can appear. In the case of the character reach (variation numbers 9 to 12) having a relatively low expectation, the selection probability of the mode of the double timer is set to be significantly low, and the SP reach (variation number) having a relatively high expectation is set. 17-20) is set such that the selection probability of the double timer mode is significantly higher. In other words, in this case, coupled with the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, a triple timer mode (one variation side timer representation and two notice side timer representations, or two variation side timers in one production pattern). When a production and one notice timer production) appear, the rate of appearance of SP reach with a relatively high expectation rather than a character expectation with a relatively low expectation will increase. Will be able to.

  In the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, only the process of selecting either a single timer or a double timer is performed as the notice timer presentation type. However, for the notice timer type lottery (step S5505), a lottery process may be performed so that a notice timer effect of a triple timer or more can be executed, and the count display mode of the notice timer effect is expected. You may make it perform as a lottery process about which to perform by which of multiple different aspects (for example, color difference etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 149, after the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed as described above, as a result of the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505), the single timer mode and the double timer mode are determined. Which of the above is determined to perform the notice timer effect (step S5506), and further is determined to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507 and S532). Production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) targeted for the timer target candidate production (preliminary production which can be the production target of the notice side timer production) with the contents (table) according to each result of , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
If it is in the first processing state that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and has been determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507), First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when in the first processing status, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for (step S5508). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the notice effects is to be the effect object of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5509).

If it is in the second processing state that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined not to be executed (NO in step S5507), First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when the second processing state is set, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the contents of the effect of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for (step S5523). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer object candidate effects as many as the number determined in the determination process, and which of these notice effects are targeted for the effect of the timer effect Is performed (step S5524).

When it is in the third processing state that is a mode of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and has been determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532), First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to in the third processing status, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the contents of the effect of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for the above (step S5533). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer object candidate effects as many as the number determined in the determination process, and which of these notice effects are targeted for the effect of the timer effect Is performed (step S5534).

If it is in the fourth processing situation that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and has been determined to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to in the fourth processing status, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the contents of the effect of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for the above (step S5543). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the notice effects is to be the effect object of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5544).

  FIG. 153 shows the reach type when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) has not been made. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a comparison of the upper limit number of appearances of candidate timer effects produced according to the processing status (the fifth processing status and the sixth processing status described below in addition to the first to fourth processing statuses) and the like. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), make the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). ) Is controlled so as to increase the upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects as compared to when the decision to execute is not made.

  That is, whether or not to perform the notice side timer effect, whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, whether or not the reach type is a relatively high expectation reach effect, Whatever the result of the determination, etc., if the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made, the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is increased as compared with the case where no is performed.

  Note that such processing setting is performed when the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect is executed (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, S5544), or when a later-described notice-timer timer effect is not executed. This is realized through the setting of each table referred to in the effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

  According to such a configuration, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, it is expected that the appearance ratio of the notice effect will increase and the average number of appearances will increase, thereby improving the game entertainment. Not only that, but if there are so many notice effects, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation may appear in these notice effects and the mission will be successful. become able to. As described above, the effect to be displayed on the mission display is required to be an effect with a relatively low expectation, such as a conversation notice, but it may not necessarily have the lowest expectation. When the types of effects that can be the effects of the timer effect are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, it may be classified into a group with a relatively low degree of expectation. Or, it is a notice effect that appears at a timing earlier than the start of the reach effect because the expectation is lower than the specific effect with a relatively high expectation that appears after the reach effect is started. Also good.

  FIG. 154 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and is in the first processing state in which a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5a referred in the process of step S5508 in that case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154, the table T5a is referred to when the notice timer effect or mission effect is executed, and therefore corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice timer effect cannot be executed. When variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to loss variation patterns (variation patterns that cannot be mission-successful) that cause conversation notices to appear as the contents of variation effects are obtained, T5a is never referenced.

  In addition, since the table T5a is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in a single timer mode, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. Allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  Also, in the table T5a, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are allocated to the winning effects among the variable numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variable number 14. Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in the change numbers 10 to 12, as the effect content of the change effect. One timer object candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and when the variable number 14 is reached, two timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as the effect contents of the change effect. It is like that. Accordingly, in the case of the variable numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the variable number 14, substantially two notice effects are provided. Each is synonymous with being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variable number 14, an effect random number of “400” is actually assigned to the number of notices 3, and an effect random number of “600” is assigned to the number of notices 4. Therefore, it can be said that among the change numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, the most notice productions are assigned most easily.

  By the way, the effect pattern (Character Reach + Conversation Notice) that appears when the variable number is 10 has a lower jackpot expectation than the effect pattern (Character Reach + cut-in A) that appears when the variable number is 11 and 12. As described above. However, in the table T5a that is referred to in the first processing state, the variable number 10 is “the mission success (special display)” is displayed as an effect pattern that is then stopped with the jackpot symbol. In view of the fact that it is “executed”, the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are increased compared to the cases of the variable numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). Is used to improve the game entertainment when the mission success (special indication) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. . However, in the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, The variation number 20 at the time of hitting has a higher number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect than the variation number 18 (the number of notifications is more likely to increase as the variation number has a higher jackpot expectation). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  As will be described later, in the character reach when in the first processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. , A special timer) can appear. However, one of up to five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalizing effect (special timer), and when a conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to mission success. When four or more candidate effects appear, a notice effect that confirms the big hit will appear. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 7 that is the character reach at the time of losing, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number that is the character reach at the time of losing (cut-in A). 11, only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects can appear (in reality, a maximum of three).

  On the other hand, in SP reach when in the first processing status, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, The timing at which the cut-in B and the action B action) can appear is reached. However, when the conversation advance notice is selected, it will function as a jackpot effect due to the mission success, and therefore when the six timer target candidate effects appear, the jackpot confirmed notice effect will appear. Therefore, in the table T5a, the variation number 15 that is the SP reach at the time of losing is allowed to appear up to a maximum of five timer target candidate effects, and the variation number that is the character reach (cut-in B) at the time of losing. In 19, only up to four timer target candidate effects can appear (in reality, a maximum of five).

In addition, the example is described below about each effect prepared as said timer object candidate effect.
-Conversation notice: A line of a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the jackpot expectation may vary depending on the content of the line, but when the conversation notice appears, It is set lower than the effects (holding change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, action B operation).
・ Hold change: Display corresponding to the hold display that has been subject to digestion even during symbol fluctuations performed in response to hold-up (display that corresponds to the hold display when in the hold state, although not already in the hold state) Is displayed, it changes the display mode (color, etc.) of the hold display that has been digested, and the expected jackpot expectation may change depending on the display mode after the change. The big hit expectation degree at the time when the pending change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation.
Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed with respect to the effects performed during symbol variation, and the expectation of jackpot when the cut-in A appears is the role A It is set lower than the operation, cut-in B, and accessory B operation.
-Action A action: Operates any of the above-described production movable bodies, and the big hit expectation when the action A action appears is set lower than the action B action.
Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed with respect to the effect that is being performed during symbol variation, and the expectation of jackpot when the cut-in B appears is the role A It is set lower than the operation and the action B operation.
-Action B action: Operates one of the above-described production movable bodies, and the big hit expectation when the action B action appears is another effect (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A It is set higher than the action A operation, cut-in B). The production movable body that is operated by the accessory B operation may be the same as or different from the production movable body used in the accessory A operation, but the operation is performed when the same production movable body is used. The aspect will be different.

  Each of these effects can be executed as a timer-targeted effect, and before the count display is executed, during, after execution, or during a variable period in which the timer effect is not executed. Can be executed as an effect which is not subject to the timer. Each of these effects may be executed in any of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, such as a blue cut-in A and a red cut-in A, for example. Moreover, about a pending | holding change, you may make it include the premier aspect (special aspect) which becomes jackpot decision when it appears. However, in this case, if a premier aspect (special aspect) appears during the execution of the count display, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the hold change is not executed as the target of the timer effect.

  FIG. 155 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and is in the second processing state in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5b referred in the process of step S5523 in that case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the notice timer presentation is executed, the change number 1 corresponding to the change pattern in which the notice timer presentation cannot be executed. When .about.6 is acquired, the table T5b is not referred to. However, since the reference is made when the mission effect is not executed, the change numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss change pattern (the change pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the change effect. , 21 is acquired, the table T5b is also referred to. Therefore, in the table T5b, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Similarly, the table T5b is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected for each variable number so as to be selected. Is allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  Similarly, in the table T5b, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 7 to 12, whereas Only a maximum of one timer object candidate effect is assigned to the relatively high expectation numbers 13 and 14. However, in variation numbers 7 and 8, a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in change numbers 9 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the change effect. Two timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as variable effect effects contents when the variable numbers 13 and 14 are reached. It has become. Therefore, in the case of the variable numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the case of the variable numbers 13 and 14, substantially two notices are provided. It is synonymous with the production being assigned to each.

  Then, for example, since the variation number 14 is substantially synonymous with the fact that a production random number of “1000” is assigned to the number of notices 3, the variation numbers 7 to 6 corresponding to the character reach production. It can be said that among the fourteen, it is assigned so that the most noticeable effects appear most easily.

  Note that, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in the SP reach, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of the character reach.

  In addition, in table T5b, the production random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as table T5a. However, since the table is referenced when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average appearance number) of timer target candidate effects is smaller than T5a.

  FIG. 156 is a mode of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and is in the third processing situation in which a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5c referred in the process of step S5533.

  First, as shown in FIG. 156, the table T5c is also referred to when the notice side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, and therefore corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to loss variation patterns (variation patterns that cannot be mission-successful) that cause conversation notices to appear as the production contents of the variation effects are acquired. T5c is never referenced.

  However, since the table T5c is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in a double timer mode, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated. However, with regard to a variation number in which a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variation effect, it is not always necessary to assign two timer object candidate effects as the effect content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect according to the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Also, in the table T5c, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, up to four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the winning effects among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only up to three timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variation number 14. Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in the change numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the change effect is 1 Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear, and when the variable number 14 is reached, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the variable effect. ing. Accordingly, in the case of the variable numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the variable number 14, substantially two notice effects are provided. Each is synonymous with being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variable number 14, an effect random number of “400” is assigned to the number of notices 4, and an effect random number of “600” is assigned to the number of notices 5. Therefore, it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, the most notice productions are assigned most easily.

  In addition, in the character reach when in the third processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer until the symbol fluctuation is stopped) ) Has come to appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalizing effect (special timer), and when a conversation advance notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to mission success. When four or more appear, a notice effect for confirming the big hit (mission success or special timer) will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, the maximum number of variation at the time of losing is up to three (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notice side is limited to three). Is not allowed to appear.

  In addition, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot finalizing effect (special timer), a notice number 5 is selected when the variable number is 8, or a notice is given when the variable numbers are 10 and 12. When the number 4 is selected, and the notice number 3 is selected at the time of the variation number 14, it is determined that the jackpot finalizing effect (special timer) is executed. In this way, when the notice timer presentation is executed in the double timer mode, the rate of appearance of the special timer described later is higher than when the notice timer presentation is executed in the single timer mode. In addition to winning the jackpot, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the game will shift to a high-probability short-time state and that a 16-round jackpot game will be executed. In particular, it is a double-timer mode, and when a mission effect is executed, it is possible to have such a sense of expectation even more effectively. It will be possible to create a directing situation.

  By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variable number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in) that appears when the variable numbers are 11 and 12. This is as described above. However, in the table T5c referred to in the third processing status, the variable number 10 is “the mission success (special display)” is displayed as an effect pattern that is then stopped with the jackpot symbol. In view of the fact that it is “executed”, the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher than in the case of the variable numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). Is used to improve the game entertainment when the mission success (special indication) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. . However, in the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, The variation number 20 at the time of hitting has a higher number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect than the variation number 18 (the number of notifications is more likely to increase as the variation number has a higher jackpot expectation). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  As will be described later, in the SP reach when in the third processing state, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. , The cut-in B, the action B action) can appear. However, when the conversation advance notice is selected, it will function as a jackpot effect due to the mission success, and therefore when the six timer target candidate effects appear, the jackpot confirmed notice effect will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, up to five variable numbers corresponding to the SP reach at the time of losing (up to five total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notice side) However, the timer target candidate effect is not allowed to appear.

  FIG. 157 is an aspect of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and is in a fourth processing situation in which it is determined that a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5d referred in the process of step S5543.

  First, as shown in FIG. 157, since the table T5d is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed, the change number 1 corresponding to the change pattern in which the notice-side timer effect cannot be executed. When .about.6 is acquired, the table T5d is not referred to. However, since the reference is made when the mission effect is not executed, the change numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss change pattern (the change pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the change effect. , 21 is acquired, the table T5b is also referred to. Therefore, in the table T5d, production random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Similarly, the table T5d is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected for each variable number so as to be selected. Is allocated. However, with regard to a variation number in which a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variation effect, it is not always necessary to assign two timer object candidate effects as the effect content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect according to the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Similarly, in the table T5d, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer object candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer object candidate effects are reached for the winning effects of the variable numbers 13 and 14. Only allocated. However, in variation numbers 7 and 8, a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in change numbers 9 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the change effect. Two timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as variable effect effects contents when the variable numbers 13 and 14 are reached. It has become. Therefore, in the case of the variable numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the case of the variable numbers 13 and 14, substantially two notices are provided. It is synonymous with the production being assigned to each.

  Then, for example, since the change number 14 is substantially synonymous with the fact that a production random number of “1000” is assigned to the number of notices 4, the change numbers 7˜ It can be said that among the fourteen, the most noticeable effects are assigned so as to appear most easily.

  Note that, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in the SP reach, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of the character reach.

  In addition, in the table T5d, the production random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as the table T5c, but since the mission production is not executed, the table is referred to when the mission production is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is smaller than T5c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), it is determined whether the notice side timer effect is performed in either the single timer mode or the double timer mode (step S5505). S5506), and further, a candidate for the timer with contents (tables T5a to d) according to each result of whether or not the mission effect is determined as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507 and S5532) After determining the number of appearances of the effect (the notice effect that can be the effect of the notice timer effect) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, S5543), the determined number of notices of any type as the timer target candidate effect Make a production appear, and then select any of them A determination process as to whether to effect target Ma effect (step S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  FIG. 158 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation where a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T6a-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5508 (step S5509).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158, this table T6a-1 (step S5509: number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the form of a single timer. Therefore, one notice effect that is determined to be executed as a timer object candidate effect is automatically set as an effect object of the notice timer effect (in the figure, the ○ mark indicates the notice timer effect effect). It is executed as a production target). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5509: number of notices N), N timer object candidate effects are determined. At the same time, the notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as the effect of the notice timer effect.

  In addition, it is a case where it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects, and N-1 of them (1 in the single mode, 2 in the double mode) ) When the following number of effects are set as the effects of the notice timer effect (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544), even when N effects of the same effect combination are selected as the timer target candidate effects It is desirable that the degree of jackpot expectation varies depending on which of these effects is determined as the notice timer effect. For example, a first effect that appears at a relatively early timing in one effect pattern (for example, a conversation notice) and a subsequent effect that appears at a relatively late timing in one effect pattern (for example, an accessory A) Motion) is selected as the timer target candidate effect, the later effect (for example, the action A action) is performed on the notice side effect than when the previous effect (for example, conversation notice) is selected as the effect object of the notice side effect timer. The ratio of appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) is set to be higher when the timer is to be produced (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even when a variation number for executing “conversation notice” or “cut-in A, B” is acquired as the contents of the effect of the change effect, As the contents of the production, “conversation notice” or “cut-in A, B” can be determined. However, as a result, if it is determined that the same effect appears in both the effect content of the change effect and the effect content of the notice effect, the control is not performed so that it appears separately as the effect content of the notice effect. A process of setting an effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) appearing as the effect contents of the effect as an effect target of the notice side timer effect is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, and S544).

  For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1), when the “conversation notice” is determined as the production content of the notice effect with the variable numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, When “In A” is determined as the content of the notice effect, or when “Cut-in B” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect with the change numbers 19 to 22, the effect content of the change effect and the effect of the notice effect It is determined that the same production appears in both the contents. However, here, the control for causing the content to appear separately as the effect content of the notice effect is not performed, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) that appears as the effect content of the variable effect is set as the effect object of the notice timer effect. Processing is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appears in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the notice effect, this is separately provided as the effect content of the notice effect. The specific effect on the side that appears separately (the content of the effect of the notice effect) may be set as the effect object of the notice side timer effect.

  In addition, this table T6a-1 (number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear), and is also shown in FIG. As described above, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the “conversation notice” are acquired as the contents of the variation effect, or “conversation notice” is selected as the timer target candidate effect (the contents of the notice effect). In the case (PTN1), a special display (successful mission) is displayed and it is definitely suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

  In this regard, in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 when the “conversation notice” is executed as the contents of the variation effect, the variation numbers 8, 12, and when the “conversation notice” is not performed as the contents of the variation effect. Compared to 16 and 20, the ratio of determining “conversation notice” as the production content of the notice effect is set to be lower. That is, as described above, when “conversation notice” is determined as the content of the notice effect in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are subject to the “conversation notice”. In this way, when two timer effects target the same effect, the big hit expectation is basically compared to the case where the two timer effects target different effects. This is because the degree is set to be low. As a result, it is possible to relatively reduce the appearance ratio of the special display (mission success) when both the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation are directed to the “conversation notice”.

  This is also the case with the production contents of the fluctuation effects other than the “conversation notice”. For example, among the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, the fluctuation numbers that do not execute “cut-in B” as the production contents of the fluctuation effects. Among 15 and 16, 150 production random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 15 at the time of losing, whereas 250 production random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 16 at the time of winning. On the other hand, among the variation numbers 19 and 20 in which “cut-in B” is executed among the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, the variation number 19 at the time of losing includes 250 production random numbers. On the other hand, only 200 production random numbers are assigned to the variation number 20 at the time of hitting.

  In other words, in this case, when “Cut-in B” is targeted only for the fluctuation timer presentation at the fluctuation numbers 15 and 16, both the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation appear at the fluctuation numbers 19 and 20. Thus, compared to the case where both of them are “cut-in B” as a production target, the ratio of appearance of the big hit symbol becomes higher. As a result, in the situation where two timer effects are counted and displayed at the same time, whether or not those timer effects reach the predetermined numerical value for the same effect target functions as an important effect element. Amusement entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In the variation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 of the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach, until the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol variation) In the mode of the special timer that targets the effects that appear after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the performance pattern instead of the effect that appears in the game (for example, a probable change suggestion effect or a high round suggestion effect during the jackpot game) It can be decided to execute the notice side timer effect. Although this special timer will be described later, in this embodiment, even if it is decided to generate a special timer in the processing of step S5509, the special timer may not appear, and its execution The execution mode of the special timer, including the presence / absence of this, is determined in the process of the subsequent step S5514.

  Here, the notice side timer effect may have a relatively high jackpot expectation even if the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small (such as when it starts from the middle of the variable display). On the other hand, in the variable timer production, the expectation suggested by the timer production is controlled to be lower when the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small than when the count is large. May be.

  As will be described later, such a special timer not only provides a definite suggestion that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) will appear in the performance pattern, but when it appears, it has a high-probability short-time gaming state or a 16-round jackpot. It can be said that it is more beneficial for the player than a timer effect that is directed to other effects in that the rate at which the game is executed is relatively high. Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By controlling, a sense of expectation when a special display (when the mission is successful) appears more suitably (steps S5509, S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1), among the fluctuation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach where the special timer can appear, the variable timer effect (mission success) that is directed to the conversation notice appears. 100 random numbers are assigned to the special timers for the fluctuation numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, while the variable timer effect (successful mission) for which the conversation notice is directed is not appearing. In the fluctuation numbers 8 and 12, only 50 production random numbers are allocated to the special timer.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even when the special display (mission success) does not appear, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (steps S5509, S5534), the mission effect (conversation) The expectation when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) appears by controlling the appearance rate of the special timer to be higher than when the notice is not given) (steps S5524 and S5544). Is more suitably played.

  In addition, when the timer effect is performed in a double manner by the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the appearance rate of the special timer is smaller than when the timer effect is performed in the double manner only by the notice timer effect. It is set to be low. Also, even if the timer effect is performed in a triple manner with one variable timer effect and two notice timer effects, one of the notice timer effects is targeted for the same effect as the variable timer effect. In this case, the special timer is set such that the appearance ratio of the special timer is lower than that in the case where the same effect is not set as the effect target in the notice timer effect and the variable timer effect.

  FIG. 159 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a figure which shows an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5523 (step S5524).

  As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach where the special timer may appear, the variable numbers 10 and 14 50 effect random numbers are assigned, and 20 effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 8 and 12. In this way, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer is compared to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (table T6b-1). It is clear that the appearance ratio of is set to be low.

  Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is referred to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the variable effect. The table T6b-1 (notice number 1) is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each number of notices.

  In addition, in the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, the variation timer production having “conversation notice” as the production target appears as the production content of the fluctuation production. When “conversation notice” is selected as the production content, both the variable timer presentation and the notice timer presentation are executed with “conversation notice” as the production target. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), when “conversation notice” is selected in the variable numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22, the variable numbers “ The production random numbers are distributed so that the expectation of jackpot is lower than when “conversation notice” is selected.

  The contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect other than such “conversation notice” are the same. For example, “cut-in B” that can be the effect of both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect in the SP reach, Allocation is performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described table T6a-1 (number of notices 1).

  Similarly, this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is also referred to when it is decided to execute the notice side timer effect in a single timer mode. One notice effect that is determined to be executed as a timer target candidate effect is naturally set as an effect object of the notice timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5524: number N of notices), N timer object candidate effects are determined. The same applies to the determination of the notice effect and the determination of one of them as the effect subject of the notice timer effect.

  Timer target notice lottery (step S5534, when the notice side effect timer is performed in the double mode, in contrast to the timer object notice lottery (step S5509, S5524) when the notice side effect timer is performed in such a single mode. In S5544), when both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are the same effect, it is a big hit compared to the case where the effect of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is different. The production random numbers are basically distributed in the same manner such that the degree of expectation is set low.

  FIG. 160 is an aspect of a double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

  As shown in FIG. 160, this table T6d-2f (step S5544: number of notices 2) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the double timer mode. For this reason, both of the two notice effects that are determined to be executed as timer target candidate effects are each set as the effect objects of the notice timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (3 or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5544: number N of notice), N timer object candidate effects are determined. At the same time, the notice effect is determined and two of them are determined as the effects of the notice timer effect. Such processing is also executed in the timer target advance notice lottery in other production situations.

  As shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d-2f, when both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are the same effect, the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect It is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the case where an effect different from is targeted for the effect.

  Further, when one of the two notice effects selected as the notice side effect timer is the same effect as the effect side effect timer, one of the two notice effects selected as the special notice side effect timer is on the variable side. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than the case where it is not the same production target as the production timer.

  In particular, in the case of the fluctuation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22, when both of the two notice effects selected as the notice side effect timer are the same effect targets as the two variable side effect timers that appear in one effect pattern. The expectation level for jackpots is significantly lower.

  As shown in FIG. 149, as a result of such a timer target notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which of the timer target candidate effects should appear, the notice timer performance effects When the target is determined, a count display lottery is performed as the processing of step 510 next.

  In this count display lottery (step 510), each effect determined to appear as a timer target candidate effect is caused to appear at any timing within one effect pattern (fluctuation pattern), and further to the effect object. A determination is made as to which timing within the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) the notice side timer effect to be counted and displayed is to be executed. In this determination, when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the notice timer effect is late, the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is compared to when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the notice timer effect is early. It is desirable to be performed so that the appearance ratio of) increases.

  FIG. 161 is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number equivalent to a character reach is selected.

For example, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 161, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side,
・ Normal production period during which regular production is performed,
-Normal reach production period after the decorative pattern has reached the reach in the background at the time of normal production,-Character reach production period where the production progresses by switching to a different background from the normal production, and-Winning of the jackpot It is determined that each period such as the symbol stop period in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (big hit symbol, lost symbol) as shown in the figure appears in sequence within a 50 second variation time (period in which symbol variation is performed). (Refer to the lines of “variable time” and “variable PTN effect” in the figure).

  Also, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, the variation side timer effect is started as the effect pattern in accordance with the start of the symbol change, and this is displayed for 10 seconds. ”And the fact that the variable-side timer effect is started again after a predetermined time has elapsed and displayed for 10 seconds, and then“ cut-in A ”is made to appear.

  As described above, even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), the production pattern is not limited to this, and the variation timer production is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and this is counted and displayed for 5 seconds. After that, it is also possible to select other performance patterns that cause “conversation notice” to appear. Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, selection of such an effect pattern has already been performed before the lottery (each process shown by FIG. 149) regarding the said notice effect.

  Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), it is determined in the timer-targeted notice lottery (here, step S5524) while the various production periods appear sequentially and the production contents on the variable side are already determined. A determination is made as to at what timing each of the effect target of the notice side effect timer that has been made and the notice side effect timer that counts and displays the effect object. In addition, in addition to the timer target candidate effects that will be the target of the notice side effect timer in the timer target notice lottery, if the timer target candidate effects that are not the target of the effect are further determined, The appearance timing is also determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

  For example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer subject notice lottery (here, step S5524), as shown in FIG. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute the conversation notice and the notice timer presentation. In this embodiment, among the conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, the aspect of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation degree of the big hit, and the big hit expectation degree is selected as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the jackpot winning or fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 7 to 14). It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, at this time, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 in which the conversation notice appears as the contents of the effect of the change effect are acquired, the notice effect is also shown in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When “conversation notice” is determined as the production content, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the contents of the effect of the variation effect, the timer notice count is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the contents of the effect of the effect of the change without causing the conversation notice to appear as the contents of the effect of the change effect. The control to be performed is executed (mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), the contents of the notice effect are “suspended”. When “change” is determined, it is determined in either of the change changes 1 to 5 that the hold change and the notice timer effect are executed, and “cut-in A” is decided as the effect contents of the notice effect. In the case where the cut-in A and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed, it is determined whether the cut-in A and the notice-side timer effect are executed respectively. If the action A action 1 to 4 is performed, it is determined whether the action A action and the timer side timer effect are to be executed. If Ma "is determined so that the determining whether to perform the announcement side timer effect in any aspect of special timers 1 and 2.

  In this embodiment, in the selection of any of the changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A effects 1 to 3, and the accessory A actions 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode with the smallest number is the highest expectation degree. The selection probabilities are set so that the big hit expectation increases as the number increases. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are effects that indicate that the big hit symbol (special display mode) always appears.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment has three timings at which the notice side timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although it has been prepared (at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F), the appearance timings of these are subject to multiple types of timer notices (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in) A, an accessory A operation, and a special timer). At such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of change, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F), a plurality of count display totals when the notice side timer effect appears are prepared ( 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.), and which of the count display total number is displayed, it is predicted which production is the production target. The structure is difficult.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, 10 seconds at a timing that comes slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings. , 20 seconds, 30 seconds, the notice side timer effect with the total count display total can appear. However, when a notice timer effect with a total count display of 10 seconds appears, it is difficult to predict which of the conversation notice 3 and the hold change 3 is being executed only in the character reach effect pattern. Even when the notice timer effect with the total count display of 20 seconds appears, either the hold change 4 or the cut-in A2 mode is executed only in the effect pattern of the character reach. It is difficult to predict.

  In this regard, when a notice-side timer effect having a total count display of 30 seconds appears at a timing that arrives slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings, only the character reach effect pattern is displayed. If it sees, only the aspect of the action A operation | movement 2 can be performed. However, looking at the SP reach effect pattern (see FIG. 162) described later, the mode of the action A action 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, so the appearance timing of the notice E2 is a little. Even if a notice timer effect with a total count display count of 30 seconds appears at the timing of the previous arrival, the notice timer effect is produced in any manner including whether it is a character reach or an SP reach. It is difficult to predict what will be done.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to leave unclear which effect is the target of the production when the notice timer effect appears (the big hit expectation varies depending on the type of the effect targeted for the effect). Therefore, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained until the count display of the timer effect becomes a specific numerical value (0 in this case). In this embodiment, when a notice timer effect with the same count display total number appears at the same timing, the effect target is basically a conversation notice (unless there is a balance with a mission effect or the like). When the jackpot expectation is the lowest, the jackpot expectation is set to gradually increase in the order of the hold change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when the notice timer effect appears, a plurality of count display totals (the degree of big hit expectation varies depending on the length of the number of seconds) are prepared at any appearance timing. When the notice timer effect appears, it becomes possible to have an interest in which the total count display count is, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the notice timer effect appears. .

  In this embodiment, even if it is a notice-side timer effect that appears at any timing, the effect target is made difficult to predict at the time of appearance, but one effect target for the total count display count A mode in which the production target is set to be predictable without associating only (for example, a special timer) may also be included. Further, the appearance timing at which the notice side timer effect may appear may include an appearance timing at which only one count display total appears.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), for convenience of explanation, when the same effect is made the effect of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, The side timer effect and the notice timer effect are counted for the same number of seconds, or as if the count display is terminated at the same timing. However, as described above, the end timing of each count display is actually made different even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. One of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect reaches the specific numerical value (0 in this case) first and is terminated, whereas the other count display is continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), it is described as if the timer effect count display is made in seconds, but the unit of the number appearing in the count display is “seconds”. Is not limited to. Therefore, for example, the time required for the number change of the count display may be different between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, or the time required for the change of each number in the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect is constant. It does not have to be.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), when “special timer” is determined as the contents of the notice effect, the notice timer effect in either of the special timers 1 and 2 is used. Is going to decide what to do. That is, in this case, after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach), the count display is set to a specific numerical value (here, 0) when 20 seconds have elapsed (during the jackpot game execution period). Will be reached. Then, after this, an effect (for example, a hit type for shifting to a high-probability short-time state or a hit type in which a 16-round jackpot game is played) is started, which suggests that it is a type advantageous to the player as a jackpot type. However, such a special timer mode is set in step S5514 described later.

  In this embodiment, it is decided to select which of the modes of the special timers 1 and 2 is selected in the count display lottery (step S5511). It may be set in step S5514.

  Further, when the count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, not the timing at which the variable display according to the hold information is started, the timer pre-reading effect described later is not executed. Alternatively, an aspect (for example, during timer preparation) that is displayed in a timer pre-reading effect described later may appear (for example, appear at a predetermined probability) for a predetermined time until the count display is started.

  FIG. 162 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the fluctuation number equivalent to SP reach is selected.

For example, when variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 162, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side,
・ Normal production period during which regular production is performed,
-Normal reach production period after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode under the background of the normal production,-Character reach production period where the production progresses by switching to a different background from the normal production,
-The SP reach production period that appears in the form of further development, and the decoration symbols are confirmed to stop (decoration of jackpot, lost) Each period such as the symbol stop period is determined to appear in order within a fluctuation time of 90 seconds (period in which symbol fluctuation is performed) ("fluctuation time" in the figure), (See “Variable PTN Production” line).

  Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 is acquired, after the variable side timer effect is started as the effect pattern at the start of the symbol change and displayed for 10 seconds, the “conversation notice” is displayed. ”, And after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable side timer effect is restarted and displayed for 10 seconds, and then“ cut-in B ”appears.

  In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), as in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), even if the variation pattern (variation number) is one, Is not limited to this, and other effect patterns can be selected, such as starting the fluctuating timer effect after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and displaying the “conversation notice” after displaying it for 5 seconds. ing.

  In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), for example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect of the notice effect in the timer object notice lottery (here, step S5524), As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in any of the conversation notices 1 to 6 whether the conversation notice and the notice timer presentation are to be executed. In this embodiment, among the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the aspect of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation degree of the big hit, and the big hit expectation degree is selected as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the jackpot win or fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 15 to 22). It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, similarly, when the change numbers 17, 18, 21, and 22 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the change effect are acquired, the notice is also given in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When “conversation notice” is determined as the production content of the production, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the contents of the effect of the variation effect, the timer notice count is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the contents of the effect of the effect of the change without causing the conversation notice to appear as the contents of the effect of the change effect. The control to be performed is executed (mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variable numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, the timer target notice lottery (in this case, step S5524) shows “pending” as the contents of the notice effect. When “change” is determined, it is determined which of the change changes 1 to 7 to execute the hold change and the notice timer production, and “cut-in A” is decided as the notice contents of the notice effect. In the case where the cut-in A and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed, it is determined whether the cut-in A or the notice-side timer effect is executed, and “act A action” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. If the action A action 1 to 4 is selected, it is determined whether the action A action and the notice timer effect are to be executed, respectively. In the case where “In B” is determined, it is determined in which of cut-in B 1 to 5 the cut-in B and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed. "" Is determined, it is determined in any of the modes B operations 1 to 4 whether to execute the role B operation and the notice timer presentation.

  In this SP reach example as well, any change selections of the on-hold changes 1-7, cut-in A1-5, accessory A operations 1-4, cut-in B1-5, and accessory B operations 1-4 in the figure are shown. Also, the mode with the smallest number is the mode with the lowest expected degree of jackpot, and the selection probabilities are set so that the degree of jackpot expectation increases as the number increases.

  In the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the notice timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, SP reach) is performed are prepared (at the start of change, notice E2). A little before the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the end of the normal reach production period, a timing at which the SP reach production period starts within the character reach production period) It is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 161 in that it is difficult to predict which effect will be produced when an effect appears.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, a mode (for example, a timer for 40 seconds for cut-in B) in which only one production target is associated with the total count display count and the production target is set to be predictable, or a notice is given. The appearance timing at which the side timer effect may appear includes an appearance timing at which only one count display total appears (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP reach effect period starts).

  Thus, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the appearance time of the notice effect or the notice timer effect produced in the timer object notice lottery is determined. In this regard, when the number of notice effects produced in the timer object notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the effects that are designated as notice objects for the notice timer work, the appearance time of the effects that are not designated as the notice timer effect Etc. are also determined. In addition, when the notice timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, at what timing each of the two notice timer effects and the effects to be produced appear (two notice timer effects) (Including whether or not the count display is executed at the time of overlap) is further determined.

  However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of notice effects produced in the timer object notice lottery, whether or not it is a double timer mode, and a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) are executed. It is desirable that the appearance of the notice effect or the appearance of the notice timer effect determined in the timer object notice lottery is determined in a different manner depending on the processing status such as whether or not. For example, in a processing situation where a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is executed, if a conversation notice appears at a relatively early stage after the start of fluctuation, there will be no dramatic excitement. It is desirable to make it easier to select a conversation notice that appears at a later stage. In addition, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when a situation in which the count displays proceed simultaneously is performed rather than when the count displays are performed in a period in which the count displays do not overlap each other. The selection ratio is higher when the situation where each count display progresses simultaneously than when the situation where each count display progresses simultaneously does not appear. It is desirable to do. Further, when the number of the notice effects produced in the timer object notice lottery is two or more, the appearance times of the notice effects are determined so that the notice effects do not appear at the same time.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the notice-side timer effect can appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F, slightly before the end of the normal reach effect period, the character reach effect period Among them, the timing for starting the SP reach production period is within the period during which each notice production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation) can be performed It is desirable to set. In other words, in this case, the notice timer production is started even if the notice effect does not appear at a specific timing, or the notice effect is performed even if the notice timer presentation is not started at a particular timing. It can be expected that the decrease in the entertainment interest will be suppressed. Further, since a notice effect appears at a specific timing, and an effect situation in which a notice side timer effect is started may also occur, it is expected to improve the game entertainment. In this case, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change (at a specific timing), the notification effect is not executed when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the notice side timer effect is started is higher than the time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, the state of the notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery becomes a special timer as the processing of step S5511 next. Determine if it is possible.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, in addition to the timer target candidate effect (notice effect that can be the effect object of the notice side timer effect), non-target The non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and the non-target notice F can be executed as the notice effects (notice effects that cannot be the subject of the notice timer effect). Of these, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed, whereas the notice side timer effect In the situation where the count display is performed, the expectation of jackpot is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F.

  In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the count display is not performed. While there is a relationship in which the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol (a specific symbol aspect) will appear lower than when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed, The notice-side timer effect (count effect) so that the expectation level that a big hit symbol (a specific symbol aspect) appears is higher than when the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed during the display. Display) can be executed. Therefore, the notice-side timer effect (the non-target notice E2 (during the count display execution period) is performed in such a manner that the count display is performed in a manner that greatly increases the degree of expectation when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears in this way. The timer effect) at which the first effect) is started and ended is referred to as a “special timer”.

  That is, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a lower expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), whereas the count display is While being performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a higher expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect). Therefore, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not originally related to the effect of the notice-side timer effect (count effect display), the non-target notice E2 (the first effect) before the count display is exhausted. It is possible to have an interest in whether or not a single production) appears, and thereby maintaining the game entertainment in the period until the count display is digested and a predetermined production (timer target candidate production) is performed. It is expected to be planned.

  In addition, when the count display is started with a small number of counts with a notice side timer effect, the big hit expectation is set to be lower than when the count display is started with a large number of counts with a notice side timer effect, By realizing such control related to the special timer, even when the count display is started with a total number of counts with a small notice side timer effect, the non-target notice E2 is being executed while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to be aware of the possibility of appearing, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. In this sense, if the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the premier mode in which the jackpot is confirmed with the effects (conversation notice, cut-in, accessory action, etc.) that are the targets of the subsequent timer effects. It is desirable to control so that the rate of occurrence of becomes high. Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  In this embodiment, the non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as so-called step effects, and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is a condition that the non-target notice E1 appears. It is supposed to appear in Further, the non-target notice E3 can appear on the condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 have appeared, and in this embodiment, a jackpot symbol always appears when the non-target notice E3 appears. I am doing so. According to such a configuration, when the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the notice-side timer effect is being performed, an interest is given as to whether the non-target notice E2 appears. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest during the count digestion period.

  However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 do not necessarily have to be executed as so-called step effects, and are not necessary for realizing the above-described effect relationship between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F. The target notices E1 and E3 are not necessarily prepared. Further, the order of appearance of the non-target notice F after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears is not limited to this. For example, the non-target notice F (second effect) appears after the non-target notice F (second effect) appears. The target notice E2 (first effect) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may appear first in all notice effects, or may appear last in all notice effects. May be set appropriately. Further, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related to (implying) the type of reach effect executed in the variable display.

  In addition, when the non-target notice E2 is not realized as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 is performed in any of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in a mode with the highest expected degree of jackpot, even if the count display is not performed, the big hit expectation degree may be higher than that of the non-target notice F. . However, when the jackpot expectation degree (expectation degree including all aspects) expected when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is not performed is compared with the jackpot expectation degree expected when the non-target notice F appears, It is required that the big hit expectation is higher when the non-target notice F appears.

  In this regard, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is being performed (in the case of a special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in any of a plurality of modes including a mode with low expectation of big hit In addition, it is desirable that the big hit expectation is higher than the non-target notice F regardless of which mode appears. In other words, in this case, a production situation is created in which the big hit expectation level is dramatically increased despite the non-target notice E2 being executed in a low big hit expectation mode. Even if it appears disappointing for a moment, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved in a surprise manner by confirming that the count display is executed. In this sense, even in such a special timer situation, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in a mode with a low expectation degree of jackpot, and the non-target notice E2 is included in any mode including the low mode. It is desirable that the expected degree of appearance of the jackpot symbol is the same even if the above is executed (further, whether or not another notice effect has occurred). Note that the degree of expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target notice E2 is caused to appear in the situation where the count display is performed, it is desirable to set the highly expected aspect among a plurality of aspects.

  In addition, when the count display across the non-target notice E2 is executed, for example, even when the count display starts with any of the different total counts (for example, “10” and “5”), the same number (for example, It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when “1”). Also, at this time, among the candidates as the total number of counts that appear at the start of the count display (for example, “20”, “10”, “5”), less than half of the candidates with the smallest total number of counts (for example, “5”) It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when the number (number less than 2.5) is reached. In this way, by preventing the non-target notice E2 from appearing until the count display finishes being exhausted, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming entertainment in the period until the count display is exhausted.

  Note that the non-target notice F may be executed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, but in a special timer situation, the non-target notice F has the highest jackpot expectation. Even if it appears in the form, it is required that the non-target notice F is set so that the big hit expectation is not higher than the non-target notice E2 (for example, the aspect with the lowest big hit expectation).

  Further, the non-target notice E2 may be allowed to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the start of the variable display. That is, in this case, even when the count display appears at the same timing with the same total number of counts, there are cases where the non-target notice E2 is straddled and when there is no straddle. It is expected to maintain.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the variable timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears within the count display execution period among the candidates that can be selected as the execution mode (effect pattern). Such a mode is not included.

  As shown in FIG. 149, when it is determined in the process of step S5511 that the notice timer presentation effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512 is performed. When the first timer non-target notice lottery is performed as the above process, and it is determined that the notice timer presentation effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) cannot be a special timer, the process of step S5525 is performed. The second timer non-target notice lottery will be performed.

  The case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer is, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, an effect mode (for example, FIG. 161, conversation announcements 2, 3, hold changes 2-4, cut-in A1, 2, and accessory actions 1, 2, etc.) are selected, and whether or not it is an effect mode that can be a special timer. Are classified in advance.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of the table T7a referred to in the first timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is referred to in the second timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b.

  As shown in FIG. 163 and FIG. 164, in the timer non-target notice lottery (steps S5512, S5525), it cannot be an effect target of the notice timer production based on the big hit result or fluctuation pattern (variation number). A determination process is performed as to which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F prepared as effects is to be executed.

  Among these, the table T7a (first timer non-target notice lottery) referred to at the time of the special timer has the notice E2 compared to the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when not the special timer. The big hit expectation degree when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) to perform is selected is significantly high. More specifically, when the mode for executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is higher than when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected. ing.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) that is referred to when the timer is not a special timer, the notice F is executed when the mode for executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected. The jackpot expectation is lower than when the mode (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  In this embodiment, when the table T7a that is referred to during the special timer is compared with the table T7b that is referred to when it is not the special timer, the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. There is a change in the distribution of the production random numbers, and there is a change in the jackpot expectation level. However, when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected, there is no change in the jackpot expectation level and even the production random number distribution is changed. It is not the same.

  When the timer non-target notice lottery (the first timer non-target notice lottery or the second timer non-target notice lottery) is performed and it is determined which non-target notice is to be executed, step S5513 is performed. It is determined whether or not it is determined that the above-mentioned special timer is to be executed.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in a situation where a specific type of reach effect (character reach) is selected, a notice timer based on the result of the big hit determination (such as a win or fluctuation pattern) An effect (count effect display) is started and the count display can be controlled to continue even after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (effect display). In other words, in this case, the count display will continue even after the effect pattern (effect display) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is finished and the display is made non-display. It becomes difficult to predict the fluctuation time (reach type) of the game, for example, an effect in which the count display started during the symbol change is related to the effect in the big hit gaming state after the symbol stops It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to make the production of the subsequent production interesting.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, a big hit game start interval period or a big hit game after the symbol is fixedly stopped) Period), the number of rounds (16 rounds) that have a high expected value of the amount that can be obtained as a prize when they appear, or the first special effect in which the percentage of winning the type that shifts to the high-probability short-lived game state increases. It is possible to execute the second special effect that increases the ratio of execution. These ratios may include 100%. Then, the timer-side notice effect on the notice side for the effect that starts after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears is counted before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears. The display is controlled to be continuously executed even after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

  That is, in this case, the count display of the notice side timer effect started before the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is not terminated when the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, but the jackpot symbol (special display mode) When the specific numerical value (0 in this case) is reached after continuously being executed even after appears, the first special effect or the second special effect appears. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, not only does it definitely suggest that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) will appear in the performance pattern, but when it appears, a high-probability short-time gaming state or a 16-round jackpot game Since the rate at which is executed is relatively high, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, in addition to winning the big hit in the big hit determination, the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a high probability short-time gaming state or a 16 round big hit game) And when it is determined that it is the specific type, the special timer may be controlled to appear with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that the specific type is not determined. Desired.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the process of step S5513, next, as a process of step S5514, whether or not to make the special timer appear is executed. The execution mode of the special timer is determined including the presence or absence.

  For example, in the process of step S5514, it is first determined whether or not the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a high probability short-time gaming state or a type that generates a 16 round big hit game). As a result, when the big hit is not a specific type, a determination is made that the special timer does not appear with a predetermined probability, and when the special timer appears, the degree of expectation that the big hit is the specific type is increased. Will be able to. The expectation may be 100%. Further, when it is determined that the special timer does not appear, other notice effects (timer target candidate effects, non-target notice) or notice timer effects may appear instead of the special timer.

  In this embodiment, in the process of step S5514 after making a decision to execute the special timer in the timer target notice lottery, the type of jackpot is determined and the special timer is executed based on the result. Whether to execute a special timer in the process of step S5514 by performing the timer target notice lottery based on the type of jackpot, in addition to the jackpot winning, is determined again It may not be determined again whether or not.

  In addition, for the first special effect or the second special effect after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period or jackpot game period after the symbol is fixed and stopped) You may make it perform in either of the some aspect from which the expectation degree which is a special classification differs. That is, in this case, when the special timer appears, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in a highly expected manner among a plurality of aspects. It will be.

  In this embodiment, for the effects (first special effect or second special effect) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, a predetermined time elapses after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is made to appear at a timing when 20 seconds have passed, but a plurality of timings after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the first after 15 seconds have passed) You may make it appear at a timing and the 2nd timing 30 seconds passed. That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first mode that reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) when 15 seconds have elapsed (or just before) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, and the jackpot symbol When 30 seconds have passed since the (special display mode) appears (or just before that), either the second mode that reaches a specific numerical value (0 in this case) is selected and made to appear.

  In this case, it is set so that the ratio of the special type of big hit is higher when the production appears at the second timing than when the production appears at the first timing, and the big hit is the specific type. Sometimes, if it is executed so that the ratio of causing the special timer to appear in the second mode is higher than that in the first mode, how long the count display after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears will be continued. It becomes possible to have an additional interest. These ratios may include 100%. By the way, when the production does not appear at any of the first timing and the second timing, the ratio that the special type jackpot is obtained is set lower than when the production appears at the first timing. .

  For the special timer, in the execution period of the variable display prior to the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode), for example, it is displayed as “Preparing timer”, and “Preparing timer” is displayed. The count display may be started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) has appeared. In other words, during the big hit game, the time required to digest each round game varies according to the progress of the game, so in the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears If the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined value during a specific round game, and further to set the effect to be produced. In this regard, if the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of “timer preparation” is maintained until a specific round game in the jackpot game is started. In addition, by causing the count display to start in accordance with the start of the specific round game, the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game so that an effect to be rendered is executed. It becomes possible to set to. At this time, the display such as “Preparing timer” may not be performed until the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears.

  In addition, when the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in this manner, it is different even during the execution of the variable display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. You may make it start the count display of the notice side timer effect. As for the other notice side timer effect, the effect that the count display is consumed and the effect to be produced appears before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, or the jackpot symbol ( It may be one (double special timer) in which an effect to be produced appears after the count display has been consumed after the special display mode) appears.

  It should be noted that the production contents that are different from the production during the variable display and the production during the jackpot game appear, and usually the production at the time of production switching different from any production (for example, opening production etc.) is executed between them. Often done. In this respect, the timer display is set so that the count display does not reach a predetermined value within the switching period in which the effect at the time of such effect switching is executed, and the count display is not displayed within the switching period. It is desirable to make the player recognize that the two effects (in this case, the effect during the variable display and the effect during the big hit game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display is digested for the elapsed time, and when the count display is displayed again, the count display is hidden. It is desirable to control so that the value is smaller than the numerical value (not countdown, but more when counting up).

  Then, whether the execution mode of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514) or when the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), the timer object notice lottery or count is then performed as the processing of step S5515. After the notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like is set in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. Thereby, drawing data corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect in the effect symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case where it is determined that the timer side timer effect is not won (NO in step S5503), various lotteries (notice side of the notice side timer effect) are performed. The timer target candidate effect (notice) with the contents (table) according to whether the mission effect is determined as a result of the second mission effect lottery without performing the timer type lottery or the single lottery (step S5552). An effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, and S5564) for a notice effect that can be an effect of the side timer effect is performed.

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
When the notification processing is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552). First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when the fifth processing status is in effect, the number of timer target candidate effects during the execution of one effect pattern is used as the effect contents of the notice effect. A process for determining whether to appear is performed (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-described timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process (step S5554).

When the notification processing is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission processing (make the conversation notice appear) is determined to be not executed (NO in step S5552). First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when the sixth processing status is in effect, the number of the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects during the execution of one effect pattern as the effect contents of the notice effect A process for determining whether to appear is performed (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5564).

  Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed. When the effect is determined, the upper limit number of appearances (average appearance number) of the timer target candidate effect is larger than when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not made. I try to control it.

  FIG. 165 shows a fifth processing situation in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5e referred in the process of step S5553 when it exists in. Also, FIG. 166 shows a sixth case in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5f referred in the process of step S5563 when it exists in a process condition.

  First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed, the loss variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect (the mission cannot be successful). When the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation pattern) are acquired, the table T5e is not referred to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, since the table T5f is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the loss variation pattern for causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect (the mission may be successful). The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to (no variation pattern) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Further, both the table T5e and the table T5f are referred to when they are in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice timer presentation is not executed. In these processes, the notice timer presentation is produced. It is not essential to select any of the timer candidate candidate effects that can be targeted. Therefore, in both the table T5e and the table T5f, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that the timer target candidate effect does not necessarily have to be selected (the number of notices is 0).

  In addition, among the contents of the same reach effect (character reach and SP reach) in the table T5e and the table T5f, the change is made with a variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect. There is a higher percentage of timer candidate candidate effects being selected compared to variable numbers that do not show timer candidate candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in A) as the effects of the effect, In the variation number 7 that is the reach, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and in the variation number 15 that is the SP reach at the time of the loss, only up to five timer object candidate effects can appear. The points that are not performed are the same as the table T5a described above.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect when in the fifth and sixth processing situations where the notice timer effect is not executed in this way. After the determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) is performed, the determination process (steps S5554 and S5564) regarding which type of notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the determined number is performed. . However, when it is determined that none of the timer target candidate effects will appear as a result of the notice number determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) (notice number 0), in the timer object notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564), One processing result that does not select any of the timer target candidate effects regardless of the variation number is always selected.

  FIG. 167 shows the fifth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552) is made. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-1 that is referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 (step S5554). FIG. 168 shows a fifth case in which the notice-side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined (YES in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6e-2 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of performing processing of Step S5553 in processing status (Step S5554).

  Also, FIG. 169 shows a sixth case in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6f-1 referred to when it is decided to set the number of notices as 1 as a result of performing processing of Step S5563 in processing status (Step S5564). Further, FIG. 170 shows a sixth state in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6f-2 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of performing processing of Step S5563 in a processing situation (Step S5564).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations are determined not to perform the notice timer effect. Since all the N notice effects that have been determined to be executed as timer object candidate effects are not set as effect objects for the notice side timer effect, all of them are normal. It will be executed as a mode of a notice effect (in the figure, a cross indicates that it is executed as a mode of a normal notice effect).

  As shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations produce the same effects for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. Since the change numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22, and 22 corresponding to the change pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the change effect are acquired, it is executed. A production random number is assigned to each variable number so that a conversation announcement is not selected as a notice production to be performed. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, variation numbers 11 to 14 and 19 to 19 correspond to the loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot be successful) in which cut-ins A and B appear as the contents of the variation effects. When 22 is acquired, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that cut-in A and B are not selected as a notice effect to be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to when the fifth and sixth processing states are present are referred to when the notice timer effect is not executed. Thus, the announcement (here, a special timer) based on the premise that the announcement timer production is performed is not included in the announcement production to be selected.

  In addition, in the table T6e that is referred to when in the fifth processing status, since it is referred when execution of the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined, FIG. As also shown, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the “conversation notice” are acquired as the contents of the fluctuation effect, or “the conversation notice is indicated as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect)” When “” is selected (PTN1), a special display (successful mission) is displayed and it is definitely suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

  Also, in the table T6f that is referred to when in the sixth processing status, it is referred when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, so the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. The above-described table 6a is that the production random numbers are assigned to the change numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the lost change patterns to be made (change patterns that the mission cannot be successful). Is the same as

  As shown in FIG. 149, even when it is determined not to execute the timer side timer effect in the process of step S5503, after the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564) is performed in this way, Which of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F that are prepared as effects that cannot be the target of the notice timer effect based on the winning result of the big hit or the variation pattern (variation number) Determination processing (third timer non-target notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

  Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, the table is basically the same as the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the timer is not a special timer. When the mode of executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is lower than when the mode of executing notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  After the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5555) is performed, the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564) or the third timer non-target notice lottery ( After the notice effect determined in step S5555) is set in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. Thereby, drawing data corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect in the effect symbol variation process.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined in step S5503 that the timer side timer effect is not to be executed, the timer target advance lottery and the third timer non-target advance lottery are processed separately. I decided to do it as However, if it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect in the process of step S5503, it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F in relation to the notice timer effect. The timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

  In addition, the above-described special timer mode (non-target notice E2 is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed. In the situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is performed, the relationship with the notice side timer effect is also adopted in the case of not adopting the big hit expectation degree compared to the non-target notice F). Since it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F, the timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

  Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the notice timer effect, the determination process as to which effect is to be executed as the notice effect is performed. After determining in what manner the effect is to be executed, the presence / absence of the notice timer effect and the execution mode may be determined.

  By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a winning (accepting a game ball) occurs at the start opening 2002, 2004, whether to perform a pre-reading effect on the hold information corresponding to the winning The determination process about whether or not is performed (steps S5245 and S5255). In this regard, in this determination process, a hold that changes the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the hold display that is the target of the pre-reading effect based on the information on the big hit determination included in the hold information, information on the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Lottery for change effects (existence of execution, lottery for display mode), lottery for look-ahead zone effects over multiple variations (lottery for execution status, execution mode (color, number of continuous executions, etc.)), etc. In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold information is the target of “timer pre-reading effect”.

  Here, the timer pre-reading effect is an effect in which when the change display that has been put on hold (the change display of the effect target) is being executed, the proportion of the notice-side timer effect appearing within the change time increases. For example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, “Preparing the timer” is displayed at the start timing of the variable symbol display starting after the winning timing (the timing when the timer pre-reading effect is won)). Etc.) is displayed. Note that the reason why the predetermined image (for example, “Preparing the timer”, etc.) does not appear at the timing of winning the prize (the timing when the timer pre-reading effect is won) is to indicate which hold information corresponds to the timer pre-reading effect. This is to make it difficult to recognize.

  According to such a timer look-ahead effect, it may be suggested that there is a high rate of occurrence of the notice side timer effect over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is expected that maintenance of the game entertainment will be maintained over a plurality of variable displays. However, among the preceding effects (prefetch effects), including such timer prefetch effects, it is a type of continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. When performing a production (preceding period production), if the same type of production (preceding period production) and its execution period may overlap, the production becomes too complex and what is targeted / purposed There is a concern that it will not be possible to understand whether it is a production, and the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, when determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (pre-reading determination at the time of winning a prize), the preceding period effect according to other pending information previously won is not being executed and waiting for execution. Judgment is also made as to whether or not it is in the state. The preceding period effect such as the timer pre-reading effect is newly provided at least on the condition that the preceding period effect according to the other on-hold information previously won is not executed and is not in a waiting state. It is possible to make a decision to generate the error. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the two preceding period effects are overlapped and to be executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  As the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the timer pre-reading effect, a continuous continuous pre-reading effect that causes at least a part of a stop symbol to appear in the same manner (color of numbers, etc.) over multiple variations, or a background image over multiple variations It is possible to employ a look-ahead zone effect or the like that changes the pattern to a special mode. In the above process (prefetching determination at the time of winning a prize), among these preceding period effects, the same type of preceding period effects do not appear overlapping, and even if they are different types of preceding period effects, these execution periods Will be controlled so as not to overlap. Among the pre-reading effects, for the type of effects (for example, a hold change effect, etc.) that are performed over a plurality of variable displays by identifying which hold display is supported, the execution status of these preceding period effects It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of whether or not it is possible to appear, but if a new prize occurs when the preceding period production is being executed or is waiting to be executed, a new prize will occur when it is not in that situation It is desirable to perform the pre-reading determination at the time of winning so that the appearance ratio of the effect of the type (for example, the hold change effect) is reduced as a pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning compared to the case where the winning is performed.

  As described above, while a preceding period effect such as a timer prefetch effect (an effect of a type that continues (or continues) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported) is executed. Even if a new winning of a game ball has occurred, a prohibition control is performed to prevent this from occurring for the preceding period effect corresponding thereto, so that two preceding period effects interfere with each other. Decline in interest can be suppressed. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency of the preceding period effect being performed as the preceding effect is reduced by the amount that the preceding period effect is subject to prohibition control, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be degraded. The

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is executed while the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information has not yet started, first, the specific effect Information indicating that the status is restricted is set. Then, when the hold information is newly stored when the information is set by the previously stored hold information, at least the special symbol variation display corresponding to the previously stored hold information is ended. While the preceding period effect corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed until, the newly stored after the end of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information The preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is controlled to be executed.

  That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is not allowed at the time when the hold information is newly stored, the game is subsequently advanced and stored first. When the game situation is such that there is no concern about production interference with the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information, the execution of the preceding period effect is permitted once it has been determined that the execution is not allowed. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the frequency at which the preceding period effect is performed while performing the prohibition control on the preceding period effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest.

  More specifically, in the first special figure prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new winning occurs, first, the first special reservation is made. Based on the counter value of the number counter or the second special reservation number counter, it is determined what is the holding rank (digestion rank) of the new winning. For example, in the case of the first special symbol prefetching process, first, the hold information corresponding to the new winning is stored in any of the first special symbol hold storage area a to the first special symbol hold storage area d. Determine if it is in a state. After that, the preceding period effect is to be executed in the hold information that is stored prior to the new winning and the change display is in execution and the hold information in which the change display is not executed. Determine if there is something. As a result, even if there is specific holding information that is the execution target of the preceding period effect, the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is not completely prohibited, In the period after the variable display according to the hold information is completed, control is performed so that execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is permitted.

Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed game situation as an example.
FIG. 171 (a) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and three hold information (all are the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not yet executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred in a 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the state which is being held. FIG. 171 (b) shows the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and the two pieces of hold information (both in the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred in the 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the memorize | stored state.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this table T7a, on-hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and three on-hold information in which the variable display is in an unexecuted state (whichever And the first special symbol) depending on whether the subject is the subject of the preceding period effect or none is the subject of the preceding period effect. It is possible to determine from which timing the corresponding hold information can be the target of the preceding period effect (number of prefetchable fluctuations).

  For example, in the table T7a, both of the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and the three pieces of hold information (all of which are the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not executed. Is not the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display corresponding to the hold 1 (first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a) and the hold 2 (first special symbol hold storage) A variable display according to the second hold information stored in the area b), a variable display according to the hold 3 (the third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b), and The new winnings were targeted over four variable display periods with the variable display corresponding to the holding 4 corresponding to the new winning (fourth holding information stored in the first special symbol holding storage area d). It is possible to execute the preceding period production There is determined (determination that prefetching variability number is 4). In other words, in this case, the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is performed at the timing after the variable display corresponding to the running state is finished and the variable display corresponding to the first hold information is started. Execution of the preceding period effect for is permitted.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold information in the state where the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display according to the hold 2, the change display according to the hold 3, and the new It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning can be performed over the three variable display periods with the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the winning prize (the number of pre-reading fluctuations is 3). Determination). In other words, in this case, the timing after the variable display in the running state is completed, the variable display according to the first hold information is further ended, and the variable display according to the second hold information is started. Thus, execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is permitted.

  Here, even if the hold information in the state where the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display according to the hold 1, the change display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the four variable display periods of the fluctuation display corresponding to the new prize and the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning ( It may be determined that the number of prefetch fluctuations is 4). However, in this case, the preceding period effect that appeared in the variable display in the running state and the new preceding period effect that starts with the variable display corresponding to the hold 1 are continuously executed. Whether the preceding period effect is the same effect (whether the previous preceding period effect is continuing), or is another preceding period effect newly started (whether the previous preceding period effect has ended)? Since it becomes difficult to distinguish between the two, the method of setting the preceding period effect as a prohibited period so as not to newly occur in the first variable display after the preceding period effect ends (the method employed in the table T7a). It is more desirable to adopt. Such a method is employed not only in the table T7a but also in other tables T7 (in addition to the table T7b, a table not shown).

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the preceding period effect, two change displays, that is, a change display according to the hold 3 and a change display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning. It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning can be executed over the period (determination that the number of pre-reading fluctuations is 2). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, the variable display according to the second hold information is further ended, and the third display At the timing after the start of the variable display according to the hold information, execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is permitted.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period effect, the preceding period for the new winning is only in the variable display period corresponding to the holding 4 corresponding to the new winning. It is determined that the effect can be executed (determination that the number of prefetch fluctuations is 1). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, the variable display according to the second hold information is ended, and the third hold information is displayed. The preceding period for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning at a timing after the variable display according to the game is further ended and the variable display according to the fourth hold information is started. The execution of the production is allowed.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold 3 is the target of the preceding period effect, it is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning is not executable (the number of pre-reading fluctuations is 0). Judgment). That is, in this case, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is not allowed.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as a determination target of whether or not it is the target of the preceding period effect, and the number of prefetchable fluctuations obtained as a determination result is smaller than that in the table T7a. However, since it is basically the same as the table T7a, the description will be omitted. In addition, tables similar to these are also prepared at the time of holding 2 wins or at the time of holding 1 wins, but the explanation is omitted.

  Incidentally, it may be assumed that there are two pieces of hold information that are the targets of the preceding period production at the time of winning the hold 4 or the like. To determine the number of prefetchable fluctuations. For example, at the time of winning the hold 4, when the variable hold and the hold 2 are the targets of the different preceding period effects in the table T7a, the hold 2 on the later side of the holding order is the target of the preceding period effect. “The number of prefetchable fluctuations = 1” is determined.

  In addition, as described above, the control related to the prohibition period of the preceding period effect is a type of effect that is continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. This is done for the purpose of setting a prohibition period for this type of performance based on the execution status. Therefore, the prohibition period of the preceding period effect does not occur depending on the execution state of the type of effect (holding change effect) that identifies which hold display is supported, and the execution state of the preceding period effect (look ahead) Even if the number of possible fluctuations = 0, the type of effect (hold change effect) that identifies which hold display is supported is not prohibited.

  In addition, even in the prohibited period of the preceding period effect, among the timer prefetching effects, the timer prefetching effect performed in the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode, which will be described later, is caused to appear in the notice side timer effect. You may make it appear because certainty is not calculated | required.

  If the hold information on the second special symbol side is included in the hold information in which the variable display is not executed as the prohibition control of the preceding period effect, the hold information on the second special symbol side is preceded. Even if it is not the target of the period effect, control is performed so that a new preceding period effect is not started until the variable display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is ended. Good. Also, at this time, it is not necessary to set the next variable display period for which the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the second special symbol side is ended as the prohibition period, and a new preceding period from when the next variable display is executed. It is desirable to allow the production to start.

  In addition, with regard to the process of checking the pre-reading production status set for the hold and determining the pre-reading changeable number according to the result, a new winning occurs every time the hold is used. It is desirable to do it every time.

  In the first special figure prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the prefetchable variation number is thus determined, the determined period (prefetching is possible). A determination process is performed as to what kind of preceding period effect is to be executed (including the presence or absence of execution).

  For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the hold information corresponding to the new winning. As described above, the types of the preceding period effects include a plurality of specific preceding displays that indicate that there is a high possibility that a pre-reading zone effect that displays related background images across multiple variations and a notice timer effect is performed. It is possible to prepare a timer pre-reading effect or the like displayed across the variation as a selection candidate. As a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, a determination process as to how the preceding period effect of the determined type is executed is performed.

  FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect is determined in a situation where the prefetch variable number is four. It is. 173 (a) and 173 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect is determined in a situation where the prefetch variable number is three. It is.

  As described above, the timer pre-reading effect is an effect that when the on-hold information that is the pre-read target is digested, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect appears is high, and the periphery according to this embodiment In the control MPU 1511a, the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, the third preceding mode, or the like, in which the ratio of occurrence of the notice timer effect is different.

  Here, the first preceding mode is, for example, a display in which a first mode such as “timer occurrence premonition” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding mode. The probability that the notice timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

  In addition, the second preceding mode is, for example, a second mode such as “timer occurrence chance” displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the timer pre-reading effect is executed in the second preceding mode, the notice side is displayed. The probability that the timer effect is executed is set to approximately 80% (step S5502).

  The third preceding mode is, for example, a third mode such as “Preparing timer” displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the timer prefetching effect is executed in the third preceding mode, the notice timer The performance is always executed (even if it is not 100%, it may have a higher probability than the second preceding mode) (step S5502).

  Then, based on the information related to the big hit for the prefetch determination, the information related to the variation pattern number for the prefetch determination, or the like, it is determined in which execution mode the timer prefetch effect is executed. For example, in a situation where the number of prefetch fluctuations is 4, with reference to tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), prefetching corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 is performed. In the situation where either one of the modes is selected based on the information and the production random number assigned to the information and the prefetch variable number is 3, tables T8b-1 and T8b- shown in FIG. 2, one of the modes is selected based on the prefetch information corresponding to the variable numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random numbers assigned to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the table T8a-1, the variability display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started in the state where the first preceding mode finally appears. The following three modes are prepared as modes.
The timer pre-reading effect does not appear in any manner when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2 and is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the variable information display of the hold information is in the hold 1 state. When the state is 3, the timer prefetching effect does not appear in any manner, and the timer prefetching effect is the first preceding when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 2 state. A mode (prediction of timer occurrence) that is displayed even in the hold 1 state. Hold this timer prefetch effect when dynamic display is in the state of the hold 3 and displayed in the first prior embodiment (feeling of timer generator) 2, aspects to be continued in a state of hold 1

Further, in the table T8a-1, the following six modes are provided as modes for starting the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect in the state in which the second preceding mode appears in the end. It is prepared.
The timer pre-reading effect does not appear in any manner when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2 and is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) when the variable information on-hold information is in the hold 1 state. In this state, the timer prefetching effect is not caused to appear in any manner, and the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the second preceding mode when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 2 state. A mode in which (Timer Occurrence Opportunity) is displayed and this is continued even in the hold 1 state. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) when the fluctuation display is in the hold 3 state and this is continued even in the hold 2 and hold 1 states. When the change display of the hold information in the state is in the hold 3 state, the timer prefetch effect is not caused to appear in any manner, and the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the hold 2 state The timer pre-reading effect is displayed when the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (predicting the occurrence of the timer) and the variation display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the hold 1 state. Is changed from the first preceding mode (prediction of timer generation) to the second preceding mode (timer generation chance). The timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the change display of the hold information being held is in the hold 3 state, and this is continued even in the hold 2 state. When the variable information of the hold information that is the target of the production is in the hold 1 state, the timer prefetching effect is changed from the first preceding mode (predicting timer generation) to the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance). Mode to be displayed ・ When the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the state of the hold 3, the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of occurrence of timer) and the timer prefetching effect The timer pre-reading effect is changed from the first preceding mode (predicting timer generation) to the second preceding mode (timer generating channel) when the change display of the holding information that is the target of the holding is in the holding 2 state. A mode in which the display is changed and displayed in the hold 1 state.

  Note that the timer pre-reading effects of the first and second preceding modes are displayed in the hold 1 state and then continuously displayed after the hold information is digested and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. Moreover, you may make it a form change further in the fluctuation | variation display started after the said hold information was digested. Further, when the notice timer effect is started in the variable display, the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect may be hidden, but the notice timer effect is started. Even in such a case, the display is continued even after the notice side timer effect is started, or after the notice side timer effect is started. If it is made non-display at a predetermined timing thereafter, it becomes possible to add interest. Note that if the timer pre-reading effect is not executed even though the timer pre-reading effect is executed in either the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect, the non-notification is made when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. It will be displayed. Further, it is more desirable that the timing of the non-display is the same as the timing of the non-display (such as the predetermined timing described above) when the notice side timer effect is executed.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the first predecessor mode (predicting timer generation) or the second predecessor mode regardless of the timer prefetching effect that increases the execution ratio of the notice timer effect when it appears. The timer prefetching effect of (timer occurrence chance) and the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress) are caused to appear as different effects. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, the timer prefetching effect is changed from these preceding modes to the third preceding mode in the state where the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are displayed. This is not adopted for the display mode. In addition, in a situation where the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation is in progress) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (predicting timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) appears. Or, in the situation where the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (timer occurrence premonition) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparing) appears. Can be generated.

  Therefore, in a situation where the number of possible pre-reading changes is 4, referring to the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a), the first preceding mode (prediction of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) Referring to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. 172 (b), the execution mode related to the timer prefetching effect in the third preceding mode (timer preparation) is further determined. It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the table T8a according to this embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect in the state where the third preceding aspect finally appears. As a mode in which the variable display is started, only the following mode is prepared.
-When the change display of the hold information that is the subject of the timer pre-reading effect is in the hold 3 state, the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (in preparation for the timer), and this is indicated as hold 2 and hold 1 Mode to continue even in the state

  However, in the case of the third preceding mode, not only the above-described one mode, but also in the case of the on-hold 3 or on-hold 2 state, any timer pre-reading effects do not appear in the middle as in the case of the above-described first preceding mode. From the above, it may be possible to select a mode for displaying the third preceding mode.

  According to such a configuration, the timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding mode (timer generation premonition) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) is executed, and the timer of the third preceding mode (timer generation chance). When the pre-reading effect is executed, both the timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding mode (preliminary occurrence of timer) or the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) and the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are both Each case will be executed. And, when both the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (timer occurrence premonition) or the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) and the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparing) are respectively executed, Because it is in a situation that it is definitely suggested that the notice timer performance will be executed, enjoy the production such as whether to change from the first preceding mode to the second preceding mode with a margin or a sense of security. Will be able to.

  Moreover, you may control so that the timer prefetching effect of the 1st preceding aspect, the timer prefetching effect of the 2nd preceding aspect, and the timer prefetching effect of the 3rd preceding aspect may appear simultaneously.

  In addition, it is desirable that the timer pre-reading effect in the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress) is continuously displayed even after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started. In this case, after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress) is not displayed when the notice side timer effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the third predecessor aspect of the timer pre-reading effect is adopted as an aspect of displaying “timer being prepared” in the effect display device 1600. You may make it employ | adopt as a mode which starts the count display toward the effect (effect which appears in the unexecuted fluctuation display) made into the effect object of a timer effect. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time during which the state of the hold 1 is continued (the remaining change time of the special symbol that is in the variable display state when in the hold 1 state), and the hold 1 is digested and the change display is displayed. The count display will be performed over the time from the start until the start of the effect that is the target of the timer side timer effect, and the timer pre-reading effect (third preceding mode) and the timer for the notification side The production is executed as one count display in which two variation displays are connected.

  In this regard, when the third preceding mode is realized as one count display connected to such a notice timer presentation, the count display is not executed in the hold 3 or the hold 2 and the count display is performed in the hold 1 state. It is desirable to perform. That is, if the count display is started when the status is on hold 3 or hold 2, depending on the number of holds when the status of hold 1 is reached, “the effect that is targeted for the effect of the notice timer effect ( By changing the “Remaining time until start of production in unexecuted variation display”, it is possible to properly execute count display (count display until reaching a predetermined number) for the production. This is because there is a concern of disappearance.

  The table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173 (a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173 (b) are shown in the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b). The table T8a-2 is basically in the same relationship, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  In addition, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment determines the pending change effect in the first special figure prefetch process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetch process (FIG. 136: step S5255). Processing is also performed. The hold change effect means that the hold display is changed in any manner by changing the hold display mode corresponding to the hold information acquired in accordance with the prize to any of a plurality of modes different from the normal hold mode. Depending on whether it is displayed, the expectation degree of jackpot when the hold display is digested is suggested.

  More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, the mode of displaying white blinking, the mode of displaying in blue, and displaying in green Can be displayed in any one of a mode to display, a mode to display in red, and a mode to display in rainbow color. Is low, and the expectation degree of jackpot is gradually increased in the order of blue, green, and red. If the display is held in a rainbow-colored display mode, the probability that a jackpot symbol will appear when the reservation is stopped is 100. % Is set to be a relationship. In addition, the big hit expectation is naturally set for the normal hold mode, but the big hit expectation when the normal hold is displayed should be lower than the mode displayed in white blinking. Alternatively, the display mode may be the same as or higher than the mode of blinking white.

  Therefore, normally, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, the first performance situation with a lower degree of expectation of jackpot is provided than when displaying in green or red. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the control that can provide the second effect situation in which the big hit expectation is high when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears instead of green or red under a predetermined condition. Can be executed.

  FIG. 174 shows a case where there is nothing that causes a jackpot symbol to appear in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the normal time pending | holding change table T9a referred. In addition, FIG. 175 includes a jackpot symbol that appears between the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the change display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the special time holding | maintenance change table T9b referred to at times.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new winning (accepting a game ball) at the start port 2002, 2004 occurs, the first special figure prefetch process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure In the prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the hold information stored before the new winning and the variable display is being executed and the hold information where the variable display is not executed (for example, hold) 1 to Hold 3), it is determined whether there is one that causes a jackpot symbol to appear (one that has been determined to win a jackpot as a result of jackpot determination or prefetch determination). As a result, when it is determined that there is nothing that causes a big hit symbol to appear, a normal time table T9a (set in a relationship in which the big hit expectation degree gradually increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color. 174) Referring to FIG. 174), normally, for example, when a mode of displaying white blinking or blue appears, the first production situation with a lower degree of big hit expectation than when displaying in red is displayed. To be provided.

  However, it is determined that there is one that makes a big hit symbol appear in the hold information that is stored prior to the new winning and the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed. When this occurs (when a rare event occurs), the second change situation is provided by executing the hold change effect with reference to the special time change table T9b (FIG. 175).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special-time hold change table T9b, first, red and rainbow colors related to the hold display mode are acquired as hold information corresponding to the new winnings. The production random numbers are distributed so that any of the “prefetch information” and “prefetch information regarding the variation pattern” indicates any of them.

  In addition, as for the green color relating to the hold display mode, even if it is a variation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) in which the production random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal hold change table T9a, the special-time hold change In the table T9b, the production random numbers are distributed so as not to be selected. In this regard, when the pre-read information regarding the fluctuation pattern is equivalent to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special time hold change table T9b. In comparison with the change table T9a, the production random numbers are distributed so that the probability of the appearance of green is lower both when winning and winning the big hit.

  On the other hand, with regard to white blinking and blue regarding the mode of hold display, in the special time hold change table T9b, the probability of appearance is higher both when winning a big hit and when defeating compared to the normal time hold change table T9a. The production random numbers are distributed. Further, the blinking white and the blue color relating to the hold display mode can be selected in the special time hold change table T9b even if the variable numbers 1 and 2 are not selected in the normal time hold change table T9a. In this way, the production random numbers are distributed.

  According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high expectation in which a jackpot symbol appears (for example, an effect in which a notice timer effect for the actor B action appears in the variation pattern of SP reach) is executed. If a new win occurs during the game (under certain conditions), a big win symbol will appear in the high-expected performance during the execution if a green or red appearance appears as a hold display in response to the new win It is difficult to have expectations for the second stage, but when a blinking white or blue color appears, it is relatively easy to have the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the high expectation stage during the execution. Will be able to provide.

  In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect, the remaining time during which the hold 1 state is continued (the state of the variable display when in the hold 1 state) Over the time that is the sum of the remaining variation time of the special symbol) and the time from when the hold 1 is digested and the variation display is started until the production that is the production target of the notice timer production is started. The count display can be executed. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears in the effect display device 1600, there is a possibility that the variable display ends before the count display reaches the predetermined value and the next variable display is started. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved in combination with the control using the special time hold change table T9b.

For example, suppose that the count display (or the timer is being prepared) of the notice side timer effect appears during execution of the variable display (for example, SP reach) in the situation where white blinking or blue hold display appears as the hold 1 Thus, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that a big hit symbol appears in the second game progress than in the following first game progress.
The notice side timer effect is directed to the effect in the hold 1 for which only a low expectation level (blinking white or blue) is shown, and is suspended after the running variable display (for example, SP reach) ends in a losing manner. The first game progress / notice timer effect that starts the variable display according to the hold information of 1 is not an effect in hold 1 that shows only a low expectation level (blink white or blue), but the change being executed Second game progress that is directed to the production in the display (for example, SP reach)

  In other words, the notice timer performance with a high expectation level (for example, a jackpot symbol appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears) is executed, but the notice timer effect with a low expectation (for example, appears). Even if there is a case where the effect in the hold 1 of white flashing or blue) in which the jackpot symbol does not appear with a probability of only a few percent, the possibility of the jackpot symbol appearing is greatly reduced. However, according to the above-mentioned second game progress, it is special because the chance increase by avoiding the occurrence of such a production situation and the variable display during execution are big hits. Referring to the time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175), the chance display is increased due to the expectation that the hold display of hold 1 is in a flashing white state (high appearance probability) or blinking blue. The notice timer performance with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is that the effect of “the effect in the running fluctuation display during the run” is directed as if “the running fluctuation display is a big hit”. As the chances will increase with the double, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the third predecessor aspect of the timer prefetching effect may be executed not as a count display but as “timer preparation in progress”. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that the notice-side timer effect for the effect in the variation display is executed at the time of switching from the situation in which “timer is being prepared” is displayed to the count display. Therefore, when there is an on-hold display that is blinking white or blue when the count display appears, it can be expected that a jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display.

  On the other hand, if “Timer preparation” is not displayed and the count display is started in a situation where a green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, the notice timer performance is performed. Not only does it make it difficult to have the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the fluctuation display, but also a timer on the notice side to raise the expectation level for green and red (especially red) hold display. The production will not work. Therefore, if “Timer preparation” is displayed in a situation where a green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, until the green or red (especially red) hold display is consumed. It is hoped that the count display will not start, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained within the period until the count display (notice side timer effect) is started.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high jackpot expectation appears in the variable display during execution, a new winning is generated and the hold display in any aspect such as white blinking, blue, green, red, etc. It is possible to predict whether or not a jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display during execution, so that a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In addition, such a hold change effect using the special time change table T9b is executed for a hold display corresponding to a new winning, but the effect target is actually “new Rather than "whether the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display of the hold information (hold information that has changed hold) according to the winnings", "holding information that is stored before the new winning (holds not subject to hold change) It functions as an effect on “whether a big hit symbol appears in the variation display of (information)”. Therefore, even if no hold change is executed when a new winning occurs or the above-mentioned preceding period effect is prohibited, the special time change change table T9b is determined by the hold information that has been won later. When the hold change effect using is executed, it becomes possible to function as an effect as if the prefetch effect was generated afterwards for the hold information for which no prefetch effect was executed. It is expected to reduce the entertainment interest of not being performed.

  In the special time hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected for some reach types. However, as with the red mode, any variation pattern may not be selected. . In short, if the ratio of appearance with a high expectation that can appear as a hold display is a low ratio (including 0) compared to the normal hold change table T9a, white is displayed when the count display appears. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when there is a flashing or blue holding display.

  In addition, the pending change can be generated at a winning time, at the start of the change, or at a predetermined timing during the change, and the number of changes may be generated a plurality of times. That is, in this case, even when the count display of the notice timer effect is started in the variable display corresponding to the blinking white display or the blue hold display, the white blinking or blue may change to green or red Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. In this embodiment, the display corresponding to the pending display that is the subject of digestion even during the symbol variation performed in accordance with the pending digestion (not already in the suspended state, but in the suspended display when in the suspended state) As described above, the corresponding display) is displayed, and the display mode corresponding to the hold display is further changed (hold change).

  However, when the hold change effect using such a special time change change table T9b is realized, a new winning is generated while the high-specification specific effect is being executed during the execution of the variable display, and the winning is achieved. If the on-hold display corresponding to is generated in red, a big hit symbol is displayed in a variable display in which a specific effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, a timer effect that uses the action B action as an effect) is executed. There may be a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is a concern about a decline in the interest in gaming.

  Therefore, a new prize is generated during a period in which a specific timer effect that is directed to at least the accessory B action is being executed (during a period in which a highly anticipated specific effect is being executed). Even if it does, it is desirable to control so that the hold display according to the winning does not appear in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of change in hold is hidden. In addition, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state for the hold display even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and has been digested.

  However, in this case, the hidden display that has not been displayed is not continuously displayed until the variable display is terminated. For example, within the period of the variable display, for example, a hit effect or a loss ( It is preferable to display a hold display that has been hidden after the timing at which a loss effect that suggests a big win is displayed, and display the mode of change of the hold. According to such a configuration, even if the on-hold display corresponding to the new winning is red, it is already suggested that the game is lost, so that the on-screen display is not reduced. Because of the red color, it is possible to improve the gaming interest by including on-hold information with high expectation level for jackpots.

  In addition, the control concerning such non-display of the hold display does not cover all timer effects (notice effects), but relatively big hits such as timer effects that target the action B action. It is desirable to execute only a specific timer effect with a high degree of expectation (a notice effect with a high degree of expectation).

  Further, as described above, when the hold change effect using the special time change change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer prefetch effect is executed in the third preceding mode (eg, during timer preparation) while the blue hold display appears. In the case of being played, it is desired that the game progress in which the count display (timer effect) is started and the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display before the blue hold display is consumed. In this respect, even if the game situation is such that the game progress is performed, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the change, or the change according to the blue hold display is not started. In the variable display where the count display (timer effect) starts and the jackpot symbol appears before the blue hold display is digested so that a throbbing feeling about whether the count display starts on the display is given The count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the change display than the ratio (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started in accordance with the start timing of the change display It is desirable to control so that the rate at which is started becomes higher. Note that the ratio may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to perform control so that the ratio at which the count display (timer effect) is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display is higher than when the red hold display appears. . Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a new winning is made during the period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. When the hold information corresponding to this is newly acquired and the variable display that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is started and this is being executed, the rate at which the notice timer effect is executed is Control that can execute the timer pre-reading effect (control related to the change effect) is performed differently depending on the newly acquired hold information (new winning).

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of a processing procedure for processing performed to realize such a changeable effect. In this process, the winning (game ball reception) to a specific starting port is performed during the period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed. ) May occur, or within the period before the reserved information that is held before the winning (holding information for which the information related to the production is erased / reset) is digested It may be performed at a predetermined timing.

  As shown in FIG. 176, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether the hold information corresponding to the new winning indicates the specific game information as the process of step S5601. The specific game information may be, for example, “game information that causes a highly anticipated specific variation pattern such as SP reach to appear when the new hold information is digested” or “the new game information”. It may be “game information to win a big hit when the hold information is digested”. Here, for convenience of explanation, “game information to win a big hit when the new hold information is digested” will be described as the specific game information.

  As a result, when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new winning indicates the specific game information, the process is stored before the hold information corresponding to the new winning as the process of step S5602. When at least part of information related to the effect is deleted and the change effect is performed with respect to the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode) among the held information Reset to contents.

  For example, when the first preceding mode (predicting the occurrence of timer) is set as the timer prefetching effect, when the hold information that is the subject of the timer prefetching effect is digested, the notice timer effect is produced with a probability of approximately 20%. When the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) is set as the timer prefetching effect, a probability of approximately 80% is expected when the hold information that is the subject of the timer prefetching effect is digested As described above, the notice-timer timer effect is executed. However, in the process of step S5602, all (or at least a part) of information related to the timer pre-reading effect is deleted, or a table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern (such as SP reach) or the notice lottery is determined. Settings for changing to something different from the normal time (setting of a change flag, etc.) are made. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the control (FIG. 149) related to the effect based on the effect information modified (deleted / set) in this way, so that the first predecessor effect (predicting the occurrence of the timer) and the first Regardless of which of the two preceding modes (timer occurrence chance) is set, in the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149), the notice side timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50%. Further, when determining the contents of the production pattern, the notice production, etc., for example, a table (not shown) at the time of a change effect is referred to based on the fact that the change flag is set, and various effects in a different manner from the normal time. Will be executed.

  Then, after the modification process (step S5602) for the pending presentation information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is performed in this way, the background image is used as the background image when the change effect is performed as the process of step S5603. Process to change to. At this time, it is desirable that the display (the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect) appearing as the timer prefetching effect is also hidden. In other words, in this case, when a new winning occurs (or until the reserved information subject to the timer look-ahead effect is consumed after the winning occurs) When the image is suddenly changed to the image, the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode that has appeared until then is not displayed, but the background image at the time of the change effect itself functions as one mode of the timer pre-reading effect. Become moist. In this way, during the period when the background image at the time of the change effect appears, whether or not the notice timer effect appears when the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is digested (whether it is a frustration). It becomes possible to have a great interest, and thereby, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest during the period in which the timer prefetching effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S5601, if it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new winning is not indicative of specific game information, whether or not to execute a change gaze effect next as the process of step S5611 Judgment processing is performed. This change gaze effect is an effect that changes the background image to the background image when the change effect is performed in the process of step S5603 in spite of not performing the modification process (step S5602) for the above-described hold information. That is.

  If it is determined in the process of step S5611 that the first change effect is not to be executed, the current timer pre-reading effect (first preceding aspect, second preceding aspect) and various effect determining aspects are to be continued. The processing (FIG. 176) is terminated without performing any processing related to the change effect.

  In such a configuration, when a new winning occurs during the period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1 or table T8b-1) of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed (in a specific starting area). When a game ball is accepted and game information corresponding to the game ball is newly acquired), when the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started and this is being executed, the notice timer effect is displayed. The notice side timer effect can be executed so that the executed ratio varies depending on the newly acquired game information (holding information). That is, in this case, when the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, it is not the holding information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect, but is newly added. The acquired hold information is specific game information (information indicating a specific variation pattern such as SP reach, information indicating a big hit, or information indicating that the type of the big hit is to shift to a high probability short-time gaming state, etc. ), The rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect changes, so that it is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. Expectations for other effects can be given before the variable display is executed, and a decrease in the gaming interest in the period can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, it is not the holding information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect. Depending on whether the newly acquired hold information is specific game information, after performing the modification process (step S5602), before the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is digested In addition, the background image is changed to the background image at the time of the change effect, and the display related to the timer prefetch effect is hidden. In other words, in this case, until the start of the change effect, the main subject of the effect is a timer pre-reading effect, and an effect is provided that gives a sense of expectation to the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. On the other hand, after the change production is started, the main subject of the production is changed to the change production, in order to give a sense of expectation to the newly acquired hold information including the timer pre-reading production. It is shifted to the production situation where various productions are performed. Therefore, when a hold with higher expectation than the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is acquired, the subject of the effect can be changed flexibly, and it has already been set. It is avoided that the production time for the hold information with high expectation is lost due to the production.

  Such a changeable effect may be executed even if the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect indicates that a big win is won. That is, in this case, since the main subject of the production moves to the newly-held winning hold information, the big hit effect appears in the hold that is digested before that, so a surprise-like production is realized. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the processing related to the above-mentioned change effect (FIG. 176) is executed. However, when the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding aspect is being executed, the process (FIG. 176) relating to the above-mentioned change effect may be executed. .

  Further, the background image at the time of the change effect may be continued even after the change display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is ended. In other words, in this case, the hold information digested after the end of the variable display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect, functions as a one-time change effect.

  Further, such a changeable effect may be executed on the condition that the new winning is generated and a specific condition is satisfied even when the timer prefetching effect is not executed. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the production pattern (SP reach, etc.) and the notice lottery for all holding information stored before the new winning is changed to a table different from the normal time. Settings (such as setting a change flag) are made, so that the appearance probabilities of various effects change as long as it is not a change effect.

  In the above embodiment, the rate at which the notice side timer effect is executed at the time of the change effect is changed. However, when the change flag is set, the change side timer is determined by determining the effect pattern different from the normal time. You may make it change the ratio in which production is performed. As a result, even if the variable number that does not cause the variable timer effect to appear when the variable effect is not executed, the variable timer effect appears when the variable effect is executed, or the variable timer effect appears when the variable effect is not executed. Even when the number is changed, it is possible to perform control so that the variable timer effect does not appear when the change effect is executed.

  In addition, when such a change effect is performed, even if the timer effect appears when the change effect is not executed, the variable timer effect may not appear when the change effect is executed. Because there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest, when a change production is performed, the special notice will be given if a lottery is performed on a special notice production that cannot appear in normal times (when the change production is not executed). You may control so that an effect may appear.

  In addition, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed in the variable display that was the target of the timer pre-reading effect at the time of the change effect is not necessarily constant (in this case, 50%). It may be controlled differently depending on whether or not a big hit symbol appears in the variable display that has been.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 177 and FIG. 178, the contents of the effects of the above-described timer effects are described in detail. Here, the processing examples relating to the above-described effects are merely examples, and for example, effects other than the above-described types may be executed as the contents of the notice effects, Appearance conditions and the like may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, the production examples described below may include those that do not match the processing content of each production described above, but are within the scope of the same technical idea and within the scope of implementation by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are changed as appropriate. In addition, the “timer effect” below basically means that the count display is executed in the notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including timer prefetching effects. In addition, as a mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted in the following, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 177 (A) shows an effect situation in which a change display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero. FIG. 177 (B) shows that two winnings are generated during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (A), and the holding information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the first holding is held. The on-hold display corresponding to 1 indicates the normal on-hold mode, and the on-hold display corresponding to the second on-hold hold 2 is displayed in red. FIG. 177 (C) shows the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) after the decorative symbol SZ that has been in the variable display state in the effect state shown in FIG. ) Shows a production situation in which the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested and changed to a change state. In addition, in this production example, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and is in a variable display state (hold 0 state), it is shown at the time of hold 1. Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the hold display mode (hold 0 display). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in a change mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. Street.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state in FIGS. 177 (A) and 177 (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Alternatively, the hold prefetching effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. The pre-reading pre-production effect may be executed in any of the first preceding aspect, the second pre-preceding aspect, or the third pre-preceding aspect described above. The appearance of an effect means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of change display) or the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect (example here) Then, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect).

  FIG. 177 (D) shows that one winning occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (C), and the holding information corresponding to the winning is normally held as a holding display corresponding to the holding 2 The production status displayed in the form of is shown. However, if the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 indicates specific game information (here, jackpot information) and satisfies the above-described change effect execution condition, FIG. 177 (E) shows. As described above, the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

  As described above, a change effect is a change made by changing the contents of hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored and held before hold information (here hold 2) that causes the change effect. It is something to digest. On the other hand, the above-described change gaze effect is, for example, a hold that occurs when the hold display corresponding to hold 2 does not indicate specific game information (here, jackpot information) and generates the change gaze effect. The contents of the hold information (here hold 1 here) that is stored before the information (here hold 2) and is in a hold state are put on hold without modification. That is, in this case, since the ease of occurrence of various effects will be different when the hold 1 is digested depending on whether the change effect or the change Gase effect is performed, It is possible for the player side to estimate whether or not the hold indicating the game information is included (whether the change effect or the change gaze effect is performed), so that the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed. It is desirable to control the hold display (here, hold 2) corresponding to these effects so that no hold change occurs regardless of the result of the jackpot determination in both the change effect and the change effect.

  Therefore, the timing at which the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2 is after the change display of the hold 0 that is not the target for altering the hold information has ended. In addition, it is desirable that the change display of the hold 1 to be modified of the hold information is before the start of the variable display. In this respect, in this embodiment, after the lost symbol is stopped by the variable display of the hold 0, when the hold display of the hold 1 is not yet shifted and displayed, the control related to the change effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 177 (E), as well as modifying the hold information for hold 1 (especially information related to the effect), the timer pre-reading effect and the change state of the hold (red) displayed so far are displayed. The background image is not displayed (displayed in a normal hold mode), and the background image is changed to the background image when the change effect is performed. At this time, a predetermined display image (here, “change”) is displayed for a predetermined time.

  In such an effect situation (FIG. 177 (E)), the timer pre-reading effect that has appeared until then until the variable display of hold 0 is terminated continues to be displayed without starting the count display. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the target of the timer prefetching effect is the hold 1.

  In FIG. 177 (F), after the change effect background shown in FIG. 177 (E) appears, the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested by shifting the hold information, and the state is changed. The production status is shown.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state in FIG. 177 (E) is digested and the variable display is started. The timer effect count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Similarly, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), a specific display related to the first production (here “conversation notice”) (here, “make conversation notice appear”) is displayed. Has been. The timing at which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) may appear before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. It is possible to appear at an appropriate timing.

  It should be noted that the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case of the timer pre-reading effect (FIG. 177 (D)). In the so-called ticker mode (slide image), the partial display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays “make the conversation notice appear” is hidden by the timer effect that is preferentially displayed. ing.

  In this production situation (FIG. 177 (F)), the timer production starts counting with a relatively small number of counts such as “10 seconds”. There is a high possibility that it will be the target of the timer performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered. However, in this effect state (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific indication (conversation notice) that the effect type (conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types that are the effects of the timer effect appears. It is expected that the target of the timer production will be “conversation notice that appears relatively early” and that the mission success will be confirmed to be a big hit. For this reason, the decline in the entertainment interest is suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the timer effect appears with a different probability from the normal time when the change effect is executed. For example, when the timer pre-reading effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence), the timer effect appears only with a probability of approximately 20% under normal conditions. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed, the timer effect appears with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect appears in the background of such a change effect, the change effect (the change of the appearance probability of the timer effect is not a constant change effect (generally 20%) where the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change). The expectation that about 50%) is being executed, and in turn, the expectation for winning the jackpot (because it is determined that the holding information for the jackpot is included at the time of changing production) is increased. However, in this case, if the timer effect does not appear in the background of such a change effect, the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, not the change effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. As a result, the degree of concern that the change gaze production (approximately 20%) is being executed increases.

  In addition, when the timer prefetching effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% in the normal time. When the change effect is executed, the timer effect appears only with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, if the timer effect does not appear in the background of such a change effect, the change of the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, not the change effect (approximately 100%) where the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. It is definitely suggested that the performance (generally 50%) is executed, and that the holding information for winning the jackpot is included. However, in this case, if a timer effect appears while such a change effect background appears, it is not a change effect (generally 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, but a change effect that does not change the appearance probability of the timer effect. As a result, the degree of concern that the performance (approximately 100%) is being executed increases.

  FIG. 178 (G) shows a timer related indication indicating that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177 (F) has reached a predetermined value (here, 0) and has reached the predetermined value (here, 0). The display status (here “Yukuzo”) is shown. Note that the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) suggesting that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) has been reached may appear after the timer effect count display is hidden.

  In the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (G), the count display reaches a predetermined value while the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is still displayed. It is a situation that is definitely suggested that the situation is about to appear now, and it can be said that a great deal of attention is drawn to whether or not a conversation notice appears as the production.

  FIG. 178 (H) shows a conversation notice (in this case, after the timer effect that has reached a predetermined value in FIG. 178 (G) and the timer related display are hidden) “It may be a chance”) shows the production situation. Immediately after this, a special display indicating that the mission was successful appears in the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear).

  In the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (H), since the mission production (make the conversation notice appear) indicates that the mission was successful, it is definitely suggested to win the jackpot.

  In FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is successful in FIG. 178 (H), the fluctuation display is stopped by the losing symbol even though the special display (here, “Mission successful!”) Appears. The production situation is shown.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with respect to the specific display related to the first presentation (here, “conversation notice”) (here, “make the conversation notice appear”), the hold information that is the subject of the presentation (In the situation shown in FIG. 178 (I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the hold 1), and the hold information (FIG. 178 (I In the situation shown in (), it is possible to appear in advance even within the variable display period corresponding to the hold (0). Moreover, the timing at which the first presentation (here, “conversation notice”) is displayed and the special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Appears, is also the holding information (the big hit) Within the variable display period according to the hold information (hold information that does not become big hit) before the variable display under a predetermined condition. Can also appear in advance.

  According to such a configuration, a special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Appears in the mission effect, and it is definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, but the fluctuation display ends with a losing pattern. Since it will be (stopped), an unexpected situation will occur as a player. However, after that, when the next variation display is started, the variation display ends (stops) with a jackpot symbol, so that a sense of happiness after being dropped into despair is given. . As a result, it becomes possible to add a dramatic inflection even after it has been definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment taste until the big hit symbol is stopped become.

  However, when the special display is caused to appear in advance as described above, there is a concern that a complaint on the player side against the hole side may occur when the variable display is terminated (stopped) with a lost symbol. Therefore, in the case of a loss variation in which a special display appears in advance, the ratio that the pre-reading effect that extends to the next variation display (a variation display that becomes a big hit) is executed within the execution period of the variation display does not appear in the special display. It is desirable to set it higher than the time. In this example, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is achieved in FIG. 178 (H), a timer is used within a period until the change display is terminated (stopped) with a losing symbol. A new look-ahead effect will be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the timer effect count display is started, the variable display displays the losing symbol in the variable display, and the variable display in which the timer effect count display is started appears. It is possible to achieve an effect as if the variable display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of complaints on the player side with respect to the hole side when the variable display is terminated (stopped) with a lost symbol.

  However, the look-ahead effect that spans a plurality of fluctuation displays (up to a fluctuation display that becomes a big hit) may not necessarily be executed. In this sense, as shown in FIG. It is desirable to continue to display the special display (here, “Mission successful!”) That has appeared within the execution period of the variable display in which the losing symbol appears, even after the symbol is digested and the variable display is started. In this respect, if such a special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Is continuously displayed until the big hit symbol appears in the variable display where the big hit symbol appears, the effect is produced until the big hit symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 178 (K), the production image that is definitely suggested to win a big hit as the production in the production pattern, because there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest without a general inflection. It is desirable to hide the special display (in this case, “Mission Success!”) At a timing before appears. As a result, after the special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Is hidden, the effect image shown in FIG. 178 (K) (determined to win a big hit as the effect content in the effect pattern) Until the appearance of the suggested effect image), the anxiety about the appearance of the jackpot symbol increases somewhat, and the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (L) (the effect state where the jackpot symbol is stopped) It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained until).

  In FIG. 178 (J), the count display of the timer effect for 30 seconds is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (J) appears, the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (K) changes. Until it appears, the count display of the 30-second timer effect ends, a timer-related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, and an effect that is the target of the effect has occurred Needless to say.

  Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180.

  FIG. 179 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero. FIG. 179 (B) shows that three winnings are generated during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (A), and the holding information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the holding which is won first is held. An effect in which the hold display corresponding to 1 is in a normal hold mode, the hold display corresponding to the second hold 2 is displayed in red, and the hold display corresponding to the third hold 3 is displayed in blue Indicates the situation. FIG. 179 (C) shows the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) after the decorative symbol SZ that has been in the variable display state in the production state shown in FIG. ) Shows the production situation in which the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested and changed to a change state. In this production example as well, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and is in a variable display state (hold 0 state), it is shown at the time of hold 1. Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the hold display mode (hold 0 display). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in a change mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. Street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, for the sake of convenience of explanation in FIGS. 177 and 178, the movable body for production KT omitted is shown in the drawing. The movable body KT may be, for example, “a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom-front front movable effect unit 3500, It corresponds to `` movable member '' etc.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state at the time of FIGS. 179 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Alternatively, the hold prefetching effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display. The pre-reading effect may be executed in any of the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode as described above. However, the holding pre-reading effect is shown in FIG. 179 (C). The appearance of an effect means that either the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of change display), the hold information of hold 1 or the hold information of hold 2 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect. (In the example here, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect).

  Here, as a mode of the hold pre-reading effect, the count display may be executed from the time when the corresponding hold display (here, hold information of hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”), the count display is the predetermined numerical value (here, “0”), as well as an event that the decorative display of the decorative symbol SZ may end. Since the event that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ ends before the time of reaching can occur may occur, even if the count display is being executed, the target of the timer effect is any hold information It becomes difficult to grasp whether or not.

  However, in this effect example, any one of the first preceding mode (predicting timer generation), the second preceding mode (timer generating chance), and the third preceding mode (timer generating chance) is displayed as the mode of holding pre-reading effect. Can be done.

  In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information 1 is in red in the hold information 0, 1, 2 and is in the hold display mode with the highest expectation level for jackpot. In view of this, it is desirable from the player side that the timer pre-reading effect is for the hold information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red hold display. That is, in this case, since the composite effect indicates that the degree of expectation that the big hit is obtained with the hold information 1 is higher, the hold 0 in the normal hold mode or the blue hold 2 with the low expectation is pre-read by the timer. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol appears in any of the hold information 0 to 2 than when the expectation degree of jackpot is dispersed as a target of the production. In addition, if the blue hold 2 with low expectation becomes the target of the timer prefetching effect, there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment, so the blue hold 2 with low expectation is the timer for maintaining the game entertainment. It is also important to develop the production so that it is not the target of the pre-reading production.

  Moreover, as described above, in this embodiment, when a new winning occurs when the hold information (hit-hold hold) in which the big-hit symbol appears is stored, not the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174) but the big-hit hold time. The hold change effect is executed with reference to a dedicated table (FIG. 175: special time change change table T9b). In the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b, when the big hit hold is already included (when the red hold 1 is a big hit), red and green hardly appear as the hold 2 mode. The blue and white blinking modes are relatively likely to appear. Therefore, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), when the timer prefetching production is for the hold information 1 and functions to increase the big hit expectation, the blue hold 2 with a low expectation is set to the timer. Because the chance increase by avoiding the decline in the gaming interest by making it a target and the hold information of the hold 1 in the red mode is a big hit, the special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) is referred to and the blue mode Increased chances by expecting that the hold display of hold 2 is in a blue (high probability of appearance) production state (the notice timer production with a high jackpot expectation is “production within the variable display during execution” Is a production target, and it also functions as if it supports the fact that “the variable display during the execution is a big hit”), and a chance is raised by double From becoming cormorants, it is possible to improve the game playability.

  Accordingly, in the production situation shown in FIGS. 179 (B) and (C), when a new winning is generated, a blue or white blinking on-hold display is newly generated, or a green or red on-hold display is displayed. If a new occurrence is confirmed, it is possible to recognize whether the jackpot hold is included, and it can be said that the present situation is in a stage where a new winning is encouraged.

  In FIG. 179 (D), the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ in the running state is maintained while the timer pre-reading effect mode shown in FIG. After the end (stop), the hold information stored in the hold 1 as a result of the shift operation of the hold information is digested to show a change state.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (D), the player is subject to the timer prefetch effect in the hold information of hold 0 (in a variable display state) that is in red and in the blue form. It becomes possible to recognize that the information is one of the hold information of the hold 1, and hope that the count display is executed within the execution period of the variable display corresponding to the hold information of the hold 0 which is a red aspect.

  Also in this example, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects and decorative symbols, including the case where the timer prefetch effect is present (FIG. 179 (D)). Here, the partial range (left part) of the dialogue part of the female character in the conversation notice is hidden by the timer effect displayed with priority over this.

  FIG. 179 (E) shows an effect situation in which the timer pre-reading effect ends and the timer effect count display is being executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (D). .

  However, as described above, whether or not the count display is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the digestion of the red hold information (whether the timer prefetch is for red hold information) ) Is an extremely high level of interest for players. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display in the running state is made difficult so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the count display is in the running state. Control is possible so that the movable body for production KT is moved forward and positioned for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, the timer effect (timer pre-reading effect, count display) is executed, and it is confirmed whether the timer effect count display is being executed while giving the player a pounding feeling. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of throb.

  In order to suitably realize such an effect, in the situation where the timer effect is being executed but the count display is not yet executed (for example, while the timer pre-reading effect is being executed), the aforementioned movable body for effect KT It is desirable to control so as not to move (move). That is, in this case, since the production movable body KT suddenly moves where the player does not care about the presence of the production movable body KT, the count display becomes difficult to see. With such a surprise effect that occurs at the worst timing, it is possible to increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of excitement.

  Further, the operation effect by the movable body KT for the effect may be made to function only as an effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the timer prefetch effect among the timer effects and makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display. You may make it function also as object notice E2 (first production). That is, in this case, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not originally related to the effect of the timer effect, the effect situation in which the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being executed. By becoming (FIG. 179 (E)), for example, a higher jackpot expectation level is shown than the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)), and the game entertainment is improved. Will be able to.

  As described above, this non-target notice E2 (here, the operation effect by the effecting movable body KT) is desirably executed in any of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. In a state where the display is not executed, it is desirable to show the big hit expectation degree depending on which of the light emission modes (blue, green, red) appears when the movable body KT for production appears. At this time, when the production movable body KT operates in the red light emission mode, the expectation degree of big hit may be higher than the cut-in production shown in the next production situation (FIG. 179 (F)). The expected value of the jackpot expectation when the action effect is generated by the effector movable body KT is lower than the expected value of the jackpot expectation of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)). Is required. However, as described above, when an operation effect is performed by the movable body for production KT during the execution of the count display, regardless of which of blue, green, and red appears as the light emission mode, the motion for the production is performed. It is desirable to control so that the degree of jackpot expectation indicated by the action effect by the body KT is the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, during the count display, attention is paid not to what kind of aspect appears in the operation effect by the effecting movable body KT but to the operation effect itself by the effecting movable body KT. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the gaming interests depending on the mode when the production effect is generated by the production movable body KT.

  By the way, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (E), the above-mentioned double chance increase has succeeded because the target of the timer prefetching production is not the blue hold 2 but the red hold 1. In addition, a chance increase due to the execution of the non-target notice E2 (here, the operation effect by the effecting movable body KT) during the execution of the count display is also successful. Therefore, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the variation display is not likely to win a big hit despite such a highly anticipated production situation, the game entertainment is originally enhanced. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced in the expected variation display. In this regard, in the above-described special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) that is referred to when a big hit hold (including hold 0) is included, green or red is held when a new winning occurs. Since it is difficult for information to appear, if the hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new winning in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (E) is displayed in red, the jackpot hold is included. There is a possibility that the player will be exposed to the fact that it is not.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is awarded during a period in which the count display of a specific timer effect that is considered to have a high degree of expectation is executed among the timer effects, or in a period thereafter. Even if an error occurs, the mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) is difficult to recognize, and even if the hold display that has already been displayed is further changed to hold, the control becomes difficult to recognize the mode. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (E), the hold 1 and 2 are hidden and displayed by their shadows, making it difficult to recognize the hold display mode. May be hidden. As a result, even if the count display with a high degree of expectation is being executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to the appearance of a green or red hold display when a new winning occurs. become.

  In FIG. 179 (F), after the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 179 (E) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, An effect situation is shown in which an effect (cut-in effect by a teammate character) that is an effect of a timer effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179 (F), even in the situation where the effect (cut-in effect by the teammate character) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed, the holds 1 and 2 remain hidden, and the shadow is The mode of holding display is difficult to recognize.

  FIG. 180 (G) shows the variation display when the teammate character wins the enemy character after the effect (cut-in effect by the teammate character) that is the target of the timer effect in FIG. 180 (F) is executed. The production situation is shown to be confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol.

  In the production situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), since it is definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, no matter which mode appears as the mode of the hold 1, 2, the game entertainment is reduced There is no such thing. Therefore, the hold 1 and 2 that are difficult to recognize are displayed in such a manner that it can be recognized which mode appears after the effect that indicates whether or not the big hit is displayed. It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, even if it is indicated that the change display is confirmed and stopped due to the loss of the ally character by the enemy character, the status of the hold 1 and 2 can be recognized at that time. Since it may be recognized that either one of 1 and 2 is a red or rainbow-colored aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), a new timer effect is generated and the count display is started. This count display is performed with the remaining count number remaining (the count number displayed at the start of the count display) even in the production situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped and the variable display is terminated. (With more counts remaining than the smallest count number (10 seconds)), and without any effects that are the targets of the timer effects being generated, continue even after the change display ends. It is executed as the special timer effect described above.

  However, after that, during the period in which the opening effect is executed in the effect state shown in FIG. 180 (I), the timer effect count display is not displayed. Thereby, the change display (symbol effect) ended in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) and the effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J). It becomes possible to recognize that the productions are not connected to each other, and the player can enjoy the production newly started in this way with a fresh feeling.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is secretly executed as time elapses even during the period in which the timer effect count display is hidden (the opening effect execution period). When the count display of the timer effect is redisplayed in the effect during the jackpot game that is started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount. Like to be. This will create a production situation as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer production reaches a predetermined value has suddenly decreased, so it counts in a state where the player's feelings are not ready It becomes possible to make the display reach a predetermined numerical value, and it is preferably avoided that the timer effect that is continued from the state of the variable display becomes rutted.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the timer effect that is continued from the variation display state is controlled so that the count display reaches a predetermined value within the execution period of the big hit game. At this time, a timer related display (here, “Yukuzo”) that suggests that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) has been reached is the same as the timer effect performed within the period of the variable display.

  FIG. 180 (K) shows that after the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 180 (J) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here “0”) and the timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed. An effect situation in which a specific effect (corresponding to the first special effect and the second special effect described above, and “CHANCE” in the drawing) is executed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (K), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute a specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) within the execution period of the jackpot game, and the specific effect (“ When “CHANCE” is displayed), the jackpot type in which the winning jackpot is advantageous to the player (for example, the type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or the high probability short-time game state after the jackpot game ends) It is shown that the degree of expectation is high. The ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the above-mentioned special timer effect is executed, in which the count display is continued until after the big hit game is started, the big hit type is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player as well as being a big hit decision. A certain degree of expectation will also increase, so that it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Then, after this, an effect in which the teammate character fights against the enemy character is performed in a specific round game or the like, and as a result, the teammate character wins (FIG. 180 (L)), the jackpot type that the winning jackpot is advantageous to the player It will be shown that. When the teammate character is defeated in the production, it is indicated that the winning jackpot is not a jackpot type advantageous to the player.

  When the result of the performance during the big hit game appears in this way, the game proceeds with the content according to the result. For example, if the result that the ally character wins is obtained, the big hit game is executed up to 16 rounds. Or after the jackpot game is over, it is controlled to a high probability time-short state. On the other hand, when the result of losing the teammate character is obtained, the big hit game is finished in eight rounds, or after the big hit game is finished, a gaming state (for example, a low probability of lower probability) than the high probability short-time state. It is controlled in a short time state.

  Here, the content of the specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) shown in FIG. 180 (K) may be related to an effect in which a teammate character fights against an enemy character in a specific round game. For example, it is possible to set an effect content for the ally character to acquire a weapon in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K) and execute an effect of fighting the enemy character using the weapon acquired in the specific round game. For example, in the specific performance shown in FIG. 180 (K), it can be implied that the possibility that the teammate character has won in the subsequent battle has increased.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when such a timer effect is executed, and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described. Note that the effects described below can be executed in appropriate combinations between the effects, and can also be executed in appropriate combinations with the effects described above. Further, in each of the following effects examples, a case is described in which it is executed as a notice timer effect, but it may be executed as a variable timer effect instead of a notice timer effect. That is, in this case, the contents of the effects according to the following effects are determined in advance as the effects of the variation pattern.

[Timer exclusion effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) ) Is prepared, and any of these effects is set as a timer object (count object) (timer object notice lottery), and a timer effect is displayed for the timing at which the effect object targeted by the timer appears. Execute. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation (object A notice), special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation (Advance object B notice)) is performed without knowing which is the target of the timer, and in such a production situation, the production mode (timer target notice) It is possible to display which suggests which effect mode (not determined as a timer target in the lottery) (timer target exclusion effect).

  That is, in this case, at the stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is being digested, a guessing material as to which effect mode is the timer target is provided. For example, when a low-expected production mode (for example, a conversation notice) is suggested as a production mode that is not a timer object, the possibility that a low-expected production mode appears as a timer object at that time is excluded. Therefore, although it is at the stage where the remaining count in the timer performance is being digested, the high-expected performance mode (for example, an accessory B action) appears as a timer object. It is expected to improve this. In addition, when a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, an action B action) is suggested as an effect mode that is not subject to the timer, at that time, the timer effect cannot be expected. It becomes possible to focus attention on the performance, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the expectation for the timer effect without changing the mode of the count display itself while digesting the remaining count.

  FIG. 181 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed when the fluctuation numbers 7 and 8 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "No timer character reach" are selected in a situation. FIG. 181 (b) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed when the fluctuation numbers 15 and 16 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "no timer SP reach" are selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), a specific timer type (any one of “pending change 5”, “object A operation 3”, and “special timer 1”) Is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer exclusion effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), a specific timer type (as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510)) is selected. When any one of “pending change 5”, “actual object A action 3”, and “actual object B action 1” is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

  However, the timer-excluded effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). Alternatively, the determination may be made based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the big hit determination. As will be described later, the timer-excluded effect may appear within a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed afterwards (relative to the timer target advance effect) (whether it is executed or unknown), the effect that does not appear as a timer target It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the mode is. Note that when a timer-excluded effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not yet been executed (even when the timer pre-reading effect display does not appear), the timer effect is subsequently compared to when the timer-excluded effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate of executing is increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an advance suggestion that the timer effect is executed.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of “holding change 5” or “actual object A operation 3”, 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. At around timing, a count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the presentation mode (“holding change 5” or “actual A operation” 3 ") appears.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the example where the timer effect is executed in the mode of “holding change 5” or “object A action 3”, 20 seconds have passed since the symbol variation started. The count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started at the timing when the time has passed, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“holding change 5” or “object” A operation 3 ") appears.

  In this case, in these cases, the timer effect is not yet executed (the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed) at the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. First, the timer exclusion effect may occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is indicated that “conversation notice” is not a candidate for a timer target, and when a timer effect occurs within this variation, a candidate for a timer target is displayed. Can be grasped by the player that is restricted to any one of pending change, cut-in A, action A action, special timer, cut-in B, and action B action. In other words, in this case, a low-expected production mode out of a plurality of production modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, action A operation, special timer, cut-in B, service B operation) is excluded from candidates for timers. (A high-expected production mode can be expected to be a candidate for a timer), so that the player hopes that the timer production will occur within the fluctuation. Thus, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state.

  In the period in which the count display is in an unexecuted state (in this example, the period from when the symbol variation is started until 20 seconds elapses), the above-described timer pre-reading effect (the first preceding mode, the second mode) The preceding mode and the third preceding mode) may be displayed.

  Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the second timer target exclusion effect can occur in accordance with the start of the count display in the timer effect. In the second timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effect (conversation notice) already excluded in the first timer target exclusion effect are excluded. For example, if the second timer target exclusion effect indicates that the “special timer” is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate is suspended, cut-in A, accessory A action, cut-in B Then, the player can grasp that the action B has been narrowed down to one of the actions B. In this case, among the plurality of presentation modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation), the presentation mode that is determined to be a big hit is the candidate for timer Since it will be possible to recognize that it has fallen off, it will be possible to relieve anxiety about whether or not a highly anticipated effect will appear as a timer object after the first timer target exclusion effect is executed. Become.

  Next, the third timer target exclusion effect can occur at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation. In the third timer-excluded effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) already excluded in the first and second timer-excluded effects are further excluded. For example, if it is indicated that “Cut-in B” is not a candidate for a timer target, the candidate for a timer target is narrowed down to a pending change, a cut-in A, an accessory A operation, or an accessory B operation. It becomes possible for the player to grasp this.

  Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have passed since the start of the symbol variation, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0), and the production mode (“holding change 5” determined in the timer target notice lottery). "", A pending change occurs, and in the case of "act A action 3", an act A action occurs) is executed as a timer target effect.

  By the way, in the timer effects of “pending change 5” and “object A action 3” shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), when 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation, As shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, the timer effect in this manner (timer effect in which the effect of the timer target is executed when 40 seconds elapse) is executed. It can be seen that there are only three types of timer announcements: conversation notice, pending change, and accessory action. In other words, in this case, an experienced player confirms that a timer effect has been generated in such a manner that the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing of 40 seconds after the start of symbol variation. , Hold change, cut-in A, accessory A action, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B action, but not one of conversation notice, hold change, accessory A action It is assumed that you will see through. At this time, if there are cases where two effects are excluded by the timer-excluded effects, among the effects of conversation advance notice, change on hold, and accessory A action, any effect is displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer-excluded effect so that at least two effects are left as candidates for the timer effect.

  According to such a timer-excluded effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state or when the count display is being executed, it is inflated to an expectation or anxiety (which effects are excluded from the timer object). Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is the same as the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer target effect). The timing is set in accordance with the arrival of any of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates.

  For example, when looking at the time charts shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, when 45 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, even if the count display subsequently becomes 0, the “object A operation” is displayed as an effect for the timer. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. As described above, in the timer effect, each timing (usually 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case). Etc.), the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. In this regard, by performing the timer-excluded effect, even for beginners, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (in this example, start of variation) 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.), and the timer effect can be enjoyed to a high degree by recognizing that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are narrowed down. .

  Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of “special timer 1” (the count display having a count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the symbol change of the character reach). In the example), every 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer target exclusion effect, Each of the timer target exclusion effects will be executed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of “act B action 1” (the count having the count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the SP reach symbol variation). In the example where display is performed), every time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are executed.

  In addition, the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment suggests one effect mode that is not a timer target in the count effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive after the start of symbol variation. I did it. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer exclusion effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and a predetermined probability every time these timings arrive based on the type of variation pattern, the result of jackpot determination, etc. The timer target exclusion effect may appear, or the timing for executing the timer target exclusion effect may be selected from those timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer exclusion effect may be made different at a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing after the start of symbol variation (for example, the timing at which the first timer-exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur) If the ratio at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is higher than the later timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur) It is possible to digest the count display over a relatively long time in a state where it is suggested that the aspect is not a timer target. However, in this case, when the timer-excluded effect is executed at the timing when the first timer-excluded effect can be generated, and when the timer-targeted excluded effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer-targeted excluded effect can occur (Or even if the timer exclusion effect is executed at any timing), it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) of appearance of the big hit symbol is the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer-excluded effect appears at an early timing (while the rate of execution of the timer-excluded effect is increased) after the count display is started (after the symbol starts to fluctuate). Because it comes to be aware of what to do, it is expected to improve the game entertainment at the beginning of the production.

  In the case of realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the target of the timer based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “reserved change 5” of the character reach). Determining whether to generate an exclusion effect, and at what timing (in the example of FIG. 181 (a), a maximum of three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds)) to generate an exclusion effect Process. Next, at each timing at which it is determined that the timer target exclusion effect is to be generated, a determination process is performed as to which effect mode is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer target. Note that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149 or after step S5510 and before step S5511 is performed. It is possible to carry out based on the processing result information.

  Or you may make it perform the timer object exclusion | determination effect for exclusive use (only for conversation notice) which suggests that a specific production | presentation aspect (for example, conversation notice) is not timer object. That is, in this case, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “reserved change 5” of the character reach, etc.) A determination process is performed as to whether or not to generate a dedicated timer target exclusion effect at which timing.

  In any case, when the production mode suggested as the production mode that is not subject to the timer is of a relatively low expectation production mode, the suggested production mode is of a relatively high expectation production mode. It is desirable that the rate at which the highly anticipated performance mode appears as a timer-targeted performance is higher than that of the above. According to such a configuration, when a dedicated timer target exclusion effect that excludes a low-expected effect mode (conversation notice) appears, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, at least at a specific timing among the plurality of timings, only a specific performance mode (for example, a “conversation notice” which is a low-expected performance mode) may be suggested as a performance mode that is not a timer target. You may set as follows. That is, in this case, when the timer-excluded effect is generated at a specific timing, it is understood that a specific effect mode (for example, “conversation notice”, which is a low-expected effect mode) is not a timer target Since it becomes possible, it is possible to maintain the game entertainment interest with a sense of expectation that the effect of the timer target is a highly anticipated effect mode.

  In addition, in the timer object exclusion effect according to this embodiment, one effect mode is suggested as an effect that is not a timer object, but two or more effects that are not a timer object under a predetermined condition. You may make it suggest the production | presentation aspect. For example, if two low-expected effects are suggested, it is possible to greatly enhance the game entertainment at the stage of digesting the remaining count in the timer effect.

  In addition, with respect to “display suggesting which presentation mode that is not a timer object”, the count display starts within a period from when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or It is desirable to make it appear within the period until the effect that is the target of the timer is executed, and to maintain the display during the same period. Furthermore, with regard to the “display that suggests which effect mode is not subject to the timer”, if the display is maintained after the effect that is subject to the timer is executed, the timer effect It can be used as a material for remembering which production mode the subject of is.

  In addition, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, “display that suggests which production mode is not the target of the timer” is displayed while the remaining count of the count display is digested (for example, a specific timer When a timer effect of a type is executed, it is hidden at a predetermined timing (when a specific count value is reached before the count display reaches a predetermined value) (when the count display reaches a specific count value, etc.). May be maintained while the count display reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case) and the effect targeted for the timer is executed. In other words, in this case, the remaining count of the count display will be digested without knowing when the “display that suggests which direction is not targeted for the timer” will be hidden, It is expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period in which it is easy to become rutted). In order to obtain such an operational effect, for the “display indicating which presentation mode that is not a timer target” is hidden, the count display reaches a predetermined value and becomes a timer target. It is desirable to maintain the non-display state even after the production mode has appeared. However, even if the “indication suggesting which effect mode is not targeted for the timer” is hidden, the effect once suggested as the effect mode not targeted for the timer is displayed as the effect targeted for the timer. It is important to control so that it does not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with peace of mind unless the memory about the hidden display mode is forgotten. In addition, with regard to the “display that suggests which effect mode that is not a timer target” is hidden, the display after the count display reaches the predetermined value and the timer mode target mode appears. After maintaining the non-display state (for example, after the elapse of a predetermined time), check that the player's memory is correct so that the symbol is displayed again at a timing before it is confirmed and stopped. It is desirable to be able to do so.

  In addition, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state, a “display suggesting which effect mode that is not a timer target” appears, the predetermined effect condition is When satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while the timer effect (count display) is not executed. In other words, in this case, it is possible to give a sense of tension with respect to the timer effect before the count display is started, and it is possible to provide a sharp effect.

  Note that, as will be described later, “displays suggesting which presentation mode is not a timer target” is shown in FIGS. 198 (C) to (K) and FIGS. 200 (B) to (J). In addition, it is only necessary to be able to grasp that the production mode does not occur when the count display becomes zero. Other methods include, for example, a method in which the name of the effect mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a cross mark is added thereto, or a conversation notice or cut-in is performed at a timing before the count display reaches zero. To show that the female character or male character used to perform the conversation is dead and suggest that the conversation notice or cut-in cannot be performed, or the hold display is monochrome at the timing before the count display reaches 0 Shown that the color change cannot be displayed and the combination of the objects A and B fails at the timing before the count display reaches 0. Thus, a technique that suggests that the action A and B cannot be performed may be employed. The point is that a special mode that cannot appear at the timing before the count display reaches 0 when the timer display is selected is prepared, and this timing at the timing before the count display reaches 0. If an effect that is not a timer target, such as a conversation notice or a hold change, is executed in a special mode, it is possible to realize a “display suggesting which effect mode is not a timer target”. .

  In addition, when a timer-excluded effect is generated, a higher-expected effect mode is more likely to appear as a timer object when the count display reaches a predetermined value, compared to when the timer-targeted excluded effect does not occur. By controlling in this way, it is expected that the game entertainment will be more suitably improved when the count display digests the remaining count.

  By the way, if it is suggested that the effect form (special timer) of the hit determination is not a timer object in the timer object exclusion effect, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even so, there is a concern that it will be compared with the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination, and the gaming interest will be reduced. Therefore, if it is indicated that the winning appearance (special timer) is not subject to the timer, even if any other effects appear when the count display reaches the predetermined value, You may make it a fluctuation | variation be stopped by a big hit symbol without fail.

  Alternatively, when a timer target exclusion effect is generated, a jackpot symbol appears regardless of which effect mode appears as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). You may make it a ratio (expectation degree) become the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as a timer object when the count display reaches a predetermined value. The timer effect can be ended early at the time when the time is consumed. As a result, it is possible to shift attention to other effects while the remaining count of the count display is being digested, so the effect design that increases the types of effects that appear per unit time can be created. Can be encouraged.

  In addition, when two or more count indications (timer effects) appear within one symbol variation period and the timer-excluded effects are executed, when there is an effect situation in which they reach a predetermined value at different timings, the timer It is desirable to control so that an effect mode that is suggested not to be a timer target in the target exclusion effect does not appear as the timer target in any timer effect (count display).

  In addition, for the performance mode suggested that the timer target exclusion performance is not targeted for the timer, even if it is at a timing different from the timing at which the count display reaches the predetermined value, it does not appear after that. It is desirable to control (control so as not to appear even as an effect that is not a timer target).

  In addition, when executing the timer target exclusion effect, it may be possible to perform a prior effect indicating whether or not the timer target effect is suggested. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined aspect does not appear in the preceding effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is executed after the predetermined aspect appears in the preceding effect.

  In this embodiment, the timer-excluded effect is executed in accordance with one of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, what is necessary is just to perform a timer object exclusion effect according to one of a plurality of predetermined timings, and it is not always necessary to perform it according to these timings. However, it is desirable that the timer-excluded effect is not executed during a specific effect period such as a period in which the remaining count is low, even within the period in which the count display is being executed.

  Further, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer target exclusion effect is not allowed to be performed over the entire period during which the count display is performed, or the period during which the count display is performed. There may be cases where the execution of the timer-excluded effect is not allowed in a part of the period. By preparing such a special timer type, when the timer type appears, it is possible to concentrate on digesting the count display and enjoy the original timer effect. It becomes like this. In order to obtain such an effect, when a timer-excluded effect is not in a special period, an effect mode different from that in the special period is caused to appear in the special period. It can be said that it is important that the player can recognize this. On the other hand, even if the timer type is not allowed to execute the timer-excluded effect over the entire period during which the count display is being executed, the timer display is concentrated in the period before the count display is started. Therefore, it is desirable to allow the execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

  It should be noted that the above-described period of non-displaying the “display suggesting which presentation mode that is not a timer target” is controlled as the same period as the period during which execution of the timer target exclusion stage is not allowed. Also good.

  Further, when the count display in the timer effect is performed in at least one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode, and the count display is performed in the second mode, the first display It is good also as controlling so that the ratio with which a timer object exclusion effect is performed becomes high compared with the case where count display is performed in a mode. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed according to the count display mode, and it is possible to focus on the effect during the count display according to the count display mode.

  The timer exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is irrelevant, and the variation pattern type or jackpot You may make it perform based on the special result being obtained by the predetermined | prescribed effect lottery based on the result of determination. As will be described later, the timer-excluded effect may appear within a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good.

  In addition, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears when the timer effect has not yet been executed (even when the timer pre-reading effect display does not appear), the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. After that, it is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an advance suggestion that the timer effect is executed. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode of the timer prefetching effects. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation in which the timer effect is executed is not started and is still in the hold state, a specific effect mode that is not targeted by the timer effect can be suggested. A specific effect mode is not targeted for the timer, with the speculation of whether the timer effect appears due to the symbol variation inside, the timer effect appears due to the symbol variation in the hold state, or the timer effect does not appear. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the timer performance occurs.

[Timer first advance effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a counts a predetermined effect (the accessory B operation) using the specific decorative member (the accessory B), and displays a count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect appears. The process is executed up to a predetermined value within a period during which the design effect is performed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, the specific time is specified within a period before the timing at which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears. By making an effect using the decorative member appear, it can be suggested that the predetermined effect is counted (timer target advance effect).

  That is, in this case, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by focusing on what effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being consumed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained from when the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value.

  FIG. 182 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object advance effect performed when the fluctuation numbers 15 and 16 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "no timer SP reach" are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when any one of the specific timer types (first-out timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. 162 is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). A timer target advance effect is executed. Further, in the first-out timers 4 to 6 of the first-out timers 1 to 6, as the effect of the timer object, the combination of the accessory A used in the “object A operation” and the accessory B used in the “object B operation”. An effect such as an “actual article A & B operation” for operating both is performed.

  However, the timer-first-out effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first-out timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, FIG. When one of the timer types selected is selected, the timer target advance effect may be performed, or the timer type is irrelevant, and a special effect lottery based on the variation pattern type or the result of jackpot determination is special. You may make it carry out based on the result being obtained. Further, as will be described later, the timer target advance effect may appear in a variation pattern in which the timer effect is determined not to be executed, or may appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed afterwards (for the timer target advance effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), the timer effect count display It is possible to indicate in advance which type of effect mode that appears when becomes a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer target advance effect appears when the timer effect is not yet executed (even when the timer prefetch effect display is not displayed), the timer target advance effect does not appear after that. It is desirable that the ratio of execution of the timer effect be made high so that the timer effect is also executed as an advance suggestion that the timer effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the advance timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds is set at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. The count display is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“act B action” or “act A & B action”) that appears as a timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the advance timers 2 and 5, the count display with the count number of 70 seconds is started in accordance with the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is “0”. After that, an effect mode ("act B action" or "act A & B action") that is a timer object appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the modes of the advance timers 3 and 6, the display of the timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode) is performed in accordance with the start timing of the symbol variation. At the same time, the timer pre-reading effect is displayed and the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed at the timing when 50 seconds have passed, and the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started. After the display becomes “0”, an effect mode (“act B action” or “act A & B action”) appears as a timer target.

  In this respect, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the timer effect is not yet executed (even the display of the timer prefetch effect is displayed). The first timer target advance effect can occur even though it is set to (not in a state). In the first timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timers 1 and 4 is set at the first position or in the vicinity thereof. An effect of making it vibrate and play (a role B rattle) is performed.

  That is, the “object B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timer 1 is an “effect that displaces the accessory B from the first position to the second position”, and is the timer object effect of the advance timer 4. The “act A & B operation” is “the effect of displacing the accessory B from the first position to the second position and displacing the accessory A from the third position to the fourth position”. The timer target advance effect is common in that the accessory B used in the effect is used, but an effect (the accessory B rattle) different from any of these effects is performed. According to such a configuration, although the timer effect is in a stage before the execution, the possibility that the timer effect is performed after that can be suggested, and the target effect in the timer effect is It is possible to suggest which effect mode is used (indicating that the effect is using the accessory B). Also, in the first timer target advance effect, by using the accessory B, an effect (the accessory B rattle) different from the timer target effect (the accessory B operation, the accessory A & B operation) is performed. While the target effect in the timer effect is suggested to be an effect using the accessory B, it is concealed as to how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches the predetermined value and the timer target performance is performed.

  Further, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (e.g., 27 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the second timer object is displayed while the timer effect is being displayed. A first-out effect can occur. In the second timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timers 1 and 4 is changed from the “first position”. The effect (moving action B on the way (small)) is performed to “displace to the first halfway position between the first and second positions”.

  That is, the second timer target advance effect is common in that the accessory B used in the “act B action” and the “act A & B action” is used, but the effect different from any of these effects (the accessory) B middle operation (small)). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which effect mode is the target effect. It becomes possible to suggest (suggest that it is an effect using the accessory B). Also, in the second timer target advance effect, the effect B (operation B intermediate operation (small)) that is different from the timer object effect (object B operation, accessory A & B operation) is performed using the accessory B. As a result, while suggesting which direction the target effect of the timer effect is, the action B is operated when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming entertainments until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is performed.

  In addition, in the second timer target advance effect, the first timer target advance effect (roughness in the vicinity of the “first position”) is more than the effect range (“first position” to “first”). Displacement from “first position” to “second position” that appears when “act B action” or “act A & B action” is performed. ). Therefore, by comparing the first timer target advance effect and the second timer target advance effect, the feature B is displayed in the timer target effect ("object B operation" or "object A & B operation"). It will be possible to provide speculative material on how to operate.

  Further, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the timer object is displayed for the third time while the timer effect is being displayed. A first-out effect can occur. In the third timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timers 1 and 4 is “first” from the first position. An effect (moving action B on the middle of the accessory B (large)) is performed to “a second intermediate position between the first intermediate position and the second position”.

  In other words, the third timer target advance effect is common in that the accessory B used in the “act B action” or the “act A & B action” is used, but the effect different from any of these effects (the accessory) B middle operation (large)). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which effect mode is the target effect. It becomes possible to suggest (suggest that it is an effect using the accessory B). Also, in the third timer target advance effect, the effect B (operation B intermediate operation (large)) is performed using the accessory B, which is different from the timer object effect (object B operation, accessory A & B operation). As a result, while suggesting which direction the target effect of the timer effect is, the action B is operated when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming entertainments until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is performed.

  Moreover, in the third timer target advance effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (displacement from “first position” to “second midway position”) is larger than the first timer target advance effect. It is becoming larger and closer to the range of effects (displacement from “first position” to “second position”) that appears when “act B action” or “act A & B action” is performed. Yes. Therefore, by comparing the first to third timer target advance effects, the actor B operates in any manner in the timer target effects ("object B operation" or "object A & B operation"). You will be able to provide more speculative material about what to do.

  On the other hand, in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, the “act B B rattling” at the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), Each effect such as “actual action B midway action (small)” and “actual object B midway action (large)” is performed as the first to third timer target advance effect. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, the timer target advance effect is produced in the situation where the count display digests the remaining count at any timing of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. Will be done.

  On the other hand, in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, at the timing Ta <b> 1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta <b> 2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta <b> 3 (for example, 57 seconds), Each effect such as “B object midway action (small)” and “Accessory B halfway action (large)” is performed as the first to third timer target advance effect. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, at each timing of the timings Ta1 and Ta2, the count display is in an unexecuted state and the timer prefetching effect is displayed. The first and second timer target advance effects will be performed. According to such a configuration, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4 in which the timer target advance effect is executed when the count display is in an unexecuted state, but even the timer prefetch effect is not displayed. Compared with, the rate of occurrence of events such as "Timer effect was not executed even though timer target advance effect was executed" decreases, so the player has a higher expectation. You will be able to enjoy the timer target advance effect.

  In each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer target advance effects are executed. Then, after the timer target effect is executed, the symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  In addition, in the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive after the start of the symbol variation, the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” It was decided to produce using the accessory B used in. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target advance effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are determined based on the type of variation pattern, the result of jackpot determination, etc. The timer target advance effect may appear at a predetermined probability each time it arrives, or the timing for executing the timer target advance effect may be selected from these timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer target advance effect and the selection ratio of the content of the effect may be made different for a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

  When realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the target of the timer based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (eg, “first-out timer 1” of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) is performed as to whether to generate a first-out effect, or at which timing to generate a timer-target first-out effect. Next, a determination process (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is performed as to which effect mode is executed as the timer target advance effect at each timing at which it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to be generated. Note that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149 or after step S5510 and before step S5511 is performed. It is possible to carry out based on the processing result information.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content (table T10) of the determination process regarding whether to generate the timer target advance effect or at what timing the timer target advance effect is generated.

  As described above, the timer target advance effect refers to the timer target within the period before the timing at which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer target effect appears in the period during which the symbol effect is performed. It is an effect that suggests that the effect using the specific decorative member is targeted for the timer by causing the effect using the specific decorative member used in the production of the peripheral, and the peripheral control according to this embodiment The MPU 1511a prepares three timings Ta1 to Ta3 as timings at which such timer target advance effect can appear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, referring to the table T10 shown in FIG. 183, the winning information, the information related to the type of variation pattern, the information related to the timer type, and the production random numbers assigned to the information, On the basis of the timing Ta1, the timer target advance effect is executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (or the timer target advance effect is not executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3).

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, “No timer target advance effect is executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ None ”” in the drawing ”) as selection candidates for execution of the timer target advance effect. “Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta1 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 ”” in the figure) ”,“ Execute timer target advance effect only at timing Ta2 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (FIG. "Ta2") "," Timer advance effect is executed only at timing Ta3 of timings Ta1-Ta3 ("Ta3" in the figure) "," at timings Ta1, Ta2 of timing Ta1-Ta3 A timer target advance effect is executed ("Ta1" in the figure). 2 ”)”, “execute timer target advance effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 & 3 ”in the drawing”) ”,“ timer targets at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 Selection candidates such as “execute first-out effect (“ Ta2 & 3 ”” in the figure) ”and“ execute timer target first-stage effect at all timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“Ta1 & 2 & 3” in the figure ”) are prepared.

  In the example of the table T10, when the count display is in an unexecuted state and the timer prefetching effect is not displayed, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the timer target advance effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target advance effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1 & T2, the timing T1 & T3, and the timing T1 & T2 & T3. However, as described above, the timer target advance effect may be performed at these timings.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the ratio of execution of the timer target advance effect is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. And the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used for the timer target effect is “act A & B”, compared to when the specific decorative member used for the timer target effect is “act B”. The timer target advance effect is set so as to increase, and the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at least at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 as a result of performing the determination process based on the table T10, the timer target advance effect appears. A determination process for the production type is further performed.

  FIG. 184 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T11) regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at the timing when the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T11 illustrated in FIG. Then, based on the winning information, the information regarding the type of the variation pattern, the information regarding the timer type, and the effect random numbers assigned to the information, any type of effect mode (“object B rattle”, It is determined whether or not “the action B halfway action (small)” and “the action B halfway action (large)” are caused to appear at the same timing that is determined as described above.

  FIG. 185 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T12) regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at the timing when the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T12 illustrated in FIG. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the production random numbers assigned to the information, any type of production mode (“object B rattle → role "B B rattling", "B B rattling → Operation B halfway (Small)", "B B halfway (Small) → Bing B middle (Small)", "Battery B rattling → B "Intermediate action (Large)", "Intermediate action B (Small) → Action B intermediate action (Large)", "Intermediate B action (Large) → Intermediary action B (Large)") A determination is made as to whether to appear at each of the two determined timings.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that “actual object B rattle → actual object B rattle” appears, “actual object B rattle” is determined at any of the above two determined timings. This is executed as a timer target advance effect, and when it is determined that the “actual object B rattling → actual object B midway action (small)” appears based on the table T12, At the earlier timing of the timing, “act B for rattling” is executed as a timer target advance effect, and “intermediate action B (small)” at the later timing of the two determined timings. Will be executed as a timer target advance effect.

  FIG. 186 shows an example of the content (table T13) of the determination process regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at these timings when the timer target advance effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the production random numbers assigned to the information, any type of production mode (“object B rattle → role "B B rattling" → "B B rattling" → "B B rattling" → "B B midway action (Small)", "" B B rattling → Battering midway B (S) "→ B "Operation (Small)", "Action B in the middle (Small)-> Action B in the middle (Small)-Action B in the middle (Small)", "B "Operation (Large)", "Battery B rattle → Midway action B (Small) → Midway action B (Large)", "B midway action B (Small) → Midway action B (Small) “Intermediate action B (Large)”, “Intermediate action B (Small) → Intermediate action B (Large) → Intermediate action B (Large)”, The action B intermediate action (large) → the action B intermediate action (large) → the action B intermediate action (large) ”) is determined at each of the above-determined three timings. It will be.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that “object B rattle → object B rattle → function B rattle” appears, at any of the above three determined timings, "B object rattling" is executed as the timer target advance effect, and it is determined based on the table T13 that "object B rattling → function B midway action (small) → function B halfway action (large)" appears. Is performed, “Function B rattling” is executed as a timer target advance effect at the first timing among the three timings determined as above, and among the three timings determined as above At the second timing, “actual action B halfway (small)” is executed as a timer target first effect, and the above three timings are determined. And executes the "character object B middle operation (large)" as the timer object first out effect in the third timing.

  In the examples of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same manner (selection ratio) regardless of whether the timer target advance effect is determined to appear at any timing Ta1 to Ta3. The determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio) depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. For example, if the determination process is performed in such a manner that the ratio at which an effect mode having a large effect range is selected increases as the timing at which the timer target advance effect is determined to appear is later, the timer It is possible to estimate how much time remains until the target effect is performed based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target advance effect. In this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 (G), the timer object is operated by operating the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) in a manner that overlaps the count display of the timer effect in a front view. In order to obtain such an effect, it is preferable to make it difficult to visually recognize the count display during the execution of the first-stage effect (the action B intermediate operation (small), “the operation B intermediate operation (large))”. In this way, if the timer target advance effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target advance effect is executed at the same timing, the timer target depends on the type of effect that appears at that time. Or will feel that there will be enough time left before the timer-targeted performance will be performed (when the range of the performance is large) ( When the output range is small), it is expected that a gap from when the accurate remaining count can be grasped thereafter can be expected to have fun. At this time, the count display may be hidden during execution of the timer target advance effect, and the count display may be displayed again when the timer target advance effect ends.

  However, if the specific decorative member (in this case, the accessory B) is operated in a manner that overlaps the count display of the timer effect in a front view so that the count display is difficult to view while the timer target advance effect is being executed ( Or, if the count display is hidden, the count display reaches the predetermined value even though the timer target advance effect is being executed, and the timer target effect is being executed. There is a concern. Therefore, it is desirable that the count display is made difficult to visually recognize during execution of the timer target advance effect, while the count sound generated in accordance with the execution of the count display is continuously executed. That is, such a count sound is output when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and is not output when a timer target effect is performed. By continuously outputting the count sound during the performance, it is expected to suppress misperception that the timer target performance is being executed.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the timer target advance effect has a larger effect range compared to the case where the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. It is set so that the ratio at which the mode is selected is high.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act A & B”, and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act B”. In comparison, in the timer target advance effect, the ratio that the effect mode having a large effect range is selected is set to be higher.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, when the timing is late among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, compared to when it is the early timing among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the production mode having a large production range in the timer target advance production. Is set so that the rate of selection is high. Therefore, it is possible to infer whether or not the remaining time until the effect for the timer target is left is based on the size of the effect range that appears in the timer target advance effect.

  In the examples of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as time passes, the range of the effect in the timer target advance effect (the action B rattle → the action B midway action (small) → the action B halfway action (large) ) Is spread, and it is set so that the reverse (mode in which the production range narrows) does not occur even if the current state is maintained (such as an accessory B rattle → the accessory B rattle). That is, in this case, as the time elapses, the timer object “action B operation” and the “object A & B operation” are close to the range of effects that appear when the operation is performed. By confirming the effect, it is possible to recognize that the remaining time until the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” as the timer object is reduced.

  Further, in the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used during the timer target effect (for example, the accessory B operation) is always used. For example, the timer target advance effect may be performed using a different decorative member (for example, the accessory A) without using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used during the accessory B operation). That is, in this case, the timer target advance effect functions as an effect that suggests with a predetermined accuracy the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. And when realizing such a timer target advance effect, the type of effect to appear as the timer target advance effect (the accessory B rattle, the accessory B midway action (small), the accessory B halfway action (large)) In addition, it is desirable that the ratio (accuracy) that appears when the type of the suggested effect reaches the predetermined value depends on the number of executions. For example, when the type of production (action B midway action (large)) with a large production range appears, the timer target advance is compared with when the type of production (composition B rattle) with a small production range appears. The effect using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used in the effect (the accessory B operation, the accessory A & B operation) may be increased when the count display reaches a predetermined value, When the number of executions of the timer target advance effect in the variation is large, the effect (special item B) using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used in the timer target advance effect is smaller than when the execution number is small. The ratio of the action and the accessory A & B action) when the count display reaches a predetermined value may be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of effects modes including “the accessory B operation” and “the accessory A & B operation” (“the accessory B operation”, “the accessory A & B”). Performing an effect using a specific decorative member (an accessory B) as a timer target advance effect on the premise that any of the effects other than “operation” can appear. It was. However, on the premise that only the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” is prepared as an effect mode using the accessory B, a specific decorative member (object) An effect using B) may be performed.

  For example, as an effect mode using the accessory B, only the “object A & B operation” can appear as an effect for the timer target, and the specific decorative member (the accessory B) is used as the timer target advance effect. When the used effect is performed, only a part of the decorative member (the accessory B) used in the timer target effect (the accessory A & B operation) is used in the timer target advance effect. That is, in this case, the “effect using the accessory B” is suggested while suggesting that the “effect using the accessory B” appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target advance effect. It becomes more difficult to predict the entire picture (using the accessory A in addition to the accessory B), and this can be kept secret. Therefore, the effect of the accessory B when the count display reaches a predetermined value by a plurality of timer target advance effects (the accessory B rattle → the accessory B halfway operation (small) → the accessory B halfway operation (large)). Even if an effect approaching the range is executed and the prediction thereof is possible, not only the effect range but also the presence of the effect A is hidden, so the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value It becomes possible to suitably maintain the content (object A & B operation) of the target effect in a concealed state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B operation is performed may be performed as a timer target advance effect.

  According to such a configuration, the timer target advance effect is performed using only a part (the accessory B) of the accessories A and B used in the “object A & B operation” that is the effect of the timer. Of course, in the timer target advance effect, the effect range of the accessory B in the “object A & B operation” using only a part (the accessory B) of the accessories A and B used in the “object A & B operation”. Only part of the effect will appear (the action B midway action (small), the action B halfway action (large)). Then, after such a small production range is gradually expanded by a plurality of timer target advance productions, the “object A & B operation” which is the production of the timer target is performed, so that only the feature B in the larger production range. In addition, since the effect using the accessory A also appears, the novelty when the timer target effect is performed is lost by performing the timer target advance effect while digesting the remaining count. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target advance effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily coincide with each other as long as it is possible to suggest which effect mode appears as the timer target effect by the timer target advance effect. For example, in the case where a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory” are arranged in a front view as fan-shaped features, This is a case where the specific decorative member used in the above is a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and the specific decorative member used in the timer target performance is a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, the fan-shaped accessory was used as the timer target advance effect at the stage before the effect using the fan-shaped accessory was performed as the timer target effect (while the count display was being executed). It is possible to produce an effect.

  In this embodiment, an accessory is used as the specific decorative member. Instead, a display means may be used as the specific decorative member. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, an effect similar to the effect using the above-mentioned accessory is realized by increasing the range in which the display appears (the range of the effect) or changing the display content. It is possible.

  Incidentally, it is desirable to end the “effect using the specific decorative member” performed as the timer target advance effect after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the specific decorative member is an accessory, control is performed to return the specific decorative member to the original position after the lapse of a predetermined time, and when the specific decorative member is a display means, Control to hide the display as the timer target advance effect is performed. At this time, the predetermined time required for the timer target advance effect is desirably shorter than the time required for the effect (timer target effect) that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In this way, by realizing different presentation modes depending on the length of time, in the timer target advance presentation, the specific decorative member used in the timer target presentation can be kept in a choi that is not very satisfactory. Therefore, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by waiting for the count display to reach the predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the count display is not displayed, a plurality of effects modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B) A count effect in which at least one of the operations and the like appears can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after the count display reaches the predetermined value and is not displayed, the first effect mode (for example, conversation notice) appears among the plurality of effect modes. Even so, the count display is redisplayed thereafter, and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the count display is redisplayed, the count display is hidden again, and a second effect mode (for example, an accessory A operation (an accessory A notice)) appears among a plurality of effect modes. (Revival timer production).

  That is, in this case, after the first effect mode is shown as if it was a timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, which is different from the first effect mode. Even if the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears and this is hidden, Then, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer object will be changed thereafter, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  FIG. 187 (a) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). In the situation, it is determined that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and “conversation notice” is performed at the previous timing and “act A operation 1” is determined at the later timing. FIG. 15 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the resurrection timer effect performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “No timer character reach” are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 1 but also a plurality thereof) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161) The following processing relating to the resurrection timer effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the revival timer effect is not performed, but the revival timer effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), if the timer type of “object A operation 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. The selected “object A action 1” includes a plurality of effect forms (“object A action 1-1”, “object A action 1-2”, “object A action 1”, including the mode of the resurrection timer effect. -3 ”or“ Accessory A operation 1-4 ”). The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or a predetermined lottery result.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of “actual material A operation 1-1”, 20 seconds after the count display with the count number of 40 seconds is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation. A “conversation notice” that is not subject to the timer is executed when the timer elapses, and the timer is targeted when the count display is hidden when the predetermined value is reached when 40 seconds elapse. The “object A operation (object A notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “acting material A action 1-2”, after the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, the value is set to a predetermined value when 20 seconds have passed. The “conversation notice” (first production mode) that is not subject to the timer is executed while the count display is hidden and the count display is displayed when the “conversation notice” is finished. The timer effect is continued after being redisplayed, and the count display is hidden again after a predetermined time has elapsed (40 seconds after the count display with a count of 20 seconds has started). The “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is a timer object, is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “act A action 1-3”, after the count display with the count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, the predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have passed. While the count display is not displayed, a notice E2 (first effect mode) as a non-target notice that cannot be a timer-targeted effect is executed, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) ends. The count display is redisplayed and the timer effect continues, and the count display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have elapsed since the count display with a count number of 12 seconds was started). Is not displayed again and the “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is a timer object, is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “acting material A operation 1-4”, the predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of 8 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. When the count display is not displayed, a notice E1 (first effect) as a non-target notice that cannot be a timer-targeted effect is executed. The notice E1 (non-target notice) When it is finished, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect continues, and counts after a lapse of a predetermined time (after 40 seconds from the start of the count display with a count number of 8 seconds). The display is hidden again, and the “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is a timer object, is executed.

  That is, among a plurality of presentation modes prepared corresponding to the “object A operation 1”, the “object A operation 1-2”, the “object A operation 1-3”, and the “object A operation” The aspect of “1-4” corresponds to the rebirth timer effect. In these revival timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden between the time when the count display is started and the time when the timer target effect (the accessory A operation) is performed. Since the notice of conversation, notice E2, or notice E1) appears, it is possible to make it seem as if the timer effect has ended when the effect appears.

  In this regard, in the mode of “Combination A operation 1-2”, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, change on hold, cut-in A, combination A operation, special timer, cut-in B) that can be adopted as a timer object. , The action B action, etc.), the resumption timer effect is targeted for the effect (conversation notice) having a lower jackpot expectation than the effect that is the target of the timer (action A action). To do. In other words, in this case, after an effect (conversation notice) with a low expectation of jackpot appears as an effect for the timer target, it is indicated that the effect (conversation notice) is not a timer target effect (count display) ), And an effect (action A action) with a higher expectation level than the effect (conversation notice) appears as a timer-targeted effect (second effect mode) (the count display is hidden again). Display), it is expected that the recreation of the game will be improved by such reversible performance.

  In addition, in the mode of “act A action 1-3” or “act A action 1-4”, there are a plurality of performance modes that cannot be adopted as timer targets (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F). Or the like) as a target (first effect mode). In such a configuration, the timer effect is not terminated at this timing when an effect mode (here, the notice E2 or the notice E1) that cannot be adopted as the timer object appears as if it is a timer object effect. Will be suggested to continue. That is, in this case, in particular, the notice E1 that appears when the mode of the “act A action 1-4” is executed is low in expectation of itself, but the timer effect is continued without being terminated at this timing. By functioning as an effect that suggests, it becomes possible to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment. It should be noted that a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the notice E1, the notice E2, the notice E3, the notice F, etc.) that cannot be adopted as the timer object can appear even when the timer effect is not performed.

  In addition, in each mode of “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4” according to this embodiment, it appears when the count display is started. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), as a peripheral control MPU 1511a, a 40-second production timer is secretly set for control, and count While the display is once hidden, the timer for the effect is internally updated so that the timer effect (40 seconds after the count display is started) (Action A action) appears. According to such a configuration, any one of “Combination A operation 1-1”, “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4” is selected. Even in the case where the accessory A operation 1 is executed in this manner, the count display is hidden again at the same timing from the start of the change, and the timer target effect (the accessory A operation) can appear.

  And in such a revival timer effect, “the count display that appeared before it was once hidden” and “the count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed” are different counts. It is important to make it possible to recognize that the same count digest is being used, not to stop, and to indicate that the timer performance has not ended halfway and continues .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of “actual object A action 1-2”, when the count display with the count number of 20 seconds becomes “0 second”, the count display is hidden. The “conversation notice” is executed, but after the “conversation notice” is completed, the count display is displayed again with a minus sign so that “0 seconds” when the display is hidden is displayed. It expresses how the count digestion is not over and continues.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of “acting material A operation 1-2”, the count digest is secretly continued while the count display is hidden, The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count is digested for the time that has been hidden. More specifically, in the mode of “act A action 1-2”, the count display is not displayed at “0 seconds”, and the count display is displayed again after the non-display state is maintained for 2 seconds. However, when the count display is redisplayed, the count digestion by the minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2 seconds”.

  In each example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the symbol variation is stopped after the timer target effect is thus executed.

  In order to realize such a revival timer effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the result of the jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of timer effect (for example, “Role A action 1” of the character reach). Thus, a determination process (see FIG. 187 (b)) is performed as to whether the revival timer effect is to be generated, and in which manner the revival timer effect is to be generated. Note that this determination process is performed based on the result information of each process before, for example, after step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 and before step S5511 is performed. Is possible.

  FIG. 187 (b) shows that when the timer type of “object A action 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the “object A action 1” includes the mode of the resumption timer effect. It is a figure which shows the example about the content (table T14) of the determination process about which of the some production | presentation aspect is performed.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when “Character A action 1” of the character reach is selected, the “act A action 1” is changed to “the accessory A action 1-1”. , “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4”.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first refers to the table T14 shown in FIG. 187 (b), and allocates the winning information, the information regarding the variation pattern type, the information regarding the timer type, and the information. Based on the production random number, any mode of “Combination A operation 1-1”, “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4” With this, it is selected whether to execute the timer effect.

  As a result, if it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in any one of the “actual material A operation 1-3” and the “community A operation 1-4”, the processing in steps S5512 and S5525 is performed. Therefore, the type of the non-target notice is determined based on the determined type. For example, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of “object A action 1-3”, it is determined in step S5512 and S5525 that at least the notice E2 is executed as a non-target notice. Therefore, if it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of “object A action 1-4”, at least the notice E1 is executed as a non-target notice in the processes of steps S5512 and S5525. A determination will be made.

  In the example of the table T14, when the revival timer effect for the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect modes (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer object are displayed. Compared to the case where the targeted revival timer effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher. In addition, when a revival timer effect is performed for an effect mode with a high expectation among the effect modes (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode (notice that cannot be adopted as a timer object) E1 and E2) are set so that the jackpot expectation level is higher than the case where the resurrection timer effect is performed for a performance mode with a low expectation level. Further, in the example of the table T14, when the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the revival timer effect is executed is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. Is set to

  According to such a revival timer effect, an effect mode (first effect mode) with low expectation appears once by non-display of the count display, which temporarily gives disappointment to the player, but thereafter counts The display is redisplayed and this is continued, and the count display continued after the predetermined time is not displayed again, and an effect mode (second effect mode) with high expectation appears. This makes it possible to give surprises and surprises to the player who was paying attention to the count display temporarily while giving a sense of regret by continuing and reversing the count. Can be suppressed.

  In this sense, an effect mode with a high degree of expectation (second effect mode) is executed as an effect using two different decorative members, and an effect mode with a low degree of expectation (first effect mode) is used. In order to express the reversibility by the revival timer effect, it is desirable to execute the effect using only one of the two different decorative members (or a decorative member related thereto). At this time, one of the two different decorative members may not necessarily completely match when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, in a case where a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory” are arranged in a front view as fan-shaped features, This is a case where the decorative member used in the aspect is a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and the decorative member used in the second rendering aspect is a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the effect performed as the first effect mode is lower in expectation.

  Also, in such a revival timer effect, “count display that appeared before being temporarily hidden” and “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed” are different counts. In order to make it possible to recognize that the same count digest is being performed instead of digesting, while the count display is hidden, the count sound is It is desirable to continue to perform over the “count display that appeared before the display” and “the count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed”.

  In this embodiment, the revival timer effect is performed only once within a period during which one symbol variation is performed. However, the revival timer effect is performed a plurality of times within a period during which one symbol variation is performed. It may be executed over a wide range. At this time, each time the count display is hidden, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed. Then, as the number of times the revival timer effect is executed within the period in which one symbol variation is performed, the production mode (production type and production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) with high expectations as the production of the timer target It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing high.

  In the rebirth timer effect, the time until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears after the count display is hidden and the redisplayed count display is again hidden. It is possible to recognize whether or not the timer-targeted effect is in a state where the length of time until the second effect mode (the accessory A operation) appears is made different. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, in order to improve the game entertainment as a timer effect, when a revival timer effect is executed for an effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer object As compared with the case where the resurrection timer effect for (notice E1, E2) is executed, a higher-expected effect mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) appears as the timer target effect. It is desirable to control the ratio to be high. In addition, when a revival timer effect is performed for an effect mode with a high expectation among the effect modes (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode (notice that cannot be adopted as a timer object) E1, E2) compared to the case where the revival timer effect is performed for the effect mode with a low expectation level, the effect mode with a high expectation level (effect type and effect content (cut-in It is desirable to control so that the aspect ratio)) appears.

  Further, in the revival timer effect according to this embodiment, the first effect mode appears after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and is not displayed, and the first effect is displayed. When the mode is finished, the count display is redisplayed, and this is negatively counted. When this reaches a specific negative value and this is made non-displayed, the second effect mode appears. If the first production mode and the second production mode are made to appear under non-display, the count display is hidden when the first production mode and the second production mode are made to appear. Each count value at this time may be set appropriately.

[Timer suppression control]
In other words, the effect that is the target of the timer effect (count object) can often be executed even when the timer effect is not being performed. For example, the specification that is executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern Production (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, action B operation, etc.), predetermined production (for example, hold change, etc.) executed at the timing of winning a prize Prepared. However, among these, a new prize is awarded when the count display reaches a predetermined value in a situation where the “specific effect executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern” is the target of the timer effect (count target). If a certain effect (for example, a change in hold) occurs due to accidental occurrence, the predetermined effect occurred in relation to the count display reaching the predetermined value as the target of the timer effect. However, it may be difficult to grasp whether a certain effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect that is not related to the timer effect (confusion). ) Missed specific effects (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, action B action, etc.) Rikane no.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a specific type of timer effect with the specific effect as a timer is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the specific type of timer effect reaches a predetermined value When there is a relatively large first period, display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed when a new winning occurs, but the first period ends, and the count display in the specific type of timer effect is a predetermined value. When the remaining time until reaching the second period is relatively small, even if a new winning occurs, display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is not permitted (timer target suppression control). As a result, in a situation where a specific type of count effect with a specific effect as a timer is executed, the count display is displayed as the target of the timer effect while allowing the generation of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target due to the occurrence of a new prize It becomes difficult to grasp whether a predetermined effect has occurred in relation to reaching a predetermined value or whether a predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused) Can be suitably avoided.

  FIG. 188 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object suppression control performed when a specific variation number is selected in the situation.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing at which a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, the specific effect that is the target of the timer appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a period until the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, “5 seconds”) before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0 seconds”) after the symbol variation is started. In the (first period), when a new winning occurs, display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed (allowable period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, “5 seconds”). In the predetermined period (second period), even if a new winning occurs, timer target suppression control that does not allow display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is performed (suppression period).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the timer target suppression control according to this embodiment, a suppression period (second period) in which display of a predetermined effect is not permitted is expressed as “a count display is a specific count value ( For example, “5 seconds”) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) and a specific effect as a timer is executed (terminated) ” It is supposed to continue until “the period after the specific performance ends”. That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 second”) and the specific effect that is the target of the timer is generated, the generation of the effect itself is suppressed, so that the target is the timer. The specific effect comes to function as a valuable effect occurrence opportunity, and the degree of attention to the specific effect is improved, and the game entertainment when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) is suitably maintained. That is expected.

  However, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, “5 seconds”) has elapsed since the end of the specific effect as the timer target. In this case, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is not permitted is ended.According to such a timer target suppression control, the symbol variation is stopped after the suppression period ends in this way. In the period until it is made, display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed again when a new winning occurs.

  By the way, as described above, in the suppression period, even if a new winning is generated, display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is not permitted. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player may play a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period in which the display of the predetermined effect is not permitted even if a new prize is generated, and thus the progress speed of the game per unit time May be detrimental to the hall side.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if a new winning is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by this is not permitted, but the display of the predetermined effect that is not permitted is not allowed. Does not discard the display of the predetermined effect itself, but controls to delay (carry over) the display timing until the suppression period ends. According to such a configuration, even if a new winning is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by this is not permitted, but the display of the predetermined effect is suitably executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period.

  In addition, when a new prize is generated within the allowable period and the predetermined effect is displayed, the sound output is performed in accordance with the display of the predetermined effect, whereas the new prize is generated within the suppression period and the predetermined effect is displayed. In the case where the display of the effect is delayed (carry over) until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable that the sound output corresponding to the display is not performed when the predetermined effect is displayed. As a result, the display of the predetermined effect can be secretly performed at a timing different from the normal (at the time of winning), and when the predetermined effect is displayed while the player does not know, the surprise performance is improved. It is expected to improve the game entertainment interest by granting.

  In addition, regarding the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the start of the execution period of the performance that is the target of the timer to the timing after the end of the execution period, It is desirable to control so that it does not necessarily occur when an effect is performed.

  For example, when a timer performance is performed, such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability, and when a big win is won by a big hit determination, compared to when a big hit is lost (losing) Thus, if the rate of occurrence of such a suppression period is increased, a predetermined effect caused by the winning occurs when a winning is generated aiming at the timing before and after the timer target effect is performed. (Whether or not there is a restraint period and it is highly likely that you have won the jackpot) It will be suppressed that the game which is not made is performed.

  In addition, the rate at which the suppression period is generated varies depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer (for example, conversation advance notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). In this way, when a prize is generated within a period prior to the presentation of the timer-targeted presentation, whether or not a predetermined presentation resulting from the prize is generated (the suppression period has occurred and the specific type of presentation is generated) To see if there is a high possibility of being executed as a timer target), and a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period is suppressed. Will come to be.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a table (table T15) that is referred to in timer object suppression control when the ratio of occurrence of the suppression period varies depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the timer target effect. .

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc. are prepared as timer target effects. .

  In this regard, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), basically, the lower the jackpot expectation degree, the lower the rate of occurrence of the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect. It is set so that the higher the degree of the production mode is, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the production for the timer target.

  More specifically, the suppression period is not necessarily generated when the timer target effect is “conversation notice”, and when the timer target effect is “cut-in A”, the suppression period is 20%. When the timer target performance is “Cut-in B”, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the timer target performance is “Action A action”. In some cases, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and when the performance of the timer target is “act B action”, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80%. When the production is “special timer”, a suppression period is always generated.

  According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation degree of jackpot, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect, so that a predetermined effect is generated due to a new winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility of missing a performance mode with a high expectation level for jackpots. To put it the other way, the lower the expectation level for jackpots is, the more likely it will be missed, so when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the appearance mode with low expectation level for jackpots appears. It becomes possible to proceed with the production while keeping what is being kept secret, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained until the symbol is stopped.

  In addition, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the generation rate of the suppression period is determined according to the type of the production mode that appears as the production of the timer, regardless of whether or not the big hit is won. Yes. Therefore, even if the big hit is won or lost (losing), if the type of the production mode appearing as the production of the timer target is the same, the suppression period can be generated at the same rate. .

  By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the timer target effect is “pending change”, the suppression period is surely generated even though the jackpot expectation is a relatively low effect mode. I am doing so. That is, the “pending change” according to this embodiment can be displayed as a specific effect that is not a timer object when a new winning occurs, as well as a specific effect that is a timer object. Therefore, if there is a case where the suppression period does not occur when such a “pending change” occurs, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the “pending change (fluctuating symbol) Change of hold display corresponding to ")" and "hold change (change of hold display corresponding to the pending symbol)" due to a new winning may occur at the same time, there is a concern that they may be confused is there. Therefore, it is desirable to always generate the suppression period when the timer target effect is “pending change”. However, as described above, the “holding change” also has a higher possibility of overlooking the same as the “conversation notice”, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, there is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is low. If the aim is to advance the production while keeping the appearance of it secret, control may be performed so that the suppression period does not occur even when the production of the timer target is “pending change”.

  In the example of the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the rate at which the suppression period is generated varies depending on the type of the production mode that appears as the production of the timer, but in addition to this, the production of the same type Even if it is an aspect, you may make it further vary the ratio which a suppression period generate | occur | produces with the timer classification determined by count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

  For example, even when “conversation notice” is selected as the effect for the timer, the “conversation notice” is “conversation notices 1 to 4” shown in FIG. 161, and further “ It is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the suppression period varies depending on which of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is applicable. In this case, the generation ratio may include 100% or 0%.

  In addition, the production subject to the timer is any one of “conversation notice”, “holding change”, “cut-in A”, “special timer”, “object A operation”, “cut-in B”, “object B operation”. In this case, the suppression period may be generated not only in a predetermined period before and after the execution of the effect for the timer, but also in the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. In particular, when the performance of the timer target is the “special timer” with the highest expectation level for jackpots, the above-described suppression period must be generated over the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. ”May be increased in expectation of being performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect resulting from this is not discarded, and the timing for performing the display ends when the suppression period ends. However, the display of the predetermined effect itself may be discarded and not performed.

[Timer production targeting new timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the design effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, etc.) prepared as candidates for counting , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) can be performed in a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which it appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after preparing a “specific effect mode” as one of the plurality of effect modes that appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, When the “mode” appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) until then is newly started.

  That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is executed in the form of the first count display and the second count display, even if the time required for the timer effect as a whole is the same The time required for digestion of one count display (first count display or second count display) can be shortened by itself, and the monotony during digestion of the count display is eliminated and the game is enhanced. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  FIG. 189 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). Time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect with the new timer performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (refer to FIG. 148) corresponding to “No timer character reach” are selected in the situation It is a chart. FIG. 189 (b) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). Time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect with the new timer performed when the variable numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected in the situation It is a chart.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for convenience of explanation, only one pattern is prepared for the type of “timer effect with a new timer as an effect” for each variation pattern. A plurality of types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) having different generation timings (for example, a pattern in which the first count display is started from the middle of symbol variation) and end timings are prepared. Then, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: Step S5510).

  In the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect” shown in FIG. 189 (a), first, the first count display with a count number of 30 seconds is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation. Then, after the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, a “specific effect mode” that is a timer target appears. After the “specific production mode” appears in this way, a new count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is newly displayed. To start this (new timer). In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, whenever a “specific production mode” appears, a count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far. ) To be displayed and started. However, even if the first count display becomes the predetermined value in this way, only by newly starting another count display (second count display), the execution of the effect targeted for the timer is executed. May feel as if they were entrusted to them, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment amusement.

  Therefore, in the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect” according to this embodiment, first, as the “specific effect mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, “Failure production” that does not show any expectation is to appear. In other words, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect having a degree of expectation as an effect for the timer target (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, combination An unfortunate production situation is generated as if it failed to generate the object B motion, etc., but in this production situation, the second count display is newly started, As a person, he / she feels that he / she can challenge the failed timer performance again, and is expected to improve his / her gaming pleasure through such feelings.

  However, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” shown in FIG. 189 (a), the second count display started after the “failed production” is not terminated within the symbol variation period, and the remaining count is calculated. Symbol stop (big hit symbol or lose symbol) is made in a state where digestion is not finished. According to such a configuration, even if the player is looking forward to what kind of expectation will appear when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), Since it will be possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation at the point when the symbol stop (winning of the big hit) is displayed earlier, without causing any decline in the entertainment interest of the game The timer effect can be ended. In the symbol stop that appears before the second count display is completely exhausted, in addition to the lost symbol, the jackpot symbol can also appear, especially when the jackpot symbol appears, there is no game entertainment There will be no decline.

In other words, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” shown in FIG. 189 (a), almost no period of symbol variation (at least half) despite the fact that no effect with the expected degree appears as the timer object. Count display (first count, second count) over the above period)
-In addition to performing an effect (the effect that the first count reaches a predetermined value) that raises the possibility that an effect with some expectation may appear in the middle stage,
・ By providing a configuration in which the newly started second count display is stopped with the count remaining, the expectation that the timer-targeted production will soon occur will be almost completely Will be able to last for a period of time. In addition, as described above, it is a mechanism that suitably suppresses a decrease in the entertainment enjoyment attributed to the fact that no production with expectation is generated in either the first count display or the second count display. Street.

  On the other hand, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” shown in FIG. 189 (b), as in the example shown in FIG. The first count display with is started. Then, after the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, a “specific effect mode (failure effect)” that is a timer target appears. After the “specific production mode (failure production)” appears in this way, a count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is displayed. The point of newly displaying and starting this is the same as the example shown in FIG. 189 (a).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), the symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol variation period. It is supposed to do. In this regard, “timer effect with a new timer as a production target” means that, as described above, the expectation that a timer-targeted production will soon occur without causing any production with a degree of expectation as a timer object to appear. Since it has a technical feature in sustaining, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of symbol variation, it is possible to produce an effect with a degree of expectation. I do not. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol variation period, the process of simply causing the effect with the expected degree to not appear is performed. The expectation that the production will soon occur cannot be sustained.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol variation period, The count display is not hidden and is maintained as it is at a display that has reached a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the symbol is stopped while the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display reaches the predetermined value and is maintained, an effect (count target effect) corresponding to the second count display reaching the predetermined value appears from the player side. Since it seems that the state is not strange, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of expectation that a timer-targeted production will soon occur until the symbol is stopped. Even in such a configuration, the interest regarding the big hit expectation can be completely lost when the symbol stop (hit a big hit) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. As a result, the timer effect can be terminated without causing any effect to appear without deteriorating the gaming interest.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for a player who has confirmed the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect”, what happens when the failure effect or the second count display occurs? There is a concern that it will be overlooked that there will be no production. Therefore, only when the jackpot symbol is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count (including the period in which the display of the state where the second count display reaches the predetermined value is maintained). A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Or you may make it the ratio which a special production produces increases. According to such a configuration, the second count display is different from the first count display in counting purpose, and is the big hit symbol stopped during the period when the second count display is using the remaining count? It becomes possible to add the interest of no. In this sense, the display mode (form, position, size, etc.) of the first count display and the second count display may be different from each other.

  Note that the special effect may be generated when the second count display leaves the remaining count and is in a running state. However, considering that a special effect is generated as an effect corresponding to the second count display, the second count display is not displayed when the big hit symbol is stopped (the second count display leaves the remaining count). Even if it is in a state, it is desirable to execute a special effect after it is hidden. And it is desirable that the special effects executed in this way are continuously displayed including the execution period of the jackpot game and the subsequent game period. That is, in this case, the special effect is ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process related to the “timer effect with the new timer as an effect”.

  Special effects may be generated within the symbol variation period. In this case, it is desirable to execute a special effect after the big hit symbol appears (for example, displayed in a temporarily stopped state) and the second count display is not displayed within the symbol variation period. However, the big hit symbol may appear (for example, displayed in a temporarily stopped state) within the symbol variation period, and the second count display may be hidden after executing a special effect.

  And if the occurrence ratio of special effects (including 100%) is increased when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is digesting the remaining count, the symbol stop is performed. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before it is displayed, the second count display may be hidden and the symbol may be stopped in the hidden state. Even in such a case, while the second count display is being performed, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest. However, even if a big hit symbol appears when the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, the ratio of occurrence of a special effect remains relatively low. In this case, the ratio may include 0%.

  When realizing such a “timer effect with a new timer as a production target”, in particular, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, a “failure effect” that does not show any expectation is caused to appear. Is different from the above-described timer effect that causes other effects to appear (for example, conversation advance notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) (these (In a separate lottery), based on the fact that a predetermined performance condition that has nothing to do with the result of the jackpot determination or the type of variation pattern is satisfied, the “timer performance with the new timer as the production target” is performed. It is desirable to make this determination. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is stopped, both the big hit and the loss can be stopped (the situation where the big hit symbol may appear according to the probability of the big hit lottery) It is possible to generate a “timer effect as a production target”, and thereby it is possible to cause a failure production without any expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the timer target effect will soon occur without causing any effect with the expectation level to appear as the timer target over the period in which the symbol variation is performed.

  However, if it is not required to exhibit such an operational effect, the “specific production mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure production without any expectation. , It may be executed as another effect mode (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, action B operation, etc.). In this case, through the same processing as the case of performing the above-described timer effect in which other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) appear. The “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” is executed.

  In FIG. 189 (a), in the example in which the first fluctuation pattern (without timer character reach) is selected, the symbol is displayed before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. In FIG. 189 (b), in the example in which the second variation pattern (no timer SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (character reach without timer) is selected, a pattern in which the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value may appear. In the example in which the variation pattern (no timer SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation may be stopped before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. In addition, when a variation pattern different from these variation patterns is selected, a “timer effect with a new timer as a production target” may be performed.

  In addition, for the first count display, a timer-targeted effect is about to occur as a count display having a shorter count than the second count display that can be stopped during the display of the count display. It is desirable to maintain a sense of expectation to do.

  In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the “failure effect” is performed, if the symbol display is stopped before the count display is completed, either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol may appear. However, in the normal count display that occurs regardless of the “failure effect”, it is desirable that the big hit symbol always appears if the symbol is stopped before the count display is completed.

  The first count display has a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds) as the count number, and may be executed in any one of them. The first count display and the second count display are different count displays that are executed only in one mode (for example, 40 seconds) regardless of the count number executed in the first count display. It is desirable to be able to recognize that it is executed.

  Further, in view of the fact that the first count display and the second count display are executed as different count displays, the period when the first count display is performed and the period when the second count display is performed The display mode (including color differences and effects) of the background image, etc., may be different from when it is in (including the period when the display reaches the predetermined value and is maintained) desirable. In such a process, even if the reach effect is generated during the period when the first count display is performed and the background image is shifted to the reach effect, the second count display is executed until then. The second count display is executed even when the reach effect is generated and the background image for reach effect is generated within the period in which the second count display is performed. The display mode different from that which has appeared at that time is maintained even during the reach production period, and is maintained until the second count display is not displayed.

  In the “timer effect with the new timer as a production target” according to this embodiment, as the “specific production mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, The “failure effect” that does not show the expectation level was made to appear, but instead, another count start suggestion suggesting that a count display different from the count display that had been executed so far will be started. An effect may appear. In this case, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the another count start suggestion effect, or the degree of expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of effects modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation) prepared as candidates for counting within the period during which the symbol effect is performed. , Cut-in B, accessory B action, etc.), a timer effect that allows a count display to be performed up to a predetermined value for the timing at which it appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display is a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). A hell timer mode (first timer mode display) in which the proportion of the appearance of a high degree of expectation as an effect of the timer object (the effect type and the content of the effect (such as a cut-in aspect)) appears is relatively low, When the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which a high-expectation production mode appears as a timer target production can be displayed. (Timer mode production).

  That is, in this case, when the remaining time of the count display is consumed, one of the timer mode displays having different degrees of advantage with respect to the timer effect is displayed, and this is the predetermined value after the count display is started. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until it reaches “0” here.

  FIG. 190 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). Timer mode effect that is performed when variation numbers 15 and 16 (refer to FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected and it is determined that “cut-in B1” is performed as a timer-targeted effect. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (actually, not only cut-in B1 but a plurality) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161). In addition, the following processing relating to the timer mode effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the timer mode effect is not performed, but the timer mode effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 190, when the timer type “cut-in B1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the next process as the selected “cut-in”. “B1” is a plurality of production modes (“cut-in B1-1”, “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, “cut-in B1-4”) including the mode of the timer mode production. Judgment processing on which is executed is performed. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or a predetermined lottery result.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, in the form of “cut-in B1-1”, when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation. “Cut-in B (cut B notice)”, which is a timer object, is executed while the count display is hidden by reaching a predetermined value (“0” in this case).

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-2”, 20 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, and this is the first specified The hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed while the count digestion is in progress when the count value (here, “30”) is reached, and 50 seconds have elapsed since the count display started. When it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the “Cut-in B” that is the target of the timer is executed while it is not displayed, but the hell timer mode (first timer mode) The display of “display” is not hidden but is maintained after “cut-in B” is hidden.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-3”, 18 seconds have elapsed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specific count value. When the second specific count value (in this case, “32”) is reached, a heaven challenge effect is performed as to whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress. As a result of failure in the heaven challenge production, the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is performed, and when a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached after 50 seconds from the start of the count display. While the count display is not displayed, “Cut-in B”, which is the target of the timer, is executed, but this is not displayed for the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display). Since without being to indicate the "cut-B" was hidden even the display is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-4”, 18 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specific count. When the second specific count value (in this case, “32”) before the value is reached, a heaven challenge effect is performed as to whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress. As a result of the successful heaven challenge production, the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is performed, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display started, and the predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached. Then, while the count display is hidden, “Cut-in B” which is the target of the timer is executed. For the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), After the "cut-B" without being in the non-display is hidden even the display is maintained.

  That is, among the plurality of presentation modes prepared corresponding to “cut-in B1”, the modes of “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4” are timers. It corresponds to mode production. And in these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs while the count digestion is in progress, and the timer target effect is executed while either display of the timer mode appears. Will be. Therefore, even when the count display is exhausting the remaining count, the timer effect can be rendered with the timer mode effect related to the timer effect.

  More specifically, when the heaven timer mode appears as the type of timer mode effect, the proportion of the effect type with a higher expectation appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the hell timer mode appears. Since the ratio of appearance of a high-expected aspect as the aspect (effect contents) of cut-in B, which is an effect targeted for the timer, becomes high, it is impossible to wait for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, the timer effect can be more closely watched. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the timer target effect itself cannot be expected compared to when the heaven timer mode appears. Thus, it becomes possible to turn the gaze toward the player, so that even if a low-expected stage of appearance appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In order to make the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode function more effectively, the same effects as the effects of the timer target when the heaven timer mode is displayed and when the hell timer mode is displayed Even when a mode appears, it is desirable to control so that when the heaven timer mode is displayed, when the effect mode appears, the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing when the symbol stops thereafter is higher.

  In addition, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4” modes), the timer Even after the target effect is executed and hidden, the display relating to the timer mode type (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, after the timer effect is ended, the effect can be advanced while the timer-related effect is displayed, and the effect state in which the timer effect is executed in either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode. The symbol is stopped in a state where the player recognizes whether or not Note that the display in heaven timer mode and hell timer mode is not displayed before the count display reaches the predetermined value (before the timer target effect occurs) or the symbol stop is displayed. The display may be hidden at the previous timing, or the display may be maintained even when the symbol stop is displayed, and may be hidden when the symbol stop is completed.

  Further, the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is executed (for example, during the execution of the timer prefetch effect). In addition, when performing the heaven timer mode or hell timer mode display or the heaven challenge effect when the count display is not executed, the timer effect is not necessarily generated after the effect is executed until the symbol is stopped. It may not be allowed to. However, when performing heaven timer mode or hell timer mode display or heaven challenge production in the state where the count display is not executed, compared to the case where those productions are not executed in the state where the count display is not executed, It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed before the symbol is stopped is increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests in advance that the timer effect is executed.

  In the form of “cut-in B1-3” and “cut-in B1-4”, the heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display reaches the second specific count value, and then the count display is the first. While the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect when the specific count value is reached, in the “cut-in B1-2” mode, the count display becomes the second specific count value. When the count display becomes the first specific count value, the hell timer mode is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, it is possible to first pay attention to whether or not the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility that the heaven timer mode will occur is lost. That is, in this case, the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself does not occur, so the count display is the first specific count value. It becomes possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode occurs when it becomes.

  In addition, when the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the rate at which a highly anticipated effect mode appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the timer mode effect itself does not occur and the case where the hell timer mode occurs, the rate at which a highly anticipated effect mode appears as an effect subject to timer will be different. Even when the relationship is adopted, it is possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode is generated when the count display becomes the first specific count value.

  On the other hand, when the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are used as the timer mode effects when the count display reaches the first specific count value. As a result, the timer mode effect type that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value can be further watched.

  According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also some specific count values different from the predetermined value (first specific count value, second specific count value) Since the timer production (count value) and the production related thereto can be interesting and watched even when the time is reached, the game entertainment during the period when the count display is executed Can be suitably maintained.

  In each example shown in FIG. 190, the timer effect count display sequentially reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value, and when it reaches a predetermined value, the timer target effect is executed. The symbol fluctuation will be stopped.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, not only the cut-in B1 but a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161), the specific As a timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190), it is determined which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) is executed. However, instead of cut-in B1, cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510). Then, it may be determined which timer type is selected from these candidates. This processing method can be similarly adopted in processing related to execution of other effects (for example, a resurrection timer effect).

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the heaven timer mode is displayed and the timer target effect is performed, the specific type of effect (cut-in B) is compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. The ratio of content with high expectation (such as cut-in B performed with a color with high expectation) was increased. However, instead of this, when the heaven timer mode is displayed, if the timer target effect is performed, compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed, a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation advance notice, hold change) , Cut-in A, special timer, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) may be such that the proportion of the high-expected performance type appears. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, as the timer target performance, the ratio of the high-expected performance type may be increased, and the ratio of the high-expected content may be increased.

  In addition, a specific effect type selected from a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, special timer, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is selected as the timer target effect. If a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode must be generated within the count display execution period. Also good. In this case, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode is generated can appear without performing the heaven challenge effect.

  Further, it may be possible to perform an effect indicating that one of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode is necessarily generated within a period before reaching the second specific count value at which the heaven challenge effect is executed.

  In addition, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the heaven high probability mode in which the rate of success in the heaven challenge production (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher when the heaven challenge production occurs than in the normal time. You may make it transfer to. That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, the probability of occurrence of the heaven challenge effect itself when the heaven timer mode is not displayed is lowered (the probability of generating the hell timer mode without generating the heaven challenge effect or the timer The probability that the mode effect is not generated is increased), or the expectation of the timer target effect itself generated in the heaven timer mode is lowered as compared with the normal time, thereby realizing the heaven high probability mode.

  Also, in the heaven challenge production, a period during which the operation by the player can be accepted is set, and the success or failure result (heaven timer mode, Which of the hell timer modes occurs) may be displayed.

  In addition, if the heaven challenge effect is generated when the number of executed counts in the count display is relatively small, for example, the heaven challenge effect is generated at the same time as the count display of the timer effect is started, the count in the count display is displayed. It is desirable that the rate of success in the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher than when the heaven challenge effect is generated when the number of executed is relatively large. . That is, in this case, it is possible to maintain the game entertainment interest with the expectation that the production will soon occur immediately before the appearance of the production that is the subject of the timer production, and the production that is the subject of the timer production appears. When it takes a long time (the number of counts) to do so, it is expected to maintain the amusement interest by expectation that the heaven challenge production will occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer target effect is executed. In this case, the success rate of the heaven challenge effect is the lowest and the timer target effect already executed. On the other hand, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will occur in a follow-up manner.

  Further, a heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. When the heaven challenge effect is executed as the target effect of the timer effect, the success rate in the heaven challenge effect (the ratio displayed in the heaven timer mode) is set to 100%, and after the heaven timer mode is displayed In the symbol variation period, the ratio of the high-expected effects (for example, the action B action) among the effects prepared as one of the timer target candidates, although not targeted for the timer, is the effect. It is desirable to make it higher than when it did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the design effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, etc.) prepared as candidates for counting , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) can be performed in a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which it appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect different from the timer effect during execution of the count display (desired effect having a predetermined expectation is desirable, but not necessarily limited thereto). When it is executed, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value, and the output related to the count display is not performed until the predetermined value is performed, and this is performed in the middle of the execution of the predetermined effect. Any of the production modes for which output is to be stopped is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

  According to such a configuration, even if the output related to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is stopped halfway and the output related to the predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is maintained until the count display of the timer effect is performed and this reaches a predetermined value (counting period).

  FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count output stop control performed when the specific variation number is selected in the 2nd processing condition.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation is started. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, the timer target effect which is the timer target appears.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time when the predetermined effect appears. It is determined whether the situation is in a predetermined production situation. And as a result, when it is in a specific effect situation, it is supposed that the output concerning the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the control for executing the predetermined effect is performed. The “predetermined specific effect situation” used for determining whether or not to stop the output related to the timer effect count display is, for example, the timer effect count display being executed. This is an effect situation in which contention occurs between the timer effect and the predetermined effect, such as when a predetermined effect is executed using an area.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is displayed even after the output related to the predetermined effect ends. The count display is not output again. On the other hand, even after the peripheral control MPU 1511a stops outputting the count display, the time since the count display is started (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly measured internally. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have elapsed since the count display was started), it is determined that the timing at which the output display is stopped reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The target production appears.

  According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is executed, the output stop state related to the count display is maintained, but if the count display is not stopped, the predetermined value (here, “0”) is set. When the timing that should have been reached has arrived, the timer target performance appears. In other words, in this case, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the timer target effect appears due to the surprise performance that the timer effect that seemed to have been interrupted by the execution of the predetermined effect was kept secret Will come to be.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), even if the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the predetermined control is performed. When the production situation at the time of the production appearance does not exist in a predetermined production situation, the output related to the count display of the timer production is continued until it reaches a predetermined value without stopping, and the count display is digested. In this situation, a predetermined performance is executed.

  More specifically, the predetermined effect is “an effect that causes an enemy character to appear in a specific area”, “an effect that attacks the specific area”, or “display when the effect fails in a specific area” If the player performs such a predetermined effect while the count display is being executed in a specific area, the player will have a timer effect (count display). On the other hand, there may be a concern that there may be some adverse effects on the performance (for example, the expectation level of the timer performance is lowered). Therefore, when there is a production situation that may cause such a concern, the output of the timer production count display is stopped and the predetermined production is executed, so that any adverse effects on the timer production are produced. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect without producing an image as if it is exerted (effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the timer target effect is made to appear in a surprise manner while maintaining the output stop state related to the count display. Therefore, such a predetermined effect is used. Thus, it can be expected that the gaming interest will be improved on the contrary (the production mode of FIG. 191 (b)).

  However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped every time such a predetermined effect is executed, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself deteriorates, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered. Is done. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when executing the predetermined effect, there is a space (an area where no effect is output) in an area different from the specific area where the count display of the timer effect is output. In some cases, the predetermined effect is output not in the specific area but in a vacant area while maintaining the output of the timer effect count display without being stopped (FIG. 191 (c)). ) Production mode). As a result, it becomes clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect that cancels the count display of the timer effect in the middle of the process, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the game entertainment is reduced. Will be avoided.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 191, after the timer target effect is executed, the symbol variation is stopped.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for realizing such count output stop control.

  As shown in FIG. 192, if it is determined that a predetermined effect is to be executed based on the result of jackpot determination or the type of variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment First, when the timing for generating a predetermined effect has arrived within the symbol variation execution period, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific effect is in place prior to starting the output of the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

  Here, the “specific production status” means that when a predetermined production is newly output, an area necessary for newly outputting the predetermined production is other various productions (here, a count display of a timer production). As described above, this is a situation in which all of the above are used, and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 201G and 201H described later, a “bullet firing effect” by a cannon corresponds to a predetermined effect. In the bullet firing effect, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area, and the lower area in the display area are selectively used as bullet discharge destinations. Usually, the unused area is used to produce a bullet firing. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), which will be described later, an area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect is other various effects (count display (upper left area), symbol variation (upper right) Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer-excluded effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. This corresponds to the above-mentioned “specific production situation”. If the bullet is fired in such a specific production situation, the production that is already in the output state (for example, a count display) at the bullet launch destination is broken or destroyed by the fired bullet. (There will be a conflict regarding the production output between the timer production and the predetermined production), and as a result, there is a possibility that the big hit expectation will be lowered. Was also mentioned above.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, when it is determined that the specific production situation is in place before starting the output related to the predetermined production (YES in step S5701), it is already different from the predetermined production. The output in the output state (here, the count display) is stopped (step S5702), and a process related to output of the predetermined effect is performed using the empty area created thereby (step S5703).

  On the other hand, prior to starting the output for the predetermined effect, when it is determined that there is no specific effect status (NO in step S5701), other effects are included in the area necessary for effect output. Since there is an unused area that is not used, processing for outputting a predetermined effect is performed using the unused area without stopping output of an effect different from the predetermined effect. (Step S5713).

  Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, an effect mode advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to increase the rate at which appears. For example, in the example of FIGS. 191 (b) and (c), when the production mode of FIG. 191 (b) in which the production of the timer target is suddenly executed while the output related to the count display is stopped, It is desirable to perform control so that the ratio of appearance of a high-expected performance mode (production type and content of performance) as a timer-targeted performance is higher than when the production mode of FIG. 191 (c) appears.

  Note that the processing in step S5702 and step S5703 may be executed as one processing. For example, if the processing data in which the output data of the count display is stored is overwritten with the output data of the predetermined effect, the output related to the count display is automatically canceled, and the output is stopped in the state where the output is stopped. It is possible to perform output related to a predetermined effect.

  In this embodiment, the output for the count display is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed when in a specific effect situation. However, the effect to be output is not limited to this, The output related to the production may be stopped.

  In the process of step S5702, an effect type for which output is to be stopped is selected from a plurality of effects (in an output state) that use an area necessary for outputting a predetermined effect, and output of the selected effect is stopped. Then, a predetermined effect may be output. In this case, it is desirable to set a priority in advance for a plurality of effects that are candidates for output cancellation, and to select an effect type for which output is to be canceled based on the priority. About this priority, it is desirable to set beforehand on a program on the basis of whether it is a production more important to a player. As a result of determining the priority order, when all of the other effects in the output state have higher priority than the predetermined effect, the output related to the other effects is maintained and the output of the predetermined effect is not performed. .

  Then, the production types for which output is to be stopped are executed as a plurality of productions that are related and connected to the production contents (for example, timer production that is connected by the count display and the timer production production). Among the effects, the predetermined effect is produced before the output is stopped during the effect that appears earlier (for example, while the count display is being executed) and before the effect that appears later (for example, the timer target effect) is started. When is terminated, it is desirable to execute an effect that appears later without stopping output.

  In addition, for the effects and output effects that are subject to output cancellation when executing the specified effects, in addition to effects by image display, effects by action of actors, effects by music, effects by panel lamps, etc. Good. In addition, when the predetermined effect is executed, the output or the predetermined effect that is the target of output cancellation is a combination of at least two or more of the effect elements such as the image display, the accessory operation, the music, and the board lamp. In the case of being executed as a combined performance, it is only necessary to stop outputting at least one of the combined performance elements. For example, when the predetermined effect is a “bullet firing effect” shown in FIG. 201 (G) to be described later and the effect to be output is “combined effect of image display and board lamp”, the combined effect Even if only the output related to the image display is stopped and the output related to the panel lamp is maintained, it will adversely affect the effect of the panel lamp outside the bullet as the image display in the display area. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition by production) will occur.

[Timer plus production]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first counts at least one of a plurality of effects (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). The count display can be displayed within the period in which the design effect is performed, and the count display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the count display is hidden and the count target effect appears in the non-display state. Production can be performed. In this regard, in the count effect, after the count display that has reached the specific count value (for example, “0”) is not displayed, any one of the plurality of effect modes appears, and the specific count value (for example, “0”) is displayed. )), It is possible to execute an effect of continuing the count effect by re-displaying the count display with a larger count value (timer plus effect).

  That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, “0”) and this is not displayed, the count display is not displayed. Since there is a possibility that the count effect will continue to be displayed again with a count value greater than the specific count value (the possibility that a higher expectation effect mode will appear), the count display is It is expected to maintain the game entertainment after being hidden.

  FIG. 193 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer plus production performed when a specific fluctuation number (timerless SP reach) is selected in the situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only cut-in B2 but also a plurality) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (FIG. 162), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is not performed, but the timer plus effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), when the timer type “cut-in B2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the selected as the next process. A determination process is performed as to whether “cut-in B2” is executed in a plurality of production modes (“cut-in B2-1” and “cut-in B2-2”) including the mode of the timer plus production. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or a predetermined lottery result.

  In the example of “cut-in B2-1” in the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), after a count display with a count value of “40” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation, 40 seconds have elapsed. When a predetermined value is reached (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed, “Cut In B (Cut B Notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B2-2”, a count display in which the count number is significantly smaller than that in the form of “cut-in B2-1” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change. Yes. In general, in such a timer effect, there is often no effect during the period from when the count display is executed until the count display reaches a predetermined value. The Therefore, in the timer plus effect (“cut-in B2-2” mode) shown in FIG. 193 (a), first, a relatively small first count value (here, “4”) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation. After displaying the count display with, and making it non-displayed, in the non-display state, the first double-compatible effect is displayed for a time longer than the time during which the count display was displayed (here, 4 seconds). (For example, for 9 seconds).

  Here, in the first double-compatible effect, first, the effect of cut-in B is used as an effect (first timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, “4”). Execute. However, in the first timer target effect, a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) appears as a mode of cut-in B. Thereafter, an effect (second timer target effect) is executed as to whether or not to redisplay the count display in such a manner that the count value is larger than the first count value. In addition, as an effect about whether to re-display the count display, for example, whether a specific display image (count-up image) appears or whether a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) operates It can be realized as an effect such as no.

  It should be noted that in the effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display (count up effect), each time the count display in the non-display state is redisplayed, it is executed prior to that, but a specific display An effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable character (count-up character) is made different according to the number of times the image is redisplayed. It is desirable to do so. When a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is adopted as an accessory indicating that the count display is redisplayed, the count-up effect is given to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory). For example, it is desirable to be used for other effects such as big hit determination. However, in this case, in addition to changing the operation mode of a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), in addition to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), a different movable accessory is further operated. In order to make it possible to grasp that the count-up effect is not being executed, it is desirable to perform the movable effect in cooperation with them.

  According to such a configuration, two different effects (first timer target effect (cut-in B) in which the degree of expectation is indicated) as a target of the count “4”, the second on whether the count display is redisplayed. Since a timer target effect (count-up effect) is performed, when a relatively short time count display (count “4”) is executed, it is possible to enjoy a timer target effect over a longer time. become able to. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the time required for the count display to be executed while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, and to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment in the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Become so.

  In this regard, in the aspect of “cut-in B2-2”, an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display in the first double-compatible effect appears, and the first result appears when the effect result appears. The timer effect is continued by re-displaying the count display in such a manner that the second count value (here, “5”) larger than the count value is given. However, in the first double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the count display is prepared, and the count display is not redisplayed when the effect pattern appears. It is desirable to end the timer effect at this point.

  Thereafter, when the count display having the second count value (here, “5”) is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double-corresponding effect is displayed in the count display in the non-display state. Is executed over a longer period of time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time during which it was displayed (here, 5 seconds).

  In the second double-compatible effect, first, the effect of cut-in B is used as an effect (third timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the second count value (here, “5”). Execute. However, in the third timer target effect, an aspect (a character wearing a green aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect appears as a cut-in B mode. Thereafter, an effect (fourth timer effect) regarding whether or not to re-display the count display in a manner having a count value larger than the second count value is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, “5”) that requires a longer time than the first count value (here, “4”) is executed. However, in exchange for this, the effect of cut-in B is executed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, while maintaining the total time as a timer effect, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment in the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value while extending the time required for counting. Become.

  In this regard, in the aspect of “cut-in B2-2”, an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display in the second double-compatible effect appears, and the second result appears when the effect result appears. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in such a manner that a third count value (in this case, “7”) larger than the count value is given. However, even in the second double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to re-display the count display is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable to make the timer effect end at the time.

  After this, when the count display having the third count value (here, “7”) is hidden, the count display is displayed for the third double-compatible effect in the non-display state. It is supposed to be executed over a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (in this case, 7 seconds).

  Here, even in the third double-compatible effect, first, as an effect (fifth timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, “7”), the cut-in The effect of B is executed. However, in the third timer target effect, an aspect (a character wearing a red aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects appears as a cut-in B mode. Thereafter, an effect (sixth timer effect) regarding whether or not to re-display the count display in a manner having a count value larger than the third count value is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, “7”) that requires a longer time than the first and second count values (here, “4”, “5”). However, in exchange for this, the effect of cut-in B will be executed in a mode with higher expectation than the first and second timer target effects. It is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest in the period until the predetermined value is reached.

  In this regard, in the “cut-in B2-2” aspect, an effect result that fails to re-display the count display in the third double-compatible effect appears, and at this point, the timer effect ends. Will be. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect of the timer, but before the cut-in B according to the aspect appears. Since the count display for a relatively short time is displayed a plurality of times, and the effects corresponding to the count display are executed a plurality of times, the timer effect is started and ended. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, every time the count display is redisplayed, the count value is increased to earn the scale of the entire production, but the total time that the count display is displayed is itself more than the total time that the count display is hidden. Since the timer target effect is executed in a mode with a higher expectation every time the count display is hidden, the timer effect is executed while maintaining the game entertainment interest for a long time. Will be able to.

  Moreover, in the mode of “cut-in B2-2”, every time the count display is hidden, the expectation level is gradually increased by changing the mode (color) for the same effect (cut-in B). Since the state of going is expressed, the multiple count display can be executed as one timer effect for “cut-in B”, and the finally displayed effect (red) It becomes possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura is an effect of the timer effect.

  In the third double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is re-displayed and the timer effect is displayed. It is desirable to continue. However, when the maximum number of times that the count display is redisplayed has been reached, it is not an effect of cut-in B that has been executed up to that point, but an effect different from this (the expectation level is greater than any aspect of cut-in B). It is desirable to recognize that the maximum number of times has been reached by executing a special effect that is not prepared as a timer target candidate. In this case, the effect on whether or not to re-display the count display after the special effect is executed does not appear, but the time required for the special effect is the double corresponding effects (two It is executed over a longer period of time than the effect that the timer target effect is executed), suggesting that the expectation is higher than the effect that has appeared so far (cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura). This is desirable in order to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the degree of expectation may be 100%.

  FIG. 193 (b) is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the timer plus effect.

  The timer plus effect may be performed in the manner shown in FIG. 193 (b). That is, in the mode shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the count display having the first count value (here, “4”) is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the first count value ( Here, the effect corresponding to the count “4” corresponding to “4”) (the effect during the 4-second timer) is executed.

  Here, in the production corresponding to the count “4” (production in the 4-second timer), the production period corresponding to the time required for the first count value (in this case “4”) to be consumed is set. Within the effect period, a timer effect such as cut-in B is executed in a predetermined manner (such as a character wearing a blue aura).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the timer object in the situation where the count display is being executed, so that it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during the count digestion. .

  In addition, when such an effect corresponding to the count “4” (the effect at the time of the 4-second timer) is ended, the count display of the count “4” also reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). Easily recognizes that the count display has reached the predetermined value (here, “0”) simply by confirming the count-corresponding effect (4-second timer effect) without confirming the effect count display. Will be able to.

  Then, after the timing at which the effect corresponding to the count “4” (the 4-second timer effect) is finished (after the count display of the count “4” reaches a predetermined value), the first count value ( Here, an effect (first count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is executed in such a way as to have a count value larger than “4”). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to redisplay the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect ends at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears as a result of the first count-up effect, the second count value (here, “4”) larger than the first count value ( Here, the timer effect is continued by re-displaying the count display in the form of “5”). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having the second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”). An effect corresponding to “5” (a 5-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “5” (the effect at the time of the 5-second timer), an effect period corresponding to the time required for the second count value (here “5”) to be consumed is set. Within the production period, timer-targeted productions such as cut-in B appear in a mode (such as a character wearing a green aura) that has a higher degree of expectation than the above-mentioned production corresponding to the count “4” (production for a 4-second timer). Will be allowed to.

  Then, after the timing for ending the effect corresponding to the count “5” (the effect at the time of the 5-second timer) has come (after the count display of the count “5” reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here Then, an effect (second count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is executed in such a way as to have a count value larger than “5”). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to redisplay the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect ends at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears as a result of the second count-up effect, a third count value (here, “5”) that is larger than the second count value ( Here, the timer effect is continued by re-displaying the count display in the form of “7”). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having the third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”). An effect corresponding to “7” (7-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “7” (the effect at the time of the 7-second timer), the effect period corresponding to the time required for the third count value (here “7”) to be consumed is set. Within the production period, timer-targeted productions such as cut-in B appear in a mode (such as a character wearing a red aura) with a higher degree of expectation than the above-mentioned “5” -adaptive production (five-second timer production). Will be allowed to.

  Then, after the timing at which the count “7” corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) ends (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here Then, there may be an effect (third count-up effect) regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display in such a way as to have a count value larger than “7”). This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is performed as a result of the effect. When an effect pattern that fails to re-display appears, the timer effect ends at this point without re-displaying the count display.

  In this regard, in this modified example, after the timing at which the count “7” corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) ends (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. This shows an example in which the count-up effect itself suggesting the possibility of no appearance. Thus, even when the count-up effect itself does not appear, the count display is not redisplayed as in the case where the effect pattern that fails to re-display the count display appears in the count-up effect. The timer effect comes to an end at the time.

  According to the count-up effect according to such a modified example, when a count display having a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed in advance corresponding to the count value. Since a count-corresponding effect (cut-in B or the like) having an effect content for a certain amount of time is started, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during execution of the count display. Further, when such a count-compatible effect is finished (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect is given as to whether the count display has a larger count value to be displayed again, and these two effects are alternately performed. Since the timer effect is executed and continued by appearing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the count display is only performed in the timer effect and the effect is not performed at all. To be able to maintain.

  In this modified example, a count-corresponding effect (for example, count “4”) having effect contents for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, “4”). While the corresponding effect) is being executed, the count display is also digested (count down from 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 0). However, as described above, the count corresponding effect (for example, the count “4” corresponding effect) according to this modification is finished at the timing when the displayed count value (for example, “4”) ends. Since the count display is executed, only the count value at the time of appearance (for example, “4”) is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during count digestion (4 → 3 → 2 → 1) is performed. It is more desirable not to necessarily perform this for the countdown (→ 0), in order to encourage attention to a count corresponding effect (for example, a count “4” compatible effect).

  And in each example shown to FIG. 193 (a), (b), after a timer effect is performed in this way, a symbol fluctuation | variation will be stopped.

  Of the timer plus effects, the effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display is set based on the fact that an effect acceptance period of a predetermined time is set and the player performs an operation within the period. An effect suggesting that the display is redisplayed (success effect) or an effect suggesting that the count display is not redisplayed (failure effect) may appear. In other words, in this case, after the successful performance appears, the count display is redisplayed in the form of increasing the count number and the timer effect is continued, and when the failed performance appears, the count display is redisplayed after that. Absent. When such an effect is adopted, even if no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period, an effect result (success effect or failure effect) that is predetermined at a predetermined timing after the elapse of the period is obtained. Will be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the time required for the first to third double compatible effects is set to the same time, but it corresponds to each count display (“4”, “5”, “7”). You may make it set mutually different time as production time to perform. For example, each time the count display is redisplayed, as the count value of each count display gradually increases, the time required for this will also gradually increase as a double compatible effect corresponding to each count value. If it is set to, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short, and the scale of the overall production can be suitably extended while maintaining the game entertainment.

  Moreover, in the effect about whether to re-display the count display, when displaying the effect result, a plurality of effect modes with different ratios (expectations) in which the count display is re-displayed as the count number increases. Either of them may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, every time the count display is redisplayed, the count display having a count value larger than the count value when the previous count display is displayed appears. The count display having a count value larger than the count value when the count display is displayed may not be displayed again. In other words, even when the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by simply redisplaying the count display when a predetermined effect image appears thereafter. I can expect it. However, despite redisplaying the count display with a count value smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed, there is an effect with a higher expectation as a timer target effect than the previous count display. If the rate of appearance (which may be 100%) is increased, the game feeling is further improved in combination with the increase in the speed feeling from when the count display is displayed until the timer target effect appears. Will be able to. When re-displaying in such a count display with a small count value is repeatedly executed, the appearance timing of the timer target effect is gradually shortened from when the count display is first displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gaming interest by such an accelerated timer effect.

[Timer staging production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, any one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is selected. Count display is executed within a period during which a design effect is performed, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect mode that is a count target among the plurality of effect modes is caused to appear. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the count display can be hidden after the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value. There is a case where it is not displayed over the first time and a case where it is not displayed over a second time longer than the first time (timer stagnant effect).

  In other words, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a plurality of performance modes appears as a count target. Since it may be hidden for a longer second time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until any one of a plurality of production modes occurs, and the tension until the production subject to count is executed Can be sustained.

  FIG. 194 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer stagnation effect performed when the fluctuation | variation numbers 7 and 8 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "No timer character reach" are selected in a condition.

  In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 2 but also a plurality of them) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161) The following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is not performed, but the timer stagnation effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), assuming that the timer type of “object A operation 2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. Whether to execute the selected “object A action 2” in a plurality of effect modes (“object A operation 2-1” or “object A operation 2-2”) including the mode of the resurrection timer effect The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or a predetermined lottery result.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 194 (a), in the mode of “actual material A operation 2-1”, after the count display with the count value “30” is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, When the second has passed, the “object A operation (object A notice)” that is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is not displayed when the predetermined value is reached (here, “0”). Is done.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “act A action 2-2”, the count display with the count value of “10” is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol fluctuation, and the count is counted after 5 seconds. When the value becomes “5”, it is not displayed, and when the non-display state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is displayed again with a count value of “4”. After that, when 2 seconds pass and the count value becomes “2”, it is again hidden. When the non-display state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is restarted with the count value of “1”. 1 seconds later, after reaching “0”, the “object A operation (object A notice)” which is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is hidden. It has become.

  According to such a mode of “actual material A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a count display with a count value of “10” starts a predetermined time after the start of the symbol variation. In spite of this mode, as in the case where the count display with the count value of “30” is started, a predetermined value (here, “30” is passed when the count display is started). 0 ") and the timer target performance is executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if an effect that makes it non-display for a predetermined time (timer stagnation effect) occurs while the count display is digested, Will be stagnated by that amount of time, and it will be expected to be executed as a timer effect that requires the same time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears. . And as described above, in the timer production, the longer the time required for this, the higher the proportion of the appearance of the timer-targeted production aspect tends to be higher. By making it possible to generate a stagnation effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. In addition, since the time of the timer effect as a whole is extended by adding the time during which the count display is not displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest while the count display is executed. .

  Further, in the mode of the “actual material A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the first time (6) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The count display is not displayed over a period (a period between the count value “5” and “4”) over a second period (16 seconds) longer than the first time. Period (a period between the count value “2” and “1”) can appear, but the count display is “non-displayed” regardless of the length of the time (the first time and the second time). When returning from the “display state” to the “display state”, the count value advances (changes) only for a specific number (here, “1”) which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the time during which the count display is maintained in the “non-display state”, the longer the count progress speed is stagnated by that time, and the higher the degree of expectation of the production mode. Because it is expected to become, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the mode of the “actual material A operation 2-2”, as the count value in the timer effect progresses, the time that the count display is kept in the “non-display state” becomes longer when the count display is hidden. It is supposed to be set to. In other words, in this case, even when the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed, even if the count digest is about to end (a situation where the predetermined value is reached soon), If a timer stagnation effect appears, the time required for the timer effect will be greatly increased and the expectation level will be greatly improved. Therefore, the game entertainment will be suitably maintained over the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to.

  Further, in the mode of the “act A action 2-2”, after the count display is hidden, the count display is displayed again, and the timer target effect is executed after reaching a predetermined value. However, after the count display is hidden, the count display is not necessarily displayed again so that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated at this point without executing the timer target effect can also appear. May be. When this effect pattern appears, the percentage of symbol fluctuations that stop at the big hit symbol is lower than when the timer target effect is executed when a predetermined value is reached. The frequency of occurrence of this itself can be increased. In addition, after the count display is hidden (after the timer effect is terminated halfway), there is a case where the symbol variation is stopped with the big hit symbol while waiting for the count display to be displayed again. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by realizing such a surprise effect.

  Further, in the mode of “act A action 2-2”, the total time during which the count display is hidden (22 seconds) is longer than the total time during which the count display is displayed (10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest while the count display is being executed.

  FIG. 194 (b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is redisplayed (the time during which the non-display state is maintained) and the risk level at which the count display is not redisplayed. It is Table H1 shown according to the count value when being displayed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the type of timer effect including the mode of timer stagnation effect and its execution mode are applied based on the result of jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, etc. so that the relationship shown in Table H1 appears. It is desirable to perform processing.

  According to such an aspect shown in Table H1, the maintenance time tends to become longer as the count value progresses (as it approaches the predetermined value), whereas it is not displayed. There is also a tendency that the risk that the timer effect ends without the count display being re-displayed while being displayed is gradually increased. In other words, in this case, if the count value is not displayed at a stage where it has not progressed much, the total time for the timer performance is small but can be extended firmly with a low end risk, whereas the count value is large. If it is hidden at the advanced stage, the end risk is high, but the total time for the timer performance can be greatly extended, so the performance as a timer stagnation effect gradually changes as the count value progresses As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest while the count display is executed.

  In Table H1, one non-display time is associated with each count value, but a plurality of non-display times are associated with each count value, and the timer stagnation occurs at any one of these non-display times. An effect may be generated.

  Also, at which timing (count value) during the count display is executed, the count display is not displayed, and the number of times the display is not displayed depends on the result of jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, etc. It is desirable to make a determination based on the start of symbol variation.

  Moreover, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to this may be performed while the count display is not displayed. For example, when the count value “6” is hidden for 6 seconds, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6” is performed for 6 seconds, and the count value “2” is not displayed for 16 seconds. If the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “2” (the effect different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6”) is performed for 16 seconds, It is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment when the count display is in the non-display state. Further, at this time, an effect as to whether or not the count display is redisplayed in the non-display effect may appear, and the count display may be redisplayed or the timer effect may be terminated according to the effect result. .

  More preferably, during the period from when the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in a display state, an effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests a big hit expectation is newly added. If it is not started, and the count display is in a non-display state, an effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit can be newly started, and the remaining count is a concern. It is possible to enjoy an effect different from the timer effect. In addition to the expectation increase due to the occurrence of the timer stagnation effect itself, it is possible to enjoy the expectation increase due to the performance effect different from the timer effect, and the expectation for the timer stagnation effect is increased. It can be made even higher.

  Then, another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, a new timer is set before the timing at which the count display in the non-display state is advanced and the count display in the non-display state is displayed again is reached. It is desirable that the effect count display reaches a predetermined value and the target effect appears. In addition, you may make it perform the effect which re-displays the count display which is in the non-display state as a target effect of a new timer effect.

[Progressive production leading to timer production]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs count display up to a predetermined value within a period during which the design effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as effect candidates corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that causes one to appear as a timer target effect. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, a series including the above-mentioned timer target effects (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) The timer-related effect is started before the count display reaches the predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches the predetermined value (a progress effect that leads to the timer target effect).

  That is, in this case, since a series of timer-corresponding effects corresponding to the timer effects are executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, the game entertainment is suitable until the count display reaches the predetermined value. To be able to maintain.

  FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect.

  As shown in FIG. 195, a timer effect is being executed with a specific timer type within the symbol variation period, and the count value of the count display reaches the first specific value (here, count “6”). Assuming that the progress has been made, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first develops a progress effect (a series of timers corresponding to the timer target effect) that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”). Production).

  Here, in this illustrative example, as shown in FIG. 195, as a timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), a cut-in by an ally character is performed. A display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this explanation example, the cut-in by the ally character is performed during the count digestion period before the count value of the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, count “0”). The process of reaching the situation is displayed as an effect image (a progress effect that leads to the effect content of the timer target effect).

  For example, in this explanation example, the count value of the count display before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, count “0”) is the first specific value (here, count “6”). When it becomes, as a production corresponding to this, a display image SEG1 depicting a person who seeks help from an ally character is displayed.

  Next, when the count value of the count display becomes the second specific value (here, count “3”) before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, count “0”). As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 depicting a situation in which a friend character accepts a request from a person seeking help and faces an enemy character is displayed.

  That is, by sequentially causing such display images SEG1 and SEG2 to appear while the count display is progressing toward a predetermined value, when the count display further progresses and reaches a predetermined value, cut-in (here, It is possible to expect the display image SEG3-1 to be displayed in which a friend character wears an aura to defeat the enemy character). Can be suppressed.

  However, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, even when the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, count “3”) appears, the cut by the teammate character when the count display reaches the predetermined value. There is also an effect pattern in which a display image SEG3-2 depicting the appearance of the ally character escaping before the enemy is displayed instead of the display image SEG3-1 in which the in is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attach a star as to which effect appears as a timer effect in a period before the count display reaches the predetermined value, while the count display is the predetermined value. Since it will not be possible to specify the production mode that appears when reaching the value, the game entertainment after the count display reaches the predetermined value can be suitably maintained. Note that the display image SEG3-2 does not necessarily have to be prepared, and the display image SEG3-1 may necessarily appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In this regard, in this explanation example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count “6”) appears, or after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the second specific value (here, count “3”) is displayed. After the image SEG2 appears, an effect pattern is prepared in which the count display does not further progress and is terminated halfway before reaching the predetermined value. According to such a configuration, the progress of the count display is carried out while there is a risk that the timer effect will end prematurely without the timer target effect appearing while such an effect appearing before the predetermined value is reached. Will be able to enjoy. It should be noted that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated halfway is not necessarily prepared, and the timer display may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 that is cut-in by the ally character, Although illustration is omitted, it is displayed as an effect image connected to different display images (for example, cut-in by different characters) prepared as timer target effects. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 204 (C) to 204 (F) and 205 (G) to (I) described later, one of the three teammate characters shown in FIG. 204 (D) seeks help. A request from a person is accepted, and the accepted ally character confronts the enemy character and performs a cut-in effect.

  Therefore, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, the count “3” is displayed). ") May be displayed instead of the display image SEG2 as a display image corresponding to")). When the other display image is displayed, the display image is displayed when a predetermined value is reached. Production progress will be made so as to be connected to a display image (for example, cut-in by a different character) different from SEG3-1. The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that is always connected to the display image SEG3-1 that is cut-in by the teammate character.

  Note that it is desirable to determine on which route the effect progresses while the count display is being executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the like when the symbol changes. When an effect pattern that does not execute the timer target effect appears, the rate at which the symbol variation is stopped in the big hit symbol is lower than when the timer target effect is executed when the predetermined value is reached. By preparing, it is possible to increase the frequency of the timer effect itself.

  In addition, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count “6”) appears, the count display continues until the count display reaches the second specific value (here, count “3”). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, when the count “6” is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count “6” is displayed for the time period during which the counts “5” to “4” are digested. The count display is not displayed while the display image SEG1 is displayed. After that, the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes “3”, and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count “3” is displayed for the time for which the counts “2” to “1” are digested. The count display is not displayed while the display image SEG2 is displayed. After that, the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes “0”, and the display image SEG3-1 (timer target effect) corresponding to the count “0” is executed. It becomes possible to enjoy the progress of production corresponding to the count number without worrying about counting toward the value.

  Note that the display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1, and the like may be displayed as a still image or a moving image that requires a predetermined time. When displaying as a still image, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (first specific value or second specific value).

  In addition, the time for displaying the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value, the time for displaying the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. It is desirable that the times are set as different times.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the progress effect connected to the timer target effect, a plurality of types of progress effect connected to any of the plurality of types of timer target effects are prepared, but a specific timer target effect appears. Only in some cases, it may be possible to execute a progress effect that leads to the specific timer target effect before the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed when the count number is “6”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining specific count is a relatively small first specific count (for example, “3”) and when the remaining count is a relatively large second specific count (for example, “6”). When the progress effect connected to the timer target effect is executed when the progress effect related to the timer target effect is made executable and the remaining count is the second specific count number (for example, “6”). If the jackpot expectation is relatively high, the performance will be more advanced as the number of counts continues as if the jackpot expectation is high, making the game entertainment more suitable To be able to maintain.

[Timer operation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a count display up to a predetermined value can be executed within a period during which the design effect is performed, and the count target effect that is the target of the count display can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be accepted during the execution of the count display, and within the period, the operation means (for example, the operation button) 410), when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a plurality of operation-time effect modes having different ratios of appearance of high-expected effect modes (for example, cut-in B) as the count target effect. To generate. In addition, as a period during which the production can be accepted, a first period from when the count display is the first count value to the second count value, and a third count value that is counted after the second count value is counted. The second period from the time to the time of the fourth count value is prepared as at least a settable period. On this basis, during the symbol effect period in which it is determined that a high-expected effect mode (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target effect, the count display is the second from the first count value. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the first period up to the count value and the effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value, When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period up to the count value and the effect is received, the specific operation-time effect is obtained as a result of the effect reception. The ratios in which the modes (for example, the mode that suggests that the ratio of the high-expected specific effects appearing as the timer target effects is high) occur are different ( Timer within the operating performance).

  That is, in this case, even if it is determined that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) appears as an effect corresponding to the count, the count display is from the first count value to the second count value. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated from when the count display is the third count value to when the count display is the fourth count value Since the ease of occurrence of the operation mode is different, the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from when the count display is the first count value to when the count display is the second count value. Should operate the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value, or both Work unit (e.g., operation buttons 410) it is possible to have fun in game strategies such should manipulating.

  For example, if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which a specific operation-time production mode is likely to occur, the production risk that the specific operation-time production mode does not appear can be suppressed. Even if the specific operation-time effect mode is easily generated, it is difficult to have an expectation that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) within a period in which a specific operation-time effect mode is unlikely to occur, there is a higher risk that the specific operation-time effect mode does not appear. When it appears that the specific operation-time effect mode is less likely to occur, it is easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count-corresponding effect.

  Then, until the count display reaches a predetermined value during the two periods having different characteristics (from the first count value to the second count value and from the third count value to the fourth count value). Therefore, it is possible to maintain an enjoyment of the game during the digestion of the count by giving interest to how to operate the operation means (for example, cut-in B) for these two periods. That is expected.

  FIG. 196 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the operation effect in a timer performed when the specific fluctuation number (no timer SP reach) is selected in the situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162), the following processing related to the operation effect in the timer is performed. It is supposed to run. However, in view of the fact that the operation effect within the timer functions as “an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the specific effect appears as the timer target effect”, a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The following processing related to the operation effect in the timer is performed even when the timer type in which another effect mode appears instead of the cut-in B as the timer target effect is not performed. Execute. When the timer type in which an effect with a lower expectation than cut-in B appears as a timer target effect is determined, the effect is produced as compared to the case where the timer type in which cut-in B appears as a timer target effect is determined. When the reception is made, the ratio of occurrence of a specific operation time effect mode is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), if the timer type “cut-in B2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the selected as the next process. A determination process is performed as to whether “cut-in B2” is executed in a plurality of production modes (“cut-in B2-11”, “cut-in B2-12”) including the mode of the operation production in the timer. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or a predetermined lottery result.

  In the example of “cut-in B2-11” in the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), after a count display with a count value of “40” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation, 40 seconds have elapsed. When a predetermined value is reached (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed, “Cut In B (Cut B Notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, the mode of “cut-in B2-12” also has a predetermined value (40 seconds after a count display with a count value of “40” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol change). Here, “0”) is reached and “cut-in B (cut-B notice)” which is a timer target is executed while the count display is not displayed. However, in the form of “cut-in B2-12”, the same as the first period from when the count value of the count display is “35 (first count value)” to “25 (second count value)”. Regarding the operation effect within the timer when the operation button 410) is operated in the second period from when the count value is “15 (third count value)” to when it is “5 (fourth count value)”. The display of suggesting that the reception of the effect is in an allowable state appears. In addition to the method of displaying a specific display image as a display that suggests that the stage reception is permitted, “25 (second count value)” from the time of “35 (first count value)”. By changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from “15 (third count value)” to “5 (fourth count value)”. Is also feasible.

  That is, in the form of “cut-in B2-12”, either the first period (count value is “35” to “25”) or the second period (count value is “15” to “5”). When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the period, an effect is accepted as an operation effect within the timer, and the proportion of the occurrence of a specific effect with a high expectation as a count target effect varies based on the effect acceptance. One of a plurality of operating effects is generated. In addition, about the some operation time production | generation aspect, it is possible to employ | adopt as a mode which lights a predetermined lamp in either blue or red (specific operation time production | generation aspect), for example, the aspect lit in blue When it appears, the ratio that the specific effect with high expectation appears as the count target effect is the lowest, and when the aspect that lights up in red (specific operation effect mode) appears, the ratio that the specific effect with high expectation appears as the count target effect Can be set to be the highest.

  In FIG. 196 (b), it is determined which production mode appears as a production mode during operation when the production is accepted during the first period and when the production is accepted during the second period. It is a figure which shows the example about the table (table T16) referred when doing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a mode in which a predetermined lamp is lit in either blue or red (a specific operation mode) is prepared as an operation mode.

  In this regard, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196 (b), when an effect is received during the first period in an effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which “cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect, “ 30 (100/100) is selected in blue (low expected mode) and 70/100 (in red) (high expected mode) is selected, and the presentation is accepted during the second period. Then, blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of “70/100”, and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of “30/100”. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the first period, it is possible to suppress the presentation risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear, but the red (highly expected mode) is likely to occur. Even if only this amount appears, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as an effect to be counted. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, the production risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear is high, but red (highly expected mode) is less likely to occur. However, when this only appears, it becomes easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in an effect pattern in which an effect mode with a lower expectation than “Cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect, for example, when an effect is received during the first period, “50/100 ”(Blue) (low-expected aspect) is selected, and“ 50/100 ”is selected (red) (high-expected aspect). Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of 90/100, and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of “10/100”. Therefore, when red (high expectation mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have an expectation that an effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which “cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect is selected. become.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods of the first period and the second period are generated within the fluctuation time. You may make it generate | occur | produce at least one of a 1st period and a 2nd period based on the classification of a pattern, or a timer classification. For example, when only the first period is generated, the risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear when an effect is accepted is suppressed, but the degree of expectation when red (highly expected mode) appears is also low. An operation opportunity is given only under a single condition that it does not become high, and when only the second period is generated, there is a high risk that red (highly expected mode) will not appear when the production is accepted However, an operation opportunity is given only under a single condition that the degree of expectation when red (high expectation mode) appears is high. That is, in this case, depending on the preference of the player, even if it is desired to operate on the first period side, an operation opportunity is given only on the second period side, or even if it is desired to operate on the second period side. Since the operation opportunity is given only on the one period side, the count display is executed by causing a conflict as to whether to operate within the period on the unfavorable side while the count is digested It is possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest during the game.

  Further, in the first period and the second period, the display indicating that the effect acceptance is allowed may not be necessarily performed. That is, in this case, it is counted in a state in which it is unknown whether the stage reception is permitted in the first period or the second period, or whether the stage reception is allowed in either the first period or the second period. Since the display is advanced, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more interesting, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment while the count display is executed.

  Moreover, about the 1st period and the 2nd period, it is desirable to set the same time length in which production reception is permitted in those periods. According to such a configuration, reception of effects is allowed for the same period of time in either the first period or the second period, so the count value is a specific number (here, “10”). ) Can be provided as a “thinking time for operation”, and the game entertainment can be maintained during the period in which the count display is executed through the addition of such a production element. It becomes like this.

  In addition, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to receive the operation by the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode changes (for example, blue → green → red) through the reception of the plurality of times. As a result, the rate at which an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) appears as a count target effect may be increased. However, in this case, even if the production is accepted a plurality of times, the easiness of appearance of the finally produced production mode is set to be different between the first period and the second period.

[Timer concealment effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a count display up to a predetermined value is executed within a period during which the symbol effect is performed, and a timer target effect corresponding to the count display can be executed. In this regard, in the present invention, during the count display, the count front effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display.

  That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the count target effect is counted so that it is difficult to visually recognize the count display until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since the front effect will be performed, the remaining time until the target effect is executed, for example, the count value by the count display can be grasped only by skipping (during the count front effect by decoration) It becomes difficult to grasp and the interest in the count display can be increased.

  In addition, instead of making the count display difficult to see, the expectation that the big hit symbol will appear through the count forward effect by the decorative body has been raised, so about the decline in the entertainment interest by making the count display difficult to see Will be expected to suppress this.

  FIGS. 197 (a) to (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer concealment effect performed when the specific variation number is selected in the 2nd processing condition.

  In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), first, a count display with a count number of “30” is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. After the count display becomes “0”, a timer target effect that is a timer target appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display.

  Here, as the count forward effect by such a decorative body, for example, in the example of FIGS. 206B and 206C described later, the effect movable body KT is moved to the front of the count display for a predetermined time. It can be realized as a count erosion effect for positioning this. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be anything as long as it makes the count display relatively less visible at the time of production than at the time of non-production.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed as an effect state (a state in which the count display is difficult to visually recognize) until the count value becomes “10”. In the effect state, the ease of appearance of a specific effect with a high expectation as a timer target effect is suggested by an operation mode or a light emission mode by a decorative body.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the count front effect by the decorative body is finished, the count value is changed from “10” to “0” in a state where the count display is easily visible. Then, one of a plurality of effects forms appears as a timer target effect.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), first, a count having a count number of “30” at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The display starts, and after the count display becomes “0”, the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. Further, the point forward effect is displayed by the decorative body on the front side of the count display during the count display, as in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a).

  However, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197 (b), the count front effect by the decorative body is finished in a relatively short time, and when the count front effect by the decorative body is ended. The count display progresses from “15” to “0” in a state where the count display is easily visible, and then any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a timer target effect.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), first, a count display with a count number of “25” is displayed at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The timer target effect that is the target of the timer appears after the count display becomes “0”. As in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the count display.

  However, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197 (c), the count forward effect by the decorative body is generated and ended at a relatively early stage, and the count forward effect by the decorative object is ended. The count display advances from “20” to “0” in a state where the count display is easy to visually recognize, and then any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a timer target effect.

  By the way, as described above, in the timer effect, the higher the count value when the count display is started, the higher the rate at which the effect target having a high expectation level appears as the timer object effect. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the count front effect is generated by the decorative body, the count front effect is ended, not the count value when the count display is started. The relationship is such that the higher the count value when it is made easier to perform, the higher the rate at which a production target with a high degree of expectation appears as a timer production. The ratio may include 100%.

  For example, in the above-described effect examples in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the count value when the count display is started in any effect pattern is “30”, which is the same as FIG. 197 (a). In the example of production, the count value is “10” when the counting forward production is finished and easy to see, whereas in the production example of FIG. 197 (b), the counting forward production is finished and easy to see. Since the count value of “15” is “15”, the effect example of FIG. 197 (b) has a higher rate of appearance of a highly expected effect as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, when a count forward effect occurs during execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number that appeared at the start of the count is damaged, and the count number when the count forward effect ends. Since the size of the game is refocused, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during execution of the count display.

  For example, in the effect example in FIG. 197 (c) described above, “25”, which is a relatively small count value, is displayed at the start of counting, but is relatively large at the end of the effect when the count forward effect ends. The count value “20” is displayed, and the proportion of the highly anticipated effects appearing as the timer target effects is higher than in the example effects of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b). Yes.

  In other words, in this case, if a count forward effect occurs, there is a possibility that an effect with a high expectation as a timer target effect appears higher than when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

  However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, a relatively large count value is also displayed at the end of the count forward effect compared to when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the value appears is high.

  Moreover, in the production examples in FIGS. 197 (a) to (b) described above, since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from when the count display is started until the count forward production occurs, the count display is executed. It is possible to maintain the game entertainment interest by making the player aware of the possibility that the count forward performance may occur over a long period of time.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), a plurality of times are prepared as the time from when the count front effect is started until it is ended, and therefore the count front effect is started. At this point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the end, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the count forward effect is ended.

  In addition to the count display being executed, the count forward effect appears during the period before the count display is executed, for example, during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect in which the ratio of appearance of the timer effect increases when it appears. It may be. However, in view of the configuration according to the present application that makes it difficult to visually recognize the progress of the count by causing the count forward effect to appear during the count display and aims at the fun as the effect, than before the count display is started. It is desirable that the count forward effect is executed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. In addition, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is executed in the period within one symbol variation, the count display is not yet started when the count forward effect is finished, and the timer prefetch effect is executed. When the count forward effect ends, the rate at which a highly anticipated effect appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the count display is executed when the count forward effect ends. It is desirable to set as follows.

  In addition, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is being executed, the timer prefetch effect and the count display are displayed at different positions, and the timer prefetch effect is displayed. During the execution of the timer, the count front effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer pre-reading effect, and during the count display, the count front effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer pre-reading effect. It is desirable to perform. That is, in this case, for example, the decorative body moves to a different position depending on whether the timer pre-reading effect is being executed or the count display is being executed. When the timer pre-reading effect ends when the position is in the position, the count display is started at a position different from the timer pre-reading effect that has been difficult to view. According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect is generated while the timer pre-reading effect is being executed, the count display is started at a stage where the count forward effect is still being executed and has not been finished. Even so, since the count value of the count display can be made easily visible from the start, there is a possibility that the production value as the size of the count at the start of the count may be impaired. You will be able to enjoy the count forward performance while being excluded.

  In addition, with regard to the count forward effect, it is in a relatively late stage where a certain amount of time has elapsed since the count display was started, rather than a relatively early stage where the time has not elapsed since the count display was started. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the count forward effect is executed.

  In addition, if the count forward effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer target effect is executed is relatively small, it is impossible to expect the count value that appears when this effect is ended. In addition to this, there is a concern that it may be confused with the timer target effect, so the count forward effect is terminated before the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number, and the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number. In this case, it is desirable not to newly execute the count forward effect.

  Further, the count front effect may be performed in such a manner that the decorative body is positioned on the front side across the count display when a plurality of count displays are executed.

  Of the timer effects, a timer of a type that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, a timer target exclusion effect, a timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target advance effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When an effect is executed, the current count value can be substantially dewed by the related effects even when the count forward effect is being executed by the decorative body, and thus the count display is visually recognized. It will be possible to predict how much count progress has been made since it was made difficult. However, instead of performing a count forward effect by a decorative object only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, a timer object exclusion effect, a timer mode effect, etc.) is obtained when a specific count value is reached. Or the counter display is made difficult to visually recognize by performing the count forward effect in such a manner that the decorative body is positioned in front of the position where the predetermined effect movable body (timer target advance effect) appears. It may be difficult to predict how much the count has progressed.

  The number of decorative bodies that produce effects on the front side of the count display is not limited to one, and the count front effects may be performed so that a plurality of decorative bodies are positioned on the front side of the count display. In this case, in addition to a mode in which a plurality of decorative bodies are all positioned on the front side of the count display, any one of a plurality of modes such as a mode in which only one of the plurality of decorative bodies is positioned on the front side of the count display The count forward effect may be selectively executed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 198 to FIG. 207, various aspects of the above-mentioned timer effect itself and the contents of the effect will be described in detail for various effects performed in relation to the timer effect. Here, the processing examples relating to the above-mentioned effects are merely examples, and for example, effects other than the above-described types may be executed as the contents of the effects. These may be changed as appropriate as long as they are within the scope of the same technical idea. Accordingly, in the production examples described below, there may be some productions that do not match the production contents of each production described above, but within the scope of the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are changed as appropriate. In addition, the “timer effect” below basically means that the count display is executed in the notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including timer prefetching effects. In addition, as a mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted in the following, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 198 (A) shows an effect situation in which a change display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero. ing. In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for the sake of convenience of description, the specific decorative member SDY for performance that has been omitted is shown in the drawings. The specific decorative member SDY may be, for example, “backward behind-bottom movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. Is equivalent to "movable member of"

  FIG. 198 (B) shows that the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 198 (B), when the timer effect (count number) is displayed and the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value, The candidate for the type of effect that can appear as is displayed, and while the count display is executed, it is unclear which of these candidates will appear as the effect of the timer target, but any of those candidates is a timer target It is possible to recognize that it appears as a production. Note that “conversation” in the figure corresponds to conversation notice, “hold” in the figure corresponds to hold change, “cut A” in the figure corresponds to cut-in A, “Corporate A” in the figure corresponds to the action A, “Malce” in the figure corresponds to a special timer, “Cut B” in the figure corresponds to cut-in B, “Combination B” in the figure corresponds to the accessory B operation.

  FIG. 198 (C) shows an effect situation in which the above-mentioned timer target exclusion effect is executed when the count shown in FIG. 198 (B) reaches “60”.

  Note that, as described above, the timer target exclusion effect is an effect mode that is not selected as a timer target in which it is unclear which effect mode the timer target effect is (in the timer target notice lottery, the timer target Display that suggests at least one (two or more may be suggested) of the production mode not determined as.

  Here, as described above, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, in which the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) and is prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the timer target effect may appear. There is a relationship that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are narrowed as 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, etc.) have passed since the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the effect example of FIG. 198 (C), the timing for generating the timer target effect is set to a plurality of timings (10 seconds and 20 seconds from the start of the change) that are prepared as timing candidates at which the timer target effect can appear. , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.).

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (B), an effect pattern in which a timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70” is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have a count number of “70”, but has another count number such as “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, or “50”. An effect pattern to be displayed can also be generated. Of these, assuming that a timer effect having a count of “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198 (C). The predetermined value (“0” in this case) is reached at the same timing, and for example, “conversation notice” appears as an effect for the timer. On the other hand, if a timer effect with a count other than “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the “conversation notice” will not appear as a timer target effect. When the count number is left at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (C), the “conversation notice” is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as a timer target. It can be said that the candidates that can appear as production were narrowed down. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (C), since there is an effect situation where the count display is executed with the count number of “60” left, at this timing, it is substantially determined from the effect candidates for the timer target. It is desirable to perform an effect (timer-excluded effect) that suggests which effect type (conversation notice) is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately represent the performance situation where the player is placed.

  However, in the first timer target effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), it is suggested that “special timer” is not selected as the timer target effect at this timing, instead of “conversation notice”. Yes. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it becomes clear during the digestion of the count that "the effect indicating that the big hit is confirmed when it appears" is not selected as the timer target effect. It is possible to feel anxiety about whether a highly anticipated performance appears as a timer target.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display image corresponding to the “special timer” (the secret) is locked among the display images displaying the candidates for the target effect of the timer effect. The padlocks that are in the state are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a display such as “LOCK !!” is suggested to indicate that the “special timer” has not been selected as an effect for the timer.

  FIG. 198 (D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display reaches a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer-excluded effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). Yes.

  As described above, the timer mode effect is an expectation level as an effect of the timer object when the count display becomes a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). Hell timer mode (first timer mode display) with a relatively low rate of appearance of high performance modes (production type and content of production (cut-in mode, etc.), and timer object when count display reaches a predetermined value One of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which a high-expectation production mode appears as a production is displayed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), first, the heaven challenge production is performed as to whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress, and the heaven challenge production appears. At this point, it will be shown that either the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode always occurs.

  In addition, in the heaven challenge production, there is a high possibility of entering the hell timer mode or the possibility of entering the heaven timer mode (for example, the devil and the angel are pushing each other, which is dominant) In this case, after such an effect, it is suggested whether the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode occurs.

  Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed with the effect type excluded in the timer-excluded effect being shown, any effect type in the timer-excluded effect is determined. Whether the hell timer mode is likely to occur, depending on whether it is excluded (whether it is a production type with a low expectation level or a production type with a high expectation level), or heaven It can be said that the present situation is such that the timer mode is likely to occur with a certain degree of accuracy.

  FIG. 198 (E) shows the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) as a result of successful heaven challenge production shown in FIG. 198 (D) (for example, result of angel winning victory against the devil). It shows the status of the performance being performed.

  In this performance situation, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it has been shown that the ratio of appearance of a highly anticipated performance mode as a timer target performance has shifted to the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display). It is. Therefore, when the timer target exclusion effect is performed in the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), a result advantageous to the player (here, a low-expected effect among the plurality of effect types is a timer target effect). ) Is suggested, and the expectation when the timer exclusion effect is generated can be increased.

  On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, the timer target exclusion effect is executed while the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) appears as a result of the failure of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D). In such a case, the ratio of the result indicating a disadvantageous result for the player (here, a high-expected effect is not selected as a timer-targeted effect among a plurality of effect types) is increased. Anxiety when the production occurs can be heard.

  In the example of FIG. 198 (E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as a count display mode, but a mode of the decorative symbol SZ that is changing or related to it. This makes it possible to recognize that the state has shifted to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) without overlooking other effects while the remaining count is consumed. In this case, the current timer mode can be easily confirmed even when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

  FIG. 198 (F) shows the second to fourth times when the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198 (E) is displayed after the appearance of the first timer exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). The timer-excluded effect is executed, and when the count display is “20”, the fifth timer-target excluded effect is executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), five types of effects among the seven types of effects prepared as timer target effects candidates are locked and displayed by the timer target exclusion effects (5 types of effects). Therefore, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the remaining two effects (holding change, accessory B action) occurs. It can be said that it is in a recognizable state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of effect candidates (holding change, The ratio of the production with the higher expectation in the action B) is higher, and the expectation until the count display reaches the predetermined value can be suitably maintained.

  At this time, the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden after the timer target effect shown in FIG. 198 appears until the timer target effect appears. According to such a configuration, if it is not memorized that the heaven timer mode is displayed, it becomes unclear which occurrence ratio of the remaining production candidates is high, and it is counted as a price not concentrated on the production. It is possible to give a sense of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

  In FIG. 199 (G), after the appearance of the fifth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F), the time before the timing at which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer target effect appears appears. By producing an effect using a specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the accessory B) within the period, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is targeted for the timer. This shows the production situation where the timer target advance production suggesting that the timer is being executed.

  That is, in this case, since the timer target advance effect is executed while the display related to the timer target exclusion effect appears, any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect may appear as the timer target effect. It is possible to provide further information for determining whether the cost is high.

  And in this example, since the “actual object B halfway action (small)” is executed as the timer target advance effect, it is specified among the effect candidates (holding change, accessory B action) narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect It can be recognized that there is a high possibility that the “act B operation”, which is an effect using the decorative member SDY (the accessory B), is executed as a timer target effect (may be 100%). It becomes like this. As described above, the “actual object B midway operation (small)” means that the “object B operation” which is the effect of the timer is “the specific decorative member SDY (community B) is from the first position to the second position”. When it is “displaced”, it means “the effect that the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is displaced from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position”.

  However, in this explanation example, as the content of the effect related to the “act B action”, the first effect with a relatively low level of expectation that only displaces the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) from the first position to the second position. In addition to the contents, in addition to displacing the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) from the first position to the second position, the second, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, that displaces the accessory A from the third position to the fourth position. Production contents are prepared, and the production related to the “act B action” is executed with any of the production contents.

  In this respect, in the heaven timer mode according to this example, compared to the case where the hell timer mode appears, when the “object B action” is selected as the timer target effect, the content of the effect is relatively high. Even if the production type that appears as a timer-targeted effect is completely narrowed down by the timer-targeted first-order effect, the heaven timer mode is displayed. As a player, a useful function is played.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (G), when the timer target advance effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is counting. The timer target advance effect is provided so as to overlap the count display, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such timer target advance effect is executed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) used in the timer target effect is in a state where the effect is being executed. In combination with the fact that it is not the timer target advance effect during count digestion, there is an effect situation that is easily misunderstood when the timer target effect is being executed after the count display reaches the predetermined value and this is hidden. Will be created. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is not the timer target effect but the timer target first effect, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is used as the timer target first effect. After that, even if no display relating to the timer target advance effect is performed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory) is used as the timer target advance effect. It is expected that the timer target effect is generated with the recognition that B) is used. When the timer target advance effect is executed, the count display may not be made visible, but may be hidden until the timer target advance effect ends.

  FIG. 199 (H) shows a specific count value (here, “0”) whose count display is before a predetermined value (“0” here) after the timer target advance effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is executed. 3 ”), a timer that suppresses the production according to the prize even though a new prize is generated and it is determined that the production execution (holding change) is decided according to the prize. The effect situation in which object suppression control is performed is shown.

  That is, as described above, in particular, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (H), it is very unlikely that “hold change” is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer target advance effect. In other words, because there is still a “pending change” as an effect candidate for the timer, a holding change corresponding to a new winning may occur near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Then, the pending change may be mistaken for the timer target effect, and as a result, the timer target effect itself may be overlooked. In addition, when “hold change” is executed as an effect for the timer, it is executed for “hold 0” in the figure, so it is relatively easy to distinguish whether the effect is for the timer. However, there is a great possibility that these pending changes will be misidentified in situations where the remaining number of counts is small.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the first period (here, the count number is relatively long) until the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value. The remaining time until the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first period is over, although the pending change corresponding to the occurrence of a new winning is permitted. When the second period is relatively small (here, the period after the remaining number of counts is “3”), even if a new winning is generated, a change corresponding to this is not allowed. Thus, the above-mentioned concern is solved (timer target suppression control).

  FIG. 199 (I) shows that the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) while the timer object suppression control shown in FIG. After the display (in this case, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, an effect situation in which an effect (action B operation) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), it is shown that in the heaven timer mode, the action B action that is the effect of the timer is compared with the content of the first effect with a relatively low expectation. It shows a state of being executed as the second performance content with a high degree of expectation. However, in this case, as it is clear from the fact that the accessory B corresponds to the specific decorative member SDY and the accessory A corresponds to the specific decorative member TGY, the accessory B is used for the production of the second production content. The specific decorative member TGY is a position on the far side in front view than the specific decorative member SDY used for both the first effect content and the second effect content, and most (at least It is designed to produce at a position where more than half of the area overlaps.

  According to such a configuration, which of the first effect content with a relatively low expectation and the second effect content with a relatively high expectation is being executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in the effect state). ) Can be made difficult to determine, and this encourages concentration on the timer target performance. In order to obtain such operational effects, the second performance content may be any material that can be produced on the back side with respect to the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B). Instead of the combined effect of the member SDY (the accessory B) and the specific decorative member TGY (the accessory A), the specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the specific decorative member TGY (the accessory A). It may be executed as a combined effect of the effect and the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B).

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is continuously executed, and even if a new winning is generated, a pending change is generated accordingly. This is not done, and the hold display won in FIG. 199 (H) is maintained unchanged.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the “actual B movement” among the “holding change” and the “subject B movement” left as the candidate effects for the timer target is executed as the timer target presentation. Is displayed ("B" in the figure is blinking), and "Pending change" is a display that can be recognized that it is not an effect for the timer (" “Pending” is displayed).

  FIG. 199 (J) shows an effect situation when the timer object suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time elapses after the timer object effect is executed in FIG. 199 (I).

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the timer-targeted effect is executed, there is no concern that this is a timer-targeted effect even if “holding change” is executed. Accordingly, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), the display of the hold whose execution has been carried over although it has been decided to change the hold according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. This is suspended and changed at the timing shown in (J). As a result, even if a new winning that is subject to a hold change occurs near the timing at which the timer-targeted effect is executed, the hold-change is properly displayed while clearly indicating that it is not a timer-targeted effect. Be able to run.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (J), the on-hold display different from the changing on-hold display (hold 0) is changed to blue. However, in view of the special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the jackpot hold (including hold 0) is included, such a blue hold display has appeared. Since it is clearly stated that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing due to the change is higher than the case where the red on-hold display appears, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), which effect type is excluded by the timer-excluded effect even though a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer-targeted effect was executed. In addition, a display indicating which of the timer-targeted effects was continuously executed. In addition, the display indicating that the timer is in the heaven timer mode is continuously executed. However, the display suggesting that the timer is in the heaven timer mode is a mode in which the decorative symbol SZ is displayed in a reduced manner in accordance with the reduced display in the reach display mode.

  In this explanatory example, each display that is continuously executed in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (J) is also executed continuously in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 199 (199)). K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in a state where the symbol is stopped (a state where the jackpot symbol appears), the timer effect was executed in the effect process so far, or the effect targeted by the timer effect It is possible to recognize that the “act B action”.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. .

  FIG. 200A shows an effect situation in which a change display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being four. ing.

  FIG. 200B shows an effect in which a timer target exclusion effect is executed even when the timer effect is not executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200A. Indicates the situation.

  In this timer target exclusion effect, it is indicated that the “act B action” is not a candidate for the timer target, so that when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the timer target candidate has a conversation. It becomes possible for the player to know that the selection has been made to any one of the advance notice, pending change, cut-in A, action A operation, special timer, and cut-in B. That is, in this case, a relatively high expectation aspect among a plurality of effect forms (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation) is the target of the timer. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the player has fallen out of the candidate, the player wishes that the timer effect does not occur within the variation, and the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state. You will be able to stimulate the game entertainment when you are.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a display that suggests various effects that are prepared as timer-targeted effect candidates when performing the timer-target excluded effects. Is not executed, and a display indicating that at least “act B action” is not selected as an effect for the timer is displayed. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to grasp that the “act B action” is not a timer target effect, but it is unclear what other types of effects are available as timer target effects. The Rukoto.

  In FIG. 200 (C), after the timer exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “15”, and the count display (here, countdown) is started. The production status is shown.

  Here, in the timer target exclusion effect in this explanation example, after displaying that at least the “act B action” is not selected as the timer target effect (FIG. 200B), the display is changed to the timer effect ( This is continuously displayed without being displayed until the (count display) is executed, and the timer effect (count display) is started while the display is displayed. In such a configuration, how much of the timer effect has a degree of expectation since the count display is started (here, a timer effect in which the “object B operation” having a relatively high degree of expectation is not executed). Will be able to recognize.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 200B and 200C, when a display suggesting that at least the “act B action” is not selected as the timer target effect appears, this is continuously displayed. Although the aspect concerning the display is different from time to time, it is not necessarily required to be different, and may be the same.

  FIG. 200D shows the timer effect when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200C reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed. The production situation in which “conversation notice (first production mode)” prepared as a production candidate is being executed is shown.

  That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is recognized that an effect such as “may be a chance” as “conversation notice (first effect mode)” is being executed as an effect object of the timer effect. Become. However, the “conversation notice” shown in FIG. 200 (D) is not executed as the effect form of the timer effect, and as is clear from the next effect situation (FIG. 200 (E)), the conversation notice is not displayed. When finished, the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 200 (C) is displayed again and continued (revival timer effect).

  That is, in this case, after the “conversation notice (first effect mode)” appears as if it is a timer object (count object), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect Since the second presentation mode different from the mode is indicated to be a timer target, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when a relatively low level of performance appears and this is hidden. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed thereafter, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  FIG. 200E shows the count display that has been hidden after the “conversation notice” executed in FIG. 200D with the count display being hidden is displayed again. The effect situation which continues this is shown (revival timer effect).

  Here, in such a revival timer effect, while the count display is not displayed (FIG. 200 (D)), the count digest is kept secret, and in the example of FIG. 200 (E), The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count has been digested for the amount of time that has been hidden (here, 2 seconds). That is, in this case, after the “conversation notice” is completed, the count display is displayed in a minus notation (here, “−2”), and is displayed again. Now, it is possible to express how the count digestion has not ended and this is being executed continuously. As a result, the “conversation notice” that appeared in FIG. Be able to recognize.

  In addition, in such a revival timer effect, “count display that appeared before being temporarily hidden” and “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed” are different counts. In order to make it possible to more reliably recognize that the same count digest is being performed rather than digesting, the count sound is displayed even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continue to perform over the “count display that appeared before being hidden” and the “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed”.

  When the count display is executed in minus notation (here, “−2”), a display (for example, “−2 (remaining 18)”) that can recognize how many counts remain is displayed. It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches “−20 (remaining 0)” as a predetermined value (when minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2”), this is not displayed and the timer target effect is executed. Become so.

  FIG. 200 (F) shows an effect situation in which a heaven challenge effect (not shown) is generated while the count display shown in FIG. 200 (E) is continued, and as a result, the mode is shifted to the heaven timer mode. .

  With the appearance of such timer mode effects (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode), it is clearer that the timer effect has not ended and is still in progress (the situation where the count display is being executed). Can be recognized. In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating the state of the heaven timer mode is not associated with the decorative symbol SZ but in the display area. Is displayed as a stamp notation on the left side.

  FIG. 201 (G) shows another effect (not related to the timer effect) while the count digest is being executed after the display indicating that the state is in the heaven timer mode in FIG. 200 (F). The production situation in which the “cannon chance production” is generated as the predetermined production) is shown.

  That is, in this “cannon chance effect”, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until a predetermined value (−20 in this case) and the output related to the count display are set to a predetermined value (here −20). When the “cannon chance effect” is executed, any one of the effect modes in which the output is stopped in the middle stage is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

  More specifically, in the “cannon chance effect”, after displaying the cannon image near the center in the display area, from the cannon image, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area in the display area An effect in which a bullet is fired by selectively using an area that is empty (unused) among the area and the lower area as a bullet firing destination (a bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 201 (H)) Is to be done. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect (FIG. 201 (H)) is other various effects (count display (upper left area), Reach fluctuation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)) are all used, and the bullet firing effect (FIG. H) There is no room for new output (a specific production situation), and if a bullet is fired in such a specific production situation, The production that is already in the output state (for example, the count display) may be damaged or destroyed by the bullet that has been fired (there is a conflict in the production output between the timer production and the predetermined production) Striped ), And more big hit expectation degree or not from being dropped, concerns such as may have occurred as a result.

  Therefore, in this explanation example, when the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, when there is a specific effect situation (the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G)) in which there is no room for output, Out of the areas that can be used as bullets (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area), the output corresponding to the count display using the upper left area is a predetermined value ( In this case, the output is not interrupted until -20), and output is interrupted in the middle of the process (count output abort control).

  FIG. 201 (H) shows an effect situation in which the bullet firing effect is executed while the output is not performed until the output for the count display reaches a predetermined value (−20 in this case) and the output is stopped in the middle of the output.

  In this way, when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the output related to the bullet fire effect is different from the case of the resurrection timer effect described above. The count display of the timer effect will not be output again after the end. On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly counted, and this is a predetermined value (Fig. When the value (−20) when 35 seconds have passed since the count display is started at 200 (C) is reached, it is determined that the timing at which the output stopped count display reaches a predetermined value is reached. The production is made to appear.

  FIG. 201 (I) shows a cut-in A (cut-in effect by a teammate character) as a timer target effect after the timing that should have reached a predetermined value has been reached if the output display is not stopped. Shows the state of performance. It should be noted that the cut-in A is executed as the “second effect mode” in relation to the resurrection timer effect.

  According to such an effect progress, after a bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, a predetermined value is reached if the output of the count display is maintained but the output of the count display is not stopped. When the timing that should have been reached, the timer-targeted performance appears. In other words, in this case, an improvement of the game entertainment when the timer target effect appears due to the surprise that the timer effect that seemed to have been interrupted by execution of the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) was kept secret It is expected to plan.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), for example, when the display related to the timer mode effect is not performed and the left area is empty, the timer effect count display (upper left area) The output is maintained and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is output using the empty space (left area). That is, in this case, the timer effect count display and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) are executed simultaneously, and the timer effect count display continues after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) ends. The operation is continued until a predetermined value (−20 in this example) is reached.

  As described above, the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is to output the bullet using any one of the plurality of areas. Even if the bullet is fired toward any of these areas, the bullet The jackpot expectation shown by the launch effect (predetermined effect) is the same with no change.

  And also in this example of an explanation, it is related with the display which shows the production type excluded in the timer object exclusion production performed in Drawing 200 (B), and the heaven timer mode displayed in Drawing 200 (F). With respect to the display, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped while they are continuously executed (FIG. 201 (J)).

  Next, various examples of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. .

  FIG. 202 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero.

  In FIG. 202 (B), the timer effect is displayed with the count number “3” during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  In FIG. 202 (C), after the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 202 (B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, The effect situation where the effect (cut-in B) used as the effect object of the timer effect is performed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (C), “cut-in B” as a timer target effect is executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura). At this time, since the count display is also in a non-display state, for the player, the timer effect is ended by the appearance of “cut-in B”, which has a relatively low expectation (blue aura). Will come to recognize. However, in this effect example, after the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura), the count display is redisplayed. An effect (second timer target effect) about whether or not to appear further appears.

  202D shows whether or not the count display is redisplayed while “Cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202C is displayed. The effect situation in which the effect (second timer target effect) is being executed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), as an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display, an operation system effect that allows the player to operate for a predetermined time. If the player performs an operation within the predetermined time, a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed or a second effect indicating that the count display is not redisplayed is displayed. An effect result (not shown) is made to appear. In addition, as an operation system effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time, in addition to displaying the operation instruction image SSG prompting the operation of the operation button 410, the first operation when the operation button 410 is operated is displayed. The operation expectation image SKG that suggests the ease (ratio) of appearance of the effect result is displayed. About a ratio, you may make it include 100%.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), among the plurality of performance modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the performance mode in which the first performance result is most likely to appear (i.e., the friendly ally Character) has appeared. Therefore, although the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) has been executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura), the count display is redisplayed. It can be said that the player is strongly aware that the timer performance will be continued. Moreover, in the timer plus production according to this embodiment, a count value larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value “3” shown in FIG. 202B) is given. Since the count display is re-displayed in the form, it is expected that an effect mode with a higher expectation will appear further as a timer target effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), “cut-in B (blue aura)” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. (The display is not hidden), and the effect (second timer object effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. The timer object effect (the first timer object effect shown in FIG. 202C) The “cut-in B (blue aura)” as the first timer target effect) is hidden, and then an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. Also good. However, in this case, the effect is switched from the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202C to an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display. It is desirable to allow the player to recognize that the timer effect has not ended and is being continued (or possibly continued).

  FIG. 202 (E) shows a count number with a timer effect of “5” after a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed in the operation effect shown in FIG. 202 (D) appears. Is displayed again, and the production status is shown in which the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed. In the operation system effect, in addition to the case where the player's operation is accepted within a predetermined time, the case where the player's operation is not accepted within the predetermined time, the same effect result (first) The production result and the second production result) appear after the end of the predetermined time.

  In FIG. 202 (F), after the second count display shown in FIG. 202 (E) reaches a predetermined value (here “0”) and a timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, The effect situation where the effect (cut-in B) used as the effect object of the timer effect is performed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (F), “cut-in B” as a timer target effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high expectation (red aura). That is, in this effect example, the target effect is executed as the same type of effect in the first count display and the redisplayed second count display, and in the second target effect, the first target effect. It is made to perform in the form of changing (promoting) to a production mode with higher expectation. According to such a configuration, when the same type of effect is executed as the timer target effect, it is recognized that the timer display is executed as one timer effect in which the first count display and the second count display are connected. As the number of times that the count display is redisplayed increases, the effect mode as the timer target effect is changed (promoted) to a mode with higher expectation, and the timer target effect is generated. From the time when the count display is redisplayed instead of the time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 203 (G) shows an effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display while “cut-in B (red aura)” as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202 (F) is displayed. The performance status being executed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203 (G), it is easier for the first effect result to appear than the example shown in FIG. 202 (D) among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG. An appearance mode (a friendly ally character) appears. Therefore, in a situation where “cut-in B” as a timer target effect has been executed in a mode with a relatively high expectation (red aura), the count display may not be displayed again. It can be said that the situation is to raise awareness. As described above, after the count display reaches the predetermined value, on the other hand, the effect (cut-in B) having an aspect (red aura) relatively advantageous to the player is executed as the timer target effect. On the other hand, an effect (an operation expectation image SKG) having a relatively unfavorable aspect (a senior friend character) is executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, the more the number of times that “cut-in B” is changed to an advantageous mode for the player on one side and the count redisplay is repeated, the more Since the operation expected image SKG having a disadvantageous aspect is likely to appear and the rate of redisplay is reduced, the game entertainment is enhanced and tension is felt each time the count is redisplayed. Both can be suitably imparted.

  As a result of such an effect, if the count display is not redisplayed, the timer effect is terminated at that time, and then the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203 (H)).

  Next, various examples of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. .

  FIG. 204 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero.

  In FIG. 204 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “10” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the timer effect, generally, the longer the time required for counting the count, the higher the rate at which an effect with a high expectation appears as a timer target effect. When a count display having only “10”) is displayed, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in this production example, while performing the count display, the production of the production to hide the count value for a predetermined time is generated, and the progress speed of the count is stagnated by that time, so that the count is digested. The timer stagnation effect that maintains the sense of expectation by extending the time required can be executed.

  204 (C) and (D) are displayed when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204 (B) becomes the first specific value (here, “5”). The production situation is shown.

  In other words, in this effect example, when the count display reaches the first specific value (here, “5”), if the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any effect type ( A conversation notice, a hold change, a cut-in A, an action A action, a special timer, a cut-in B, and an action B action) start to appear (progress effect that leads to the timer effect), While the effect is executed, the count display is hidden. The progress effect connected to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the first specific value and is not displayed.

  In this effect example, a display image SEG11 depicting a person seeking help for a teammate character and a display image SEG12 accepting a request from a person seeking help are sequentially displayed as progress effects leading to a timer target effect. It has become so. Here, when the display image SEG11 or the display image SEG12 is displayed, it can be narrowed down to some extent which type of effect appears as the timer target effect, but it specifies which type of effect appears. It is desirable not to be able to do that. For example, the display image SEG12 shows a situation in which three teammate characters accept a request from a person who seeks help, but it is predicted that someone of the three teammate characters will confront an enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it unclear who of the three ally characters will confront the enemy character (for example, which one is cut-in A or B).

  204E is displayed again with the count value of “4” after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)” shown in FIGS. 204C and 204D is completed. The production situation is shown.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value is between “10” and “5”, the count value is incremented by “1” every time one second elapses, whereas the count value is changed from “5” to “5”. When progressing to “4”, until “the progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)” that appears when the count value becomes “5” ends (here, 6 seconds), The count value is not developed, and this can be stopped. In order to stagnate the progress of the count value, the count display may not necessarily be hidden, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, “5”).

  204 (F) and 205 (G) are displayed when the count display redisplayed in FIG. 204 (E) is advanced to the second specific value (here, “2”), and this is not displayed. The production situation when it is turned on is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, the count display is hidden a plurality of times until the count display reaches a predetermined value. Thus, each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is displayed. Progressive production that is connected to is to be executed. The progress effect connected to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the second specific value and is not displayed.

  In this effect example, as a progress effect that leads to a timer target effect, a display image SEG13 that shows the intention of a friendly friend character of the middle age among the three friendly characters depicted in FIG. A display image SEG14 depicting the appearance of the teammate's ally character facing the enemy character is sequentially displayed. Here, at the time when the display image SEG13 and the display image SEG14 are displayed, it is possible to grasp that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) appears as a timer target effect, but any effect content (blue aura) It is not possible to specify whether or not a red aura is worn.

  FIG. 205 (H) shows a count value of “1” after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (second time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G) is completed. The re-displayed status is shown.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value is advanced from “2” to “1”, the “progress effect that leads to the timer target effect (second time) that appears when the count value becomes“ 2 ”. ) "Is completed (here, 14 seconds), the count value is not developed and can be stopped.

  In FIG. 205 (I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205 (H) is advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed. Thereafter, an effect situation is shown in which an effect (cut-in B) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, an effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, so that it is suitable for amusement entertainment until the count display reaches the predetermined value. To be able to maintain. In addition, while the effect related to the timer target effect is executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value is stagnated, so that the time required for the digestion of the count can be lengthened accordingly. As a result, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. . In FIGS. 206 and 207, for the convenience of explanation, the movable body for production KT omitted in the other drawings is shown in the drawing. The movable body KT may be, for example, “a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom-front front movable effect unit 3500, It corresponds to `` movable member '' etc.

  FIG. 206 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 206 (B) shows that the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “40” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the timer effect, generally, the longer the time required for counting, the higher the proportion of the effect that is expected to appear as a timer target effect, so that such a large number of counts (here, When a count display with “40”) is displayed, there is a concern that the tension cannot be suitably maintained while the count number is consumed. Therefore, in this effect example, while performing the count display, a count forward effect is generated by a decorative body in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display. As the count value when it becomes easier to visually recognize again, an effect with a high degree of expectation is likely to appear as a timer target effect.

  FIG. 206 (C) shows a state in which the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display for a predetermined time while the count display is executed with the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (B). This shows the production situation (counting production with a decorative body) that continues to stay. FIG. 206D shows an effect state in which the count front effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG. 206C is finished and the count display is easily recognizable.

  According to such a configuration, even if a large count value is once displayed, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body) and seems to be redone as a count display with a smaller count value. Since the performance can be provided, there is a concern that it is not possible to appropriately maintain the tension while the count number is digested.

  Further, in such a count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the effect, the smaller the count value that is easily visible when the effect ends, and as a result, the expectation level as a timer target effect There is a concern about the decline in the entertainment of the game due to the fact that it is difficult for the high performance to appear. Therefore, in the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the movable body KT (decorative body) also has a plurality of effect modes (expectations different in expectation in the lottery separate from the lottery for determining the effect mode of the timer effect) For example, it is desirable to make any one of the operation mode of the movable body KT, the light emission mode, etc. appear. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult for an effect with a high degree of expectation to appear as a timer target effect, the big hit expectation is high due to the effect on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, which is another lottery. If this is done, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In this regard, in this production example, since a relatively large count value such as “35” is maintained and the state is easily recognizable, the expectation for the timer production is maintained thereafter. In this state, it can be expected that the count display is continued.

  FIG. 206E shows the operation instruction image SSG when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) in the timer effect shown in FIG. FIG. 206 (F) shows an effect situation where an operation by the player is accepted at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206 (E) and the effect result appears. ing.

  That is, in this effect example, if there is an operation by the player during the first period from when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”). As a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operation effect modes with different rates of appearance with a high expectation as the timer target effect (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Evil, etc. in descending order of appearance rate) ) To appear.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 206 (F), the player performs an operation when the count value reaches “23”, and as a result of the production, the operation-time production mode that is most advantageous to the player ( Since Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the first period from when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”), when the player does not receive an effect, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  FIG. 207 (G) displays an operation instruction image SSG when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. 206 (F) appears, and displays to the player. FIG. 207 (H) shows the effect situation where the operation opportunity by the player is accepted at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207 (G). The production status is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, if there is an operation by the player even in the second period from when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). As a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operation effect modes with different rates of appearance with a high expectation as the timer target effect (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Evil, etc. in descending order of appearance rate) ) To appear.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 207 (G), the player performs an operation when the count value reaches “8”, and the result of the effect is a special operation effect that is most advantageous to the player. Since the mode (Daiyoshi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment is maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the second period from when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”), when an operation by the player is not accepted, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  However, in this effect example, when the count display is in the first period from when the first count value (here “30”) to the second count value (here “20”), the operating means ( For example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410) and an effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period until an effect is received, a special operation-time effect mode (Daichi) The rate of occurrence is different.

  More specifically, when an effect is received during the first period, the occurrence ratio of a special operation effect mode (Daiyoshi) is relatively high, and an effect is received when during the second period. And the occurrence ratio of special operation-time effects (Daiyoshi) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed in the first period, it is possible to suppress the production risk that the special operation-time production mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation-time production mode (Daikichi) Even if this appears as much as it is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high expectation will appear as a timer target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the second period, a special operation-time effect mode (Daiyoshi) is generated, although the production risk that the special operation-time effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear increases. When this appears as much as it is difficult to perform, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated effect will appear as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, the count display is the first count value (here, “30”) from the first count value according to the player's preference and the production status such as the degree of expectation shown in other productions. Whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated firmly in the first period with a low production risk until the time of 2 count value (here, “20”), the count display shows the third count value (here, “15”). )) To the fourth count value (here, “5” in this case), the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated bullishly in the second period with high production risk, or both It becomes possible to make the game strategy such as whether to operate the operation button 410 interesting.

  In FIG. 207 (I), the count display is further advanced after the effect result shown in FIG. 207 (H) appears and reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the timer related display (here, “Yukuzo”). ) Is displayed, an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207 (J)).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Thus, next, automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background is briefly explained.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel including the respective reach is assigned in advance to each sound to be output in each scene. It is played back using the channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds) for the purpose of realizing a variety of sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. Output means) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while dynamically assigning and managing each channel to each sound to be output, the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . This will be specifically described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
208 (A) and 208 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 208A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction channel” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 208 (B) shows an example of assigning playback channels to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started playback until any end of the playback. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that sound overwriting does not occur. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so as not to suffer from the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that would interfere with overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound classification and sound name. Yes. Since the playback channel number has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  211A shows an example of a production time chart, FIG. 211B shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and FIG. 211C indicates that playback cannot be performed when attempting to play back each sound. An example of a problem is shown. In these FIGS. 211A to 211C, the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 211 (A), the game state along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, in the order of “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “big hit” It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be “medium”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 in FIG. 211 (C), a new opening sound is received during the playback time of “first half notice A” (“hold” shown in the figure). 208 (B), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the “holding winning sound” is assigned in advance to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”. "Is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the" first half notice A "sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 211 (C), a new sound is generated during the playback time of “full screen notice” (“hold” shown in the figure). 208 (B), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”. "" Is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound stops (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 212A and FIG. 212B each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment.

  FIG. 212A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel classification as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to “sound control by automatic channel method”).

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 212 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned a priority. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  If there is no empty channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the production control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound Manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the sound that should be played with priority, while the lower the numerical value, the sound that should be played without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sounds having a priority of “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”) A sound effect with a priority of “20” (“big hit fixed sound” and “button press sound”), a BGM with a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10” Sound effects (such as “full-screen notice sound effects”), sound effects with a priority of “05” (“first half notice sound effects” to “second half notice sound effects”), hold winning sounds with a priority of “01” It is said. As a result, for example, when a notification sound is to be reproduced in a state where there is no empty channel, there is no need to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and a lower priority sound (for example, a reserved winning sound) The notification sound is preferentially played back using the channel that is playing back.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and setting “0x80”, for example, indicates that the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Further, as described above, the initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the upper and lower pans of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . The initial value of the upper and lower pans is managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. In addition, “1” is set in the third byte (0x1FF if 0xFF). ) Is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided on the gaming machine, and is always played at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect”. “1” is set for each “sound”. When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source by such a seek point is exceeded, the maximum number of sounds that can be registered can be registered.

  The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 215 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In FIGS. 215A and 215B, the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215 (A), the game state is sequentially changed along the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the “normal BGM playback” sound is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range A). Here, if there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “holding winning” shown in the figure) and an attempt is made to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM playback” is played all the time on the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start winning (corresponding to “holding winning” shown in the figure) and the player tries to play the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated, so that the notification sound having the highest priority of “25” as a new sound ( As shown in FIG. 215 (B), it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as a result of searching for an empty channel. Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 216 shows an example of work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic assignment group, a priority at the time of automatic assignment, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a piece of information corresponding to these.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that a setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”. The sound number during playback indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played back when “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic assignment group, when “0”, the channel is fixedly assigned, while when “1”, the channel is automatically assigned (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is “1”, it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is “2”, it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of sounds being played when trying to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of the automatic assignment are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the top and bottom pans described above.

  FIG. 217 shows an example of an empty channel search process when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 217, the channel is also abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request for reproduction of a new sound (step S1100A), the production control program checks an automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A), and when this automatic allocation group is “0”, fixed allocation is performed. And start playing a new sound on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that the allocation is automatic allocation, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (mono) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A). ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound in the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound in the (mono) channel being reproduced It is determined whether or not a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The production control program terminates the processing if there is no channel of reproduced sound that is equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (mono) channel being reproduced, while Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  When there are multiple corresponding channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, when there is not a plurality of the corresponding channels, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel that satisfies a desired condition (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, in the above-described step S1106A, when the production control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether there are vacant (stereo) channels (two channels) (step). S1120A). When it is determined that there is an empty channel, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the effect control program determines whether or not a (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step) S1124A) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten with the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when there is a production control program, it determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

  The production control program starts outputting the new sound with a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the new sound starts to be reproduced on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the production control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

  FIG. 218 (A) and FIG. 218 (B) to FIG. 221 (A) and FIG. 221 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 218 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a normal BGM playback request with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 02 to 03 in response to the request for playback of the sound effect of the first half notice_A whose priority is 05. Therefore, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for a button pressing sound with a priority of 20 is generated, and sets the playback channels 04 to 05 to the playback channels. Since there is a vacancy, playback of the button press sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_B having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06.about.07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a play request for a big hit definite sound with a priority of 20 is generated, and sets the playback channels 08 to 09 to be performed. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the big hit definite sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first notice_C having the priority of 05 is generated, and the reproduction channel 10 Since there is a vacancy in .about.11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing a reserved winning tone with a priority of 01 is generated, and sets the play channels 12 to 13 to the search. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the retrieval channels 14-15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  222 (A) and 222 (B) to 225 (A) and 225 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for reach BGM having a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 is generated, and there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Therefore, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the processing as described above, the production control program next, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10, Since there is a free space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 with priority 25 is generated, and FIG. As shown, since there is a space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and plays channels 04 to 05 ( Since this corresponds to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure, there is an empty space, and the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing an accessory announcement sound with a priority of 10 is generated, and plays channels 12-13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 that reproduce the “holding winning sound” having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is searched. Will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can an empty channel be effectively used as described above, but also each of the sounds scheduled to be output is made as much as possible using each channel including the empty channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

  FIG. 226 (A) and FIG. 226 (B) to FIG. 227 (A) and FIG. 227 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and free channels are created in the playback channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel triggered by a request to reproduce a medium symbol stop sound with a priority of 15, and plays channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a big hit BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the big hit BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00 to 01.

  When the sound replacement playback according to the priority order occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played back before the replacement in the playback channel after the playback is completed. Needless to say, it can be done.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed as an example using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above. You may make it perform sound control as follows by a combination.

  FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (F) are diagrams showing examples of channel assignment variations in sound control based on the above-described two types of channel systems or combinations thereof.

  FIG. 228 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 228 (B) shows this. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described so far, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since sound control by these two channel assignments has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 228 (C) shows an embodiment in which sound control is performed by an automatic channel system by assigning channels to the maximum number of playback channels using a plurality of automatic channel groups (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). . FIG. 228 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for the some reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 228 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for a part of the playback channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 228 (F) is a diagram showing the assignment of channels to the maximum number of playback channels using one automatic channel group to perform sound control by the automatic channel method, and the sound by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. Although the control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (F) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 235 and subsequent drawings.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped, empty channels are allocated or output channels are replaced based on a pre-specified standard. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority order. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods in which sound is output by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as the automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed so that a lot of sounds can be played back by effectively utilizing the empty channels. Since diversified gaming machines in recent years select and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect redundantly or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels for each group, it is possible to reliably output the sound. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that management is facilitated by dividing the sound into types.

  Furthermore, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the effect sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), the sound that is output with priority or the sound that is always output is output in the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning or change display is displayed. Output in automatic channel mode.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively use empty channels by the automatic channel method and to prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Moreover, since it becomes possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228 (C) and 228 (D), and has the advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes channels that reproduce sound using a fixed channel method and channels that reproduce sound using an automatic channel method. . In addition, channels that reproduce sound using the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, the sound source control of this embodiment uses 32 channels, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 229 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is that the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound that is used by all manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is the sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is activated. Channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or waiting for a customer. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  In the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time, thereby improving the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as will be described later, since BGM can be output also on channel 20 (and channel 21), four BGMs can be output simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. For this reason, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice effect, the sound selected by lottery according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, etc. is output each time. As described above, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition.

  In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound during the notice effect is AUTO group 1.

  When a sound is output during the execution of the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, setting is made so as to output the sound designated from the empty channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, based on a predetermined condition, the used channel is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 during stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. This is used when four sounds are superimposed and BGM is output, or when a specific performance sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect that is output by the automatic channel method.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, as in the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 when stereo output is performed. Channels 22 and 23 are channels for outputting a hold sound. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning are output from channels 24 to 29 as will be described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 play sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot determination even if there is no empty channel in channels 24 to 29, and draw the player's attention. Can do.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when output is continuously continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel method is applied to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., thereby preventing the sound from being output while there is an empty channel, and a channel with a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of empty channel search processing in the case of executing control for outputting sound according to the present embodiment. FIG. 217 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 230 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. Note that description of common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 230, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the channel of the same group when the new sound is the automatic channel method in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B. That is, even if different groups of channels are available, if the same channel group is not available, the results of step S1108B and step S1120B are “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 230, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, a channel selection condition for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example of conditions for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, attributes of a sound being reproduced and a new sound are compared, and a sound with higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume, the amount of change in the sound being played back, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection, Includes remaining playback time. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A in FIG. 217, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. Thus, by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time since the start of reproduction, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is terminated, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire performance. For example, an effect with a shorter playback time is selected because an effect with a higher expectation can be achieved with an effect with a longer playback time. On the other hand, the influence on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by canceling the effects having a long playback time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time without depending on the playback time from the start of playback.

  Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the playback time. In addition to this, for example, the sound output of a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the entire production time, that is, the progression ratio of the production. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being played. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output can be a highly important effect, and therefore, a channel with a small volume of sound being output is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected and the player may be made aware that a new performance will be executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being played back. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a sound to be faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small amount of volume change is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel on the basis of a dynamic change of the sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, a channel with less change in the dynamic sound image localization position can be considered to be a more important performance that can produce a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the left and right sound output of a stereo speaker. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) number is selected. At this time, the priority order may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect output with stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since the monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of empty channels is not enough even if the channels that output the monaural sound are opened, a channel that outputs stereo sound is selected to increase the number of empty channels. It may be.

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may be higher in importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment can be performed may be higher in importance.

  In addition to the above-described conditions, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. In addition, by assigning unique priorities to all sounds, the production data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  In the table shown in FIG. 231, conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example. However, these conditions may be applied independently, or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example of performing channel assignment control based on the priority order assigned to newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel through which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of sound effects in the example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half notice_A occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display is started. At this time, when an instruction instruction for the effect button is displayed on the display screen and the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 233, the priority order of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority order of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority order of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the announcement effect with a low priority is executed in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppressed volume value. Reduced.

  The contents of each notice will be described. For example, the first notice_A is an effect in which a character appears, and a character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and a button press sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the effect from the channels 10 and 11 in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and a sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily displayed. The sound is muted (blackout effect). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

  Thereafter, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority order of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority order of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  Note that if the priority order of the notice effect that is executed later is lower than or the same as the priority order of the notice effect that is being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects that are output at the same time It is not necessary to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the output of the effect sound effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B that are muted from time t3 is resumed at time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5> t4, reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half notice_C ends at time t8, and the first half of the change ends.

  Note that during the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (subvolume) for each channel may be set to 0, the main volume for controlling the volume of the overall effect sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and reducing the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. Alternatively, the volume of the sound being played back on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). Further, the volume of the sound being played back on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. Sounds with a high priority are, for example, sounds that are surely transmitted to players and game hall employees, such as notification sounds and warning sounds, and the expectation that the result of variable display is a big hit is high. Sound effects for enhancing the expectation of the game, or sound effects that have a high stage effect and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it becomes possible to easily manage production data related to production sound effects by classifying each channel used for sound source control into a plurality of groups. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, for example, by suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. Further, by making a stable game possible, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel method are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) for outputting a sound effect of a notice effect and a group (AUTO group 2) for outputting a sound effect related to holding. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously. In particular, during the first half of the change, there may be a case where output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be requested by executing a pre-reading notice of the pending change together with the change notice. In such a case, it is possible to maximize the fun of the game by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while replacing the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. .

  Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the expectation level by changing the hold display of the variable display and accompanying the output of the effect sound effect can greatly increase the player's expectation and be executed reliably. . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, since the number of effect sound effects that are output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the output of effect sound effects is stopped. The possibility of being reduced. Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a highly effective effect that increases the player's expectation.

  In this embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, the automatic channel method makes effective use of a finite number of channels by searching for available channels, and gives priority to output effects and high-priority sounds by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when a sound is continuously output as in BGM or when a sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a gaming machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of sound, each channel can be used effectively, and further appropriate control according to the sound output status can be performed. For example, in the control for outputting BGM, it is only necessary to output a sound to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state. In the control for outputting an alarm sound, a designated channel is not searched without searching for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, as described above, in the automatic channel method, it is possible to make the best use of empty channels and to preferentially output a sound with a high effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while the volume is lowered without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the previously executed effect with the lower priority is continuing even after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Moreover, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation of production can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved.

[15-2. Modification of sound control with fixed channel method and automatic channel method]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. In this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be temporarily allocated. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, nine divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each divided screen. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example screen configuration of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 235 is a notice effect in the latter half of the fluctuation after the occurrence of reach.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) for displaying different scenes on each screen is executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously. The scene may be selected by lottery or selected by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. The default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, a channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and the channel arrangement is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when a multi-screen effect is executed. The default configuration in FIG. 236 (A) is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 229 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the channel arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced while all scenes are displayed. At this time, if all BGMs are output at a normal volume, the sound volume becomes too high, and therefore the sound is output with the sound volume set lower than normal. When a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and playback of other BGMs is terminated. . When the player selects a scene, for example, the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM volume of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Indicates.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 236 (A)) to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 236 (B) at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 236 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 is smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  Note that, after the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the gaming state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above-described configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 228 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. 228 (F) “corresponding to“ variable AUTOch ”) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be reproduced depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more types of notification sounds are output. Or a flexible response such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects to be reproduced for production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control over sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, the example in which the channels are grouped and the sound to be output is managed by being associated with each group has been described. Also, if the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound that is sounding is stopped based on the predetermined condition and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound being output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which when a sound is newly assigned to a channel for output, control is performed such as changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel.

  In the state before the occurrence of reach after the start of the special symbol variation (during the first half variation), the output of the sound of the BGM being played and other effects is regulated (muted) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a representative effect for performing such control, there is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after the elapse of a predetermined time after the output of the sound effect is restricted, the darkening of the screen is canceled, and the sound output by the BGM or other effects is resumed, whereby the newly output sound (the sound concerned) The effect including the output of the player is conspicuous and the player's attention can be drawn to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which assignment of a new sound to an empty channel is not performed, but the assignment of a channel where sound effects are output is not canceled and a new sound is assigned. In this case, in order to return the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sounds from different groups are being output]
In the present embodiment, channels are grouped and a priority order is set for each group. A description will be given of a case where a sound is newly output from a channel belonging to a higher priority group when a sound is output from a channel belonging to the lower priority group.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group volume control table showing the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is defined as a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into three groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority order and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect in which the volume of another sound being played is changed when the sound is played on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the sound reproduction is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. When “0” is set, control is performed to mute other sounds being reproduced. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. It should be noted that control may be performed so that the volume is set larger than usual by setting a numerical value of 100 or more.

  Further, each set value will be described with reference to FIG. 238. Also in this embodiment, channels of the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system are mixed as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is output with priority or is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, grouped effect sounds are assigned according to the type and importance of the production.

  In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since “0” is set in the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced with the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or a game hall employee as shown as a reference reproduction sound. This may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound for clogging a ball or the like. That is, when a sound is output from the fixed ch1, because of an illegal act or a failure, the output of the effect sound is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed channel 2, the group volume priority order is set to “4” which is the lowest in FIG. In addition, since “−1” is set in the suppression volume value, even if sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch 2, other sounds being reproduced are not affected. Sound played on fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games, and in normal games, production effect sounds that draw the player's attention in response to the execution of special symbol variation display while BGM is being output, etc. Is output.

  In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to “2”. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit definite sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variation display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning a prize, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it has been determined that the game will shift to a high probability state. Can be made.

  The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that is output in a silent state while suppressing the output of other effect sound effects when executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot sound and V winning sound are output in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is concentrated on the blackout effect by setting the sound effect sound of another effect not being output for a predetermined time after the blackout sound effect is output. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, an effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the change. For example, the blackout effect is executed with the first half change, and the corresponding effect is executed with the second half change. It may be.

  In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sounds are played in the AUTO group 2, all sounds being played in the groups whose priority is “4” or less are halved (50% Output). For example, the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has the group volume priority “4” as described above, so that the volume is halved and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at the normal volume. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 2 include, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice effect sound.

  In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Similarly to the case of AUTO group 2, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is played back in AUTO group 3, a group whose priority is “3” or lower is being played back. All sounds are halved. For example, when a notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, or the volume may be halved (1/4 of the original volume). May be.

  Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of start winning, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button pressing sound for notifying that the effect button has been pressed, and the like. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the AUTO group 2 blackout effect is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, sounds belonging to the AUTO group 3 are output. For example, when a game ball enters a start winning opening, a pending winning sound is output even when a blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, the volume control procedure in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control part steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control part power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a new sound reproduction request (step S1401). If there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing from step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound for which reproduction has been requested, and the volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 238, the suppression volume value and group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, when control is not performed on the sound being reproduced, the processing from step S1406 is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, when control is being performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  The control for the sound being reproduced will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced has not been registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set (step S1407).

  The sound control executed after step S1410 will be described. When the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a issues a new reproduction request. The group volume priority order of the sound is compared with the group volume priority order already stored in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The volume of the sound with the noise is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the new playback. The requested sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, if the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and group volume priority are It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order are not already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “No”), this process ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the processing has been completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be described in time series. FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to the present embodiment in time series. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 240 illustrates an example in which a notice effect and a blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output on the fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 238, the fixed channel 2 has a group volume priority “4” and a suppression volume value “−1”. Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value “−1”, the sound is reproduced without recording the normal BGM sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, sound output at the time of the winning winning is omitted), the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is “3”, and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is “No”). . Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is the result). “Yes”). At this time, the group priority of the sound requested for new reproduction and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”). A predetermined volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being played back and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half notice A. Is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the normal BGM volume is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is “2”, and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is changed to the blackout effect. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the group priority of the effect sound of the normal BGM and the first half notice A being played is lower than the group priority of the effect sound of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), these The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). The blackout effect is muted because the suppression volume value is zero.

  Further, the second half notice B is started during execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority order of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority order of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the second half notice B is started in a silenced state, Continue until is finished.

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, a reserved winning sound is output (time t24). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output in a predetermined volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect is being executed, the pending winning sound is output as usual.

  When the blackout effect ends (time t26), the blackout effect parameter recorded in the work area is deleted (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sound of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect having a high group priority is being output, a specific effect can be emphasized by suppressing the output of a sound effect having a low group priority. Furthermore, volume control based on the suppression volume value allows the player to recognize that multiple performances are in progress at the same time. By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

  In addition, when a new high priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound during playback is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the effect sound during playback is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. The volume of other effect sound is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out from the timing when the sound with high priority is output. Also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being played) and the time to reach the target value, the amount of change may be specified, or the target value based on the production contents such as the length of the reproduction time of the production effect sound. You may make it set the time to reach and the amount of change. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the effect sound stand out. If the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target It is also possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling that may occur when the effect sound effect is switched by setting a long time to reach the value.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output, such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly produced effect sound more prominent without destroying the game tempo.

  Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound is finished and the output of the other effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume during regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the normal BGM output is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but when the normal BGM output is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%, and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the player's uncomfortable feeling while making the switching of the effect sound effect stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the effect sound effect as an example, it can be applied similarly also in the case of an alarm sound or a notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound having a high importance (priority order) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraud), not only a production effect sound but also a notification sound having a relatively low importance (priority order) ( For example, the output of a ball clogging notification sound) may be regulated. On the other hand, if an illegal act is performed while a low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high-priority (priority) notification sound (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set for the sound output time like the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or the notification is resolved. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is resolved, other notification sounds are output. . At this time, the next highest priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sound, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)
In the above, the control of the sound output redundantly according to the priority order between the groups has been described. Next, a control example for controlling the sound volume based on the sound output time (long / short) will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table for each sound effect]
FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of a volume control table for each sound effect indicating volume (volume) control for each total sound reproduction time (output time) in the present embodiment. For each sound effect, a used playback channel (ch), a total playback time, and a suppression volume value are set.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 238, the used reproduction channels are divided into five groups of fixed ch 1, fixed ch 2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to stop of the sound effect output. When the total playback time is set to -1, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effect to be output elsewhere. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed.

  When the total playback time is set to 0, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. Note that the unit of the total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

  Similar to the example shown in FIG. 238, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of other sound effects that are output simultaneously. Specifically, in the case of “−1”, the sound is continuously reproduced without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of “0”, the sound effect being reproduced (− Output (except for sound effects set to 1) is suppressed (mute). In the case of a numerical value other than “0”, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 241. In the present embodiment as well, in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the assigned sound effects are also the same. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are played back, All sounds are muted. The sound played on the fixed channel 1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall, and is caused by an illegal act or occurrence of a malfunction. Cannot be suppressed, and output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

  Since the total playback time is set to “0” and the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, the sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games.

  The sound effect assigned to AUTO group 1 has a total playback time set for each sound effect (play time) and a suppression volume value of “0”. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in FIG.

  The sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3 have the total playback time set for each sound effect (playback time) and the suppression volume value “50”. When a sound is reproduced, all other sound outputs being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as specific sounds output in the AUTO group 2 that can make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game by halving the output of the BGM, for example, the first half notice sound effect or the second half notice effect Examples of specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning a prize, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and an effect button being pressed. For example, a button press sound for notification.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In this embodiment, the output of the sound effect reproduced in duplicate is controlled according to the sound effect playback time. FIG. 242A and FIG. 242B are flowcharts showing the procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure of sound effect output control in this embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for playing a new sound (step S1501A). When there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1501A is “No”), the processing from step S1530A is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request for playing a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound that has been requested to be played, and The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, when control is not performed on the sound being reproduced, the processing from step S1506A is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “No”), that is, when control is being performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), the processes after step S1506A are executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time of the sound requested to be played. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510A.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1”. (Step S1510A). When the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “Yes”), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new The volume of the playback sound is prohibited from being suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work number is overwritten with the sound number, the suppression volume value and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the sound suppression volume value for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

  On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is not “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the total playback time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether “−1” or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520A). When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “Yes”), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

  When the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  If the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is shorter than or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or equal to the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area for all sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). If the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing after step S1530A (step S1528A).

  When the volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530A). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “No”), this process ends.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process has ended (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erasing is performed (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1533A and S1534A), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the sound volume based on the total sound effect playback time in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be specifically described along a time series. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to the present embodiment in time series. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 243 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output at fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” as shown in FIG. Normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set and normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is “No”).

  Further, since no parameters are registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a reproduction request has been made has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”, the result of step S1521A is “No”, and the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, since the normal BGM is being reproduced at this time and the volume has not been suppressed, the suppression volume value is “100”, which is larger than the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), and the normal BGM volume is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total playback time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of Step S1504A is “Yes”), and the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is being output (Step S1506A). The result is “Yes”).

  Furthermore, the blackout effect sound effect requested for new reproduction has a total reproduction time of “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is “15000” (the result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, since the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50” and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect requested to be newly reproduced is “0” (step The result of S1521A is “Yes”), and the work number is overwritten with the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new playback request has been made, the suppression volume value “0”, and the total playback time “8000” (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black in the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the notice effect sound effect (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is normally “50” for BGM, “100” for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and “0” for the sound effect volume of the blackout notice effect effect already recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527A).

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time is “2000” and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “8000”. (The result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound requested to be newly reproduced is “50” (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the pending winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the reserved winning sound is finished (time t34), the blackout effect sound is continuously output because the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area.

  Thereafter, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), so the blackout stored in the work area The parameter of the effect sound is deleted (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A in which the sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume is reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM is suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of other sound effects being played and to make a specific effect (for example, blackout effect) stand out, Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while a specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed If the output of the sound effect continues until the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to make the execution of the specific effect stand out. be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no vacancy in the channel to which sound data is to be assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will deteriorate due to the appearance of the unintended sound output in the production design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no channel space (the number of empty channels is 0), a preset value is set. Based on the priorities, the control of the sound output with lower importance is selectively discarded, thereby avoiding the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design and reducing the entertainment interest. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to make technical ingenuity in the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) and how it is difficult to appear.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable more channel resources to be assigned to the effect sound (effect sound), various kinds of signals that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed. As for the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving type control structure is adopted for outputting various kinds of notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) of a finite number of channels prepared by using various notification sounds excluding the production sound (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) as sound control by the fixed channel method. An example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above-mentioned manner is shown. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting definition are managed. is doing. Here, for the convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of other notification sounds, effect sounds, and the like is omitted. In addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209, the production sound is defined based on the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 213 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the assignment state of the notification sound having the low priority order to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is finished, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. Will be.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each notification sound exemplified in FIG. 244, notification conditions, a notification mode, a notification time, and a condition (release condition) where the notification is terminated for each notification sound type. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is used as much as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. This is a measure for maintaining in the state and forcing a subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 245, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which an illegal act using a magnet is highly likely). This is to notify that there is. As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet has been detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed. As the notification time, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is 60 seconds from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions). On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are continued until the release condition “re-power on” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of a fraudulent act due to a dodging action is high). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) for notifying that the player is in the state) and the count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big size) despite not being in the big hit gaming state (state where the big prize opening is opened) Notification sound for notifying that a state in which detection by a winning prize sensor) has been performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening a large winning opening in a closed state and winning a game ball) is performed. 3 (Large winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been performed, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “boost vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as a notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of the occurrence, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps The execution of the lighting by is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “A boo-boo prize abnormality has been detected” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. A display (for example, “A big prize abnormality has been detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) after the detection by the count sensor 4005, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is terminated. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. About lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). Moreover, about the notification sound used as the object of a loop process, the notification sound 1 called "boo boo" which plays the role which alert | reports that it belongs to the 1st notification group (state with the high possibility that the fraudulent act was performed). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the notification contents is adopted. The warning sound is a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a severe unfair situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to do so.

  In other words, when reporting information belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to fraud It is important to speed up the initial action. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (the fraudulent acts are It is expected that the initial response of the hall side response to the fraudulent act will be expedited. In addition, a message sound for informing which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of “boo-boo”, or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side is performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility of fraudulent acts due to door opening). However, there is a possibility that the door may be opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side). As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” )) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds after the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three repetitions of the notification sound). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release condition “door closing detection (door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until “detection that the door frame 3 is closed)” is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), a state in which the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed by opening the main body frame, a notification sound 5 (frame opening) for notifying that there is a possibility that the main body frame is opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side) It is considered as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium possibility that some sort of fraud has been performed and this cannot be denied, and for notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notifications The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to a common one.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, “the frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and the body frame opening switch is used as the notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) after the detection by 619 is ended, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 As for lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619. Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. About the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (injustice) A combination of sequential output with alarm sounds used in either of the notification sounds 4 and 5, such as “ping-pong ping-pong”, which plays a role of notifying that the possibility of the occurrence of the error is moderate) Yes.

  In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility of fraudulent acts) It is important to be able to perform abnormality handling on the hall side to a certain degree of speed. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for informing which notification type is output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing appropriate games will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as “ping-pong ping-pong” follows the message sound, although it is an alarm sound different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so as to make it difficult for a person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. In the case of belonging to the third notification group, the lighting mode is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so that it is difficult for the person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. By performing notification by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hall side will be accelerated to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a in spite of the non-time-short state. Passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate manner (left-handed)) This is to be notified. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “please return to left-handed” )) Are executed. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to the left” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time-saving state. The detection is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) after the detection by the gate sensor 4003.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state in which the lower tray 322 is detected to be full of game balls by the full-tank detection sensor 279 (lower pan) The notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) for notifying that the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the ball is to be removed is provided to guide the game in order to properly advance the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is assumed that it belongs to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set in common. It is said.

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please remove the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, “please remove the ball on the lower plate”) and a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as “please remove the ball on the lower plate” as a notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to repeated notification sounds for two times) from when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), when the detection is performed by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279, the sensor 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. Data is assigned to channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated for repeating the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silent data as a set. It has become. And, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are all configured to output silence data for the same time, the notification sounds 6 and 7 function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the portion of the silent data, not the portion of the message sound that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10-second sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop processing while assigning it to the channel X.

  By the way, although there can be silence in the notification sounds (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these are very short in order to have a “between”. It is clear that it is a time thing and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent part (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” or “ping-pong ping-pong” is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. Thus, it is possible to make a notification regarding the game guidance without feeling disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 244 and FIG. 245, the priority order is set to be the same for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do it. In addition, loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played is adopted as the playback type setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, “boo-boo” that is commonly used for notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” that is commonly used for notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are connected to the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound at the time of output is created. After that, it may be assigned to the channel.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (a), if there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that there has been a magnetic detection. Next, information indicating the presence of magnetic detection is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been made based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. , The notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the “loop of magnet detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control is performed. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. On this basis, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X so that the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again as a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “We detected boo-boo magnetism” is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from the timing tα1, and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Detect magnetism”). And lighting by various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (a), at time tα2 where 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop playback, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). I won't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already in the assigned state is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is completed, a sound corresponding to vibration detection is set. Set the schedule data for generation, and assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in that notification mode (here, “boob vibration detected” loop) Playback is to be executed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. The light emission mode generation schedule data according to the above is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal and lamp These are executed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is variously changed. It is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents. Even in the case of reflecting, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  After this, at the timing tα3 when 60 seconds have passed since the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is repeated based on the time-up of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality). The loop process to be executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) At the timing tα3 that has been increased, the loop processing is terminated at a time when the notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and when the notification sound is good.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and the rest By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X by the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boob vibration” is assigned. ”Is detected” loop), the notification sound reproduction is executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) expires, “Boo-boo vibration is detected. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “boobing vibration”) in the notification sound such as “Done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied (FIG. 246 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here, “boo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have finished playing, the seventh alarm sound (here) Then, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if “boo-boo”) was reproduced. As a result, “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” and “Boo-boo vibration was detected” would be connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with “Boo-boo magnet” and the notification sound 2 starts with “Motion detected”, an unknown notification such as “Boo-boo magnet detected” Occurrence of content that may confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up at the “boo-boo” alarm sound and ends and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing and the reproduction is stopped. If it is a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at halfway timing, it will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will show “Magnetic detected” and “Vibration detected” respectively. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above-described processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. When it is understood that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification is made. Notification sound playback in the mode (here, “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started, and a timer (30 seconds) is set for timing the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open). .

  When the notification sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning notification sound 5 (frame open) to channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the release condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from timing tβ1, and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “frame is open”). And “lighting by the various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group)” are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tβ1 and a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the loop reproduction state, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening is detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 when the frame opening is detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that the door opening detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that has already been assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) in a state where the channel X is not assigned is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, the door open detection is detected. Set the schedule data for sound generation, and assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the loop “door is open ping-pong ping-pong”) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and The schedule data for light emission mode generation corresponding to the detection of door opening is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the door opening appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. When the lamp is lit, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority is the same. Thus, the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection have the same data contents. In any case, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at timing tβ3 when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is issued based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the time tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, By assigning the notification sound 4 (door opening) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 is subtracted from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Will open the notification sound in the “Ping-Pong” loop.

That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set but is set when the timing tβ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) times out, “the door is open It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “door is open”) of the notification sound such as “Ping Pong”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 246 (b)) When the third message sound (here “the frame is open”) and the third warning sound (here “ping-pong ping-pong”) have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( In this case, smooth notification sound switching can be realized as if "door is open") is reproduced. As a result, “Ping Ping Ping Pong” and “Ping Ping Ping Pong” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize the information in a tense situation. Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed suitably.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at a halfway point, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 246 (c) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-time-saving state within the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right-handed detection in a non-short-time state), In the control MPU 1310a, information indicating that a right-handed detection has been detected in a non-time-short state is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the short time state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It becomes like this. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analyzing process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, When the right-handed detection information is detected, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop “return to left-handed”) 20 seconds).

  In this embodiment, regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state, information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command. Only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-short-time state. And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-short state.

  When the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, sound generation schedule data corresponding to right-handed detection in a non-short-time state is copied to various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to right-handed detection in a non-time-short state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-described display in the liquid crystal is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up), which is a release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set. Will never be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, “please return to the left”) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ2 when the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in the state where the loop sound is being played back after 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tγ1. It is assumed that the full-bottom detection sensor 279 detects that the lower pan is full in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower pan full has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the information (lower pan full tank detection) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information on the detection of the lower pan full is included, the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is displayed on the channel in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed in a state in which it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after), a timer (20 Second) is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, when the timer (20 seconds) has not timed up, the lower pan is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, and assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (in this case, “Pull the ball on the lower plate. The notification sound reproduction is executed in the “loop”.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after), but for generating the screen corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is executed. Yes.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is issued based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being up. The loop process to be repeatedly executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Return to left-handed” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the time tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the full lower tray. Then, by assigning the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here) Then, the notification sound reproduction in the “please pull out the ball of the lower plate” loop is executed.

  In other words, at timing tγ2, while setting the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tray is not set, but is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound “please remove the ball in the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head and the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , So that the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing of the notification sound such as “Please remove the ball from the lower plate” (for example, “Please remove the ball from the lower plate”) and will not be played back. Can be encouraged.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 246 (c)) When the second message sound (here, “Return to the left”) is finished playing, the third message sound (here, “Remove the ball on the lower plate”) Smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced can be realized. As a result, “please return to the left” and “please pull out the ball on the lower plate” are connected at a strange place, and the occurrence of a situation where the notification content cannot be recognized is suitably suppressed. Will be able to.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied, silence data of 5 seconds is sandwiched. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, the occurrence of a situation where two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of an alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized is preferred. It will be possible to avoid.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), when there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, With respect to processing according to magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), processing similar to that described with reference to FIG. 246 (a) is performed. Therefore, at timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” has been reproduced six times. The display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again as a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), the timing t-2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in a loop reproduction state. , It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 244). ) Even if door opening detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continued.

  In general, as for the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority level described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to (c) overlaps, Only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has occurred. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group having a medium fraud possibility”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), at timing t-2, neither the alarm sound 4 (door open) timer corresponding to the door open detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. Only set the flag according to the detection of door opening. Then, at timing t-3, based on the flag being set, a notification sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection and a sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are respectively obtained. As well as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X, and the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . Note that the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting in response to the detection of the door opening are started from the timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, while the alarm sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” was detected while the loop was being reproduced, the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening, “Boo-boo magnet was detected. "From the timing t-3 when the alarm sound loop playback ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the detection of door opening is played back for 30 seconds, and the" door is open ping-pong ping-pong " That is, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. In this way, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group. Although it is a content (here, a “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop), it is expected to encourage recognition that the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound “Boo-boo magnet detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation The notification to which it belongs can be recognized at an early stage that it has been terminated. On the other hand, the alarm sound “ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247 (b), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2 where 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback. It is assumed that the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 is detected in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. For this reason (see FIG. 244), even when right-handed detection in a non-short-time state occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continued.

  That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as the case where the processing of the same priority level described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to (c) overlaps. Only the timer is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is performed. No schedule data is set. At time tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the “return to left-handed” loop).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the notification sound that does not include the warning sound “please return to the left” at a good timing. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, even with such silence data, the type of notification sound that has been reproduced so far has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It becomes like this.

  FIG. 247 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door opening) has timed up Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at time tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S112 It is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of FIG. In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in either sound or lamp lighting. The output contents are not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or the lamp lighting, it has been set so far at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data in accordance with the detection of the door opening from the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection at the timing tε2. Are kept in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has a higher priority than the respective data are respectively set. Put it in a state. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is made based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) corresponding to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tε2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (processing at the time of opening the door) is performed without any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boost magnetism detected” is started, and a timer for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is completed at a good timing when the notification sound “Boo-boost magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). The display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again as a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of magnetic detection that is highly likely to be fraudulent, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is performed in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as “boo boo” is first reproduced as an alarm sound, an alarm belonging to the first alarm group is performed, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense situation is quickly transmitted to the hall side. That is expected.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ1 when no notification sound is output, right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If there is, the processing corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 246 (c). Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “please return to left” is started, and timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is continued.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at time tζ2 in which a notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in a state where the loop sound is being reproduced since 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tζ1, It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opening) according to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the detection of the door opening, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state that has been set until then at the timing tζ2 Processing for canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state but also the sound-generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. The screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection as well as the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection having higher priority than this are maintained. Set the generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Thus, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is made so that the output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed without any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between the two different processes (left-handed guidance process and door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) As the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as the detection of door opening that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound is first played from the message sound (the door is open), the person who is playing the appropriate game will not feel disgust, Notifications belonging to the second notification group are made by the alarm sound of “Ping-Pong”, and it is expected to promptly notify the hall side that it has been switched to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 244 are to be output, various processes are performed by performing the above-described processes according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, the notification sound belonging to the second notification group having a medium fraud possibility may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraud but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraud. is there. In other words, if there is an abnormality detection that is likely to have been fraudulent, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIG. 248 to FIG. 253, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priority order, the special condition is also taken into consideration to further improve the state of the gaming machine. Notification in a manner that enables appropriate expression is realized. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also Set state. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 is reached.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the magnetic detection in which the priority for notification is relatively high at the timing tα13 when the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of door opening is completed and the channel X is in an empty state Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door started from timing tα11, although the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, regarding allocation to various lamp operations. At timing tα13, the lamp emission mode is switched according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, sound generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X, and screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection are also included. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is set for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. To be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the alarm sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is finished and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some improper manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening to end. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet is instantaneously within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when attempting to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the door is cooled. Therefore, there is a concern that it is insufficient as a countermeasure only to perform the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity to take any countermeasure.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is finished at the timing tα14, it is utilized that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued, Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening” in the state where the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. Special processing to reassign to is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the end state is played back in a form linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, so that there is a great discomfort in the hall. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that “when the magnetic alarm is over, all of the alarm sound playback has been completed, and it is finally possible to make it inconspicuous that fraudulent acts have been made.” Since the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that should have ended is played, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected to recognize that further fraudulent activities are too risky It becomes like this.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, A process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound that is assigned to other channels and the other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period for which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal It is a period in which the conditions of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) are satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. A process of suppressing the volume of the production sound and the other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) that suppresses the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the other game sounds is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period, the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the volume of the other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of reducing the value to a value lower than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be further accelerated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is ended, the processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the detection of door opening that was already in the finished state was played back in a form linked to “reproducing the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, there was a possibility that an extremely malicious act was being performed. In view of this, it may be possible to continue the production sound without changing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sound even at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection ends.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, as is apparent from the processing according to the door opening detection, the in-liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The start period and the end period of the lamp light emission in a mode corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door are all different, although the start period is the same. As described above, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds by operating them so as to have different roles for the notification sound, display in liquid crystal, and lamp emission. However, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormal content and game guidance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, right-handed detection in the non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. Assume the case. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 248, since there is a low possibility that an extremely malicious act is being performed, the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening is finished, it is extremely malicious even when the frame sensor detects that the gate sensor 4003 does not detect right-handed in a non-short-time state. Therefore, when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection already in the finished state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is terminated at timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. Yes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is no such thing as being played back in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 248, a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then detects the door opening. In response to the end of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is momentarily within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when attempting to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state. The possibility of being in the situation entered is assumed. However, after timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is in a non-illegal state where the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection occurs, the magnetic detection is performed in spite of being in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound is played sufficiently until the timing tα35 arrives, and it is considered that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is freed when the further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door opening detection is ended, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251, after the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cooled. Sometimes, a magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in response to this, a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced. It is assumed that the magnet is being placed again, and there is a possibility that a more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection over a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed until 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was performed. Can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Boom magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced over a period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And finally, the loop processing is not finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is completed, for example, the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boo magnet is detected” As a result, it is expected that everyone will be attracted attention by creating a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was made, the notification sound reproduction has already been reported for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the closed state is played back in a manner linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, and the midway such as “detecting boo-boo magnetism”. It is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback according to magnetism detection” in which the loop processing is terminated at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection already in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, as shown in FIG. Is the same as However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 252, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. Even though the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the magnetic anomaly notification sound is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without suffering from such a situation. It is assumed that there is a possibility of more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a manner further linked to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60 for notifying the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Second) is set, and at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection ends, the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Boo-boo vibration has been detected” is not terminated at a good timing, for example, the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boo vibration is detected”. Since the process will be terminated, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted by creating a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to the detection of door opening”. The schedule data "is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection” connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. In addition to being played back at the same time, it is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback in response to vibration detection” at which the loop processing is terminated at an abrupt timing such as “Boom vibration detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection that has already been in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the detection of the opening of the frame is completed, not the detection of the door opening. Assumed.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 253, it can be said that the situation where the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the detection of the frame opening is a situation where there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraud, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnets. Thus, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected by mistake when the hole side uses a magnet to eliminate the clogging of a ball in a ball tank or a payout passage.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 253, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By reproducing in the form of “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hole and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also according to the magnetic detection. For each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp), a special process for ending them is performed.

  According to such a configuration, while performing a function against fraud appropriately, in the event of erroneous detection on the hall side, only the body frame 4 is closed, and notification processing corresponding to frame opening detection and magnetic detection ( Notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp) can all be terminated, so that it is expected to quickly maintain the atmosphere in the hall by speeding up the response on the hole side to false detection. Become.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 253, when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended when the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. Not only for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to detection of frame opening, but also for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetism detection You may make it perform the special process which complete | finishes.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the setting value (player setting value) by the player is reduced with respect to the volume of the speaker, and if it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the setting of the speaker volume by the player Processing to increase the value (player set value) is performed. In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is output at the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player set value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. It is possible to grasp how much the volume has been changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is lowered and when it is raised. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20” which is the same as the button press sound) referred to when there is no empty channel, and the output volume of the production sound ( The change of the audible sound volume) can be transmitted more reliably.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period before the game is started (the demo display etc. Not only during the period when the game is started, but also during the period when the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed, allowing the player to accept, and more important effects appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume level flexibly at times, the game entertainment is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation in which channel assignments of various effect sounds are made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic anomaly or door opening, a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. At this time, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. In other words, in this case, even if a specific notification sound is assigned to a channel among a plurality of types of notification sounds, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately returning the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described production progress notification process, the channel assignment of various production sounds according to the progress of the display production itself is not stopped, so that only a specific notification sound is assigned to the channel at the normal time ( More channels are used than in the non-informing state), and there is no free channel to which no sound data is assigned before the end of channel assignment (notifying state) of a specific notification sound. Risk tends to be high. If there is no free channel to which no sound data is assigned before the end of the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, after that, even if the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, the discarded sound data cannot be assigned to the channel and reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Concerning the concerns about the vacant channels related to the performance sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Whether to adopt the automatic channel method or not should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production, so even if any channel method is adopted, the notification process under the progress of the production It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to ensure cost reduction and improvement in reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the operation is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“Pi!” Or “Pi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin and the risk of vacant channels being lost is promoted.

  However, while the pachinko machine 1 is capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the notification process under the progress of the performance is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the notification process under the effect progress caused by the error detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) is executed, the sound volume is appropriately set according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the period in which the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being performed, the output volume (possible) After changing the setting of the volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the sound volume to an appropriate value. However, in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Thus, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that the effect sound cannot be output properly because there are not enough empty channels even though the notification process under the effect progress is finally finished.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player can accept the change of the set value (player set value) of the sound itself. When the effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is finished, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

  According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the setting value (player setting value) in accordance with the progress of the presentation while the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being executed, a new operation can be performed. Even when the notification process under the effect progress is finished, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be changed at once. As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production ends, and a situation occurs in which the empty channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, according to the said structure, when performing the batch change of the output volume to a player setting value, when the notification progress under effect progress is complete | finished, the game in the period when the notification processing under effect progress was performed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, etc., the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of the special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably resolve the shortage of empty channels when the notification progress under the effect progress is completed, the number of changes in the player setting value during the period during which the notification progress under the effect progress is being executed, or by the player Regardless of the number of operations, etc., it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump as the notification process under the production progress is terminated. . According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that notification processing under the progress of production due to false detection or notification due to convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate performance is due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes it impossible to enjoy the video.

  Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) will be described.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the notification process under the effect progress according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to explaining the processing from when the effect progress notification process is executed until the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. A brief explanation will be given. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are illustrated, and description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 254, in this example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the production sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) for the volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among these, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanation example, although the process relating to the output itself is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, prize winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any of them is executed, a process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode that is the higher suppression level. In addition, when the notification process regarding any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression level until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected. ) Is not terminated and this is continued.

  In this example, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period of time during which the process of suppressing the volume of sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) according to abnormality detection is played to when it is terminated Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having the medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode on the lower side. However, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, when the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is ended in the first volume suppression mode that is the low suppression level.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed. Therefore, no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound).

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. However, the output volume of the production sound may be reduced in one case when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (volume of an audible sound). However, the end condition of the process to be suppressed is different in a case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed more strictly than the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make it.

  FIG. 255 shows the contents of the processing related to volume adjustment that accompanies the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while no abnormality detection has occurred and the process related to the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player set value can be varied by “1” within the range of “1” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the player setting when the above-described suppression mode (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanation example, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), the player setting value is “3” out of “1” to “5” with respect to the volume of the production sound, and no notification flag is set. Suppose that the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “60”, which is 20 times that volume. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the big hit determination is not performed and the start winning awaiting state is in effect, the effect selection left button 331 is imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is displayed to indicate that the volume can be adjusted through these operations. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a first volume value display OH1 that enables recognition of which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. The The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect that is a reach effect that is executed when the background image is changed. In the case of the above, at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a later-described second volume value display OH2 may appear when the player performs an operation without displaying. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 255A, when an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is incremented by “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20”. In addition, whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the current set values is “1” to “5” that is the range of the player set values is indicated by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255C) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume (audible sound volume) is reduced. The person set value remains “1” (the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if assigned to the channel, the volume is set to “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to “0”. The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 255 (A) (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed), but also the variation of symbols corresponding to the jackpot determination after the game is started. Even during the period of execution, the player is allowed to accept. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration allows the setting change to be made possible.

  That is, FIG. 255 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 255 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60”, which is 20 times the volume. While the setting has been changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at “80” which is the volume after the change. When the value is changed from “4” to “5” and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed from “80” to “100”, which is 20 times the value, Volume adjustment completed at “100”, the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the range of the player setting value is “1” to “5”. Thus, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by gauge display is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify the current set value for the player set value range of “1” to “5”, and even under a tense situation where a more important performance appears. The purpose is to prevent operation mistakes such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical value range of “1” to “5” is regularly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to changes in the player setting value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed when there is an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 255 (C). The display is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is an operation in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 is selected. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”). When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Accordingly, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation to be repeatedly performed on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is “5” which is the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 256 shows that the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection occurs during the symbol variation execution period and the process related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 256 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (A). In this situation, when a start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong”, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ “When the door is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Further, as described above, when the door opening detection that belongs to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in accordance with the detection, the first sound volume suppression mode. An effect progress notification process for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 256 (A). The sound output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value). The contents of the performance are developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such an effect progress notification process is being performed, the first identification is performed. The output volume of the production sound that is lowered to the value (here, “10”) (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the volume Accepting the change of itself, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point It is as described above that they are collectively changed.

  That is, FIG. 256 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 256 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of the player setting value “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the effect progress notification processing (output volume to a specific value As shown in FIG. 256 (D), when the processing ends, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point is reflected. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation. However, the first specific value (here, “10”) should be changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production is finished, and there is a shortage of empty channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time, or there is no room for it. The occurrence of such a situation is also preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump (“10” → “100”) in accordance with the completion of the notification process under the effect progress, the output volume changes. Regardless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  On the other hand, FIG. 257 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection when the state detection generated in FIG. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 257 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (A). In such a situation, when a start winning is generated and a jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the magnetic detection that belongs to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed accordingly. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Also, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in accordance with this, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. A notification process under the progress of production for suppressing the output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 257 (A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The production contents are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”). ") The output volume of the production sound that has been reduced to (the volume of the audible sound (mute) in this case) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value for the volume (player setting value) itself Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-described production progress notification process (process for reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is finished. As described above, the batch change is performed.

  That is, FIG. 257 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 257 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that a predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the value (here “0”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of the player setting value “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this example, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detected state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The notification process under the effect progress that suppresses this is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of magnetism with the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH being returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 257 (D), the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) in which all the operations up to that time are reflected in response to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), and the second operation. However, the second specific value (here “0”) is changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  Note that when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. Display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. Yes. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and the player setting value However, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, the production sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued in the notification process according to the door opening. It is supposed to be.

  In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Thus, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests until the notification progressing process is finished. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production is finished, and there is a shortage of empty channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time, or there is no room for it. The occurrence of such a situation is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, in this example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed in a lump (“0” → “100”) when the notification process under the effect progress due to the magnetic abnormality is terminated. In spite of the change in volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which it is impossible to enjoy an appropriate effect due to a lack of empty channels, even though the notification process under the effect progress due to notification due to erroneous detection has finally ended. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 244, for the notification sound in response to the door opening such as "door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and the notification sound in response to magnetic anomaly such as "Boo-boo magnet was detected" Since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification process under the effect progress is not executed. Therefore, during the notification, the player setting is performed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, as shown in FIG. 244, since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the volume initial value, regardless of the player set value, Playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the third byte of the volume initial value, You may make it include in the object of the volume adjustment by a player.

  Each process described in FIG. 256 and FIG. 257 is not only detected during the symbol variation execution period, but also in a state before the symbol variation is started, or in a state that spans the timing of the start and end of the symbol variation. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  Also, in each process described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the process demonstrated in FIG. 256 and the process demonstrated in FIG. 257 differed in the production | presentation sound suppression mode in the period when the production progress under notification process is performed, about this suppression mode, it does not necessarily exist. The output sound volume (audible sound) of the production sound is suppressed in one mode between when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the sound volume may be performed.

  Further, in the notification progressing process, the output volume of various game sounds (audible sound volume) is suppressed. Among these game sounds, a game ball is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as sounds played in response to winning (winning sounds), may be played with the initial value set volume without being affected by volume control. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) that is played in response to the winning of a game ball in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable to play the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the notification process under the effect progress is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 244 to 257, there is no channel space by adopting a channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) It was proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make this difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation in which there is no vacancy in the channel to which the production effect sound (production sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the channel assignment of the production sound, various technical matters are performed at a stage before the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to give some ingenuity. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel with respect to various notification sounds is not necessarily employed. You don't have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel method is employed, the above-described control based on the priority order may not necessarily be employed, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Moreover, each example demonstrated below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an act of praying with the hand holding the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” has been performed. It can be detected by detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined value that does not indicate any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel over a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, even if special performance conditions such as a jackpot finalizing effect and a pre-reading effect are established as a result of the game ball being received at the specific winning opening, At this point, no special sound corresponding to the performance is assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to end, an effect of assigning a special sound to the channel and reproducing it can be executed (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned to the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound cannot be output due to a shortage of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to winning.

  As for special sounds, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination according to the winning prize, the highly anticipated effect mode (for example, the jackpot determination according to the winning prize (for example, Predictive announcement sound that is executed when a highly anticipated announcement effect is performed during the execution of a reach production, etc., or when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by a prefetch judgment according to a prize It is possible to exemplify a pre-read notification sound or the like that is executed as an effect, but in essence, it is assigned to a channel and output when a special determination result is obtained by determination by a predetermined determination means according to winning Anything can be used.

  FIG. 258 shows that when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, a special sound (for example, a cure) corresponding to a so-called pre-reading effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state where the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a determination that a special sound is to be output (a determination that a pre-reading effect will be performed) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation process ensured in advance from time.

First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation process, a general prefetch effect that is a well-known technique will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a winning is made to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. , First and second start opening winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a start opening (first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 134: steps S 5231 to S 5234), pre-reading processing for executing the pre-reading effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. 135: Step S5245, FIG. 136: Step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the contents of the effect, etc. Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information related to the special symbol stop symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information before the final decision such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group in the variation pattern, and the latent hit group and the small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol as described above. It is a production to do. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining the presence / absence of prefetching production and the contents of the production on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information before the final decision such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group in the variation pattern, and the latent hit group and the small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the determination process as to whether or not the big hit is won and the symbol variation is not digested, and information obtained from the prefetch command when they are put on hold ( Expectations on whether the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result based on information related to the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side and information related to the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side) It is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the special symbol processing flag based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment shown in FIG. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low-expected blue and a relatively high-expected red) Whether to perform a specific prefetching effect that suggests the prefetching expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and a mode (for example, blue, red, or when it is determined that the prefetching effect is not performed) according to the result of the determination The normal display mode) performs a hold display process. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such a pre-reading effect, when a hold display (including a jackpot fixed hold display) is caused to appear in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, a quine) may be output in accordance with the pre-read execution. Many. However, since such special sounds (pre-reading effects) are played at game ball winning timings that occur irregularly, a game ball winning occurs at a timing when there is no vacant channel, and pre-fetching is determined. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the pre-reading determination is won, and the hold display appears in a highly expected manner (blue or red). There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, the special sound is output before the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 wins the game ball and outputs the special sound (prefetch effect). Channels that can be assigned in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more precisely, the determination that the special sound is output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is performed) has not yet been made). It is possible to execute channel reservation processing to be secured in

  For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of jackpot determinations that are currently on hold (the number of holds) is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable state, the player usually wins a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 in order to increase the number of holds. A game (handle operation) is performed as described. As a result, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winnings, and the big hit determination is made. Each time the game is put on hold, processing related to hold display and pre-reading effects according to winning is performed.

  Here, as a pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, in the order of winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing related to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. When a pre-reading determination is won and a pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (e.g., a cure) is output at a timing at which the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when winning and pre-reading determination is performed). A hold display with a mark will appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also, for example, in the order of winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first win (first hold), the second win ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed after winning the pre-reading determination, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (winning timing), but this is kept waiting for execution. Thus, after waiting for the channel reserved for channel reservation processing to become empty, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output. In addition, about the hold display with a specific aspect, you may make it appear in synchronization with the timing which outputs a special sound (for example, a quine), or it may make it appear at the timing when the hold which wins prefetch determination occurred. Good. However, when a hold display having a specific mode is caused to appear at the timing when a hold that has been won for the prefetch determination occurs, a prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is executed and a time when the channel reservation process is not executed In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable to allow only one aspect (for example, only red) to appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor, an infrared sensor, etc.) not shown when the hand is held near the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. However, this is detected as an object, and this is used as a trigger to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player is holding his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and “countdown countdown” is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning and reproducing “sound” to a predetermined channel is performed. Note that the countdown sound is started when, for example, the countdown starts from “30” and counts down every second and becomes “0”. In addition, during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, an effect in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600.

  However, the “shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and the “countdown sound” in a predetermined channel hold the player in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It can be triggered only by this (detection by the sensor), and it is not related to the content of the progress (effect that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation being executed, It does not depend on the result of the jackpot determination at all. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be appropriately changed to other contents. However, by performing such processing, the display and sound are predetermined for a predetermined time (30 seconds). The channel can be maintained in a usage state (in this case, a “countdown voice” usage state that does not indicate any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, Occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when the predetermined channel ends may be avoided (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first win (first hold), the second win (second hold), the third win (third hold), and the fourth win (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing related to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown audio” is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetching win) that the prefetching effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cuin) in the waiting state in this way is output as a post notification sound that is output after the winning time at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period from the start of the “countdown voice” reproduction (channel reservation process) by the player's own intention until the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no winning, but a special determination result is not obtained even though a winning has occurred (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” ends is special Sound is not played.

  According to such a configuration, the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) from his own intention to the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-fetching win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, a special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown sound” It is executed as a post-announcement effect that is output aiming at the timing when the channel is vacated and the channel is vacant. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the absence of an empty channel even though a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cue) corresponding to this is generated at a timing when at least one channel is vacant. Since reproduction is aimed at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, and a special determination result (read-ahead) within a relatively long period of timing tY11 to tY12. It will be possible to easily recognize whether or not (winning) has been obtained.

  In addition, when outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at the timing tY12 for reproduction. However, if the special sound (cue) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown sound” has been assigned, the channel reservation process and the post-announcement effect corresponding to it can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it can be realized, and it can be said that it is beneficial in that the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Further, in this embodiment, for the prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image, the timing tY12 at which the “countdown audio” playback ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) Even after the end timing arrives, it is continuously displayed. This is based on the fact that a person who requests execution of such a channel reservation process tends to hold his hand again to generate the channel reservation process every time the number of holds decreases. It is considered that there is a benefit when holding your hand over the display of “Shrine Torii” as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of a later notice increases) Yes, the prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, release operation by a button). However, in actuality, even if “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image or “Shrine Torii” is not displayed as a background image, the player holds the hand When this is sometimes detected, only a process of maintaining a predetermined channel in an assigned state for a predetermined time is performed by a predetermined sound (countdown audio), and therefore the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown audio” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display, for example, at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the notification sound is terminated.

  In addition, when the player holds his / her hand again during the period of timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the reproduction time of “countdown sound” until the predetermined time (in this case, 30 seconds) elapses from the detection again. May be extended and a special sound corresponding to the pre-reading winning may be output when the timing comes.

  In addition, such prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol variation is in the changing state but also when the symbol variation is not in the changing state. You may make it do. The specific action may be an action to be detected by a contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action to be detected by a non-contact type sensor.

  However, when a special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-announcement sound, the first time winning (first hold), the second time winning ( (2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold), it will be difficult to know which special decision result (prefetch win) was obtained, so prefetch win There is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest of the game due to being suspended and not recognized. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Cuin”), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (second hold) (3 hold), it is also possible to make it different depending on which hold of the fourth winning prize (fourth hold) wins. However, in this case, since the content changes from the sound (in this case “Cuin”) that is played in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not being executed, it is possible to know that the pre-reading is won. There is concern that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is given at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, and fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetching win) is obtained, a process of varying the playback time of the special sound (herein “cuin”) starting from timing tY12 is performed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, a special sound (herein “cuin”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, a case where a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) that is won at a relatively early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once. If a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 6 seconds, “Cuin” is played twice. As a result, a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) winning at a relatively late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 9 seconds, “Cuin” is 3 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at a very late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once, when playing a special sound (here, “Cuin”) for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin / Cuin / Cuin / Cuin” is output.

  According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained between timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict whether a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained by winning at any timing between tY11 and tY12. In this example, the shorter the playback time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is, the shorter the timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, the special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. The longer the playback time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is, the longer the timing of the special timing from tY11 to tY12 is indicated, the more the special determination result (prefetching winning) is obtained. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the winning. However, in this case as well, depending on the timing at which the winning occurs. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to a maximum of four, if a special determination result is obtained in the first winning, the special sound is “Cuin” 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the playback time for the first time, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, the special sound is set as the playback time for the second time of “Cuin” regardless of the timing of the prize, and the special judgment is given in the third prize. If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of “Cuin” regardless of the winning timing. If the special result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is set regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four times of “Cuin”.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-reading win is obtained, the “cuein” is reproduced as a special sound. However, the first determination result (for example, relatively high expectation) is determined by the pre-reading determination when winning. Depending on whether a low prefetching win) or a second determination result (for example, a prefetching win with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained, the playback content as a special sound may be changed. For example, when the first determination result (for example, prefetching with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination at the time of winning a prize, “Cuin” is played as a special sound, whereas the prefetching at the time of winning a prize is performed. If the second determination result (prefetching winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the determination, if “Dokan” is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction of whether or not a pre-winning win has been obtained in the prize, the first determination result (pre-fetching win with relatively low expectation) and the second determination result (pre-fetching win with relatively high anticipation) It is possible to predict which one has been obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “cuin” or “docan” as a special sound also in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, depending on the determination result.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first determination result (prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) in the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and the second determination result (relatively high prefetching win) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that has been won at a very late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced in the “cue” mode for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the “docan” mode for another 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cuein” mode is 3 seconds, the first winning (that is, winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12) It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the prefetching was won in the prefetch determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching winning with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that was won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cue” played is finished, the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) is the second It is possible to predict that a determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (prefetching on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in accordance with the winning at the first starting port 2002, “cuin” is reproduced as a special sound. , “Dokan” may be reproduced as a special sound when the second determination result (prefetching win on the second special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the second starting port 2004. . In this case, in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the second starting port 2004 is performed. It is desirable to reproduce “cuin” or “docan” as a special sound depending on whether there is any.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the timing tY11 to tY12 The first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing is a win to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first determination result (the first special figure side of the first special figure side) in the pre-reading determination corresponding to this It becomes possible to predict that the pre-reading win) was obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading win is also determined in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) which is won at a very late timing. Can be grasped. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (the pre-reading win on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound has been played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the fourth winning (fourth hold) is on the second start port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetching win on the side of the second special figure) has been obtained by the prefetch determination in accordance with this.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that a game ball is received at a specific winning opening while executing the channel reservation process. The case where the pre-reading winning in the pre-reading effect is obtained is exemplified. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262 is basically a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received at a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that has the technical characteristics of itself, which can avoid the fact that a channel shortage occurs and cannot be output when a special sound is output when the judgment result is obtained Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the pre-reading win in the pre-reading effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of empty channels is monitored as the game progresses, and when this number is less than the predetermined number, at least some of the game sounds are out of various game sounds. The ratio for restricting the execution of processing related to output is increased (channel use restriction). That is, in this case, for at least some of the game sounds, the execution of processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes zero, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches zero. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to zero.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, whenever the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), The availability of the channel during the execution period is determined. As a result, when there is room in the channel availability, the channel usage restriction rate (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the relevant symbol variation to be judged is finished, and the channel availability is reduced. If there is no room in the situation, increase the rate at which channel usage is restricted (channel restriction level) until at least the relevant symbol variation, which is the subject of determination, is finished, and limit channel usage based on such symbol variation as a unit. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of empty channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and the ratio of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of game sound increases as the level value increases.

  FIG. 263 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing related to setting of such a channel restriction level.

  Assume that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 within the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 263, as the processing of step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. Note that the reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the first half of the production pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the first half of the period (for example, the period from the start of the design fluctuation to the start of the reach production, Specify “X”, which is the number of empty channels (minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the channel is most empty within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when the design is stopped without starting reach production) To do. Further, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the latter half of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel within the latter half of the fluctuation period (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the stop of the fluctuation of symbols, etc.) “Y”, which is the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the empty space becomes the smallest, is specified.

  However, when an effect pattern that stops the symbol without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol variation is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process of step S3103 itself, or the maximum number that can be set as the number of empty channels “Y” in the process of step S3103 (a number that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

  Then, as the process of step S3104, “X” specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with “Y” specified in the process of step S3103, and among these “X” and “Y” On the basis of the value on the side where the minimum number of empty channels is smaller (the side where the number of empty channels is not sufficient), the channel restriction level is set until at least the symbol variation to be determined is completed. As a result, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level from the start to the end of the symbol variation to be determined. Therefore, it is expected that the number of empty channels is hardly reduced to 0, and a decrease in amusement interest due to appearance of an unintended performance mode is expected.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum free channel number” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half (step S3102) and the second half (step S3103). I am going to do that. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of symbol change to the start of reach production) are shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

  However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel restriction level need not be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as a unit, the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is most empty during the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

  Also, the “minimum number of free channels” here is a sound automatically generated when the production pattern (production content) to be judged progresses (for symbol stop-related or big-hit determination according to BGM-related or big-hit determination). It shows how many channels are left in an empty state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effects. Therefore, a button pressing sound (such as a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The production patterns (production contents) to be judged such as the sound accompanying the winning at the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the ordinary electric production sound (the sound accompanying the production according to the normal symbol judgment), etc. are developed. Various kinds of sounds that are not necessarily executed by simply performing are not included in the determination.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing an example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level and the value of the channel restriction level set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104. .

  As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, among the various game sounds, the block winning sound (the winning to the general winning opening) is first selected as the sound subject to channel use restriction. ), On-hold winning sound (sound associated with winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), general electric effect sound (sound accompanying effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the period of symbol fluctuation when there is not enough room in the free channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds Channel usage restrictions may occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “0”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation with an empty channel is performed, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) None of these are restricted, and if there is a prize at the general prize opening during execution of the symbol variation, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and the first start port 2002 or during the symbol variation is executed. If there is a winning at the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, The electric sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel for playback, and when the volume is adjusted while the symbol variation is being executed, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is sent to the vacant channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 6 to 11, the process of step S3104 performs the channel restriction based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to “1”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which the pattern variation with a slight margin is executed in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction Sound)), the channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. In other words, in this case, when there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the amount of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but the block winning sound is set to a predetermined value. Processing is performed so as not to assign to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening, and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 2 to 5, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “2”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation with a relatively small margin is executed in the empty channel, and four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment) Among the completed sounds), the channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds, the block winning sound and the pending winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during execution of the symbol variation, the quantity corresponding to the winning is detected. Although the payout of the minute prize balls and the above-described first and second start opening winning prize processing are performed, the reserved winning sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the association shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which there is a design variation that has no room in the empty channel. The channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above and the restriction on the pending winning sound, even if an effect according to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, Is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment is performed according to the operation, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, for the general electric performance sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data and do not reproduce the general electric performance sound or the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of the empty channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Execution of related processing is restricted, and the percentage of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, so the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  In the above configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound that is subject to restriction on channel use is not the most important “production sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other “sounds associated with winning a prize” "," Production sound related to normal determination ", and" sound related to volume adjustment ". In other words, even if the restriction on channel use is generated during the execution of symbol variation, the effect on whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not limited. The decline in the entertainment interest when restricting the use of the channel is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, multiple types of game sounds that are candidates for restriction on channel use are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (as the minimum vacant channel number is smaller, the number of types of sounds that are subject to restriction on channel use is increased). However, a method of limiting the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increasing the rate of execution restriction as the number of free channels decreases. For example, a method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be adopted.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating another example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 265, in this alternative example, depending on the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104, the channel is used. A limited lottery is held to determine whether or not to apply a limit. However, here, a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) Etc.) is limited only to the channel use.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of vacant channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result for restriction in the restricted lottery is set to 0/100. The restriction process related to channel use is not executed for a specific game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) to be restricted.

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is increased as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). When the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100, and when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100, and the channel restriction level. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the same probability is 100/100. In this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that the restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is obtained, the restriction process related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even in such a configuration, when the game is progressing and symbol variation is executed in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, the number of the empty channels is reduced. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. In other words, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of available channels decreases and the number of free channels decreases, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation is preferred. It is expected to be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, the minimum free channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. It becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the number will not have room, and it is possible to prompt the game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) corresponding to the estimation.

  In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265, after performing determination processing for various types of notice effects based on the effect patterns, the number of minimum vacant channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects, and the specified minimum available space Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the maximum number of sounds that can be assigned to a channel at the same time during the symbol variation period can be estimated in advance for each effect pattern. Keep it. Then, when the production pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be increased as the channel shortage in which the production pattern is classified in advance is more likely to occur. That is, in this case, when a specific type of performance pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, there are actually no button operations or many channels are not used without various winnings, and empty channels are not used. Even if there is a surplus in the number of channels, there will be a situation in which the execution of processing related to game sound output may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of the number of being zero, and even when such a process is executed, “the number of empty channels in the pattern fluctuation is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which execution of processing related to game sound output is restricted increases, and when the number of free channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively large, it is related to game sound output. The rate at which the execution of processing is restricted is low ", and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained because it is a phenomenon that is not particularly uncomfortable from the player side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether or not the sound is restricted, it is possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause a shortage of channels.

  In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is created while the production contents are developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and the channel restriction corresponding to the channel restriction level may be executed each time. Or, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific rendering mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, the channel restriction level is made constant at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel restriction level is set to this channel restriction level. Accordingly, channel restriction may be executed.

  By the way, in the configurations exemplified in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, the sound that is subject to channel use restriction is not the most important “production sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that Only “sounds associated with winning prizes”, “production sounds related to normal judgment”, and “sounds related to volume adjustment” were adopted. However, these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the production sounds. Therefore, in order to implement a restriction process that can secure empty channels more effectively, It is desirable to adopt “effect sound” as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “effect sound related to the jackpot determination”, there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in an effect that lacks excitement. In some cases, if the jackpot symbol is stopped, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, among the “effect sounds related to the jackpot determination”, only the “effect related to symbol variation that is in a reserved state and is digested in the future” If the channel usage of the sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being executed Thus, it is possible to employ a production sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a restriction target without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs during the period when the symbol variation is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is put on hold, the hold is usually performed. A determination process is performed as to whether or not a pre-reading effect is to be performed with respect to the jackpot determination made into a state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination that has been put on hold will win the jackpot is performed. Become.

  However, there will be situations where the number of used channels will increase and anxiety will occur (such as when the symbol variation with the minimum number of free channels being 0 or 1 is being executed). In the case where “the effect sound corresponding to the effect relating to the symbol variation that will be digested in the future” is targeted, winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is suspended. Even if it is in the state, the determination process for the pre-reading effect itself is not executed with respect to the jackpot determination put on hold, and both the pre-reading effect and the effect sound corresponding to this are not performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of used channels increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion assigned to the production related to the future symbol variation that is not the symbol variation being executed is being executed. It is possible to supply effect sounds related to fluctuations in performance, so that effects with high occurrence frequency are restricted without any adverse effect on the effects related to the result of the ongoing symbol fluctuation. Will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only “the effect related to the future symbol fluctuation in the unexecuted state”, and even if the symbol fluctuation is subject to restriction, it will be restricted if it is suspended in the future. Since the effect during design change (the contents of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not made is always executed, the decrease in the game entertainment effect due to the effect being restricted is also suitably suppressed.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as the restriction target, if only the effect sound is restricted (no sound output) among the effects (effect display, effect sound), the effect lacks excitement. However, in the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and anxiety about the vacancy occurs, a prize is awarded and the jackpot determination is put on hold. Sometimes the judgment process for the pre-reading effect is not executed itself, and both the effect display related to the pre-reading effect and the effect sound are not performed, so a special result (pre-fetching win) cannot be obtained in the pre-reading judgment. It is only the same production situation as when it was played (the hold display when the pre-reading production is not executed), and it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the gaming interests due to the production execution lacking excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when winning and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the determination process regarding the prefetch effect itself is not executed, and the effect display and effect regarding the prefetch effect are performed. Although it was made not to perform both with a sound, it is not restricted to this. For example, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is to be restricted, determination processing for pre-reading effects is performed when winning, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing arrives during symbol variation Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect, but restricts them, and when a specific timing comes during the pattern change, only the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is limited. This may be done by canceling. In other words, in this case, an effect display related to the pre-reading effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing) different from the case where the “effect sound related to the jackpot determination” is not a restriction target (normal time), and a special effect is displayed. Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading win) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the decline of the game entertainment effect by not outputting the production sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

In addition, as a process related to the future production in the situation where channel use is restricted, the judgment process for the pre-reading production is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained, a specific timing during the symbol variation arrives Until it is done, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect are not executed, and these are restricted, and when the specific timing comes during the symbol change, the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound A configuration in which only this restriction is released and this is performed is defined as the first restriction process,
When the second restricted process is used, the game is advanced when the determination process for the pre-reading effect is not executed when winning and the effect display and the sound related to the pre-reading effect are not performed. In particular, when symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels with no sound assigned is less than a predetermined number, compared to when symbol variation in which the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is performed. The ratio of execution of either the first under-restricted process or the second under-restricted process is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first under-restricted process was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is “B”. When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. In other words, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the greater anxiety arises due to vacancy, it is not the first under-restricted process that restricts only the effect sound but restricts both the effect display and the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second under-restricted process increases, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more appropriately suppressed.

[Channel special release processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, A process of ending assignment of a specific game sound to a channel can be performed in a state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished in this way, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that is continuously assigned to the channel (channel special release process).

  According to such a configuration, the usage state is aimed at a timing when it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel assignment mode of the game sound (the state where the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)) The number of channels in the channel is reduced (the number of empty channels is increased). Therefore, for example, in order to output important game sounds more reliably, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this, the number of channels in use is reduced. This makes it difficult to be aware of this, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the fact that specific game sounds are no longer output.

  FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 266, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The “normal BGM playback” sound corresponding to the playback is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 (in this case, stereo playback), and the sound corresponding to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. The “effect A playback” sound is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 for playback (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), among the sounds in the playback state (normal BGM playback, effect A playback), the sound of “effect A playback” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect. At timing tk13 (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback ends. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of production, the content of the production of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by ending the assignment of the production sound from the channel and quickly changing it to an empty channel. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to allocate and reproduce new sounds due to insufficient channels.

  However, as described above, when the predetermined production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is in the stage of production (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), when the production sound is unassigned from the channel and changed to an empty channel, There will be a decrease in the number of effect sounds in the playback state, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern is reduced by that amount.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), first, the sound of “production A playback” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and timing tk13 before the playback ends is reached. Over the period from “timing tk12” to the arrival of “timing tk14” after the timing tk13, the sound of “playing effect B” according to the effect B displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 The reproduction channels 08 and 09 are assigned to be reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction). Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “production B reproduction” is in the reproduction state in this way, timing tk13 at which reproduction of “production A reproduction” ends. As the sound arrives, a process (volume suppression process) for reducing the volume is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” are assigned to the channel.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the sound of “effect B playback” in this example is output as an effect sound corresponding to a step effect whose effect contents can be developed up to four times. After the production contents have been developed three times (step 1, step 2 and step 3) in sequence, the production is executed as to whether or not the production contents are further developed according to step 4. Thus, a process of reducing the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the step effect are assigned to the channel. In addition, when this volume suppression process is finished and when the high expectation aspect that further develops to the effect contents according to step 4 appears when the volume is returned to the normal volume (relatively high expectation effect), While the specific effect sound corresponding to the effect content in step 4 is output as the sound of “effect B playback”, the step does not develop into the effect content according to step 4 but the effect content according to step 3 When a low-expected production mode in which the production ends is produced (a production with a relatively low expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of “production B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, an effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the “playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends, the number of channels in use has decreased (the “playing effect A playback” sound has not been played back). It is possible to make it difficult to notice.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (c), the production content with relatively high expectation (production content developed into step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation (step) Within the period (period in which it is unclear whether it develops) within the period in which the production content (the production whether or not to develop to Step 4) appears. Volume suppression processing is executed, and the sound of “production A playback” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B ("production B playback" sound). Because the production A (the sound of “production A playback”) comes to an end, the volume of the production sound that was targeted for volume suppression, including the sound of “production B playback”, was then restored. Even if the sound of “production A playback” is not reproduced, the production content with relatively high expectation (production content developed into step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced by attracting interest to which of the production contents) that has not developed into step 4).

  In addition, in the volume suppression processing according to this illustrative example, the volume is lowered while each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” is assigned to the channel. The volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) is continuously played at the normal volume. In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is reduced while the volume of some effect sounds (“normal BGM playback” sounds) is being played normally without being suppressed, and thus the sound can be identified. Since the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is ended while the “production A reproduction” sound is no longer reproduced, it can be made more difficult to notice. It becomes like this.

  Furthermore, in this example, the reproduction of the “effect A playback” sound is not finished immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. The reproduction of the sound of “production A reproduction” is ended after waiting for the elapse of timing tk13. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, there is a possibility that the player will be interested in the production sounds A and B in which the change of “volume reduction” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. When the state that does not change with the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already faded. By finishing the reproduction of, it becomes possible to make it difficult to notice because the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced.

  In particular, in this example, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process is decreased in stages, and the reproduction of the “effect A playback” sound is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice by the fact that the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the reproduction of the “production B reproduction” sound is started in the state where the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the “effect B playback” sound is being played back, the playback of the “effect A playback” sound is started. May be terminated.

  In addition, the effects A and B are not necessarily the effects accompanied by the effect display in the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect of only sound, for example.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 at which the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced comes from the development of the variation pattern (production pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the reproduction of the “production B reproduction” sound is started, and the sound of the “production A reproduction” is reproduced while the sound of the “production B reproduction” is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, it is not always necessary to reduce the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process in a stepwise manner. Conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned in stages. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a level lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound has ended. Is possible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect pattern (here, the sound of “normal BGM playback”) is excluded from the volume suppression process, and the normal sound volume is maintained. Although the reproduction is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be reduced when the volume suppression process is performed. Conversely, the sound of “production A playback” may be maintained without necessarily reducing the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is reduced. While the player is interested in the “production B playback” sound, the playback of the “production A playback” sound is terminated, and then the “production B playback” sound is also included. Even if the sound of “effect A playback” is not reproduced when the volume of the plurality of effect sounds that have been subject to volume suppression is restored, the content of the effect with a relatively high expectation (step 4) The effect “playing effect A” is played back, attracting interest as to whether the content of the effect that develops to a higher level) or the content of the production with relatively low expectations (the content that does not develop into step 4) appears. Can make it harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” is performed (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction” more appropriately, It is desirable not to reproduce the corresponding reserved winning sound. Also, even if a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetch determination when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. It is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, sound reproduction of “production A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the production sound is reduced in volume, and when the production period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced until then. In addition to this, the volume of the production sound that was being played was increased (returned to the original volume value), but in addition to this, a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel until the end of the period was added to the channel. You may make it newly allocate and reproduce | regenerate (reproduction | regeneration with the normal volume). According to such a configuration, when the volume is returned, it becomes more interesting whether or not the special effect sound is played back, and it is further noticed by the fact that the “play effect A playback” sound is not played back. Can be difficult. In addition, if the number of channels used after the volume recovery is reduced than before the volume reduction, there is a concern that the expectation that the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation is reduced, but there is a special production sound. Is assigned to a channel and played back (played at normal volume), so that it is the same before or after the volume is restored, or more (2 or more performance sounds for the channel). It is also possible that the player remembers the feeling that the degree of expectation has been reduced, because it is possible to make it possible to use the channel (when newly assigned). It will be avoided. In this case, the special effect sound may or may not be played when the volume is restored, and it is suggested that the expectation is relatively high when the special effect sound is played. It is desirable to do.

  Note that when a special effect sound that was not assigned to a channel when the volume is restored is newly assigned to a channel for playback, the channel that has become empty due to the removal of the sound for “effect A playback” It is desirable to assign a special performance sound to the. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is to be executed. For example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265 As the effect of “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in the situation where there is a margin in the number of empty channels so as not to cause anxiety that there will be a shortage of channels, the “production A” can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol variation is started and ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of “BGM playback” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. To perform the process. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, a state where the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to a predetermined channel and is output in a suppression mode or silence ( When the volume of “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output), and an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected in this state, A special effect sound suggesting a degree of expectation in which a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output process). The expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, although the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, the sound is output in the suppression mode or silence. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which the channel usage is likely to be afforded. Therefore, providing the player with an opportunity to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe the channel is not available and the special performance sound may not be output” is removed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("BGM playback" sound) is assigned to a channel and is output in a suppressed manner or silence, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM playback”) (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving the player an opportunity to operate (generating a valid period for the production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is undefined (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if an operation (production reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the “BGM playback” sound in advance so as to start playback of the sound in accordance with this indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback exclusively for special effect sound playback”. It is also conceivable to perform processing for reproduction. However, the “BGM playback” sound is played in accordance with the contents of various effects, the timing of symbol stop, etc. until the specific effect pattern is stopped after being stopped. When the operation (production reception) is performed indefinitely (depending on the player), when the operation (production reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. There is a concern that so-called sound misalignment may occur between the various effects and symbol stop timings thereafter, resulting in a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific performance pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data (BGM playback) sound corresponding to the specific performance pattern ( For example, normal fluctuation sound data, sound data of the first half of the super reach production, sound data of the second half of the super reach production, etc.) are determined in accordance with the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the “BGM playback” sound corresponding to such a specific performance pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When assigned to a predetermined channel in accordance with the time series, the playback is started by assigning to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of effect reception within the specific effect pattern is generated, and the effective period ends. Thus, playback is performed while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel over a long period until the timing after the above.

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, it is suppressed in comparison with other sections, or processing for sound output with no sound. When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Time period) within a time series in which the valid period of the production reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over the two periods in the specific sound data with the period (other sections) after the (partial section) ends. Reproduction is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppressed state or state (special period) output in silence”. In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data content of other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is played back, it becomes possible to return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in a non-suppressed mode secretly. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. In this case, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound misalignment between various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 267 is a time chart illustrating an example of an assignment state of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 267, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 267 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the timing at which the effect is progressed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at the timing ts11. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the effect pattern is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback). The sound of “BGM playback” is, for example, one sound data (one piece of data over the entire period of symbol variation from the start to the end of symbol variation when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is to be executed. (Sound material) may be reproduced based on sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and individual sound data prepared for each period may be used. May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as a sound of “BGM playback” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267 (a) and 267 (b), one sound data ("BGM playback" sound) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is special. The silent data content is set at timing ts12 before the timing ts13 when the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) for which the operation opportunity that is the generation sound is given is generated. The playback state is set for a part of the section. As a result, without adjusting the volume from the initial value for the “BGM playback” sound, the sound can be output without sound while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content, and there seems to be room in channel usage. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides an opportunity for the player to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and the special performance sound may not be output” is removed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interests.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is ended even when there is no operation by the player. At time ts15 before arriving, the period is ended so that the player's operation is not accepted for production. Therefore, even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing during the operation valid period, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by the player can be generated while an atmosphere is provided in which the use situation of the channel is likely to be sufficient. It should be noted that the operation effective period is ended not only when the player does not perform an operation but at the timing ts15, but also when the player receives an operation. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case of the operation by the player at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound “BGM playback” is assigned based on the acceptance of the effect. , 03 is assigned to a special effect sound for reproduction on channels 08, 09 different from the above.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period ends at this maximum time. When the time from the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” to the end (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF” Even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the above, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even when an operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. The sound of “BGM playback” can be output as a non-suppressed form in the form of being mixed with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time until the sound of “BGM playback” is output as a non-suppressed mode after the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted, The output period of the special effect sound is a buffer period for returning the sound of “BGM playback” in a non-suppressing manner (the sound of “BGM playback” is restored in a non-suppressing manner by intermingling with the special effect sound) The period of time when it is difficult for the player to notice that the “BGM playback” sound is not restored as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted, and the user feels uncomfortable by returning after a predetermined time. It becomes difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound “BGM playback” is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM playback effect sound, the sound “BGM playback” is played back in the non-suppression mode when the timing ts17 arrives. In the state, the reproduction of the special performance sound comes to an end.

  In the example described above, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 267 (b). Although it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrows according to the timing of acceptance, the timing ts16 arrives when the special performance sound is in the playback state, regardless of which timing it falls into. It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM playback effect sound is set as the “BGM playback” sound is started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 267, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning after a predetermined time without returning the“ BGM playback ”sound as an unsuppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section while paying attention to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, when the player's operation is accepted for the production, the special production sound is generated based on the production reception. However, the specific production according to the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is used. The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. Even if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when an operation is received by the player within the operation valid period, the performance is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section in a state where the playback of the sound or the like is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the playback state in the normal section is the playback of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending. According to such a configuration, there is a silent period (in accordance with the operation timing) from when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) ends to when the BGM playback sound returns to the normal state playback state. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if it is set so that a revival effect with a high degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during the silent period, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when playing a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.), the BGM playback sound is not restored to the playback state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a losing manner. Also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM playback sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM playback by performing a movable effect that operates a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect. This is desirable for secretly shifting the playback sound to the playback state in the normal section.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of “BGM playback” is output silently in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as it is output at. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode in which the volume of the speaker cone is reduced per unit time in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, the “BGM playback” sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to a suppression mode or a time-sequential period of silence in the sound data itself. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state of being output in a suppressed manner or silence (special period) simply by playing it. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at time ts12, the sound of “BGM playback” You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, a process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from the specific value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) is triggered by the acceptance of the effect. Do not. If the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is finished. (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, a restriction process that makes it difficult to assign a new sound to an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16. It is desirable to make it. Note that such a restriction process has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation being executed, such as a block winning tone, a pending winning tone, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment tone, etc. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and that the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. So that it is not a music effect sound or a speech sound effect such as speech, so that it does not blur the sound of the sound, and while the specific effect sound is being played, the timing ts12 arrives and BGM playback It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is ended before timing ts14 (or before timing ts14) at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate anxiety that the special performance sound is not output.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM playback is output from timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback is usually changed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  Further, such an under-suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265 “BGM playback sound” is used as the restriction target, and the smaller the number of symbols, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels. You may make it make the ratio by which the said operation sound output process under suppression is performed high. According to such a configuration, the BGM playback sound is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a surplus in the number of empty channels so as not to feel uneasy that the special performance sound is not output due to a lack of channels. Will be able to.

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which no sound data is assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. Executable (channel assignment cancellation operation). In other words, in this case, an empty channel will be created in response to the player's operation, so an empty channel is created by the player's operation at the timing immediately before the player's favorite production sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite performance sound and special sound through the previously secured empty channel.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this example is not limited to “button operation”, and examples include an act of praying while holding the hand against the pachinko machine 1 with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262. In short, it is based on a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect some state change that occurs when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) that is a detection target is performed. Any process may be used as long as it detects the sound assigned to the channel and removes the sound from the channel and ends the reproduction.

  FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when processing related to such channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, the predetermined effect pattern in which the effect has been developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at the timing tw11. "BGM1 playback" sound (for example, effect sound effect played during the execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 for playback (in this case, stereo playback), and The sound of “BGM2 playback” corresponding to the production mode (for example, one piece of music that is continuously played back across multiple variations in the short-time gaming state, etc.) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback) ) Is in the situation.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), among the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). The channel assignment is forcibly terminated at the time when is detected, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, when the timing tw12 is reached, an effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is received. An acceptable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) that is a detection target such as “operate a button and secure an empty channel” in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 An operation instruction image for prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 268 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection by a predetermined detection means is not performed. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed until the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of “BGM2 playback” is removed from the playback channels 02 and 03. Even after timing tw13 arrives, this is continuously reproduced. Further, at the timing tw13 when the acceptance period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button and secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed in which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduced. In this example, since the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) are reserved in advance without changing the reproduction channels 02 and 03 to empty channels by detection by a predetermined detection means, the empty channels are reserved. A predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) can be assigned to a channel and played back. However, if the other channels are not reserved in advance, there is no empty channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be reproduced and output. Concerns will arise.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means. Show.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the playback channels 02 and 03 are detected at the timing tw12a at which the detection is made. From “BGM2 playback”. As a result, it is possible to secure in advance a free channel (playback channel 02, 03) that can function as a target for assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. The concern that the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) cannot be reproduced and output is resolved. In addition, the playback state of the sound “BGM2 playback” is forcibly terminated when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed, and in this case, the music or speech as the sound of “BGM2 playback” is exhausted to the end (or Since the playback ends at a halfway point without being played back, the player feels that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player. As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced.

  It should be noted that at the timing tw12a when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the playback state of the sound “BGM2 playback” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (Operate the button and secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the production reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is allowed ends.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), at the timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as the empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channels 10, 11) a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to be reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in other channels at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definitive sound) is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in another channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and played back. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, the effect sound (here, different from the predetermined effect sound) Even if BGM2) is assigned, the assigned state is canceled at that time triggered by the detection of a specific action such as a button operation (channel assignment cancellation operation), so that one channel (specific channel) is assigned. It is possible to play “BGM2 playback” sound and a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) only by using them, and to effectively use a playback channel which is a limited resource. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing after the timing tw13. Then, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot definitive sound, an effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear, an effect sound that suggests that the player has lost the jackpot, and the like may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of the effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, when it is suggested that the player has lost the jackpot, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound is output, and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, the sound that ends channel assignment is not a sound that is output in any of a plurality of forms, but is output in only one form. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. In other words, in this case, even if the specific sound is missed when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and will not cause any trouble. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), a reception period in which the reception of a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated when a predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during a period in which a specific sound as a target to be excluded from channel allocation is in a playback state, the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is allowed to be accepted, and the channel allocation of the specific sound is based on the reception You may make it cancel. In this case, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the playback state, a previously reserved empty channel state is maintained for a predetermined time, and another sound is then output to the empty channel. It is desirable to be allocated and played back.

  In addition, as a method for canceling channel assignment of a specific sound to be forcibly terminated, a method for making a channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel assignment of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) in the form of overwriting the same channel. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated, at an earlier stage than when the forcible termination is not performed.

  In addition, at least during the period from when the reception of the specific act (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the reception of the end is completed, a new sound In order to prevent the channel from being used unnecessarily, a specific game sound (for example, a winning sound, a hold change sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. that is not related to the effect of whether the big hit symbol appears within the symbol variation concerned) It is desirable not to output the pre-reading effect sound or the like.

  In addition, the specific sound to be forcibly terminated (the sound of “BGM2 playback”) is played as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is played back only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier to remember that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player so that playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. .

[Abnormality notification while a performance according to a performance pattern is being performed]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that this occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal condition occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to this is not necessarily output, thereby accelerating the reduction of the risk that there will be no more free channels due to that much room. Is expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing at which the predetermined movable decoration body should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by the predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. When such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred”) and a game The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “abnormality occurs in the back movable effect unit 3200”) can be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has an abnormality. It may be an aspect that identifies which abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to which of the groups. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100 and the like) , The back-side movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-right movable effect unit 3400, the back-upper movable effect unit 3500, the back-under-movable effect unit 3700, etc.) An abnormality display is performed in the display area in such a manner that it can be specified on which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body an abnormality has occurred. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refers to movable decorative bodies that have different drive sources and are provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly possible that there is no error on the part of the player. Therefore, if the notification process may be executed prominently during the period in which various games (such as symbol variations and jackpot games) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, It will have a negative impact on the player, and it is an amusement for the player. Not only that, the number of empty channels is not enough for the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, so the player may feel uneasy about not being able to output a new sound. There is concern about a decline in the entertainment interest.

  However, on the other hand, a failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is a side where it is difficult to assume a situation where the mobile decorative body suddenly fails when not operating at all. Then, when the movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, it is abnormal when the movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. If there is a possibility that it is in a detected situation and the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not output in spite of being in such a situation, fraudulent acts may be promoted. If you are a big player, you may be concerned about the decline in gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such a moving body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, it is possible to execute a notification process (output of a notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) by the pachinko machine 1. However, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) corresponding to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern (effect pattern)) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 When a movable body abnormality is detected while a movable body is operated based on an effect pattern during a big hit game or the like, a notification process (output of a notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. Note that the external output (information on the hall side) of information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is not performed, and it may be performed regardless of the situation because it does not adversely affect the performance.

  According to such a configuration, even in a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a situation in which a failure in the movable decorative body is unlikely to occur (by the peripheral control board 1510). Abnormality of moving object in process of moving movable ornament body by effect control (moving body driving process of moving movable ornament body based on variation pattern (effect pattern) or effect pattern during big hit game)) In the event that a failure occurs, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed, but at least in a situation where the failure of the movable decorative body is likely to occur (during the moving operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality is In the case of occurrence, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormal notification sound is not performed, so that the person who performs the illegal action is restrained from performing the illegal action. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the control control of the effect sound for the channel, and the occurrence of the abnormality The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is performed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It is suppressed from being exerted. However, even if the stage timing for operating the movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated as long as the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. Production is not executed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an action to move the movable decorative body to a specific position (origin position)) to restore the movable decorative body from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable decoration that operates the specific movable decoration body is performed, the specific movable decoration is started. If the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state at an earlier stage, it is possible to execute a specific movable effect that operates the specific movable decorative body.

  It should be noted that the movable decorative object is identified within a predetermined time even though a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an operation for moving the movable decorative object to a specific position (origin position)) is performed. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 269 shows the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period when the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the situation by the side of a movable decoration object.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 is in timing ti11 during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to timing ti14. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period for receiving the effect), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at the timing ti13, based on the fact that the player's operation has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform an effect (FIG. 269 (b)). (See FIG. 269 (a)). An effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction.

  Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, since the restoration process has failed and recovery cannot be expected, the movable body driving process is terminated without performing any driving. On the other hand, when no abnormality history is stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined based on the information whether a specific movable decorative body is at a specific position (original position). As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a manner defined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to a specific position (original position), and when driving for the specific movable decorative body is completed, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, If it is determined based on this information that the vehicle is returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body driving process is terminated. However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position) in the movable body driving process, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed. Then, the movable body driving process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from timing ti13. In this example, the specific movable decorative body is applied to the specific movable decorative body at timing ti15 within the period during which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot work. In FIG. 269 (b), a dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). An abnormality is determined), and a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that it has occurred due to a failure of the decorative body, in this illustrative example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality has occurred. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the performance being executed.

  At timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position). In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, the normal movable effect can be executed. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery has failed. In this case, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation after the next time, even when the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable ornament based on the effect pattern has arrived, The effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, especially when the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body is activated (emitted) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected to curb the entertainment interest.

  As described above, if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same variation pattern (specific production pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When it occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable decorative body is operated by effect control (effect pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 270 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination in the period in which the pattern variation is performed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation condition of each channel when it detects, and the condition by the side of a movable decoration body.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the display device 1600 is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  As described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is the maximum, and the timing ti14. Can occur over time. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at the timing ti <b> 11 a before the timing ti <b> 12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation (operation without operating based on the rendering pattern). Thus, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). In FIG. 270 (b) as well, a dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, at the timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it will be possible to execute a normal movable effect without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state, and therefore the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, causing an abnormality. The various light emitting units including the lamps mounted on the movable decorative body only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period of the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is determined by the restoration process. If it is eliminated, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is executed. In this example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is being performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a state where restoration processing is being executed, even if an operation by the player is accepted within a period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, a specific operation is performed. Although the effect operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. is doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body although it is not the timing at which the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the performance pattern according to the result of the big hit determination It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected when a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body is not resolved by some external force even in the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing.

  Therefore, at the timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect contents, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced on the reproduction channels 00 and 01 over a predetermined time. Will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the display at the time of abnormality corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ The occurrence of an abnormality in the back movable movable effect unit 3200 ”is executed. In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are in a normal mode in accordance with the progress of the production contents. The light will be emitted.

  According to the examples of FIGS. 269 and 270, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, the period during which the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the operation, it is unlikely that an illegal act has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, when the abnormality of the movable body suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, it is highly likely that an illegal act is performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. This is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output the notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 270, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, but the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a when the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. It was decided to do. However, at timing ti11b, a movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that a specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the production pattern, and this alone can also lead to fraudulent acts such as throbbing or wire entry. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that it has been broken, the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be started to be output at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed.

  In short, regarding the notification process in response to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the pattern variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration body is in spite of the fact that the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. "A failure has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the performance pattern". It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that it is possible for a person who performs a fraudulent act to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed, while being executed for a legitimate player It is expected to avoid adversely affecting the production of the video. The condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the symbol variation is performed is as follows: “The specific movable decoration is not performed by the specific movable decoration body based on the production pattern. For example, “failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “occurring when the occurrence of an abnormality is in a specific situation” It is possible to adopt these as further conditions.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the specific movable decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decorative body is operated according to the production pattern, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger. It may not be determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time.

  In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body, Other methods such as performing detection may be employed. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti17, thereby detecting the abnormality of the movable body. In the example of FIG. 270, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti11b, thereby detecting the abnormality of the movable body.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the stage operation at the timing when the player has operated, but the specific movable decorative body is displayed at the specific timing determined by the stage pattern. It is also possible to perform a production operation.

  Of the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to a specific value (0). You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  If the abnormality notification is not executed on the condition that “the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the production operation based on the production pattern”, after that, However, it is desirable that even if the abnormal state is not solved and remains, at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, abnormality notification is not performed. In addition, it is desirable that the game or performance be developed while the abnormal state is maintained without causing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound according to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies with different drive sources and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality (Sound data) is assigned to a channel and played back, so that the number of channels used is not increased unnecessarily even when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. It was. In addition, the movable body abnormality means that the movable body is in a state where it cannot operate properly, and is the same as that exemplified in “abnormality notification while an effect according to an effect pattern is performed”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on gaming machines has increased, and the game can be obtained only by associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable ornaments. It is becoming difficult to properly inform the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and abnormality notification sounds that differ depending on which of the groups a movable decorative body has an abnormality are made to channels. By assigning and reproducing the pachinko machine 1, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  In this example as well, when a moving body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification while an effect corresponding to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). Is performed. Therefore, also in this example, even when various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) are generated and detected, notification processing (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510. When a movable body abnormality is detected while a (moving body driving process for operating a movable decorative body based on an (effect pattern) or an effect pattern during a big hit game) is being performed, a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 ( Notification sound output, abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

  In this example, however, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, abnormal sound data assigned to a channel and put into a reproduction state is only one corresponding to a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, a process for performing a restoring operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality occurs is executed. According to such a configuration, even when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to promote a reduction in the risk that there will be no available channels by giving a margin to the channels. As a result, it becomes possible to quickly return to the abnormal state of each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel usage time by improving the efficiency of the processing in the event of an abnormality. . In addition, about the content of the restoration process, and each process at the time of success and failure, the above-mentioned example of “abnormality notification while an effect according to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIGS. 269 and 270) ).

  Here, as an aspect which divides a some movable decoration body into two or more groups, it is calculated | required that it is an aspect suitable for alerting | reporting the state as the said pachinko machine 1, for example, it is provided in the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable ornaments (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back Right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, it can be transmitted to the hall side whether or not an abnormality has occurred or whether an abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative body that is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a higher possibility that fraudulent acts are performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by performing the notification sound output based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player side depending on the type (unpleasant feeling). (Without doing so), the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation of high possibility of fraud can be secretly transmitted to the hall side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment as well, in the event that a movable body abnormality has occurred, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a game board side effect display As described above, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this regard, in this example, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of abnormality than the case of the “notification by sound”, but is superior in the information transmission function for informing the details of the abnormality in more detail. Have the same properties. Therefore, in the “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in such a manner that the information transmission function is more effectively performed in a manner different from the case of performing the “notification by sound” using the difference in properties. In particular, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the groups thus uniquely divided belongs to the movable decorative body.

  That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on whether there are any abnormalities in the movable body, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same even though the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ”,“ a second notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are the same even when any abnormality of the movable body occurs. ”And“ a third notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are different from each other even when any movable body abnormality occurs ”occur. It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 271 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the timing change tj11 during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over the period up to the timing tj15. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after timing tj15. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 271 assumes a case where an operation by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform the effect. An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force at the timing tj11 (operates without being based on the effect pattern), and the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation. A case is assumed where abnormalities of these movable bodies are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 271 (b) and FIG. 272 (b), which will be described later, a dotted range indicates a period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration process is performed to perform a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred. Accordingly, in relation to this restoration process, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing tj14, a specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, a board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, a board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and a board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. There is a movable body abnormality with respect to the frame side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Each situation is assumed.

  More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. On the other hand, the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are operated. Thus, there is no concern of interfering with each other's actions, so that restoration processing is simultaneously performed at timing tj12 so that quick recovery of each movable decorative body is possible.

  In such a configuration, the restoration process of the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long period of time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, the restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player ends. It is assumed that none of the restoration processing of A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the operation is effective. Regardless of the timing at which the stage is received (effective period of the stage reception), the stage is processed so that the stage operation is not performed when the stage is received.

  In other words, in this case, if there is a production reception within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body cannot be produced using this as a trigger. Even if a production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is completed, it is possible to perform another operation with another board-side movable ornament that is still in the stage of executing the restoration process. The concern of interfering arises. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any one of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if an operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. In other words, the light is emitted only in the light emission mode. In short, when a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after all the restoration processing has been completed (all restoration processing has been completed successfully), Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body has arrived, the execution of the effect operation is allowed.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, it corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, and Processing is performed so that whether or not to perform a production operation triggered by this when the production is accepted depends on when the production is accepted within the operation valid period (effective period of production reception) It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Inevitably arrives, and even if the other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F are in the process of restoration, there is no concern of interfering with them. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, any operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, a specific movable decorative body effect operation is performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is applied to the channel. In the light emission mode when various movable light emitting units perform the movable effect, including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred, the sound produced when the effect is performed is played back. Light is emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing when the restoration process is completed. Therefore, when an operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decoration body is still in an abnormal state, so that the specific movable decoration is The body effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process), the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even if it is in progress, normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) is also included, including the production operation of a specific movable decorative body. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not arrive after the restoration processing is completed (successful restoration processing). . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. Effect sound (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay.

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are provided when a notification sound is notified in accordance with a movable body abnormality. , C and a plurality of frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot normally occur as a proper game is progressing, and cannot occur as a result of fraud. There is a high probability that all movable decorations have been manually manipulated, and so on. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself can be troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it was detected that the movable body abnormality occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively. At the timing tj12, the restoration process on the panel side movable decorative body side and the restoration process on the frame side movable decorative body side are started simultaneously as described above, whereas the notification sound output is movable on the frame side. The common alarm sound for the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, but the common alarm sound for the board side corresponding to the movable movable body A, B, and C sides is assigned to the channel. The output is stopped.

  That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time elapses (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side). Therefore, among the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the “board-side movable decorative body A, By assigning only the panel side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative body A, B, and C side” is generated. The restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended while the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are being reproduced. Since the output request of the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F” after the output of “sound” is ended, it is avoided. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the panel side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F are being restored. The “board side common decorative alarm sound corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced over the period up to the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B, C are finished. Thus, the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F” is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above-mentioned “notification by sound” is performed using the difference in properties from the notification sound described above. The above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode different from the above, in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and a different display is performed depending on which of the groups uniquely divided in this manner has an abnormality. ing. That is, in this case, for example, if the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body E corresponds to this. “Notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, The corresponding “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” ends at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D ends. Therefore, even if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body ends first, depending on the execution situation related to the restoration process of the movable decorative body grouped with the specific movable decorative body, The “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed later may end first.

  According to the example of FIG. 271, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. When a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. The movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process for these movable decorative bodies is executed simultaneously. As a result, for a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state, the total time required for the restoration process can be made shorter than that of the movable decoration body that corresponds to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing corresponding to each group is performed simultaneously. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and (The frame side), the restoration process can be executed independently for each group, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies (DF) belonging to at least one of the groups (the frame side in the above example) Among them, if it is selected as a movable decorative body that can be operated without being affected by each other's operation state and all can be restored simultaneously, refer to FIGS. 271 and 272. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the functions and effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be made at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body, Other methods such as performing detection may be employed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, the specific movable decorative body is exemplified as the stage operation at the timing when the operation by the player is performed. It may be allowed.

  Of the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to a specific value (0). You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, a movable body abnormality occurred in each of the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F within the period during which the symbol variation was performed. Although the description has been made assuming that the situation is assumed, the symbol variation does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution of the big hit game or when the special symbol game is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable ornaments A, B, C and the frame side movable ornament D, Even if a movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods of all the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. It was. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even if they are operated simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative bodies are arranged based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and the movable body abnormality in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are detected. Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination is made is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F. Even when the determination is made, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is completed at an earlier timing than the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the “common alarm sound on the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C” ends, the “frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side It is possible to avoid a request for output of the corresponding frame side common abnormality notification sound.

  Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. You may make it be the processing structure determined to have carried out. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are performed. And wait until it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and then correspond to the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side. While the notification process is performed, it is desirable to perform the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In addition, as a result of waiting for the determination process whether the movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. In this case, the restoring process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed while the notification process corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

[Automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation effect may be performed a plurality of times according to each operation by prompting a predetermined operation means a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly pressing the operation button 410). However, in recent years, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) is not operated a plurality of times in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of such multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Auto multiple operation function (automatic) that makes it possible to show the appearance when multiple operations are performed simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time. Equipped with a continuous hitting function).

  In such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), a single operation (one-time operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as so-called long press is performed. ) Is a player who is not good at multiple operations (slow hitting speed). It can be said that it is important to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest of a player or the like, or to encourage the use of the function by various players. However, when the player is in the operation state, if the effect change (for example, operation sound) when the effect is accepted every time a relatively short time elapses, it is the same for the player. Even if you intend to perform an operation with a single press, the short operation time (the time during which the operation state is maintained slightly with a single press) is slightly lengthened or shortened, resulting in multiple receptions. Occurrence (multiple operation sounds are generated), production reception occurs only once (one operation sound is generated), and the number of production receptions for a single operation is stable There is a concern that the amusement interest will decrease due to the uncomfortable feeling caused by not doing so.

  In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when an operation by so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case of an operation by single press, an effect change (for example, operation sound) due to the reception of the effect is made. Etc.) only once. After the first production change (for example, operation sound) is generated, no new production reception (operation sound) is generated until a predetermined interval time longer than the predetermined short time elapses. Then, after waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, an effect change (operation sound) when an effect is accepted every time a predetermined short time elapses is repeatedly generated. In other words, in this case, since there is a time margin between the time when the first production reception (operation sound) is generated and the time when the second production reception (operation sound) is generated, a single press is performed. Whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time just by performing an operation by so-called long press while avoiding the uncomfortable feeling due to the unstable number of production receptions when the operation is performed by As a result, the production can be realized.

  However, from the player's side, this gives itself a time margin between the time when the first production reception (operation sound) is generated and the time when the second production reception (operation sound) is generated. It is useless in operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when performing operations by so-called long presses) There is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced due to the slow feeling.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation with respect to the operation means is long. As in the case of operation (long press, etc.), the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. The player can be made to remember (such as feeling as if fast hits are being made). As a result, all operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the performance when the operation is performed by a single press (whether it is a single production change or multiple production changes). Even if it exists, it becomes possible to maintain suitably the frequency | count of occurrence of the production change (for example, operation sound etc.) per unit time.

  FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of the control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Here, description will be made assuming that the operation button 410 is employed as the operation means. Also, in other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the reception of the performance in response to the operation on the button 410, The black specific sound output in the figure indicates a specific sound generated in the form following the white specific sound output in the figure when there is no production reception when the operation button 410 is not operated. It is. The volume and tone color of these specific sounds are not different from each other and are preferably the same.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given (single operation). It is assumed that one operation has been performed. Therefore, at timing tx11, detection (determination) that an operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is the same. Processing for starting output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern during operation) is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after a specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), a specific sound (for example, “picone”) associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittent in that situation. Can be output automatically.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Even if the player does not detect any operation until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone” ”) Is output, it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), five times (N times) from when the grace time TY1 is started until it elapses. The time is set so that a specific sound (for example, “picone”) of minutes can be output. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound accompanying the operation (a sound in response to an effect reception) Is at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection and thereafter 4 times (N−) when the automation time TY2 elapses even without operation. 1) (total number of times with a specific sound).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the grace period is output during the fifth specific sound output). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends is reached, processing (output interruption processing, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at the timing tx13 (for example, “pico”) And the specific sound that has been output until that time tx13 (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the first to fourth specific sounds) The output (sound waveform) in the same manner appears. In other words, if the specific sound accompanying the operation may be interrupted in the middle, it will be ambiguous whether the operation has been accepted for multiple times or not. However, according to such a configuration, such a concern may be caused by the player becoming difficult to remember the game. It is expected to be solved appropriately.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined valid period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period after the grace period TY1 starts, Until the grace period TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined effective period ends, it is avoided that the number of stage receptions is not stable when an operation by a single press is performed. Needless to say, it is possible to make the player feel as if the operation has been performed within a period exceeding a predetermined effective period, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment. In this sense, a display (such as a remaining time display for which the valid period is continued) is performed so that the player can recognize whether the predetermined valid period is being continued or has been terminated. In addition, it can be said that it is more preferable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) under the condition that it can be recognized that it is in the finished state.

  Note that the “specific sound output accompanying the operation” in the figure is not a signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, but a volume waveform of the specific sound that is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses (other sound outputs This is a conceptual illustration of the excluded waveform). As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the output of the specific sound of the previous output to end, and the specific sound of the previous output is obtained. On the other hand, the sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently as if fast repeated operation is performed It is expected that players will be able to remember the sensation.

  By the way, as a reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to a mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the drawing) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the drawing) that is repeatedly reproduced every time the automation time TY2 elapses. Moreover, the aspect which reproduce | regenerates the several specific sound output intermittently as one sound data may be sufficient. In the case of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, it is not always necessary to output all the specific sounds as the same single sound, but they are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), regarding the display output on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 is displayed after the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand leaves and no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation-time display pattern is advanced multiple times in this situation. It has become something that can be made.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). It is. In this respect, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over a period from the timing tx11 until the set grace time TY1 is up. By executing this, the display content of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

  The contents of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set as, for example, the mode shown in FIG. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 274, “display scene 1” is a video depicting the situation where the teammate character holds the sword and is about to pull out the sword, and “display scene 2” is the ally This is a video depicting the situation from when a character is extracted until it is cut off, and “Display Scene 3” is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the first mode. "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "Display scene 5" is a third scene in which the teammate character and the enemy character are in a third state. This is a video depicting a state where a sword is being held in a manner.

  After displaying the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is intermittently output. The player can be made to feel as if the content of the battle with the character has been developed in response to a plurality of operations. In addition, about each display scene 1-5, it may not necessarily be a moving image, and a still image may be sufficient as it. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern during operation, various effect displays (such as hold display and operation instruction image) may be displayed. As one of these effect displays, an image that changes in production (such as a color change) every time an effect is received by an operation by a player may be included, but it is recognized whether or not an effect has been received. In order to make it difficult, it is important that the image is displayed as an image smaller than the display pattern during operation.

  Here, in the operation-time display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), the grace time TY1 is started until it elapses. At least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are set to have a length of time that can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) is given, at least five (M) display contents of the operation-time display pattern are displayed. ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and thereafter four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (developed) even when there is no operation. The display content is developed over the total number).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the timing tx13 when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). Unlike the case of the specific sound, the display pattern at the time of operation is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 without displaying it until the end. In other words, unlike the case of a specific sound without progress, the display pattern at the time of operation where the production content has progress is interrupted in the middle of the display scene. It is expected that the player will be given an impression that it may have been able to be further developed, thereby prompting further operation by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the display pattern at the time of operation (each display scene) and the grace period TY1, all display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace period TY1 starts and ends. It can be said that it is more desirable to prompt the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage further operations by the player, only a part of all display scenes 1 to 5 are displayed between the start and end of the grace period TY1. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined effective period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period from the start of the grace period TY1 until the lapse of the grace period TY1, the predetermined effective At the end of the period (a state in which the remaining time of the grace period TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and a display showing the result as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are displayed and progressed sequentially according to a predetermined schedule after the display scene 1 is displayed, regardless of the mode of operation. May be set in advance according to the time (automated time TY2) from when the specific sound is output until it is output again, or set regardless of the time (automated time TY2) It may be a thing. In this sense, display contents such as switching to another display or occurrence of a new display are included in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 274, the display scene 1 is “from a state where a sword is held, There is a display change due to “video depiction of sword pulled out”, and display scene 3 has a “display change due to an effect occurring when an ally character fights against an enemy character”. More desirable. If display scenes having such display changes are used, it is possible to make the display change in each display scene appear to have occurred due to the effect reception, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be resolved without strictly matching the above. In addition, a plurality of display scenes do not necessarily have to be prepared as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at timing tx21 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. It is assumed that the operation in the long mode to be maintained at is performed. Accordingly, at the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, detection (determination) indicating that the operation is performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed based on the detection (determination). A process for starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern at the time of operation) will be performed.

  Also, in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, as in the case of the non-operation period (period from the timing tx12 to tx13) described above, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, “picone”) can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display content of the hour display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Monitoring is periodically performed (determining whether the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, detecting a falling edge in the detection signal). As long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and the periodical monitoring is performed, “every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A process for outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) and a process for sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order are performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period from the timing tx21 to tx22), “when the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and it is determined that the operation is detected. Based on a process such as outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) based on “the operation detection state is determined each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and the operation detection state is indicated” Processing such as “progress display contents based on determination” is not performed, and “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”. And “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order. Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. The “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is what is done.

  Thereafter, as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the (operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the determination result. Set grace time TY1. However, in this case, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are performed in accordance with a predetermined time and order. The “sequential output processing” is continuously executed over the period up to the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends after the timing tx22 at which the operation state is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22), the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) across the transition timing, the specific sound can be output intermittently in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the display pattern during operation can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, the specific sound output mode at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the specific sound output mode at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are respectively generated. The processing mode (program) for outputting a specific sound can be made common among them. Similarly, the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are respectively displayed. In creating them, it becomes possible to share a processing mode (program) related to the output of the display pattern during operation. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273 (a), as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has ended. Further, the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) is changed to the situation where the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) straddling the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. The operation-time display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

  As a result, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-pressing manner, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as when the operation on the so-called long-pressing manner is performed. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, a single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if it was being performed (such as a feeling as if fast hits were being performed). As a result, while striving to stabilize the responsiveness of the performance when the operation is performed by a single press (whether it is a single change of production or multiple production changes), any operation mode (single press, Even if long press) is employed, it is possible to favorably maintain the number of production changes (specific sounds) generated by the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-pressing mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and in a so-called long-pressing mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change occurs in (b)), actually, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), one effect is accepted at timing tx11, and the white in the figure is specified accordingly. Whereas sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), four receptions are received every time the automation time TY2 elapses from timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them. The specific sound output without a cut is made four times. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. When the type of effect that causes the effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), since only one effect reception has occurred, a specific effect result appears. I can't expect much. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the reception of the specific sound without the black in the figure is intentionally performed even when the reception of the production is not generated, so that the reception of the production actually occurs so much. Even if it is a situation that can not be expected very much that a specific production result will appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring Even if a player who is not good at (such as slow hitting speed) performs a single operation, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much production reception has occurred only by confirming one specific sound output at a time. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been performed, it is possible to attach a degree of star that indicates how much production reception has occurred.

  Further, in the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after sequentially outputting from the display scene 1 to the display scene 5, the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is up, By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or the production conditions are satisfied within the predetermined validity period and a specific production result appears, the teammate character and the sword A depiction of just making a meeting with will appear. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific performance result is a depiction of how the teammate character wins the enemy character as a result of such a sword battle, and the specific performance result within a predetermined effective period. It is desirable to display the result of the failure at the end of the time when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a battle with the sword.

  As described above, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-pressing manner (FIG. 273 (a)) and when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed in a long-pressing manner (FIG. 273 (b)), the specific sound accompanying the operation is intermittently output over a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule and progressed. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating a plurality of times is prompted to perform the operation with peace of mind. However, in practice, during the predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a multiple hitting operation in a single-press mode, and when such a continuous hitting operation is performed, 1 It is important for improving the game entertainment to let the player remember the feeling of operation in which the production reception is generated by one operation. However, if the operation feeling that the reception of an effect is generated by one operation at a time is completely reflected as an effect, a player who is good at multiple operations is more advantageous than a player who is not good at multiple operations. Since the production performance is as if it is, it is required to achieve both production elements (operation feeling, production fairness) having such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure an operational feeling that the reception of the production has been generated by one operation at a time, the operation is performed as an immediate operation with respect to the operation. Focus on the fact that “whether sound is generated (or changed) when operated” is a more important parameter than “whether display is generated (or changed)”. Each time the operation on 410 is performed in a single press mode, a specific sound corresponding to the production reception is output in accordance with the operation timing.

  For example, now, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner in a period of timing tx31 to tx32 in a predetermined effective period. Suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, every time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the detection is triggered by the detection of a new specific sound with respect to the previous specific sound (specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output in such a manner that the sound data is overwritten on a specific channel. As described above, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode, such output is performed while the specific sound is intermittently output a plurality of times. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the operation. It is possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound has been newly output and the production has been accepted at the timing at which is performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode or in the case of an operation by long press, the output of the specific sound of the previous output is completed to the end. The automatic time TY2 is digested before the time required for the time elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. This is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm for each fixed time (automated time TY2), whereas the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single press mode. When the operation timing by an irregular player is reached, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output. It is possible to make the player preferably remember the operational feeling that the production reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), whether or not the operation is continued (operation state) is periodically performed every time the operation button 410 is operated during the predetermined effective period. Thus, a process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has ended) is performed. In this respect, in the period of the timing tx31 to tx32 when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single-press mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of periodic monitoring of whether or not it is in (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended, and a predetermined length of time is set accordingly. A grace period TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the grace period TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace period TY1 is canceled. Thus, the operation button 410 is returned to a state in which processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period from timing tx31 to tx32, every time the operation button 410 is in an operation state or a non-operation state, a process for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in an operation state is performed. A state transition is performed rapidly between a state in which a grace period TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), after repeated striking operations for six times between timings tx31 to tx32, the tired operation is repeated for a plurality of times, and thereafter, repeated operations are repeated. It is assumed that the time required has become significantly longer. If a player who is not good at such multiple operations cannot perform a continuous hit operation multiple times after the timing tx32, the number of stage receptions is greater than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest by being reduced. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is generated each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state ends. As described above, the output process is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repeated operation is significantly increased, at least a grace period TY1 after the previous operation state is ended. If it is possible to perform repeated operations within a shorter period of time, it is possible to output a specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently so that the player feels as if fast repeated operations are being performed. It becomes like this.

  For example, when it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has ended as a result of periodic monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination A grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. From then on, although the time required for repeated operations will become significantly longer, a specific sound will be output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where there is no operation by the player By performing the processing, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output continuously and intermittently. However, these specific sounds are output as black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure under the situation where no production reception has occurred.

  In this respect, black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only during the grace period TY1 after the previous operation state ends. However, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (does not time up) based on the operation. Accordingly, at timing tx34, a white specific sound (the 10th specific sound) in the figure is output in response to the production reception being performed in the form of cutting off (suspending) the specific sound in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to a state in which processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated at timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the monitoring. Based on this determination, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is determined. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sound) in the figure is output again. When an operation by the player is finally performed at timing tx36 before time TY1 expires, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In this way, a white specific sound (15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

  As described above, even after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly increased, the repetitive operation is performed within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state ends. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound in the figure at the timing when the operation by the player is performed and the specific sound in the figure in the regular period when the operation by the player is not performed Are output, so that the player can remember the feeling as if a quick continuous hitting operation is being performed so that the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. Therefore, according to such an aspect relating to the output of the specific sound, it is possible to secure an operational feeling that an effect is received by one operation at a time, and a player who is not good at multiple operations. Even in such a case, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently by the output of the black specific sound in the non-operating state. , Production fairness) is expected to be compatible.

  However, even when the specific sound is output in such a manner, in the operation display pattern that plays a role of informing the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period, a plurality of times If a player who is good at operation and a player who is not good at multiple times of operation make a difference in the aspect of the progress of display contents, it will eventually be more difficult than a player who is not good at multiple times of operation. There may be a performance as if a player who is good at multiple operations is advantageous, and there is a concern about a decline in the game interest. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the display time pattern for the operation is not advanced step by step in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, display contents can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), as described above, after the timing tx32 in the predetermined effective period, it is assumed that the time required for the repetitive operation has significantly increased. However, until the set grace time TY1 expires, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again and the setting of the grace time TY1 is cancelled. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined effective period does not arrive.

  When the operation is performed in such a manner as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the display of the operation time display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. Thereafter, display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 as the operation-time display pattern are determined in advance regardless of the operation state even though the speed of the continuous hitting operation is greatly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed sequentially according to the scheduled schedule, and this makes it appear that the performance fairness is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations. Will be able to.

  However, even if the display contents as the display pattern at the time of operation are the same, the number of times that the presentation reception accompanying the operation is actually generated is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that you will be different from your favorite players. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested or more than a specific number of times, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. If there is a type of production that makes the production result appear, the player who is good at multiple operations is likely to make the specific production result appear more easily. The significance is kept. In other words, while maintaining the significance of such production, the fairness of production between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained in the production of sounds and displays. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest of a player who is not good at multiple operations by making it appear as if it is performed.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) in which the presentation is accepted when the operation by long press is performed, the aspect of the progress of the display pattern during operation is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which button deterioration is accelerated by performing a quick hitting operation too quickly.

  Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 275 (b) assumes a case where the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, within the predetermined effective period, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up is reached, and at the timing tx37 (specific end timing), the timing tx31 is reached. The dynamic display output (processing for sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends when in the output state is reached. Even if the specific sound in the output state is cut off at the timing tx37 (for example, “pico”), the process (such as the output interruption process or the process of interruption by overwriting with another sound) is performed. Even after the timing tx37 has arrived, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output so far appears as described above. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) when the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is If the operation of the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can feel the feeling that a fast repeated operation is being performed so that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), before the black specific sound (10th specific sound) output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the tenth specific sound output is interrupted twice, the white specific sound in the figure is generated twice, and then the black specific sound in the figure is output intermittently again. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. In the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), the specific sound is output intermittently in this way. On the other hand, in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily stopped at timing tx37. . Then, after that, it is apparent that the progress of the display content is started again from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx38 at which the white specific sound is output again.

  FIG. 276 shows a predetermined effective period during which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given in the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic hitting function) described in FIGS. 273 to 275 is installed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when operation is performed within this predetermined effective period (timing tx41-tx48), when the specific effect pattern which generate | occur | produces is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 276, at timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given occurs, and the player at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period Assuming that the operation is started, also in this production example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern at the time of operation), respectively. Processing to be started is performed.

  However, in this effect example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. Processing to be output can be executed.

  That is, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a specific sound output that is black in the drawing even under a situation in which no operation is performed on the operation button 410 and no effect is received. In this drawing, the black specific sound output is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the drawing that occurs at the timing when the production acceptance occurs (in this production example, the same mode) ) Is output. In addition, as described above, the display contents at the time of operation appearing on the game board side effect display device 1600 are advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation, as described above. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation by a long press or a plurality of operations are performed within a predetermined effective period, the player recognizes how much production reception has been generated by these operations. It can be said that the situation is difficult. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410 within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability ( For example, it is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status of such special sounds.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when there is a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the start of the predetermined effective period, two consecutive hit operations at timings tx42 and tx43, and from timing tx44, Each time a long press operation is performed, a total of nine presentations are received, and a specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated nine times (in the figure, 1 to 9th) ), The number of receptions of productions per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the start of the predetermined effective period, it takes a long time that the operation in the single operation mode cannot be said to be repeated, and the timing tx46 , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the reception of the production for two times occurs, and the specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice over time (in the figure, the tenth) , The eleventh white specific sound), the number of times the production reception is generated per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern at the time of operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by performing the black specific sound output described above. It is continuously output in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scene is merely switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these If you just check the output status, there will be a small number of production receptions per unit time. Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this regard, when the output state of a special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when a white specific sound output occurs in the figure, a relatively early period (timing) after the start of a predetermined effective period. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started. It is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to a certain extent which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest of a player who is not good at multiple operations will be suitably maintained. In this sense, a special sound can be generated when a specific sound output is generated, but is output based on an output condition that is different from the generation of the specific sound output. Even if the specific sound output occurs, it is required to output the special sound in a manner that does not necessarily occur.

  Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when an effect is received may be changed according to the number of effects received within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated.

  Moreover, in view of the fact that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time value from when the specific sound is output until it is muted, or a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to twice the “automation time TY2”. In addition, when a new special sound is output when the previous special sound is output, it is desirable that the previous special sound is cut off (interrupted) to output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effect can be enjoyed as when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation by a long press, the number of players performing the operation a plurality of times is reduced. There is a concern that the significance as an effect of requesting a plurality of operations will be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, the player's operation is long-pressed in the period after the player's operation is started at least at the timing tx42 in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). Among the state that is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and the state that is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48), Only when a specific display condition is satisfied, display of a specific image (specific display) is allowed.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform an operation as a mode of a single operation rather than an operation by pressing and holding at least. Performing a turning operation (such as repeated hits) can have a meaning in terms of performance, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this effect example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not necessary to operate as a single operation mode, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the difficulty of appearance of the specific image itself is increased, it is possible to operate multiple times (such as continuous hitting) without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple hitting) function every time a predetermined effective period occurs. ), It appears that it is challenging to display a specific image that is difficult to appear, and it can be operated multiple times without using the automatic repeated (automatic multiple operations) function. It is expected to promote understanding of the surroundings.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice as long as the “automated time TY2”) has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing at which the previous effect was received. In addition, a display of a specific image within a predetermined effective period (the specific display condition) is that a predetermined effect lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has passed is obtained as the “specific display condition” ( Specific display). In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the big hit is determined in the big hit determination (or the production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period (high expectation degree of the big hit is high) In the case of production status), it is possible to get a performance hit with a probability of 70%, whereas when a big hit is lost in the jackpot determination (or operation within a predetermined effective period) No matter how many times it is performed, in the production situation where the success display cannot appear (in the production situation where the big hit expectation degree is low), it is possible to obtain the production hit only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when a display of a specific image (specific display) appears within a predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation level that a jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. The above-mentioned “specific display condition” is not limited to this, and “a specific non-operation time (here,“ automated time TY2 ”without receiving a new production from the timing when the previous production was received) is generated. 2 times the time) ”and“ Achieving per-effects in the specified effect lottery ”is adopted as the“ specific display condition ”and when this is satisfied A display (specific display) of a specific image may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the types described above, the predetermined effect lottery mode is, for example, in an effect state where the success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined effective period (the effect state where the jackpot expectation is low). In some cases, a performance per win can be obtained with a probability of 0% (or the production lottery itself is not performed), but a success display cannot appear no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined effective period. When it is in a production situation where the degree of big hit expectation is low, an aspect in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined effective period. In this case, as the specific display, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined effective period ends without the success display appearing.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect is received when a specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is displayed at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on the condition that a state in which no operation is performed by the player (a state where a new production reception is not generated) is maintained. Yes.

  In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 276, at least the production reception of a specific number of times or more is required in order to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). The appearance condition is satisfied at timing tx47 when the eleventh presentation reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the success display to appear as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. The contents of the success display include the contents of the effect of the repeated portion in the operation display pattern (display scenes 3 to 5), such as destroying the enemy character that had been hit with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable to be related. Also, when a success display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is high in the big hit determination.

  In addition, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the eleventh presentation reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined effective period is ended at that time and a new presentation reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at the timing after the timing tx47, a white specific sound or special sound in the figure is not newly generated, and a specific display does not newly appear.

  FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 276. However, although the operation in the single operation mode by the player is at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it repeats taking a long time which cannot be said.

  As shown in FIG. 277, even if the operation in the mode of single operation by the player is repeated for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined effective period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously output intermittently, and the display pattern at the time of the operation is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such a production mode, even if the operation is performed only 4 times within a predetermined effective period, it is possible to create a production situation as if about 20 continuous hitting operations are performed. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a person who seriously performs the continuous hitting operation cannot understand the meaning of the continuous hitting operation and the game entertainment interest is lowered.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific performance result (successful display) within the predetermined effective period. When “EU” is the minimum number of production receptions required to appear, these numerical values are set so that the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx2” <EU] is satisfied. According to such a configuration, even when the operation is repeatedly performed at the last minute when the grace period TY1 elapses and the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, The number of production receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) that are required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success indication) from appearing. It is expected that the entertainment interests of those who are present will be suitably maintained. In order to obtain such an effect more reliably, the number of times of production reception (EU) required at least for causing a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period, Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up the numerical value.

  In this regard, in this production example, the number of production receptions (EU) required at the minimum to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”. Since it is “11 times” which is twice or more the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, a failure display appears due to an insufficient number of operations, so that it is an effect situation where it is not possible to recognize whether the big hit expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment allows the display of a specific image only when it is in a state where it is performed as a single operation mode and a specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this respect, in this production example, when the above-mentioned “specific non-operation time” required for displaying a specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship [“Tx1 / Tx3” <EU] is established. Each of these values is set to be In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause a specific display to appear every time an operation is performed within a predetermined effective period, the number of production receptions occurring within the predetermined effective period is within the predetermined effective period. The number of production receptions (EU) required at a minimum to make a specific production result (successful display) appear is reduced. In other words, in this case, a direct selection function for performing an attempt to make the specific display appear until the risk that the specific production result (success display) does not appear is committed, and the specific display is displayed. Since it is not possible to easily and repeatedly try to make it appear, it will be possible to improve the performance of the game, as the performance will be enhanced when the attempt is made. It becomes like this.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined effective period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the failure display to appear as the operation display pattern is performed. As the contents of this failure display, the contents of the repetitive portion in the operation display pattern (display scenes 3 to 5), such as defeating the enemy character who had been in a battle with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5, and It is desirable to be related. Also, when a failure display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is low in the big hit determination.

  On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined effective period is ended regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. It is designed not to be cut off (interrupted) as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success or failure indication is displayed, and then the success or failure indication will be displayed. The relationship is set so as to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, a grace time TY1 is set after the player's operation state ends, and the black specific sound output in the non-operation state is output until the grace time TY1 elapses. Although it is performed at least four times or more, the number of “specific sound output without black in the drawing” that occurs when in the non-operating state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having a length at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the black specific sound output in the non-operating state is at least twice or more. Since this occurs, it is possible to make it feel as if the continuous hitting operation (multiple operations) was continued even in the non-operating state.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 1 and 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character just makes a battle with the enemy character with the sword appears. Therefore, specific display in which the big hit expectation degree is shown in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2 may be performed. According to such a configuration, if there is a case where a specific display is overlooked, it becomes impossible to reconfirm unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace period TY1 elapses. However, it is possible to provide an effect of selecting between the disadvantage of being wasted in vain and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Further, in this embodiment, continuous operation in a manner in which the production reception is generated at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the production reception is performed when an operation by a long press is performed is permitted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an operation effect with a high degree of freedom by the player (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous hitting operation is performed, the progress of the display scene in the operation display pattern is the same as when the operation by long press is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform a high-speed continuous hitting operation, which is expected to suppress the excessive operation on the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of breakage and the like. Will come to be.

  In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing an effect that requires at least a specific number of effects to be received, only an operation by long pressing is performed within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number so that the reception of the production more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specified number of times so that the reception of the production more than the specified number of times is generated only by performing an operation by long pressing over a half of the predetermined effective period.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, a time (specific non-operation time) that is twice the “automated time TY2” has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect was received. In this case, the display of the specific image (specific display) is made to appear, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as the specific non-operation time, any time value within a range that is at least twice the “automated time TY2” and that has the grace time TY1 as the upper limit (below the grace time TY1) is used. In the non-operating state, in the state where the specific sound with blackening in the figure is output more than once (the state that the continuous hitting operation is performed in the non-operating state) It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) has appeared based on the fact that the number of pseudo operations in the non-operating state (the number of outputs of a specific sound without black in the figure) has reached a predetermined value. Is possible.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, the description has been given of the gaming machine in which the plate unit 320 includes the effect operation unit 400 that can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 278 to 329, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's willingness to operate will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 278 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 279 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same components as those described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 houses a sword part 5010 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, a sword part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 that can be used is configured.

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword direction and the sword insertion direction. The sword part 5010 is normally in a state where the sword part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020, and the sword part 5011 is in a sword state where the sword part 5011 can be visually recognized by the player in the sword production. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword state can function as an operation means for receiving a sword insertion operation by the player and returning to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, an opportunity to execute a sword effect with the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting presence or absence of a sword preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of an extracted book effect.

  The production pattern described here includes a pattern in which a sword book production is performed after execution of a sword preparation transition production, a pattern in which a sword book production is performed without performing a sword preparation migration production in advance, and a sword preparation migration production in advance. There is a pattern in which no sword book production is performed, there is a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no pattern in which the sword book production is performed. Two patterns of the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is selected in accordance with the type of variation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, multiple types of fluctuation patterns are classified into big hit fluctuation patterns for big hits, small hit fluctuation patterns for small hits, and extraordinary fluctuation patterns for outliers. The pattern is set so that the probability of executing the sword preparation transition effect is higher as the pattern is higher. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% when the variation pattern for big hit variation is executed, with a probability of 30% when the variation pattern for small hit variation, and when the variation pattern for outlier variation is used. It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the reach effect is performed or not. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (B), execution / non-execution of the sword book effect is selected in accordance with the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword preparation transition effect. When the sword preparation transition effect is executed even if the types of variation patterns are the same, the probability that the sword main effect will be executed is set higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, the variation pattern that is advantageous to the player is set such that the probability that the extraction effect will be executed increases. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword preparation effect is executed is higher when the sword preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for deviation variation, the probability that the sword book effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed with the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of the big hit variation pattern, the sword book effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the sword book effect is executed, the sword preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the sword book effect in the form with an aura member will be higher as the variation pattern is advantageous for the player. It is set to become. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the extracted sword effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by sword decoration body movement)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect (the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself that can accept a sword insertion operation by a player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281). 282), an aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with a member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integral decorative body (FIGS. 283 and 284).

  FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself. The sword state, (C) the second sword state. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view of the blade portion 5011 extracted from the sheath portion 5020 for easy understanding of the operation of the aura member 5030.

  The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 281 (B), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword preparation transition effect is visible from the player with only the portion of the blade 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011 being removed from the sheath part 5020. Becomes the first sword state. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword operation in the sword book production is a second sword that is largely visible from the player by further removing the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020. It becomes a state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state can function as an operation means that can accept a sword-paying operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade part 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade operation of the blade part 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the blade portion 5011 is in the first sword state (FIG. 281 (B)) from the sword state (FIG. 281 (A)). The movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 282 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)) inside the portion 5020, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in a changing process in which the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 281 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the maximum movement is performed, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on the blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. When these LEDs emit light, the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) is changed from the sword insertion state to the first extraction state, the closed state is opened, and the blade portion 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. Although the example in which the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state after being deformed is shown, it is not limited thereto. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extracted state functions as an operation means (not limited to the mode of maximum operation, but also includes the mode of stopping the operation on the way) ).

  FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. (A) State of blade insertion, (B) First blade state, (C) The second sword state is shown. FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 283 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) is the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) described above. While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword state (the state of the sword delivery). Operates according to the first sword state (second sword state). Accordingly, the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) can be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to be seen as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (fully accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 284 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided with a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the upper end of the aura member 5035 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully accommodated state. A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b which are provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b which mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) such that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both the pinions are engaged. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 284 (B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade portion 5011 to form the second sword state. The aura member 5035 at this time is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, the blade part is maintained while maintaining a relative positional relationship in accordance with the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword insertion state ⇔ first sword state ⇔ second sword state) with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035. Although the example which unites 5011 was shown, it is not restricted to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state. Final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (not only the full appearance state that is fully operated, but the midway appearance that is stopped in the middle) It is only necessary to be able to include a state with an aura member in a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the first sword insertion state from the sword insertion state.

(Example of sword production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIG. 285 to FIG. 290, a sword effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decorative body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the effect pattern ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) in which the extraction effect is not executed) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect pattern ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the extracted sword effect is executed. 285 to 289 are effect transition diagrams of the sword effect. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. A reach state is formed (FIG. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the reach decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and an effect image suggesting execution of a sword effect (movability of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the center display area. Specifically, after an image (Fig. 285 (X2)) where two samurai face each other and start living, an image (Fig. 285 (X2)) where one samurai holds the handle and holds the sword in the sheath (Fig. 285 (X3)) is displayed. Here, an effect suggesting that the sword ornament 5001 is movable is performed by an image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword state (FIG. 281 (A)).

  Next, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword preparation transition effect is displayed as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5). When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face of the samurai who holds the sword in the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eye is enlarged and displayed as time passes. At this time, the sword decoration transition effect is performed by the sword ornament 5001 changing from the sword state to the first sword state. Note that when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the sword book effect is more likely to be executed thereafter than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that shows the expectation that the sword main effect will be executed by the movement of the sword ornament 5001. In the sword preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first sword state up and down, the player may be expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second sword state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decorative body 5001 may be kept in the state where the sword is placed and the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) described above may be continuously displayed.

  Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword production effect is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword preparation transition effect (FIG. 282 (A )) To the open state (FIG. 282B), the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword state is visible to the player from the hand of the blade part 5011 to the part of the blade 5011a, but the aura member 5030 is the Since it is provided below, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 operates maximum. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means that can accept a sword operation by the player, and at the same time, has an expectation depending on the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  Then, after the sword preparation transition effect is finished, if the sword book effect is not executed by a lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the central decorative symbol is displayed on the left decorative symbol at the center of the screen along with the image that the samurai gives up at the timing when the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped. In addition, the display is stopped and displayed in a stop mode different from that of the right-side decorative design, that is, a shift mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the first extracted state to the stowed state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the stowed state. That is, the reach effect is terminated without the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operation means.

  On the other hand, when the extracted sword effect is executed, after the sword preparation transition effect is finished, an image in which the sword cutting is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second extracted sword. It becomes a state. Here, in the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state, the form with the aura member that is visible in the form in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 and the aura member 5030 are not visible. There is provided an aura memberless form in which the blade part 5011 that is not deformed can be visually recognized.

  First, with reference to FIG. 287 and FIG. 288, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 that is in the second extraction state is a form without an aura member will be described. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 287 (A1)), an image of cutting out the sword that was held and cutting the opponent's samurai is displayed (FIG. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the blade part 5011 becomes visible to the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is inserted into the sword by the player, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 from which the player jumps out of the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the blade operation of the sword ornament 5001 is generated. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that prompts a sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same form as the second sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with a message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 287 ( A3)). In the sword ornament 5001, the LED on the internal LED board 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. In addition, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of rai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in front of the previous rai cut scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). (Refer to FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

  When the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation valid period and performs a sword storage operation in which the blade part 5011 is placed in the sheath 5020, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the sword storage state, A post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of an advantageous result, and the effect ends with a symbol type winning notification (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the image of the opponent's samurai is defeated and the result is that the Iai is settled, and the central decorative symbol is the same as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol at the center of the screen, that is, the big hit (in this case, “7”) It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of place, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 288 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that is variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the central decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol at the center of the screen, together with an image where the opponent's samurai is not defeated at the timing of the stop display and the conclusion of the Iai cannot be settled, that is, the off mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 288 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is in the form with an aura member will be described. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 289 (B1)), an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1) and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Becomes visible from the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword state to the second sword state, but this is not restrictive. First, after the blade portion 5011 is in the second extraction state so that only the blade portion 5011 is visible to the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form the form with the aura member. The sword ornament 5001 only needs to be in the form with the aura member in the second sword state before the operation effective period is started. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second extraction state in which the player can perform a sword operation, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern of inducing an erroneous operation by the player. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword state to the second sword state is performed as in this example, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. It is preferable that the operation effective period is started immediately.

  In addition, the images in FIGS. 289 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 287 (A1) and (A2) described above. I am trying not to judge whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decorative body 5001, the player can grasp whether the form is with the aura member or without the aura member. Thereby, it is possible to focus attention on the sword decorative body 5001 before the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without confusion. Can do. Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images that are similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword ornament 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye color and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player is an effective operation valid period, the sword image in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the form with the aura member same as the sword decorative body 5001. It is displayed (FIG. 289 (B3)). The subsequent effects are the same as in FIG. 288 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed flashy compared to the form without the aura member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation effective period in the sword production effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the gait effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the extracted state (time t1). At this time, when the production pattern with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state. However, even if the aura member 5030 is in the open state, the aura member 5030 is played in the game. It is provided so that it cannot be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword state, the player knows whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 further changes to the second sword state, and if it changes, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. I can't. However, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the sword book effect is executed and the possibility of becoming an aura member-attached form increases, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced. In addition, even if the extracted sword effect is not executed, the sword movement suggesting effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state can be captured.

  When the sword preparation transition effect is finished, the sword book effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2). Thereafter, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of living together effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when a sword insertion operation by the player is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), a post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 returns from the second sword state to the sword state by the sword insertion operation by the player. Then, the preset operation effective period ends and the reach state ends (time t4), and a series of living effects is ended by notifying the symbol type in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Time t5). The operation valid period may be ended by detecting an operation by the player, as indicated by a one-dot chain line in the figure. When no operation is detected during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword state to the sword storage state as the operation effective period ends.

  Here, a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state until the operation effective period starts (time t3-t2) is a mode (aura member) in which the player is in the second sword state of the sword decorative body 5001. As an aspect confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not it is an attached form, a light emission aspect, etc., a period longer than the operation effective period (time t4-t3) is secured. That is, even when the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player is in the operation position (second sword state) that functions as the operation means, the operation reception is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. Thereby, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and inflates the expectation in the subsequent deployment (for example, in the case of the form with the aura member, the expectation increases), or the mental preparation As soon as the second sword state is reached, the operation validity period starts and the aspect of the operation means cannot be confirmed, and it is not possible to confirm the aspect of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

  Further, the sword effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of living effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a movable effect (time t0 to t3) as a movable body of the sword decorative body 5001 is obtained. The operation effects (time t3 to t4) as the operation means are related effects. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and the variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decorative body 5001, thereby suppressing a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform performance by the conventional operation means. Can do.

  In addition, although the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011) itself and the aura member 5030 deform | transforms the sword part 5011 in the example of the above-mentioned production, the aura member 5035 is the sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided with a frame side member (aura member 5035) and becomes an integral decorative body.

  In this way, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means that can change (deform or combine) the aspects of members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the general decorative movable body. is doing. Then, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword state, the first sword state, the second sword state, the form without the aura member and the form with the aura member) It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the expectation that the change display has an advantageous result for the player due to the change of the aspect of the sword decorative body, and the player's interest in the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Further, before the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the degree of expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state. is doing. Moreover, the expectation degree is suggested by making the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first extraction state to the second extraction state. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first sword state and the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword state to the second sword state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, the expectation is high when the operation position is moved after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance. In this mode, there is a concern that an erroneous operation that the player operates even though the operation means is not yet in an operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the above-described erroneous operation can be prevented.

  In the first sword state described above, only the blade 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-sword state. At this time, the amount of extraction in the first extraction state is set to be less than the maximum extraction amount in the second extraction state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a fully appearing state when it enters the second extraction state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first sword state, the player has a higher expectation at the time of the first sword state, Increase interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first extraction state, it is a form with an aura member (high degree of expectation) at the stage of the extraction preparation transition effect. Since the player can grasp and expect great expectations, the disappointment when the sword book production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the player's feelings are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword book effect, and an effect with a high gaming interest can be provided.

(Variation 1-Extraction using a control button)
In the following, referring to FIG. 291 to FIG. 294, the sword effect is executed in the reach effect, and the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. FIGS. 291 to 293 are examples of stage transition diagrams of the sword effect of the first modification. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned sword effect (FIGS. 285 to 290) will be omitted as appropriate.

  Here, an effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed and no sword book effect is performed, and after the sword preparation transition effect is executed About the production pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in the drawing, the screen transition of the production display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 are performed. The transition and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

  When the reach effect is started, the gait effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and the effect suggesting the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image with the effect added. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation effective period are performed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed (FIG. 291 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is lighted, and the image display operation button is also displayed in the same light emission manner, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. Note that the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  When the sword preparation transition effect and the sword main effect are not performed and the result is a losing result, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the deviation (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are not changed.

  In addition, when the sword main effect is performed after the sword preparation transition effect is executed, when the player presses the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the first sword state. A drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIG. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white character “Tengu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 292 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which a friendly samurai is about to touch the sword. (FIG. 292 (F2)). Next, a sword book effect in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) is started (FIG. 292 (F3), FIGS. 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) by the sword main effect, immediately before FIG. 292 (F2) and immediately after 293 (G1), the image of lightning running on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 292 (F3) is interrupted and displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 (whether it has an aura member or not) ) Along with the strength of the lightning, the expectation of winning (winning) in the Iai is shown.

  The subsequent effects are the same as those shown in FIGS. 287 (A2), (A3), and 288 described above. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is attached to the player. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the above operation, an operation effective period during which the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is detected effectively is generated. Then, the player is prompted to perform a sword insertion operation within the effective period of operation (FIG. 293 (G2)), and the player is notified of the symbol type (success, miss) by the sword operation by the player (FIG. 293 (G3) or ( G4)).

  Next, with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword ornament 5001 will be described. Modification 1 is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts a state change of the sword ornament 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect is urged to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts to change state, and first changes from the sword storage state to the first sword extraction state. Here, in the first extraction state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword ornament 5001 is operated to operate as the operation means. When an effective period occurs, an operation promotion effect is made to prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( At time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). Note that if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (the first form) You may make it deform | transform and change a state at a stretch in the form with the aura member of a double sword state. In addition, the state change timing from the first sword state to the second sword state changes according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, changes to the second sword state after the first sword state and a certain time has elapsed. It may be. In addition, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword ornament 5001 is second when the operation effective period ends. The sword is returned to the sword state.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 by the player. The extraction operation start timing of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the sword operation start timing of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword ornament 5001 (time tx). In this way, the movement of the sword ornament 5001 is reversed (slashing operation and sword operation) depending on which operation means of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is to be operated. Periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  Thus, in the first modification, the state change of the sword ornament 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operating means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the form with the aura member by deforming and changing the state of the sword decorative body 5001) To the second sword state). Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's willingness to operate can be increased.

  Further, in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIGS. 292 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 293 (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, so that the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased and the interest of the game can be increased.

(Modification 2-Stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299, based on the first modification, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 295 to FIG. 299 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword effect of the second modification. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the same effect as the above-mentioned.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 steps. The aura level 0 indicates a complete accommodation state (FIG. 284 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. The aura level 3 is a fully appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the maximum extent by the player as a result of the aura member 5035 being combined with the blade portion 5011 in the second extracted state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the state of the sword. 284 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

  Here, there are no production patterns (Z1 to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the drawing) in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no sword preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword book effect is performed, and an effect pattern (in the drawing) in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes a final form (a form with an aura member in a complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. Screen pattern of the effect display device 1600, state transition of the operation button 410, and sword ornament for the effect patterns to be performed ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure) Explain the operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described first modification, the final form of the sword ornament 5001 (the form during operation) is determined by operating the operation button 410 once. A step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword book effect is not performed, that is, in the effect pattern in which the state of the sword decorative body 5001 does not change even if the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → The same effect transition as in FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2) is followed (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

  Further, although there is no sword preparation transition effect, the sword main effect is performed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in a final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member by one operation of the operation button 410. ), The operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effects as in FIGS. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) in the first modification (FIG. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state, it completely appears. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 296 (I1)). Although the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 of the first modified example is configured by the aura member 5030 and the modified example 2 is configured by the aura member 5035, other effects are the same as those of the first modified example. 292 (F1) (F2) → The same transition as in FIG. 293 is followed (FIGS. 296 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  Further, although there is no sword preparation transition effect, the sword book effect is performed, and in the effect pattern in which the operation of the operation button 410 is requested a plurality of times and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the operation of the first operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is followed (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword ornament 5001 after the first operation is in the second sword state from the sword state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) that is not visually recognized by the player. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

  Next, an operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 297 (J2)). And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the next production will be performed according to the preset aura levels 0-3.

  First, when the set aura level is “0” (that is, in the case of no aura member configuration), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the staged operation effect is terminated (the operation button 410 is not requested thereafter), and notification is returned that the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extracted state is returned. An image (here, white letters “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 297 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 has no aura member, and follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. 293 in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) corresponding to the aura level 0. (FIG. 297 (J4) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is changed from the fully accommodated state to the 1/3 appearance state. Become. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in green indicating the aura level 1.

  Next, an operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 remains in the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user of returning to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, the message “Izai” on the blackout screen) (White character) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the state of 1/3 appearance, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 292 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 298 (K3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect decorated with light emission is performed (FIG. 298 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red indicating the aura level 2. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (After this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user of returning to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, “Izai” on the blackout screen) ) And an image indicating the aura level are displayed (FIG. 299 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the appearance of 2/3, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 292 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “3”, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating an aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (after that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state is obtained. An image notifying that the user is returning (here, white characters “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen, and an image indicating the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to that in FIG. 292 (F2) in the first modification described above in FIG. The effect transition is traced (FIG. 299 (L3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In the above, the range of visibility from the player is increased by changing the degree of uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 each time the aura level is raised, but this increases the appearance level. Not limited to. Even if the aura level is increased, the aura level is determined without increasing the appearance level of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white character “Izai” is displayed on the blackout screen), the determined aura level You may make it perform the stock-type unification of uniting the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 at a stretch so that it may become the appearance degree according to a level. Further, the object whose degree of appearance is increased in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, and may be the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011). For example, the state of the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first sword state to the second sword state.

  As described above, in the second modification, since the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 that functions as the operation means is in a movable state, it is surprisingly novel. Operation effects can be provided, and the entertainment of the game can be further enhanced as compared with the first modification. In addition, by giving the player multiple operational opportunities and developing the production in stages, it is possible to impress the player with great involvement in the production and to prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is reported so as to be recognizable even in the subsequent effects, the player can feel the aftereffect of the operation effects.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the sword decorative body 5001 described above. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state is provided on the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the front center.

  When the changing pattern forms the reach state, the display of the decoration display device 1600 displays the three decorative symbols in the reach state (FIG. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the bag is stopped in a state (initial state) that is visible from the player above the display area. Yes. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in a sword state.

  In the princess reach production, after the image of the princess heading in the back of the kite is displayed (FIG. 300 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 starts when the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the player is prompted to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also good. When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword extraction operation by the player refers to an operation in which the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in a sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, a sword operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel an operation different from his / her own sword operation through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012) moving up and down. That's fine. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even when the player removes his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) can be reduced, and failure or breakage of the movable body can be prevented. Can do.

  In the sword operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but according to the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword operation. You may do it.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial State) and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 301 (C2) is notified, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword state at the timing when the detection notification operation ends. You may do it.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is centered on the front surface overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). The drop display is movable so that only the hold display area is visible (all fall state) (FIG. 301 (D1)), and then the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. 5001 is maintaining the second extraction state (FIG. 301 (D2)) Note that a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time may be provided. The shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterwards may be used to suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (such as the winning expectation and the game profit when winning)

  Then, after the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword state by the player's sword operation, that is, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword state is displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the center in the front left / right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the center position on the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the total fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has good visibility is displayed. The image of the princess who is surprised when the bag is removed is displayed (FIG. 302 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 returns to the position where the original sword operation has been performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current variable display is a hit, the hit with the smiling princess is notified. An image is displayed (FIGS. 302 (E1) and (E2)), and an image for notifying the disagreement is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it comes off (FIGS. 302 (F1) and (F2)).

  When a player's sword operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the movable effect that the sword ornament 5001 moves to the center in the front left / right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. When the player cannot move because the player is holding it, an announcement or display such as “Please release the sword” is performed. Even if the player does not stop holding the sword decorative body 5001, the performance itself proceeds. However, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player at the movable motion timing in the horizontal direction of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 301 (D3)). When held in the performed position, it causes a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 has been moved in the left-right direction, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) have progressed. Since it is comprised so that game progress may not stagnate. Note that the sword ornament 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword ornament 5001, or is configured not to perform the movable effect. May be.

  As described above, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword decoration operation (vertical movement) of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operation position) by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved in the left direction). That is, based on the sword operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword operation has been performed, increasing the player's operation value and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means can be operated in a stepwise manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right after operation) depending on the player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  The left and right movable effects of the sword decorative body 5001 are effect display for the purpose of performing an effect that is integrated with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decorative body 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, a left-right direction movable effect that is displaced to the left (left end of the frame) may be performed. In addition, since the player's operation of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an upward / downward motion (a sword operation for pulling the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 that is performed after the operation is based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 operates in a direction (left and right direction as in this example) different from the operation direction (in this case, the vertical direction) at the time of the player's operation.

  In addition, when a player's sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player accurately determines the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period so that the player can visually confirm, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent movable performance of the sword ornament 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, when the movable effect cannot be executed by contact with the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation effective period. Even after the operation means has been detected and notified, even contact is prohibited, so that the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305. 303 to 305 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 that is used in many ways. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern (A (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that a variation being executed is a big hit and an operation of the operation button 410 are performed. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In this reach effect, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303 (A)), the operation effective period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is first. An operation promotion effect is started to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 303 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image suggesting the big hit expectation is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 304 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation (FIG. 304 (N2)), the display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character that changes the held display may be displayed.

  Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the player presses the operation button 410, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 303 (M1) in which an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting a sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, a message of the title “Chance to sword” and the operation explanation “Thank you for putting the sword”) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time elapses after entering the second sword state and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

  In a case where the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 305 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decoration pattern stop state “767” of the decorative symbol) for notifying the deviation is displayed (FIG. 305 (M6)).

  As described above, the pressing operation of the operation button 410 enables various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effects of the other operation means (sword ornament 5001). The subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of operating. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and the decrease in the willingness to operate and the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

  Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword operation) are different in the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001). The player is requested based on the above operation (the pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest that is a concern due to the monotonous operation instead of being reflected.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword ornament 5001 rather than the operation button 410 having a lower expectation than the first sword ornament 5001. Is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310. 306 to 310 are diagrams for explaining screen transition of the effect display device 1600, state transition of the operation button 410, and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not move based on the pressing operation, and is displayed in a deviating manner, the display is re-varied from the deviating manner and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1)-(P4) in the figure → R when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given or R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In this case, when the display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306A), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , The message “Move the movable body with a single button stroke” is displayed (FIG. 306 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. The prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 306 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one stroke (one time) but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation effective period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do it. Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes an operation target later, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed in state from the sword storage state to the second sword extraction state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) moves and is a big hit, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is completely dropped from the initial state. Is moved so as to become (FIG. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative symbol of the decorative symbol) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is released. Stop mode “777” and “Superb” message) are displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not move, if the player presses the operation button 410, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is stopped only by being stopped. Not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern with a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a swinging manner in the center of the screen (FIG. 308 (P1)). The decorative design is developed into a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in a deviating manner ("767") or a revived pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a revival start image (says “Madaja”) indicating that the variability display has not yet ended from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the off-state in FIG. 308 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 308 (P3)), the decorative symbol is again reached and reduced in the upper right corner of the screen, and either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated at the center of the screen. An operation effective suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a friendly samurai) is displayed (FIG. 308 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed eyes of the samurai are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). Thereby, the player raises a sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the set production pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001. (Samurai character) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is an operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern for which the sword ornament 5001 is an operation target.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmed image) in which sweat is blotted on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 309 (R1)). The operation of the operation button 410 is started and the operation button 410 is pressed while the operation button 410 is light-decorated while the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) continues to move in small increments. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, if the operation button 410 is operated the required number of times, it is no longer decorated with light emission.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player presses the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbols displayed at the upper right of the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), at this time, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the decoration symbol. Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is restored from the all-dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is displayed on the screen. An image for notifying the jackpot is displayed at the center (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) (FIG. 309 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display is out of order, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (FIG. 309 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword decorative body) in which the samurai who has closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes. (Determined image) is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second extraction state of the form with the aura member (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective based on the image of the display area. At this time, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, etc. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments, when the predetermined period of time elapses after the second sword is drawn and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 309 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 310 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of order, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 309 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

  As described above, the expectation level is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) that is executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. Therefore, the expectation level is more powerful than the expectation level suggestion based on the image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is not dropped based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is again given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest that is concerned about the monotonous operation effect without being displayed instead.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned FIGS. 300 to 310, three examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 are given, but various effect modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects and to further enhance the game entertainment.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 325, a pseudo continuous effect using the sword decorative body 5001 whose form is changed in stages according to the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (revariation) will be described. Pseudo-continuous production is an effect that temporarily changes the display of decorative symbols and re-variates them, and is performed in response to pseudo-continuous variation along with pseudo-continuous variation in which temporary suspension and re-variation are repeated once or multiple times. Etc. Here, the above-described temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, a pseudo-continuous effect of an effect pattern that can be selected by lottery of effect contents by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword ornament)
First, with reference to FIG. 311, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example is demonstrated. The form of the sword decorative body 5001 up to the above has been provided with two types, the form with the aura member and the form without the aura member, but here, the form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle part 5012. Are provided.

  FIG. 311 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword ornament 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decorative body 5001 here is provided in a two-stage form change by deformation of the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3. It has an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, and its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction as in the aura member 5030 described above. 311 (A) to 3 (D) are diagrams showing types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword storage state, and sequentially show the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. The sword decorative body 5001 takes any one of the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form according to the production.

  As shown in FIG. 311 (A), the stage 0 configuration is a configuration in a normal state similar to the above-described FIG. 281 (A) and FIG. 283 (A), and no operation is required for any of the constituent members. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 311 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath part 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 spreads and moves from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 311 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here can change the form without causing the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the second extracted state. Furthermore, since the sword portion 5010 capable of receiving an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can do.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 312 to FIG. 325, an example of the effect transition will be described for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 320 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (A), the main control board 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. The pseudo continuous effect is performed when any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo-continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weakness) corresponding to the six types of variation patterns, respectively. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is a sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), The sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, and the pseudo resurrection LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Selected.

  In the production pattern, the number of continuations (1 to 3 times) of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation), the presence / absence of operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the operation opportunity are given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is set (see FIG. 320B). The production pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuations of pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) 1 to 3 times. Further, “weak” and “strong” correspond to the drop position (semi-drop, full-fall) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (strap). In addition, the “pseudo sword LV1” gives a selection operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), and continues selection of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) by selecting the player not to operate. Indicates that the performance can be obtained. The “pseudo resurrection sword LV1” follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern that gives the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo ream fluctuation (re-variation). This indicates that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is again performed after the end of the fall effect of the special decorative member SDY (a glimpse) based on the first operation opportunity of the variation. The details of the contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) increases, that is, as the shape change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decorative member SDY The lower the fall position of the object), the higher the expectation degree is set. However, when the fall position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) is a half fall, the number of times of continuous continuous fluctuation (revariation) is 1 It is set to have the same degree of expectation as the case where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped all the time with a small production pattern. Specifically, the expected number of times of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-falling sword LV1 performance pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the total falling sword Expectation level of LV1 strong performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 times, expectation degree of semi-falling sword LV2 weak performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 The expectation level of the sword LV2 strong performance pattern for the first and last drop is 50%, the expectation level of the sword LV3 weak performance pattern for the half-fall sword LV3 is 3% The expectation of the sword LV3 strong performance pattern of 3 times of fluctuation) and the total fall of the sword LV3 is set to be 65%. In addition, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation varies depending on the selected variation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the degree of expectation is set higher as the variation pattern has a higher expectation level. The expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 weak variation pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53%, respectively, when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern, respectively. It becomes. In addition, the expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern is 47% and 74% when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 strong variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, respectively. Further, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expectation degree of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  In the following, the pseudo-continuous effects of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 312 to 319 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating an example of effect transition of pseudo-continuous effects common to all effect patterns. FIG. 313 to FIG. 315 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects regarding whether or not an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given while pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is being performed. FIG. 316 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of the post-operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns (the effect of dropping the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)). is there. FIG. 317 and FIG. 318 are diagrams showing an example of effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. FIG. 321 to FIG. 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword ornament 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. 321 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). 322 is a sword LV2 weak performance pattern (sword LV2 strong performance pattern), FIG. 323 is a sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern), and FIG. 324 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern). FIG. 325 shows a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of an effect transition in case a pseudo | simulation continuous effect is performed in the effect before a variable display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 312 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the heel is visible from the player above the display area (initial state) ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where the sword is in the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and 3 (C), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect content notification “100 chances if you can defeat the body” message, Samurai Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-continuous production is started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a quasi-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are changed again for the player. Inform you. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A sword image showing in advance the form (stage 1 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in FIG. Thus, since the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) are notified at the time of temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) starts, the player Can grasp and understand which stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation).

  When the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started, as shown in FIG. 312 (E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of FIG. 312 (D) described above. In addition, the pseudo continuous sword pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so as to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the change of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The shape change of the sword decorative body 5001 at this time is the timing at which the player's line of sight moves to the sword decorative body 5001 from the effect display in which pseudo variation (revariation) is started and moved toward the sword decorative body 5001 That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). Note that the shape change timing of the sword ornament 5001 may be before the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). For example, the sword ornament 5001 may be displayed together with the display of the pseudo-continuous sword at the time of FIG. Alternatively, pseudo continuous variation (revariation) may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state while being enlarged and displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is the second sword decoration sword decoration body 5001 that is enabled to be operated by the player being used as an operating means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating a determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. Subsequent effects include a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is effective in operation (an effect pattern with “LV1” in the name) and a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is not effective in operation (name). To “LV2” or “LV3”). Below, an example of an effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak production pattern / Sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decorative body 5001 effective as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of the effect transition in this case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (G ), An operation confirmation image (image with a samurai eye open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for requesting an aggressive operation is given to the player is displayed (FIG. 313 (T2)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, an expectation notification effect by a fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) is performed according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, when the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. ) Is moved from the initial state to the fall state. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword insertion state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is returned from the completely dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (B). An expected degree notification image (“100 body defeated!”) For notifying the expected degree of the variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the total fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the below-described semi-fall state. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Here, the expectation degree notification image is displayed, so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Further, when the set production pattern is a “weak” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a semi-falling state. The semi-dropped state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps with the upper half region of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. . Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword insertion state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (B). An expected degree notification image (“50 body defeated!”) For notifying the expected degree of variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Similarly to the “strong” performance pattern, the expectation notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  If no sword operation by the player is detected within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern or a “weak” production pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has ended without the effect of dropping the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation effective period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  When the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is finished, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), the reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. The Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. Thus, by operating when the sword decorative body 5001 is required to be delivered, the player can perform the reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object). I can greet you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have a different expectation every time, so that the player's willingness to operate is suppressed, and further, the decline in the gaming interest in uniform production is suppressed can do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 321, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the first stage is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an opportunity to operate. When the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. When there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the player's thrilling feeling and allowing the player to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern / Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not provided at the first pseudo-variation (revariation) operation opportunity provision timing. After tracing the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G), no operation opportunity is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggesting image shown in FIG. 312 (G). A continuation image indicating that the samurai's eyes are closed is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second extraction state is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols are changed again (FIG. 313 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a sword image that indicates in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change). Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the time of temporary stop display just before the second quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of quasi-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  When the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is cracked left and right and the first decorative part 5012a is visible (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 313 (S4)). In addition, the form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing powerful movements and attracting the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extracted state (stage 2 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing a result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

  Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. FIG. 314 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for requesting an aggressive operation is given to the player is displayed (FIG. 314 (V3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 2 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 314 (V4)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation notification effect is performed by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. In addition, when no sword operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 does not depend on whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation effective period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 322, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV2 weak production pattern and the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. In the period T2 during which the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 2 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. And when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword decorative body reaches the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and the operation is suggested by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak production pattern / Sword LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 314 and FIG. 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV3 weak production pattern or the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the sword decoration body is provided at the operation timing of the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) shown in FIG. 314 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1), the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuation image (image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed, and the second extraction state is displayed. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 314 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 314 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third quasi-continuous variation (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo-ream sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. The sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of temporary stop display just before the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and the production level (number of pseudo continuous variations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  Then, when the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 314 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display is applied to the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012a so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 314 (V8)). It should be noted that the shape change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set simultaneously. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed every time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and may be changed in a plurality of stages collectively when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing powerful movements and attracting the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing a result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

  Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. FIG. 315 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for the player to request an active operation is given is displayed (FIG. 315 (X3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 3 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 315 (X4)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation notification effect is performed by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. If the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). (See FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation effective period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 323, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed and the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) occur. In the period T2 in which the sword ornament 5001 is not given an opportunity to operate, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) is performed. Give the operator an opportunity to operate. And when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword decorative body reaches the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and the operation is suggested by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword decorative body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed into the second sword state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo-sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo-sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 317 and FIG. 318, the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), but the pseudo continuous change is made by selecting that the player does not operate. An effect transition example in the case where a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire continuation (level change effect) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given at the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) operation opportunity grant timing. . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for requesting the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) to FIG. 313 (T1), the operation area shown in FIG. 313 (T1) is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation selection image (a message “Opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to perform an operation from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z1 )). Then, the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect that prompts the user to select the sword ornament operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation valid period are shown together with a message “Please select whether you want to place the sword”. An image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern, the subsequent production transition varies greatly.

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 316) as the basic effect pattern sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is followed.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”) When the operation effective period during which the sword is performed ends, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the second sword state in the first stage to the initial sword state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Is it an opportunity?”) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (glare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!” Indicating that the pseudo decoration variation (re-variation) has ended without the effect of dropping the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). When the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is completed, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the operation is detected in the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern) of the basic performance pattern as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 316 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3) is displayed in a normal manner with a decorative pattern (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode at the same timing as the timing predetermined in the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed is completed, the operation pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-described FIG. 317 (Z2) to the continuous image (FIG. 313 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation. Then, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern) of the basic production pattern, FIG. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) → FIG. 314 (V5) to (V8) ) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 316 (U5) is followed.

  In this way, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) has a great difference in production development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. When the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and reach the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, you will not only be able to acquire the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach a reach effect without knowing the degree of expectation you know if you were operating it originally . Further, when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If there is no operation at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the case of the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if an operation is performed, an effect (continuous change in the shape of the sword ornament 5001 due to a level-up effect) caused by continuing pseudo-variation (revariation) that can be obtained without the operation is missed and the form of the sword ornament 5001 is initialized. It will return to form. The operation at the selected operation opportunity is the operation effect obtained in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 that is not known to the player, and the operation during the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that results in operation results that are detrimental to the user. Further, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), in the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation). When the player operates the sword ornament 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form when the selection operation opportunity is selected to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is increased to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the number of operations set in advance in the production pattern is required, but in this example, an opportunity for two operations (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance. The granting ends at the opportunity, and a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate with respect to an operation effect that does not appear instead, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the player's operation, the initial form to the stage 1 form You can see only the changes until you reach the reach. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected variation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character). . If the sword ornament 5001 is not operated, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped, and the operation is performed at the operation opportunity given after the form is further changed (leveled up) to become the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). As described above, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 320 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but is not limited thereto. For example, the expectation degree of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own selection feeling, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 324, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the first stage in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. Is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by an operation of the player is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern or a sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since three quasi-continuous variations (revariations) are inherently provided, a specific decoration is provided. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the normal pattern variation is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern. When the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous variations (revariations) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period T2 during which (revariation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 during which the third pseudo variation (revariation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And give the player an opportunity to operate. And when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → FIG. 317). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Although not shown in the figure, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) continues (when set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern), The decorative body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and the operation is suggested by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the state of sword (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword decorative body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed into the second sword state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not shown in the figure, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) is not continued (when the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV1 strong variation pattern is set), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo Resurrection Sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 319, after following the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and appearing to enter the reach effect as it is, the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

  When the set production pattern is a pseudo-resurrection sword LV1 production pattern, similar to the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, the above-described FIG. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. Follow production transition. If an operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, the same effect as in FIGS. 316 (U3), (U4), and (U5) described above is shown in FIG. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword design is resumed. If no operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword storage state with the end of the operation valid period, as in other production patterns, In place of the above-described FIG. 319 (UA1) → (UA2), the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without performing the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY. A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

  The resumption of quasi-continuous variation (revariation) is resumed at the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3) described above. Is temporarily stopped with a pseudo-sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, a pseudo-sword pattern with a form indicating the form and production level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. As a result, the player is notified (FIG. 319 (UA4)). The sword image and effect level 3 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed in the pseudo continuous sword pattern at this time. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001, and the initial form (sword storage state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of a temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts in the stage 3 form (FIG. 319 (UA4)), the form and the production level of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) described above is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the effect display is applied to the sword decorative body 5001. The display is moved toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative part 5012a, and the second decorative part 5012b are operated so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its shape at once from a plurality of stages from the initial form to the stage 3 form, it can impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

  After that, the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player is made effective as an operation means, and the above-mentioned FIG. 315 (X1) to (X5) are given an operation opportunity. When an operation by the player is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decorative member SDY (in accordance with whether or not the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, is not illustrated. The type of the fall effect of the 簾 (character) is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is once in a half-dropped state, so that the level is improved and the above-described FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → Expectation notification effect by the whole fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (strap) as in (U5) is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the semi-drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

  In the case where an operation by the player is not detected in an operation opportunity for enabling the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as an operation means, the operation effective period ends as in the case of other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword insertion state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is completed.

  As described above, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed, and when the quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, the level of the stage 2 form is jumped over and the stage 3 form. The same level of performance as the first stage of production (the production of the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) in the basic production pattern) will be performed, so the player will be surprised and have a stronger expectation than other production patterns. Can face Also, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or even if the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) becomes a semi-fall, the player will not be distracted. You can enjoy games in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-variation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 325, the operation execution timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. Give players an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the drop effect (expectation notification) that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation Production). Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed and once the display of the decorative pattern variation is returned to the normal mode, the third quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, if the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is performed in the period T1, the fall effect (expectedness notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is completely dropped by the player's operation. Production). Moreover, when the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) is not performed in the period T1, the fall in which the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) falls half by the player's operation. Production (expectation notification production) is performed. Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 325, when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the player's thrilling feeling and allowing the player to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree to be displayed is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decoration pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4)). )reference).

  Simultaneously with the resumption of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 319 (UA6)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case where the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is dropped during the first pseudo continuous change (revariation), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is changed from the initial state to the fully dropped state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the quasi-continuous change (re-change) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a faint accessory) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the total fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, although not shown in the drawings, when the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is not dropped in the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is moved from the initial state. The point is changed to a semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and the expectation degree notification image corresponding to the semi-falling is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the quasi-continuous change (revariation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318 (W2 )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect using the sword decorative body 5001, the pseudo continuous change frequency is 2 times and 3 times in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed a plurality of times, respectively. If it is less than that, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state every time the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is made, and the player can operate, but an operation effective period is provided. (Without giving the player an opportunity to operate) and returning to the sword state. For this reason, since the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is characterized in that the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a beneficial effect for the player by the player's operation. Make the player's choice of operation carefully. Therefore, interest in the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 can be given, and a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the game interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the sword ornament 5001 can be changed in stages until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), so that the player's expectation and interest are increased in stages. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operation mode and the second sword extraction state (operation position) to when the operation effective period is generated, the player operates the operation mode at the operation position (form, light emission, movable Etc.) is preferably provided for a period during which it can be sufficiently confirmed. Thereby, the player can check the operation mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, so that the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword state is entered, and the mode of the operation means cannot be checked. It is possible to dispel the concern that the game entertainment will be reduced by shifting to the operation effect.

  In addition, although the stage change of the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 was shown with the form, it is not restricted to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emission mode or operation mode of the sword ornament 5001, may be changed in stages in correspondence with the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

(Application to pre-reading production)
In the above description, the sword effect in the pseudo-reach reach effect has been described, but it can also be executed as a pre-read effect. The case of applying to pre-reading effects will be described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is the prefetch effect target and the katana LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

  When a hold that is a prefetch effect is generated as the third hold 3, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 312 (B) to (F) are performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. Note that the sword decorative body 5001 is different from the second sword removal state in that an operation opportunity is given (operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 is generated), the same effects as those shown in FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (S1) to (S4) are performed. Further, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effects as the above-described FIG. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X3) are performed. Is called. Note that as described above, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state in the pre-reading effect only when the operation effective period occurs. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 that is the target of the pre-reading effect is started, and the operation promoting effect and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. To the second extraction state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

  Although the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the state where the sword is placed to the second sword state is limited to the generation timing of the operation effective period, even if the stepwise form change is performed at the end of the change display, the next change display It may be performed at the start. In the pre-reading effect, the same effect as the pseudo-reach reach effect is achieved.

(Indication before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, the pre-operation suggesting effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is effective in operation or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in operation among a plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). . Specifically, the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (the black object) is positioned at the initial position as an suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggesting effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the black object). There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position, and a sword ornament 5001 (from the operation button 410) In the case where the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) that generates the operation effective period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is positioned at the initial position even during the operation effective period. Is performed, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 70% (including a step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation | movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse) in the 1st suggestion pattern of a pre-operation suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion pattern is demonstrated.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIG. 326 and FIG. 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach | attainment effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed when it determines that operation is effective. In this reach effect, an operation button that is determined in advance to be validated by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 when three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326 (A)). The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means of 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Displayed (FIG. 326 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. Further, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are not changed.

  Then, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is made effective at a higher rate than the sword decorative body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 326 (C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated effectively, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed with the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326 (D), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (holding object) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (with the aura member) so that the player can perform a sword insertion operation.

  In the above-described FIG. 326 (C) or (D), when an operation to an operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected, The specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved to fall from the initial state to the full fall state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
In FIG. 328, when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. In FIG. 329, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is once enabled and the sword decoration 5001 is not enabled. It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes operation effective.

  As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is displayed together with the display of the operation effect suggestion image. It operates in a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

  Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is validated, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the suggested position, the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (moving accessory) is operating at the suggested position. Is generated. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (form with an aura), so that the player can perform a sword insertion operation. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, there is a case where the pre-operation suggesting effect is executed with the second suggestion pattern although the rate is low. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved from the state operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) may be moved from the state operating to the suggestion position without being returned to the initial state to the entire fall state or the initial state.

  Then, when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected in FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3) described above, FIG. 326 (C) or (D) described above is used. Similarly, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  In addition, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the operation efficiency of the sword decorative body 5001 is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. The interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used can be enhanced.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively, In addition to the basic pattern in which the effect transition of FIG. 328 (AA1) → (AA3) described above is followed until the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled, the operation button 410 is once enabled, and then the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that is determined to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 in advance. This is executed before the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to that of FIG. 328 (AA1) described above and the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) are performed (FIG. 329 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the player detects a pressing operation of the operation button 410 during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 described above is not performed, and the switching suggests switching of the operation means that is effective. The suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when a player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (aura-equipped form), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation means that is effective for operation is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword ornament 5001. A switching notification image (a message of “chance to pull out a sword” “a message of having you put a sword”) is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB4)). In the meantime, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) has been moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 327).

  Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the above-described FIG. 329 (BB2). It is only necessary that the sword ornament 5001 is operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern is not limited to the second suggestion pattern, but may be selectable when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is enabled. ) Can be changed, and an operation means that is effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. In the second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 328 (AA1), the sword ornament 5001 is generated in a state in which the expected validity is high and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, it is suggested before the operation. The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is also used for the result notification after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 327), a series of falling effects are made from the up and down movement of the suggestion effect before the operation. It can be shown in the production of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body is effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword decorative body 5001 to the second extraction state, but also the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is activated once (or after it appears that the operation is validated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is located at the suggested position, D) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Also, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it can be expected that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 may become effective thereafter. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is effective is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 326 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (glare) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to operate in a small fall state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move in small increments between the initial position and the suggested position. When the operation effective period is subsequently generated, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player provides an operation effect suggestion by the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. The player strongly desires that the operation valid period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggested position. The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Produce with a pattern. In the production period in which the specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for establishing a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. Based on the establishment of a specific performance execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation related to privilege provision). 100% or 0% may be expected for the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation time effect.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for providing a privilege when operated) In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operating means (sword ornament 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as a sword ornament 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is established when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), the pre-operation effect that the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation opportunity is not performed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (bonus expectation) for granting a privilege is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. 100% or 0% may be expected for giving a privilege suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001).

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the stage is in the previous stage where the performance has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired performance result (such as a performance result that suggests that the degree of expectation for the provision of a privilege is high) does not appear in an operation-time effect according to an operation on another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). So that even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), the game entertainment can be improved through such operation-related productions. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (such as the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) having such a stunning property. In the case where the operation opportunity is given, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (production reception is possible),
The operation on the operation button 410 is enabled after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled (allowing for receiving the effect). ) The first production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated without producing the “specific operation-related production” (production reception is possible). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period) are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (production) by executing one of the production modes. An effective period (production reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case in which a period in which an operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs. Regardless of the case in which a period during which an operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is allowed to receive an effect occurs, the common (specify ) Operation-related effects can be executed, so that it is possible to have fun about which one of the specific operation means and another operation means can be accepted. By performing the operation under the condition that the game is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Note that such a common (specific) operation-related effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time elapses after the effect starts. An effect reception period will be generated. At least when the effect is started, which operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. It is desirable to keep secret.

  Hereinafter, several production modes that can be adopted when such a common (specific) operation-related production will be described. In each of the following explanation examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any production reception period occurs after execution of a common (specific) operation-related production. ) If any production reception period occurs without the execution of the operation related production, the content of the production may be omitted. However, the content of the production in the case where any production acceptance period occurs without executing the common (specific) operation-related production is as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and 206 (G), for example. . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 appears without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is executed, or common during the jackpot game execution period A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be executed in combination with each other, which will be described later, as appropriate, and can also be executed in combination with each effect described above. Is possible. The effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each of the effects described below, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Thus, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform effects of different examples described later. The same can be said between the productions of different examples described later.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 330 and 331, after a specific operation-related effect is started, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive an effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production (1st production aspect).

  FIG. 330 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 displays a variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 330 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display that moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative body 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that the operation of any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 330 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 330 (b) are advanced, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display prompting to operate any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) in a state where each area is stopped and displayed (in this case, a character display such as “operate”) and an effect reception An effect situation in which a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period appears.

  According to such a production mode, although operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). It is possible to make it unclear which of the productions can be accepted. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 330 (c)) is the same in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted. Because it is displayed, nothing else. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means before the operation can be accepted for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). Common (specific) operation-related relations as shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and 330 (c) over a period until an operation for at least one of (the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) is accepted. The production is executed.

  Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). Middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the production. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more surely conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for the production, the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration 5001 It is more desirable that the time required from the execution of a specific operation-related effect (production start) to the generation of the effect reception period is set to be the same when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction to be displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any of the operation means (“operate” Etc.), or always operating a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means regardless of how each of the operation means can receive a production. It is also possible to perform a display prompting the user. In short, even if an operation instruction is given, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can receive the production.

  Also, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 330 (c), it is concealed whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for production, and also when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted for production (when in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light-emitting state, or light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to provide a connection between the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. 330 (c) appears is only an operation on the operation button 410 of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where it is possible to accept the production, whether it is in the second situation where only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Both are set to be in any one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. In addition, when the 2nd situation (situation where operation opportunity is provided with respect to the sword ornament 5001) among these multiple situations occurs, the first situation (operation opportunity is provided with respect to the operation button 410). The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  In this production example (first production mode), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any of the first situation (the operation button 410) and the third situation (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001). Is performed (whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or the second situation (sword ornament 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when “GG” in the figure is made progress), an effect is accepted and an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f)). Is to be done.

  In the operation effect, regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display effect. ("Chance!") Is executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of production modes, and to display one of these production modes in response to the production reception, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and making any of these effect modes appear in response to the effect reception In addition, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control for setting the operating means to the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (d), the operation is performed according to the reception of the effect even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword decorative body 5001 on the side that is not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect is received as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and an operation effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the production reception is generated and the on-stage operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is executed. ”Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword operation on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in the sword position according to the reception of the performance. Instead of returning to the (sword state), it is possible to execute control to maintain the blade position (sword state). As a result, the sword decorative body 5001 moves from the sword insertion position (sword insertion state) to the extraction sword position (extraction sword state) based on an operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword extraction state. Occasionally there will be a performance during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, the sword ornament at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to learn the actual feeling that the operation effect due to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is being executed.

  Then, after the operation-time effects (FIGS. 331 (d) and (f)) are performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 331 (e), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is selected. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is in a non-operating state (sword insertion position (sword insertion state)). Control to return to is performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocal operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed to stop the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  330 and FIG. 331, according to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 330 and FIG. 331, specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001). 5001) is the case where the production can be accepted and the case where the production cannot be accepted, the common (specific) operation-related production starts, and the common (specific) where the production is started. While the operation-related effects are being executed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 can be receivable at the same time, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the other operation means (for example, the operation button 410) have effects respectively. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can accept an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is in effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can be receivable without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related rendition is being performed, the operation button 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decorative body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production, the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production. You will be able to be confused as if not. That is, in this case, when an effect is received, it becomes possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decorative body 5001, which is the side with a higher rate of expectation. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to provide interest about which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is consumed by the amount of such erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the production (the side where the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, Although the reception of the production required for the execution of the production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is not established, the operation is detected, and the operation on the side where the production can be accepted based on the detection. You may make it perform control which ends the production | presentation reception period with respect to a means at the time. According to such a configuration, since there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, it is urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

  Also, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side. However, the operation effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If an effect on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the game entertainment can be improved more appropriately.

  Further, when preparing another production mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other production mode. When the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001). In either case, it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 330 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the first operating means when the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, while a common (specific) operation-related production is performed, the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set (No. When an operation for the first operation means is performed during the time period for receiving the effect for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be performed. In short, when an effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another production | generation aspect appear as an operation time production, in addition to the production aspect performed with the operation time production | generation on the 2nd operation means side, it does not make the said other production aspect appear, but 2nd operation The operation-time effect may be performed as effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

  In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 It is supposed that the setting is made so as to correspond to any one of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the presentation is accepted, the same operation-time effect appears. In the third situation, the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that an effect or another effect aspect (different from the operation effects in the first situation and the second situation) should appear. However, in the example of the production, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation means to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. Above, in the production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), the player does not perform an operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately. However, the control for operating the operation means on the side where the player has not performed the operation is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Second production mode]
FIG. 332 to FIG. 335 are executed as effects indicating the progress of the effect until a specific operation-related effect appears in either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears as a result of the above, it is suggested that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of production (2nd production aspect) suggested that the production reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces among these.

  In FIG. 332 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 332 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image of the lightning image IZ acting on the images BTG and SYG is depicted. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative body 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that the operation of any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 332 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 332 (b) progress, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. There is an effect of pushing each other in the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, It is executed as an effect such as “Which of BTG or SYG is left in the display area”, and when an effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, an effect reception for the operation button 410 is received. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and (c) are “the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001. This is equivalent to a “specific operation-related effect that can appear before the occurrence of those periods”.

  Note that the left diagram in FIG. 332 (c) depicts how the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right diagram shows the sword decoration image SYG displayed. Describes the prevailing situation of remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance situation changes with time.

  FIG. 333 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), and the button image BTG is left in the display area. An effect depicting the above is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  In other words, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for the production (the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the operation means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (during the effect accepting period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is made to emit light, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted.

  It should be noted that the effects shown in FIG. 333 (d) are not progressed through the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effects. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher.

  In addition, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio that the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without passing through (FIG. 333 (d)). It is desirable to increase the value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the dramatic delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  FIG. 333 (e) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operational effect shown in FIG. 333 (e) is the same as in FIG. 331 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the presentation even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. The same is true in that the control for reciprocating between the positions (control for setting the operation state) can be executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of production modes, and to display one of these production modes in response to the production reception, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and any of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 333 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 333 (f). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed (the reach effect is started). Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-operating state (sword storage state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocal operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed to stop the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 334 (g), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is within the display area. An effect depicting the remaining state is performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  In other words, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for production (the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “Take out the sword” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state in which the effect can be received (that is during the effect receiving period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 including the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword decorative body 5001 itself may be turned on) is turned on. By doing so, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is not progressed through the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effects. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher. Still further, when the performance shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed through a specific operation-related performance, the performance shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed without performing the specific operation-related performance. The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than the case, and the expectation for granting a privilege is made lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 334 (h) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed accordingly. This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, although the production mode such as “Intense heat !!”, which indicates that the degree of expectation is relatively high, is displayed according to the production reception, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. “Chance!” May be displayed. Similarly to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, there is an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area, and any of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), based on the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the effect aspect of the sword ornament 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described plural aspects ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible, and the degree of expectation for granting a bonus such as a big hit depends on which of these forms appears The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334 (i), even when the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is maintained in the sword state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the sword state and thereafter the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into the sword state (for example, during the reach production period). An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, an operation-time effect according to the operation to the state of the sword can be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to two operation steps for one operation means (sword decoration body 5001), and the first operation (operation to the sword state) and the second operation are performed. Since the on-stage effects are performed according to each operation (operation to the sword state), not only when the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is operated, the first stage In the non-operation period from when the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed until the second stage operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected that the game entertainment for the operation is suitably maintained. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (in this case, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation have different contents.

  Further, when the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In this case, it is desirable not to be given the second stage operation opportunity. Whether the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained at a position where the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state) can be given (the sword state) in the operation stage production corresponding to the first-stage operation. You may make it perform as an effect which suggests the expectation degree of no. In other words, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the sword state but returned to the sword state, it is substantially impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state). It is clear that it will be said. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  As a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage, if the sword ornament 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect) Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-driven state (sword storage state)) at a stage prior to the start of). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) over a period of at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area until it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed to stop the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that no driving force is applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 335 (j), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 333 (d). Thus, an effect depicting the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the predetermined time has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. Or the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears. Note that which content of the effect appears is determined in advance in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)). Here, the lightning image IZ is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), an instruction display prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in FIG. Thereby, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is.

  FIG. 335 (k) shows that as a result of the development shown in FIG. 335 (j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in 靄 MY, and even its outline is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) appears. Thus, it becomes possible to give a suspicion that the production reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is clearly shown for which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  In FIG. 335 (i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 335 (k), the outer shape of 靄 MY approaches the sword decorative body 5001 (sword decorative image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a performance that depicts the appearance.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur depending on the outer shape of the 靄 MY. Will be able to.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) from FIG. 335 (k), and until which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is clearly shown. This suggests that the remaining time is less.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i) further develops and 靄 MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 334 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will remain. Will be able to.

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIGS. 333 (d) and 335 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword ornament 5001 It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by 靄 MY (FIG. 335 (k)), and further When the production progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 334 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept so that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) May be set so as to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 335 (j) and (k) is also concealed from which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. It will be executed as a specific operation related effect.

  Further, in the production situation shown in FIG. 334 (h) in the production example (second production mode) with the operation button 410 provided as operable operation means, FIG. 333 (e) As in the effect situation shown in FIG. 6, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 336 to 339 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  In FIG. 336 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 will soon be able to receive an effect.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are employed as such a predetermined movable member, and the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated. Thus, it is easy for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be ready to receive an effect soon after the effect display related to the operation has not yet been performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is supposed to be recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position toward the operation position. However, compared to when operating the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to the operation position when giving an operation opportunity, respectively. Each of them at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, it is an operating means that still has time left until the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left until the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the symbol change ends, It can be suitably maintained.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but by each operation by the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (FIG. 336 (b)). After the start, basically, the same progress of the production as the second production mode is made.

  For example, first, of the effects shown in FIG. 336 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The production contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from their initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are different from the initial position (position when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state where driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and an operation opportunity is immediately given. When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally finished, it is necessary to move the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further extended by the time required for such operations, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced by such an extension.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (non-drive position) and the operation position during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (state which applied driving force) in a different position (for example, intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and an effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur The operation means on the other side can be moved to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the extension of the operation-related effects. Also, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. Except for being displayed as corresponding to “410”, the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 332 (c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are moved to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. And an operation state (a state where a driving force is applied) at a position different from the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 336 (b) and 336 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driven position). In contrast, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are different from each other, so that their matching will be soon. It can be suggested that the illustrated effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. Except for being displayed as corresponding to a movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the content of the production is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving), the extension of the operation-related effects is suitably suppressed. Become so.

  As an effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first provided. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (character display such as “press”) You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. In this way, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, so that the deviation of these modes is soon filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 333 (e). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 337 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 337 (g), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. Except for the fact that the instruction content is “push-in” and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, the effect as described with reference to FIG. 334 (g) It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position that is different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword ornament 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Will come to be.

  In addition, as the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position)” After performing the display effect, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (characters such as “push”) Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  When the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 334 (h). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position).

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 338 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 338 (j), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. Except for being displayed as corresponding to a certain movable operation button 410 ", the contents of the production are as described with reference to FIG. 335 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively in the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that there is no possibility that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 has yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will occur. Will be able to.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (k). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (l). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both. In the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the heel MY is closer to the sword ornament 5001 at the operation position than the sword ornament 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the performance shown in FIG. 339 (l) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) Is set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 339 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation related effect.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the operation on the button side is performed. Become. When a “sword decoration image SYG imitating a sword ornament 5001 (second display mode)” appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001 of the body 5001 and an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received, an effect during operation on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination While either one of them is supposed to appear, even when the operation on the sword actor's side is performed, on the basis of the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, the production on success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the production on failure (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is caused to appear, and the contents of the effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

  It should be noted that the operation effect on the button side and the operation effect on the sword accessory side are the same effects on the display effect performed on the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it be contents.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples related to a specific operation-related production, the production operation is given to which of the plurality of operation means is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is given. An operation opportunity was given to the system. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of the operation that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means, regardless of which effect results appear, such as pushing between the specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state, or a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state with respect to one operation means The operation may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword state and the extracted state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any manner in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 be operated in the sword insertion state or the sword extraction state when an effect result indicating whether or not to perform the operation is shown.

  In addition, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the symbol variation execution period, when the symbol variation is in the hold state (the digested before this) You may make it perform the effect suggested from the execution period of a symbol fluctuation. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period for both. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in a suspended state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

  In the above-described second and third effect forms and other examples thereof, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) (button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images are not necessarily displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while it is suggested that an effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period occurs. Accordingly, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is ended. Either BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) or a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of a specific operation-related effect. When the specific image related to the operation (for example, lightning image IZ, etc.) is executed as the content of the effect, the specific operation-related effect is determined for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period is generated. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestion. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When lightning falls on the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock, so that it is possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 334 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on a rock, either a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, it is possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 334 (g). In short, it is desirable to make the effect progress as effect content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, there are specific cases in which a production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and a production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the time when the operation-related effects are executed (the effect start) to the time when the effect reception period occurs. In addition, it is desirable to set the production reception period to occur for the same time, even when an operation opportunity is given to any operation means after a specific operation-related production is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated according to which of the effect modes is performed. You may make it the ratio set with respect to the specific operation means among several operation means differ. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related production. When operating the operating means on the side (FIG. 333 (e), etc.), control is performed to return the operating means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time on the basis of the operation. It may be. However, the time when the operation is performed is not used as a reference, and the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated until the operation is ended depending on at which timing in the production reception period the operation is performed. It is desirable to vary the length of time.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the time remaining in the effect reception period is short, and the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has struggled by operating the operating means on the side that is not shown in the specific operation-related effects. Therefore, depending on at which timing in the production reception period it is operated (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (“even if the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was received and the effect during the operation was executed” If the time length for appealing the player to the player is made different, the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  Also, during the period from when the specific operation-related effect is started to when the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect that suggests the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed (here, It is possible to operate the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) more reliably to operate the specific movable body based on the presentation reception within the presentation reception period after the specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, it corresponds to any one of images that can appear in the effect result after the start of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding whether to generate an effect reception period related to a specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) using either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 While the related effects are being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. As a result, even though it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, the effect result is shown, and it is possible to create a special effect mode as if the effect was ended, and the effect is performed. During this time, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest. When a specific operation-related effect is being performed and an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received, a predetermined effect is performed based on the reception of the effect. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the high-expected effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player knows that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In addition, when the specific operation-related effects relating to a plurality of operation means are in the middle of being performed, when an effect reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means, When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a production result, the degree of expectation for the provision of a privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the stage performance as the specific operation-related stage until the stage result is shown after the stage start of the stage operation related stage. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the relatively low expectation side. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and more privilege is given than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  Further, in each of the above-described production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, an production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. An automatic button effect mode in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation was performed before may be set. According to such an automatic button effect mode, an operation-time effect is generated without an operation every time an effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. If the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect mode is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even in such a case, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even when the automatic button effect mode is set, the effect acceptance period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while the specific operation-related effect is being performed. In this case, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (the automatic button function does not function). After this, even if an effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of the specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. Even if it is not, it is desirable to perform the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated (the automatic button function should function). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  In addition, regarding the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect mode, for example, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed not only during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed but also during the period in which the symbol variation is being performed. It is desirable that For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated, the automatic button effect mode can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated. When the operation button 410 is operated during the operation, the automatic button effect mode can be changed from the off state to the on state in addition to the operation time effect corresponding to the operation. is there. However, even if the automatic button effect mode is in the on state, it may be necessary to occasionally generate an operation effect by an operation by the player. Within the production reception period for the operation button 410 when the operation button 410 is in the on state, not only the operation button 410 but also an operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled to operate the other operation means. When the operation button 410 is operated, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, the same on-operation effect is generated as when the operation button 410 is operated while the automatic button effect mode is maintained in the on state. desirable.

  The operation mode may be different depending on whether the automatic button effect mode is changed from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, a button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 or a sword ornament 5001 is simulated. While the displayed sword decoration image SYG is displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (production reception is received) for the operation button 410. Period) and when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as an operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword ornament 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 340 (a) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 337 (e). Display mode) and display the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 334 (g) and 338 (h). Also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly switched to the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is Therefore, a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword in the display area shown in FIGS. 333 (d), 334 (g), 337 (e), and 338 (h) is used. Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is made using substantially the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background portion where the degree of expectation is suggested is hidden) To be done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (a), the first image having a shield (button image BTG simulating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design is held. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b), the sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it implicitly suggests which operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) need not be prepared as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself. It is desirable that the operation means be displayed as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape or a part of the design.

  In addition, with respect to the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG. You may make it perform also as the production | presentation which suggests a different expectation degree depending on which (2nd display mode) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Also, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared, and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. You may make it suggest an expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  In addition, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (desired to have a relatively high expectation), a specific When an operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after a later-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect) is displayed (it is desirable that the effect state is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as an effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is not executed (for example, after a prelude effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect) is not executed. When displayed, the operation reception period for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG as well as another operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) not corresponding to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give an interesting aspect of the operation different from the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively highly expected production situation, and to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword ornament 5001.

  In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a “specific operation-related effect is executed relatively It is desirable to suggest that there is a production situation with a higher expectation than when it is in a production situation where the sword decoration image SYG appears in a production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410). It is desirable that the effect during the operation is executed.

  On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related production is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the production reception period When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, the special operation effect is not executed when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied. Instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is not performed. Although the operation means different from the means is operated, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect mode is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even when an effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period is executed. It is desirable to make it so that the automatic button function works. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect mode is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. The operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be obtained even if no operation is performed even when the production reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means. It is desirable that only the same operation-time effects as when operated are executed, and the special operation effects that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation time effect (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-described automatic button function before another timing. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and a specific timing has arrived. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the effect during operation (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) from appearing. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the presentation reception period, but the automatic button presentation mode is continued in the on state even after the presentation reception period ends. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and the above-described effects (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes, and other examples thereof, “the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” or the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is performed. If any one of the “sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (second display mode)” is displayed and the presentation is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation-time effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content that is suggested to have a relatively low expectation level. One of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first For the sword ornament 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, an effect image (a sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high expectation as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in the production result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the timer effect described above (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect target (one of the above-described multiple effect modes to be the timer target). is there. In other words, in the timer effect with “applying an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect object, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), an operation opportunity will be provided soon. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the performance during operation. In this case, in the “operation opportunity for the operation means” prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when an operation is performed on the operation means, an effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery One of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as an effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result that is advantageous to the player is higher than when the timer effect effect is not given. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect with the effect of “granting an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001)” appears, the “target operation opportunity for the operation means” is selected. A specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, respectively, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment at the time.

  However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before the effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). However, it is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and there is a concern that attention will be distracted and the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is set to an unexecuted state, and the count value It is desirable to start the “specific operation-related effect” after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 341 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). In addition, the following timer effects are equivalent to the above-mentioned notice side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  In FIG. 341 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 341 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 341 (a). Indicates the situation. In the production situation shown in FIG. 341 (b), the “specific operation-related production” has not yet been executed, and it is unknown which production the timer production is targeted for. Yes.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (unknown state) in which it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count “0”) is reached and displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. At the time when the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the count value is not “0” and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which of the two is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), the effects are sometimes Since overlapping in series is avoided, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

  However, if the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it may not be possible to recognize whether or not it was made as a game, and that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), until a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect suggesting an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001) that the timer effect is an effect object is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that it was a timer effect for the effect of “granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 (an operation opportunity by“ sword ”)”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword storage” ”Will be given the opportunity to operate”), the “specific operation-related effects” will begin to be produced in the production situation recognized by the player, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the “sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, it may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the sword ornament 5001 moves in a predetermined operation (here, (Reciprocating operation in the vertical direction) is performed, and this also indicates that “granting an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword ornament 5001” is the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is “granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001”, but also when another effect is the effect object. It may be performed when becomes 0. In other words, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect of, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become zero. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the production to be produced is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is made to be executed at the same time as or earlier than the timing at which the production suggesting the production type is started, and the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to do so.

FIG. 341 (d) shows the effect situation where the “specific operation-related effect” has been started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to perform the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target and the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 before the production of the specific operation-related production starts. Even after the operation-related effect is started, the execution state may be continued.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the effects are developed in the order of FIGS. 341 (e) to (h). The contents of these effects are shown in FIG. 332 (c). ), FIG. 334 (g) to (i), or FIG. 336 (d) and FIG. 338 (h) to (j), the details are omitted.

  In addition, as a timer effect performed in relation to a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 or a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on a predetermined effect lottery result. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, which is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341, but the specific operation-related effect is the effect. The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly before this), and continues after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is granted ( The degree of expectation for the big hit is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, but at the time when the effect situation where the effect is developed simultaneously appears, Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect value is the same (expectation for granting a bonus (big hit)) The same). In other words, in this case, the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, so even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, It is possible to avoid the situation where it is difficult to understand whether or not to pay attention to the situation and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the game entertainment, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, the bonus is given more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, a display that suggests the type of effect target (in the effect display device 1600) “Sword”) is performed, but such a display that suggests an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific effect is selected as a timer object among a plurality of effects that can be a timer object, a display that suggests which effect is a timer effect may not be performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, there is an operation opportunity for any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it was granted. However, prior to giving an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production reception period occurring), a first sign effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 Or before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 (before the production reception period occurs), it does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may appear. When performing these precursor effects (first predictor effect, second predictor effect), the time required for the effect (predictor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when an effect appears be low in order to enhance the gaming interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as an indication effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating an operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which an operation opportunity is given, for example. A specific image is displayed, such as expressing the state of being trapped. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image) that is difficult to view by overlapping the specific image. Then, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It is possible to execute as an effect that makes it appear to be exposed. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectation levels related to privilege grant (big hit), While the sign effect that the button image BTG is gradually exposed is developed, it is possible to have an interest in which display mode of the button image BTG appears.

  It should be noted that a first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 Is important to be executed as different production contents. In addition to the contents of the effects, it is desirable that the time required for the effects is different.

  Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the provision of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that it is a superordinate concept that includes it. As for the indication effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, a plurality of effect modes are prepared and the sign effect is performed in any of these effect modes as described below with reference to FIG. 342. Depending on whether or not the indication reception period that occurs in response to the indication effect has a length, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the indication effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it.

  FIG. 342 is a time chart for explaining an example of the content of the production for each type of production when a plurality of types (prediction productions A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the indication production.

  First, in the example (prediction effect A) shown in FIG. 342 (a), the sign effect A is started when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect reception period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The production reception period (valid period) T1 that has been generated will occur.

  In the production reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production A (character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (b) (prediction effect B1), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed. The sign effect B1 is started. This precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation) When an operation opportunity is given to the means, it is not executed), and when the indication effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as “Press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B1. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the sign effect B1 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (b). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). Thereby, it is suggested how long the production reception period generated corresponding to the precursor effect has a length depending on which mode (the precursor effect A and the precursor effect B1) was performed. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment at the time when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect B2) shown in FIG. 342 (c), the sign effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect B2 is also executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not a “specific operation-related effect”, like the precursor effect B1. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1). Production reception period) T3 is generated.

  It should be noted that in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B2 (character display such as “press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Display) is displayed. In addition, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T3, an operation-time effect different from the case where the sign effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the sign effect B2 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed in spite of the execution of the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation for granting a bonus (big hit). Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T3 having a length is generated, a production situation as if a specific operation-related production was performed is generated, and the sign production B2 is It is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode appears until the intermediate timing after the start of the effect, and the different effect modes appear after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance as to which of the production reception period (effective period) T2 and the production reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and the timing of the start of the indication effects B1 and B2 is to be started when a different time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Alternatively, the indication effects B1 and B2 may have different lengths of time.

  On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect C) shown in FIG. 342 (d), the prelude effect C is started when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is to be given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), when the predictor effect C is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The held production reception period (valid period) T4 occurs.

  Even during the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production C (character display such as “press”) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. To be done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the sign effect C is an effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (d). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, even if the length of time required for the warning effect C itself is shorter than the warning effect A, if the warning effect is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect”. Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as in the case of the precursor effect A is generated, it is preferable to maintain the game entertainment when the precursor effect C is performed. Will be able to.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 342, the length of the production reception period (effective period) is associated with the types of the indication effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, thereby producing the production reception period. The length of (validity period) was suggested. However, the production reception period (effective period) can be set by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined time length for each type of sign production. ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as that at the time of the specific operation means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of operating at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operation position in accordance with this, FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state of being operated at the operating position (extracted sword state), but the sword decorative image SYG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operating position (extracted sword state). Has been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating its appearance. If the result of the performance is displayed even though a specific operation-related performance with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the range of the performance will be remarkably narrowed. Concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344, an effect image (for example, a button image) simulating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Regarding BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, and is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 343 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effects of the effect contents when the precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect contents when the predictor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 343 (a) to 343 (c) show the contents of effects when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect state, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect” but only the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 side. If the sign effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword ornament 5001. It should be noted that in the prelude effect (the predecessor effect in another example is also the same), as long as a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is soon given is given, an effect image imitating the operation means Is not necessarily displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001 since the sword decorative image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. It comes to be.

  In the precursor effect shown in FIG. 343 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectations and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectations. Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content about which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001, it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYGa has a low expectation as the sword decorative image SYG, or the degree of expectation. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 343 (b) shows an effect result in which a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in an effect state with a relatively high expectation. It will be suggested that the production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as a sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 343 (c) shows an effect example when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to operate (“push in” And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when the production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decoration image SYGb is also extracted from the sword state accordingly. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received within the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the state of a sword. Maintained. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracted state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001) Are stopped at a predetermined position.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 343 (d) to 343 (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (d), if the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started as shown in FIG. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to these.

  FIG. 343 (e) shows an effect situation in which the sign effect as the “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 as the production result of the “specific operation-related production”. Has been. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (e), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to another effect image (button image BTG or the like).

  FIG. 343 (f) shows an effect example when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompts the sword decorative object 5001 to operate. "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the extracted state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword extraction state (sword decoration image SYG). In contrast, the sword decorative body 5001 is configured to continuously perform the upward displacement slowly over the period until the presentation reception period ends, and is different from each other. I try to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decorative body 5001, the production reception is performed when an operation to the sword state is performed on the operation subject object 141. Based on the reception, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG continues to operate and is used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated so that the sword decorative body 5001 is stopped.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are displayed in the effect receiving period (FIG. 343 (c)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (f)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG is set in the stopped state. The other side is continued in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the production when the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a predecessor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in a specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword ornamental image SYG imitating the sword ornament 5001 appears, When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation It is possible to provide further performance. About this technique, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each above-mentioned effect aspect other than the effect example of FIG. 343, and those other examples.

  And when giving such two performances with respect to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used. Whether it appears or is recognizable, and it is unclear whether the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the contour is drawn) Display in a recognizable display state, etc.) to appear as the production progresses. Then, after that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the side effect image that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined) It is desirable that the state is released and the color can be confirmed, for example, to appear in sequence as the production progresses further. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect development, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected under a predetermined condition (for example, the operation means is changed). The button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG can be recognized as appearing as a result of the specific operation-related effect. Whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high in expectation or not is unknown (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). An effect pattern for further effect development may be generated. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) To make it possible to check the color. In this case, the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is a display mode with a higher expectation (for example, red) than when the display mode is a lower display mode (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further stage development occurs.

  FIGS. 344 (a) to 344 (e) are diagrams showing other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. In other words, in FIG. 344 (a), a sign effect as a “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the sign effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A second character (effect image corresponding to the sword ornament 5001) holding the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword (sword ornament image SYG) imitating the sword ornament 5001 Is depicted, and suggests which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing so.

  FIG. 344 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this production situation, the first character (production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to be displayed is in a non-display state). While the operation-related effects are being performed, both the effect part (the confrontation between the characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 344 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 344 (c) to 344 (e) show examples of effects when an effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 344 (c). In addition, an instruction display that prompts the sword decorative body 5001 to perform an operation (a character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 344 (c), when the effect reception period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts to move from the sword state to the sword state. As shown in FIG. 344 (d), the sword decorative body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword state to the sword state only after a relatively short period of time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 344 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the sword state until at least the presentation reception period ends, and the player Will wait for the operation (operation from the sword state to the sword state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344 (c) to (e), the movement of the sword decorative body 5001 (movement in the linear direction) is completely different from the movement (rotation in the rotation direction). In the lowering operation), the second character is drawn to swing down the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted state. The operation is to be performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) within the production reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop process is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by this, and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 also enters the sword state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)). However, even if the loop process is performed, the operation is maintained without being affected by the loop process. In addition, when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the operation object role 141 within the effect reception period, the effect is received, and a predetermined operation time effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the above The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The operation modes (operations responsible for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is completed. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues the operation without ending. Thus, when an effect reception period (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect occurs, the contents of the effect of the specific operation-related effect continue until after the effect reception period occurs ( For example, the background can be continued and executed, and the range of the production can be widened.

  In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, the contents of the effect (display where the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 344 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effects (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) are different from each other while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the performance during the presentation reception period. In this sense, even in the sign effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to further improve the performance by providing a direct connection between them. In addition, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting a privilege, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  It should be noted that, for a prelude effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. You may make it suggest whether the aspect with a high expectation appears as an operation time production when the production reception is made in the period. You may make it suggest the expectation degree concerning privilege provision using the background image which appears when a precursor effect is performed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 344, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, an effect is received in the form of changing both the contents of the effect that appeared in the precursor effect and the background image. When an effect within the period is executed, but the above-mentioned effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the effect are changed. It is also possible to execute an effect when an effect reception period occurs.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 started before the production reception period occurs may be completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). You may make it maintain the stop state after completing the operation which it performed before the production reception period occurs).

  In addition, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001), when the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the background image is changed. There may be a case where the display is not performed. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the production reception period occurs. It is desirable to make it.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When an effect is received, the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation-time effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 331 (d), 333 (e), and 334 (h), a sword decorative body 5001 (or an operation button) is provided as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. As a result, a state of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the production situation at the time of failure where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the production-time production (for example, a specific production-related production) In the operation effect after the sign effect that is not the operation related effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect If there is a successful production situation that only works, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described production effects and specific operation-related productions according to other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the production, the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the production. As a result, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (a), the button is displayed in a mode (specific effect mode) in which a princess character is added. When the image BTG is displayed in some cases, and the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is greater than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of a specific operation-related effect. If it is made high, it will become possible to maintain suitably the game entertainment at the time of button image BTG being displayed as an effect result of specific operation related production.

  Further, the mode (specific production mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 345 (b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation related to the provision of privileges be higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 345 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 345 (b) shown in FIG. 345) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation-related effect. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect, the expectation level related to the privilege grant is set to be the same when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, not only can the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, but also the button image BTG and the sword can be provided. Regardless of which one of the decoration images SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific production mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, in order to allow such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) to appear, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345 (c), when the specific effect mode is in a stage where the specific operation-related effect effect result (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. From (for example, when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, a specific effect mode (a princess character is displayed) ) Appears, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same expectation). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, so that it is like a “prediction effect by the princess character” even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It is possible to provide a performance with a completely different purpose.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples of the sword decorative body 5001 is such that the sword part (the pattern part 5012 and the blade part 5011) can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes, and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. You may make it perform the said specific operation related effect as an effect about. The sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are both supported by a single body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). Is formed.

  However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a manner, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error is likely to occur on the player side. In particular, even in the case where an operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image imitating the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 (and its If an instruction prompting operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an error in operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode will occur on the player side. Become. In other words, in this case, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error while the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If the production reception period ends before the production is accepted even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  The sword decorative body 5001 has a mode such as “moving in the vertical direction” by the sword part and a mode such as “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath part. In an operation unit that can provide an aspect, if an incorrect operation is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an appropriate operation, and the production reception period ends. Thus, it can be said that the risk of losing operational opportunities is increased.

  Therefore, when the specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIG. 346 and FIG. 347, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the production reception is properly performed and the production during operation corresponding to the production reception is executed.

  FIG. 346 and FIG. 347 show an effect example when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  In FIG. 346 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 346 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 is operated from the sword state to the sword state. An image OX and a second effect image TX simulating a second operation mode for operating the sheath part of the sword decorative body 5001 to move in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time, and it is suggested that an operation opportunity according to any of these operation modes will soon be accepted. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 346 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 346 (b) progress, and the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is made to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346 (c), a display such as “push-in” can be visually recognized if the first effect image OX remains dominant. Thus, when the situation becomes dominant while the second effect image TX is left, a display such as “slide” is made visible. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the state of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a possibility that the display is erroneously recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production reception period has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 346 (d) shows that, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 346 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is within the display area. An effect depicting the state left in is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, an effect is received, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect is generated.

  In other words, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346 (d), an effect reception period related to a specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “push”) and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) is displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 operates from the sword storage state to the sword extraction state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 347 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. The production situation when performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is made effective. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the production reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received, assuming that there is an operation error by the player. (Here, “You can leave it as is”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 347 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed over time so that the player can regain calmness (here, “settled and pushed in”). It is like that. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it becomes possible to sequentially notify with a short word. It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if an operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player side will recognize that this is properly received. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 347 (g) shows that an appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production state (production reception period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIG. 347 (e) and FIG. 347 (f). As a result, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect according to the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operating state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (operation error state), the production reception is properly performed, so that a decrease in the game entertainment when an operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, notification is made that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). In other words, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player is in a panic, so that notification of complicated contents may have an adverse effect. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the reception period, the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the proper mode is received is not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to perform simple notifications such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player side does not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed such that a specific notification is made based on the operation being performed and no effect during operation is performed. Therefore, it can be expected that the operation is switched to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (especially an elderly player), it may be assumed that a situation in which an operation is erroneously performed before the production reception period occurs in a specific operation-related effect. For example, when there is no operation instruction related to the second operation part (for example, the sheath part), the first operation part is in a state where an operation (such as lateral movement of the sheath part) is performed on the second operation part. It is also assumed that there will be a production reception period related to a specific operation-time effect only on the operation part (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case as well, how the player side operates There is a concern that it may become unrecognizable.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation part (sword part) or the second operation part (sheath part) is performed, Although the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not made on the operation unit side 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit Even when an operation on is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted. This specific notification may be “message display indicating that it is only necessary to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state”. Alternatively, simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound may be used. In any case, by confirming a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and no effect during the operation is performed, the operation is performed on the appropriate side thereafter. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect to get a chance to go.

  In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved leftward) while the operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part). Even when the stage for receiving the performance related to the specific operation-time effect occurs only on the sword part) side, the state where the operation on the second operation part (for example, the scab part) is being performed (sword decoration body) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which 5001 is moved to the left), an effect is received and the above-mentioned operation effect is performed according to the operation. It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception is generated while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period, even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, the stage reception will be made properly, so the operation error will occur before the stage reception period occurs. When this happens, the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

  However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect is made regarding which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given to, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of information, information will be mixed with the information (indication indication etc.) notified within the production reception period, and the player will be more confused There is a concern. Therefore, the production result that suggests that an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is the specific operation-related production that is finally displayed, and in the period until the production result is displayed. The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. Even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, there is a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed, and the first period and the second period are sequentially followed by the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described production example, when performing specific notification, an expectation level related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their other examples, the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself changes to any one of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 311). The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 1 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. In this regard, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is changed to one of the above-described plurality of modes, and an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it make it. Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described modes when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “push” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), or a sword decoration 5001 The sword decoration image SYG is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 (step 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image SYG is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG can be given some interest. In other words, the performance is poor when there is a production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance when there is a production reception period.

  At this time, the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the stage performance during the stage reception period can be improved. It is desirable to ensure it appropriately. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Display it. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it can be understood that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decorative image SYG. For this reason, the game entertainment at the time of the production reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such effects, it is sufficient that the number of effect modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of effect modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side. The number of performance modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Moreover, when preparing a several production | presentation aspect as the sword ornament 5001, it is not necessary to change a form as these several production | generation aspects.

  However, if the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 and the mode of the sword decorative image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that a false display is made. There is concern, and this may reduce the entertainment interest. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311) prepared as the form of the sword decoration body 5001. When the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special form instead of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decorative image SYG is changed by further deforming and merging, or the sword decorative body 5001 operates in a mode that does not appear, or in the sword decorative body 5001 It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since it is in the form of realizing a stylistic expression that is difficult on the structure of the sword decorative body 5001 by the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the display is false. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by providing performance beyond the imagination of the player when viewing the structure of the sword ornament 5001.

  Even when the sword decorative image SYG is given a special mode in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is provided for each mode (here shown in FIG. 311) prepared as the mode of the sword decorative body 5001. It is desirable to be able to perform display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is only displayed when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, with respect to a technique that allows the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for other effects (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 312 to 319). You may make it apply.

  For example, if it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X1), the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 348 (a) in addition to the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X2). A production pattern for production development is prepared. When the production progresses to the production pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the display area of the production display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1). A continuation image (image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second extraction state is in a sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 348 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change).

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a form of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A sword image indicating (special aspect) is displayed. This special aspect can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot change. The special aspect concerning this production example is an aspect in which the sheath part is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), even if the sword image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) in the display area is changed to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 has three stages. While maintaining the above, the state of the sword is changed to the second sword state.

  Thereafter, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and an operation promotion effect for urging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extracted state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decorative image SYG) simulating the sword decorative body 5001 in a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), when a player's sword operation is detected during the operation effective period, the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is caused according to the set effect pattern. The expectation notification effect is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 can be executed. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. The second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given is made executable. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third sign that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. An effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different contents of the effects, but as the contents of the effects, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears,
-After that, display an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side to which an operation opportunity is given at a position that is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image,
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first sign effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” is performed as the specific image (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means), and in the second sign effect, “flame” is displayed as the specific image. Display effect by “effect” (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, the display effect by the “water effect” (the effect image imitating the operation means is used as the specific image) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by changing the type of the specific image, such as performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the “water effect” When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third warning effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed. Will come to be.

  And when performing a precursor effect (at least one of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which the visual recognition is difficult. When such a configuration is applied to either the first sign effect or the second sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and low expectation. An operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the display mode (for example, blue) is not certain, so that the effect during the effect reception period is given. Can be improved. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot hold the performance, the performance during the production reception period can be improved.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 350 is an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with the same contents. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 349 and FIG. 350, an example of an effect when the first sign effect is performed will be described. However, this effect example is not the first sign effect but the second sign effect or the third It is also possible to apply to the sign production.

  In FIG. 349 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 349 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first sign effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349 (a).

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 349 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display region to non-display after the start of the effect at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 350 (the specific image itself has a higher transmittance). Or the area where the specific image is displayed is reduced).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 350, at time t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is A button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 (a bar display that indicates the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively. FIG. 349 (c)).

  In this production example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. When the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), when the button image BTG is displayed, the ratio of performing the operation effect in a highly expected manner is higher. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), there is a situation in which the button image BTG can not be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is received. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, since the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a way that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode and the first display mode. It is possible to advance the production without having certainty about which of the two display modes is displayed.

  In addition, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), the button image BTG cannot be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” occurs while the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 349 (d)). In such a situation, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. In other words, in this case, the operation time effect is executed in the form in which the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349 (d).

  According to such a configuration, a period (timing t2 to t3) from when the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4). ), It is possible to provide performance by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the stage performance during the stage reception period (timing t2 to t4) throughout the period, the period during which the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform effect display that is not performed during the period from the timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as “press” is displayed, but for example, at a timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) is more preferably improved. Will be able to.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the production reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize appears first, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until this time, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and an instruction display for prompting an operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state that is difficult to visually recognize before the effect reception period occurs, an effect pattern (third sign) that changes the display mode of the button image BTG to a more expected mode. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, as the button image BTG is in a production situation that is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to provide fun that makes the value of gazing at the button image BTG higher. It can be suitably maintained.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to visually recognize by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is influenced by the “cloud effect”. It was decided to display so that the visibility was maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 may be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, the player can have a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without having certainty of the display mode without being able to grasp the remaining time of the presentation reception period well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented performance.

  In addition, in any of the first sign production, the second sign production, and the third sign production, when such production performance is applied, the production image imitating the operation means is clear after the indication production is started. Even if the length of time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the image can be visually recognized (time until the specific image is not displayed) to the same time. Further, when such a performance is applied to any one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, an effect imitating the operation means after the sign effect is started As for the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), a plurality of these are prepared so as to have a plurality of performances with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a technique for making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation means itself may appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. May be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, it appears in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or an effect image imitating an operation means may be displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing a different display as the precursor effect. Also good.

[Moveable performance triggered by the establishment of conditions different from the conditions for design games]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received at the start port (first start port 2002, second start port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the big hit is won, the big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained after executing the symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed is executed, and after the big hit game, the player is advantageous. It is possible to control the game state (short time state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides effects according to the result of the determination related to winning (for example, various other notice effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-read effects, in addition to effect patterns) As described above, the game entertainment is maintained until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it may be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate over a long period of time.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and the movable content in the effect display device 1600 are also obtained even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decorative body. That is, in this case, display changes and movable body operations appear in a manner that exceeds the category of symbol games, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. For example, the following methods listed below can be envisaged as methods for generating the above. In order to cause a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the symbol game start condition is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted. However, a situation where the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is “0” and the number of holds) The above-mentioned another condition must be able to be satisfied even if the condition is “0”, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body.
・ Performance lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuations periodically, and that a specific result is obtained by this production lottery is the above-mentioned method of “satisfaction of another condition” ・ the cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means A method of setting the above-mentioned number to reach a predetermined number, “establishing another condition”. Time is measured (for example, when the power is turned on) by RTC (real-time clock) function or arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) Measure the time from the above), and the above-mentioned “establishment of another condition” means that the measured time reaches a predetermined time

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is used, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, the change timing will arrive In general, it takes a relatively long time (for example, several hours), so that the display content or the behavior of the movable decorative body may be changed despite the long time. If there is a situation that can not be done, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which the movable body operating time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set in advance as the start condition of the symbol game. Can be generated based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. In a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position even though it should be in the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the design fluctuates. When the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decoration body can be started to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time arrives, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within a specific state can be started without starting a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation. .

  In other words, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the fact that a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game is established, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within a specific state, the movable body abnormality is detected in a predetermined procedure within the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed by the restoration.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 351, an example of processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 351, for convenience of explanation, “when the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function, an RTC state in which different display content appears ( The specific state) is generated and the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state) is described. As described above, the method for causing a change in the display content and the behavior of the movable decorative body in the effect display device 1600 when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. Even when other methods are adopted, it is possible to appropriately employ each technique described below.

  Assuming that there is a state prior to the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time (until the RTC state occurs) until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. Will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 351, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the flow of the game so far is achieved by sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the basis of the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol variation. You can have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes). If a big hit is won between the occurrence of the period (RTC state) and the end of the period, the progress of the production by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) has not occurred (normal state) ( It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351, a condition that is not related to the state of symbol fluctuation is satisfied even at timing Rt1 slightly before (for example, 5 seconds before) such timing Rt2. Based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the first condition), it is possible to execute a previous display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the second condition is established). That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example determines whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the time has arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing according to the occurrence of the RTC state (the behavior of the movable decorative body) is executed. . The “previous display” can be executed, for example, as a display “RTC state soon” or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations are the results of the jackpot determination. It is suggested to the player that it is not based on (no expectation of any big hits), so it is preferable to avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to a recognition error by the player Will be able to.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 351, at least in the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only a display (display that does not conform to symbol variation) that does not show any expectation is displayed as the display content in the effect display device 1600. In order to prevent the display of the decorative design (effect pattern) itself, it is not displayed. In other words, in this case, only the display that does not show any expectation level (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) appears as the display content in the effect display device 1600, and the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Since the processing to be started is started, it is expected to more suitably avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to a recognition error by the player.

  Here, “pre-display that appears at timing Rt1” and “movable body operation that appears at timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display that does not conform to symbol variation” and correspond to “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. To do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated regardless of the execution state (including execution / non-execution) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the execution situation of the symbol variation, the situation in which the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are not ready to operate (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in their original positions despite the arrival of the timing Rt2). It is feared that the process of sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be performed even when the timing Rt2 finally arrives.

  For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, but during the execution of such a movable effect, the movable body operation time (in this case, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above comes. In some cases, at least one of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the above-described “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, various movable bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 as well as the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are provided. It is possible to execute a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state in this movable abnormality determination (abnormal determination), a predetermined predetermined is applied to the movable decorative body that is the determination target in a form following the abnormality determination process. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), the movable decorative body in an abnormal state can be quickly recovered. Therefore, the movable body operating time within the above-described RTC state arrives during the execution of the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (such as an operation of moving the movable decorative body to the original position). If there is at least the movable decorative body A, B, or C, the movable decorative body that is in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-mentioned “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the design variation”. Can be assumed.

  As the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation”, for example, the symbol variation start timing (the timing to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when symbol variation is started), symbol variation It is possible to execute (execute restoration processing based on command acquisition) as at least one of the stop times (when to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 351, first, at least “the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived, and then the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operating time in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (in this case, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, the movable decorative bodies (movable decorative body A and movable decorative body B used within the period). The movable decorative body C) is prohibited from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, so that the movable object operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (the movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side.

  However, at this time, there is a concern that the game entertainment may be lowered if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at timing Rt1, only a display that does not show any expectation as a display content on the effect display device 1600 (a display that does not conform to symbol variation) appears. As described above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, when there is a symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 has arrived, The display that is not shown again (display from the timing Rt1) is not hidden at this time, and this is changed over the period until the timing Rt2a at which the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt <b> 2 to Rt <b> 2 a, although the RTC state (specific state) has occurred and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 has a decoration. Only the display in which the design pattern is not displayed and no expectation is shown. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C) is advanced. It can be expected that the lowering of the gaming interests due to the fact that the movable effect according to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is suitably suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351, when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 has come to an end (stopped) (when timing Rt2a has come) Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)” that has been displayed so far is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, The display showing the expected degree of the production pattern and the notice production is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed, the “timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived. As long as it is within a period until the movable decorative body finishes operating in a specific manner depending on the movable body operating time in the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game due to the prohibition of the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether a situation should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and when it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, the C variation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (a movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). In other words, in this case, the moving decorative body is moved in accordance with the moving body operation time in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure). Even if the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in a specific manner is completed, a movable effect ( Execution of at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is not permitted.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 351, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state to appear is a timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. There is concern about the decline. However, although the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, it is controlled to the special effect mode when a big win is won between the occurrence of the RTC state and the end of the RTC state. Etc.) is not generated at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol variation (C, D variation in the diagram) after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to cause a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) to appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, until the timing Rt2a arrives (until the timing Rt2a arrives) until the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is completed (stopped). ) “After the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that the “period until completion of sequential operation by C” elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a has not arrived, the state in which “a display in which no expectation degree is indicated (display from the timing Rt1)” appears is maintained. This is the example shown in FIG. 351, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after timing Rt2) is the target of the RTC production privilege. Because it is not.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at least “after the arrival of the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state. In this case, the restoration process is triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation when the period until the completion of the operation (sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is reached. By prohibiting this so as not to be performed (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not conforming to symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the movable decorative body) cannot be performed by the restoration process on the symbol variation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation corresponding to the symbol variation side is performed. The processing to be performed is prohibited, and the processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) is made executable. It is expected that the abnormal operation of the movable body is restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being subjected to the operation, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably performed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 351, when the game state is controlled in the normal game state and the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is being performed according to the big hit determination, It is assumed that the timing Rt1 arrives. As described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display “RTC state soon” appears in the background display of the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (in the diagram, A variation (losing)) is completed during the period from when the “RTC state is about to be displayed” to the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is displayed. Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. The timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol variation is in the middle of the process. At the timing Rt2, the three movable movable behaviors that do not conform to the symbol variation are observed. Processing for sequentially operating the decorative bodies A, B, and C is executed. It should be noted that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued over a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (lost) in the diagram) is stopped.

  Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 351, “three movable decorative bodies A, R2 are generated according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, This is prohibited so that neither the moving effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, in the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (B variation (losing) in the diagram) is being executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( The display in which the degree of expectation is displayed), the movement effect on the symbol fluctuation side (movable body operation in which the degree of expectation is indicated), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side are all controlled as a period of time (first) One limit). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 351, in the period of timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation) This is controlled as a period in which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is indicated) nor the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is executed (second restriction).

  It should be noted that such control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the expected degree) and the movable effect (movable body operation indicating the expected degree) are not performed) Even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation, but is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit variation), it is executed. That is, in this case, no expectation effect is executed, and the big hit symbol suddenly appears at the timing Rt2a when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is in the middle of execution. Therefore, the player who was expecting to be in the RTC state can enjoy the excitement as a surprised performance exceeding the expectation. In addition, after the big hit symbol appears in this way, the big hit gaming state is generated while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated.

  In addition, as described above, for the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display of the decorative symbol is not performed and no expectation is shown), the symbol variation that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 has arrived. Instead of being displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, a specific background (such as “RTC state”) after the occurrence of the RTC state is displayed instead. In addition, when a symbol variation (in the diagram, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as “RTC state”) is displayed, an effect display (expectation level indicates the variation pattern) is started. Display) will be executed as usual. However, with respect to the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, the timing Rt2a has arrived. Will also be maintained in a prohibited state. Therefore, even when an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the big hit determination, Although the display in the liquid crystal display, sound, and lighting of the lamp are performed as usual, the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 351, the three movable decorative bodies A and B are moved depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. , C until the completion of the sequential operation (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) ”, the restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation (here, symbol variation start) Even if the time and stop time) arrive, this is prohibited so that restoration processing (processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on a movable decorative body in an abnormal state) is not performed. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure). )) Start time (restoration operation time) comes, but at these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing is never performed.

  However, in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (timing Rt2 to Rt5 ′ at the time of abnormality), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. It is determined whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined presentation position (first position) and then at the predetermined presentation position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

  Next, at a timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then at the predetermined effect position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body C is, for example, that the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351 (e), when the timing Rt5 comes after the operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state Can be executed. However, while a series of movable body operations (in this case, sequential operations by three movable ornament bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are being executed, a predetermined value is applied to the movable ornament body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, the player will be awakened, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. The operation is not performed independently as an operation different from the sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C, but is performed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state itself can appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. Thus, it is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in gaming interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, on the basis of the result of the abnormality determination, not the process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but the abnormal time including the operation of returning the movable decorative body B It is possible to execute a process of operating in the operation mode (special operation). After that, without returning the restored (restored) movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. As with the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C is A process of operating the body C in a normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred is generated. Until the timing to operate is reached, this is left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side. When the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operating mode. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while preferably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C”. That is, in this case, since one of the operation modes prepared as the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be performed, it is possible to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The fall of the game entertainment at the time of performing is suitably avoided.

  Note that the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially performed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It starts when it is in the middle of the stage and continues until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol variation (D variation (losing) in the diagram) have arrived. In this case, since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration process is executed on the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), the “special mode including the restoration operation” when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoration operation” is described as “the operation in the normal state”. What is necessary is just to restore the movable decorative body B by the operation mode different from the “mode” (return to the original position), for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 351, only the display (for example, “the RTC state is about to appear”) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears at the timing Rt1. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display differs depending on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC ready state”). You may make it switch to. However, even if the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to cause a new display to appear, a display that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation) It is important to display a display that does not conform to

  In the example shown in FIG. 351, the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. However, even when an abnormality determination is made when the movable decorative bodies A and C are operated, Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special manner including a restoration operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set as the generation time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 that satisfy the condition based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, “Display” and “Behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation” were started. However, instead of this, based on a command transmitted based on a function not conforming to symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, “display not conforming to symbol variation” or “behavior of a movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation”. May be started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351, “the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, 3T This is forbidden so that the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is not performed during the period until the completion of the "sequential operation by one movable decorative body A, B, C". It is made difficult to cause a situation in which the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the (specific state) cannot be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is in the execution state. In particular, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and as a result, the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state) may arrive. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed even during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it is not executed.

  FIG. 352 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 351 in that “restoration processing is not executed”.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 352, in the period (timing Rt1 to Rt2) from the arrival of timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or The restoration process) is not executed itself. As a result, even if one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display not conforming to the symbol variation (such as “RTC state soon”) is made, this is restored. It will never be left in an abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 352, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived, as shown in FIG. As described above, the process (the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed. Accordingly, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is performed separately, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 351 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 351 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a manner that delays the arrival of the movable body operating time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is “a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”. By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the above “special mode”. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 352 (f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, “the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body is performed. Suppose that it is determined that there is an abnormality in one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of the abnormality determination when “is not started yet”. Then, while maintaining the “situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is maintained. Will be restored.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 352 (e) and (f), compared to the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are abnormal, they are within the RTC state. The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (in the figure, the delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b), but the period generated by such a delay (in the figure, the timings Rt2 to Rt2b) is used. Thus, the movable body operating time in the RTC state can be reached after the abnormally determined movable decorative body is restored. Thereafter, when the movable body operation time comes within the RTC state, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 351 is performed.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 352 (f) assumes a case where it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. is doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 351 (e). When the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the normal state, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. ”Behavior” is ended, and the prohibition state (prohibition state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

  In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 352 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 351 (f). After the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in a mode according to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” at the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b) ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, if an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination Each of the operations in the special mode is executed.

  According to such a configuration, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, three Sequential operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 352, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration processing for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence (sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C here). In this case, as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (in this case, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). ) Is delayed for a longer time, but a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be executed in a normal state. The restoration operation for a plurality of movable decorative bodies may be executed in parallel. In this case, the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs can be suppressed. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 352, if the player may feel that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state, it will be an amusement. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 352 (f) and (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state”. It is difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, an indication (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 352 (f) and (g) as well as in the example shown in 351 (f), the restoration operation (restoration process) is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period during which the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode (in the special mode operation according to the second abnormality determination). No indication (error code, etc.) indicating that this is in progress will appear. In addition, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is finished, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is finished, and further FIG. 352 ( The display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is finished. There is no such thing as causing any change. These also indicate that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only a “series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state” is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

  In FIG. 351 and other examples thereof, and in FIG. 352 and other examples thereof, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) that is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side is not limited to the above, based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is just to operate | move by a specific aspect in the movable body operation | movement time within the specific state to generate | occur | produce.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation time in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operably provided body). Operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, etc., and board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (saddle character) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 351 and other examples thereof, or in FIG. 352 and other examples thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), When the frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation where an “operation not conforming to symbol variation” is performed.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display that does not indicate any expectation level (until the timing Rt1 is displayed). "Display)" is not displayed at this time, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, the frame side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is used within a period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed. In spite of being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame side movable decorative body that is also used as an operation means depending on the production pattern, There can be a situation where the production is confusing. In the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed, an operation opportunity is not given within the period.

  Therefore, the specific operation means (the frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state where it is subjected to a specific operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, and according to the result of the jackpot determination for the specific operation means. When the production time for giving the operation opportunity has arrived, the production display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means. Even if a specific operation means in a state where a specific operation is being performed is operated, it is desirable not to receive the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being performed, it is assumed that the operation opportunity was originally given to the specific operation means. Can be suggested appropriately In addition, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality by performing an operation on a specific operation unit in an operating state by preventing the production of an operation on the specific operation unit. Expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation to the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the entertainment interest of the game due to the fact that the production is not progressed may be lowered. Therefore, among the frame side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 provided so as to be operable), the operation effects within the symbol variation according to the big hit determination are performed. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high operation effect generation rate within the symbol variation within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. When given, it is desirable that the display relating to the operation instruction image and the effect reception when operated (a predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) are executed as usual.

  That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided so as to be operable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001, etc.), the symbol variation according to the big hit determination A specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low occurrence rate of the operation effect in the interior of the movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state). By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for the operation opportunity grant according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decorative body 5001).

  Also, a frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low operation effect occurrence rate within the symbol variation) provided on the door frame 3 side is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent from the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform an operation by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 351) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 352) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In addition, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected by the operation (delay or the like). In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are used as a panel-side movable decorative body. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the movable decorative body is provided on the door frame 3 side. The operation by the frame side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body with a relatively low generation ratio of the operational effect within the symbol variation). 5001)) When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot determination is executed. Even if, at least the “specific time” has not elapsed since the start of pattern variation (the production pattern started), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration) It is desirable to make settings related to each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that the body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 351 and other examples thereof, or in FIG. 352 and other examples thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, When an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the production can be accepted, the production at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be improved without sacrificing the production on the symbol variation side.

  In addition, as described above, in view of the fact that the normal effect control is allowed only by the symbol variation after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) not conforming to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation to be digested first after that is inevitably started, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is equivalent to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), It is possible to provide a margin for completing operations that do not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Further, when the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent from the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C, Upon execution, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body. When it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is used instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation in the normal mode by performing the operation by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the above operation, or by performing the restoration operation and then following the operation. In this case, the “special mode including the restoration operation” also restores (returns to the original position) the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, a minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  Then, when the RTC state is generated by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the “normal state”, the “special aspect including the restoration operation”, and the “restoration operation” are performed. As long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is used as long as the operation is not completed. Therefore, it is more desirable to make settings related to each production pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not arrive. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated when the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in a normal mode or an abnormal determination mode, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, an operation opportunity can be given.

  When an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the reception of the effect. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation (RTC) by the frame-side movable decorative body is given. Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It becomes impossible to receive the production, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the time from the above-mentioned timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C in the normal mode is “special time”, the big hit determination As long as neither of the “specific time” and the “special time” have elapsed since the symbol variation started (the effect pattern started) , Each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so as not to arrive at a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001)). It is desirable to perform the setting related to.

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives while keeping the abnormal state intentionally.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case with respect to a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A having a fast operation order or a movable decorative body having a long time required for the restoration operation). When it is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is prohibited, but a movable ornament different from the specific movable ornament (for example, the operation order is slow) When the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) or a movable decorative body having a short restoration time is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. The processing (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibiting it. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in a normal state if the operation can be completed during the operation.

  In addition, after the RTC state occurs, the timing when a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started and the operation of the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration process for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a state where the specific state has not occurred) When the restoration operation time to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of production, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the “symbol fluctuation start time” described above is set as the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol fluctuation”. Now, as shown in FIG. 353, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol variation is started, an effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern. In particular, based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the processing to advance the effect and symbol variation is started (based on the fact that the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived) To perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 353, it is assumed that “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the progress of the production concerning the “specific production pattern in which the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the design variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation in which the processing to be performed is performed in parallel will appear.

  Generally, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific performance pattern can be executed, the performance pattern (relatively expected) that is pairwise with the specific performance pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. And in the production pattern which is a paired relationship (production pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation (relatively high effect pattern)” is performed. The In this way, by providing two effect patterns (effect pattern for operating a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern for not operating a specific movable decorative body) that are paired in terms of performance, a specific timing tm2 is provided. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body is operated). Can be executed, and the game entertainment is suitably maintained by such performance.

  However, if the process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 comes after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing It becomes apparent that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it is not possible to perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 353, the progress of the production of the “specific production pattern that can operate the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2” among the production patterns, and a predetermined movement with respect to the specific movable decoration body. When a situation in which a process for performing a restoration operation (a restoration process based on a restoration operation time corresponding to a design variation) is performed in parallel, a specific time tm2 is reached until a specific timing tm2 is reached regardless of the restoration situation. The process for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is ended. In addition, as "a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body", various methods can be adopted, but in the following description, "whether the abnormal state is resolved, A description will be given on the assumption that “a process in which a restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached” is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time required to be different will be different. For example, if the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) just by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, “predetermined restoration for a specific movable decorative body is performed. The timing tx at which the “process for performing the operation” is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored). As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is shifted to a later timing. At the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but if the restoration operation is executed once again, the timing tx will be exceeded, the specific movable decorative body will be recovered. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed before the specific timing tm is reached regardless of the restoration situation. It becomes like this.

  In addition, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is performed once, x time is required, so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is satisfied. The upper limit number n for repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended. By doing so, the processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation may be terminated before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. If a situation occurs, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable ornament is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable ornament is not restored, the specific movable ornament is not restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it is possible to favorably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, it may cause some behavior when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (if the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body), it is possible to give hope. .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined performance is being performed, there is a directing effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined production may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration situation. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In addition, as the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as `` nothing '', it is possible to exemplify a `` display effect that appears in advance in a manner that inquires whether or not a specific display result appears '', and a specific movable decorative body is `` When it is provided as “acting based on the fact that an effect has been received by an operation by the player (or having been accepted but not acted)”, an “effect that causes a specific display that prompts the player to make an operation” appears Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 353, at the timing tx when the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body returns (restores) from the abnormal state. It is assumed that the normal state is reached. In this way, even when there is an abnormal state at the start of the fluctuation (or the “restoration operation time” such as when the previous symbol was stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation has arrived after the restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with movable decorative bodies that perform a multi-stage movement with a more complicated structure. In such a movable decorative body, it is longer until the restoration process is completed. Often time-consuming. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or in an effect pattern that is paired with this, when the effect pattern is started Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive after the pattern change is started (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It can also be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is started. When the special production pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, the specific production pattern can be moved while the special production pattern is produced (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special production pattern is performed). Control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 354 (a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the progress of the rendering related to the special rendering pattern When a situation occurs in which a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation appears in parallel, at least a special effect pattern is being performed (period until the symbol is stopped) Does not end the restoration process, but continues this process.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. Even if it is a case, the said restoration process will not be complete | finished at least while the special production pattern is performed, but the restoration process with respect to a specific movable decoration body will be performed over the whole period.

  According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed, a restoration process in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis after restoration is performed). This special function pattern will function as a reconstructed / diagnostic effect pattern, and as such, it will be carefully restored as a player. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent performance with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special performance pattern that can be selected only when the winning combination is lost. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents in the effect display device 1600 appear a unique display mode such as “the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 354 (a) and (d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that “the abnormality must occur in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which symbol variation is performed” is eliminated. For this reason, it is possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 at which the special performance pattern is finished, if there is a case where the performance pattern according to the new symbol variation is performed without interruption, the next restoration operation time (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) will arrive. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not in the original position). Will be. If a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within a time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately deal with abnormalities can also accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 354 (b) and (d), the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated, but this is continued in the form of the next restoration operation time. . According to such a configuration, even if there is any hold during the execution of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, “even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, Since the restriction of “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated, the restoration process can be performed in a more serious manner.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and (d), as a result of starting a new symbol variation when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed, the new symbol variation is performed. As a case, a “specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 354 (a) to 354 (c), the timing is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the state of the game and the effect after the special effect pattern is ended (and the situation of the restoration, etc.). As for the timing tx at which the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined performance is performed. Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digestion of the special performance pattern), the specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It becomes possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

  If a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is continuously executed after the special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is terminated, Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle three or more symbol variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 354, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the situation is reached. As described above, since one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol fluctuation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made returnable, and a specific movable decorative body can be effected at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, a specific movable decorative object is abnormal at timing tx even though one restoration process is continued in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time). When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained from the timing tx until the symbol variation is finished and the next restoration operation time comes further. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, each time the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) arrives, If the restoration process for a movable ornament of a certain number of times is started several times, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. There is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced by the repeated restoration process on the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is set in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) has reached the predetermined upper limit number. In spite of this, when the abnormal state is not restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, only a special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. In other words, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has not been restored from the abnormal state although the predetermined upper limit number has been reached. Even when the +1 ”th restoration operation time comes, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued without being finished. As described above, with respect to an aspect in which one restoration process is continued in a manner across the restoration operation timing, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation timing comes while the one restoration processing is continued. It is desirable that the count for is handled as a single restoration process so that it is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

  By the way, with respect to such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the backside decoration unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the middle movable effect unit 3200 and the specific decorative member SDY (eg, a decorative object), the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner as described above. The However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 that are operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) In some cases, restoration (return) may be performed in a manner different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol variation is performed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. And as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position with a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341 (f))”, “Process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))”, “display for prompting operation (“ press ””, and bar display indicating remaining time of the effect reception period) ”(See FIG. 341 (f))”. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, a push-in operation) and an effect is received, the “special decorative member SDY (a decorative object) ) And the like (see FIG. 341 (g)) and “Process for causing change in display contents (see FIG. 341 (g))”. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is rendered in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 353 and 354.

  However, “operation for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. The “sword decoration body 5001 is in a normal state with respect to“ a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 ”and“ a process for performing a display for prompting an operation ”. It can be executed at any time and when it is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player views the “display for prompting operation” and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated and received an effect, “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” and “processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force due to an operation by such a player, and the operation part moves, so that the abnormal state It may occur when the problem is resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 that is operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001, and the like) that is also used as an operation means. In the state described with reference to FIG. 353 and FIG. 354, the driving process for returning the frame side movable decorative body (operation means) to the original position is applied to the frame side movable decorative body (operation means) when an abnormal state occurs. Restoration processing) is performed at each timing of “the above restoration operation time (here, the start time of symbol variation)” and “after an effect is received by an operation by the player within the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. It can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body is aimed at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol variation (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing of the start and stop of the symbol variation, but also a different original timing (during the variation period) Among them, aiming at the frame side movable decorative body (operation), the external force (operation by the player) is applied and the abnormal state may be resolved) Since the process of restoring (returning) means) is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. .

  FIG. 355 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword ornament 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable ornament (operating means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 355, a movable operation system effect pattern (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during a period when the symbol variation is performed) is executed. At timing tm21, it is assumed that “a process for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed. When the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, “characteristic display such as“ processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 ””, “display for prompting operation (“ push ””), and an effect reception period If the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 and receives an effect (timing tm22) while the display of the remaining time is being executed), the “specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) etc. “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body” and “processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 355, the specific movable ornament described with reference to FIGS. 353 and 354 is rendered as a board-side movable ornament based on the reception of the effect.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 355, an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 at the timing tm22 at which the presentation is accepted in this way, and this cannot be returned to the original position, and a specific movable decoration that has been staged based on the presentation reception. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and this cannot be restored to the original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are made. However, an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. Regarding the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications is performed. This is because the sword decorative body 5001 is “placed by the player's hand (the door frame 3)”, and if the sword decorative body 5001 is informed of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state is performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)”, and this has become an abnormal state This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply highlighting the fact that the movable performance is not executed may promote a decrease in the gaming interest. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 355, an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process for performing the specific movable decorative body” based on the reception of the presentation at timing tm22. However, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing this process as usual with respect to the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600”. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, when the timing tm23 is reached, the already-pending symbol variation is digested (started) immediately (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 353 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time). The timing tx at which “the process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” started at) is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status) As described above, the process ends until the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol variation starts) has arrived for the sword ornament 5001 as well. It is possible to execute a process of applying a driving force to the original position in a manner in which at least a part of the operation is performed in parallel with the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on the body. In addition, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it is started).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated, and the moving effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rush when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is started / finished is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is started / finished. However, only one of these timings may be the same, or any of these timings may be different.

  As for “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament”, as described with reference to FIG. 354, when a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue after the end of the special effect pattern, the symbol variation that is in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately consumed (for example, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) is not finished but can be executed in such a way that it can be continued. It is desirable that “the process for causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 354). In other words, in this case, regarding the “process for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it will be ended regardless of the restoration situation between the time when the next symbol variation is started and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  Also, after the sword decorative body 5001 is made in an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed appears, it straddles a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern. One restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are finished at the timing tx, respectively, but the restoration fails. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the moving effect by the specific movable ornament is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed with the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state. Thus, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (a driving force by a motor or the like is not applied) within a period of timing tx to tm2 within a specific performance pattern. Even if the position is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the staged operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that this is an abnormal situation in which an external force (not applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2. Even if there is a performance operation with a specific movable ornament in such a low reliability situation, it is highly possible that this will fail. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the state again becomes abnormal, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated therewith be performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the notification is made whenever an abnormal state occurs again, a misunderstanding as if the player is responsible for the abnormal state not being resolved is given. Therefore, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by a restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body has returned from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again. As shown in FIG. 355, the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is displayed. If an effect is received by an operation by the player, it is possible to expect a possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is thereafter used as the original. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the position (remain in the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that a movable effect by a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the reception of the performance, a period (one time) in which a process of applying a driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed. Is generated after the start of the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position). It is desirable that the process be terminated before the process is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the few chances that the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 that could not be recovered by such external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the state (returning operation with respect to the sword decorative body 5001) has failed, the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the original for a period after the end of the movable performance by the specific movable decorative body. By making it easier for the player to recognize the abnormal situation by continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return it to the position (returning the sword decoration body 5001 is performed again), It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification accompanying this be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful. The sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 355, the frame side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) used also as the operation means is set for the board side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after reception of the effect) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operation means is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities for position return and various modes (a mode for returning only by applying driving force, a mode for returning using at least external force) are used as the return method, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility of playing is increased and the decline in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Regarding the process of applying a driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state is accepted by the operation by the player, the pattern variation starts. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the process is to restore the sword decorative body 5001 using an external force (operation by the player), it is possible to perform the process with a different content from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is executed in a simple manner such that the return process is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, it is more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable to perform a proper return process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. However, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and it is movable when the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is not newly started even when a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword ornament 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to remain at the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the presentation is accepted is performed when the return possibility of the sword decorative body 5001 that could not be recovered by external force (operation by the player) is increasing. It can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even if the situation described above is given up that the return without external force is given up. Therefore, “a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))” and “a display for prompting an operation (“ push ””) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. It is important that the processing (see FIG. 341 (f)) ”is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.

  Further, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in the state where the sword decorative body 5001 is located (operated to a specific detection position), and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position (to the specific detection position) If the operation means is provided so that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given to be operated), even if the production reception is generated at the second operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state A driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect is received at the first operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state without applying the driving force for returning to the original position. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the presentation is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of operation of the operation part is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

  In addition, after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state has been accepted for production by an operation by the player, the processing for applying the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily accepted. It may not be executed on the condition that it has been done. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 355, the symbol variation start time (and the timing after the reception of the effect) is exemplified as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation. The timing may be a predetermined timing that arrives at least on the condition that the symbol variation is executed. For example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The restored processing is terminated until the timing tm2 in the specific production pattern that has been reserved is reached, or is executed so as to be straddled before the end of the special production pattern that has been reserved. Each process described above is performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may vary depending on the game state. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable that the game can be made so that the frequency of appearance of a special performance pattern (performance pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the game.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern (reproduction / diagnosis effect pattern) is sometimes performed, as shown in FIG. 354, the abnormal state is observed over a period until the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation. It is possible to continue to execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed again. It is not started, and one restoration process that is already in the running state is continued without being terminated. Therefore, the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is movable. It becomes a problem at which timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 354, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends, after the new restoration operation timing (next This is continuously executed without ending even when straddling the symbol variation start time). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body after the timing tm11 has elapsed and before a new restoration operation time (the next symbol variation start time) has arrived. In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both method 1 and method 2”, or “both method 1 and method 3” is adopted to restore the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to perform.

  Method 1: If at least “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body” When a new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continued, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) ) Has arrived, a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as an effective one, and triggered by this timing (new restoration operation timing) The restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, there will be a situation in which a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are performed simultaneously. There is no concern of interference between these movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (next symbol change start time) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, After waiting for the completion of one restoration process for the movable decorative body, another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is reached based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time). Body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective. In this respect, since the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started, since one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is to be completed, these are restored. There is no concern that interference may occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 3: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time). The restoration process is not executed, but after waiting for one restoration process for a specific movable ornament to be completed, the restoration operation time that comes after that is triggered by another movable ornament (frame side movable The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (the next symbol variation start time) is determined by performing restoration processing on a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state and another movable ornament that is not yet in the execution state. As long as one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is not completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, it will be treated as invalid. No processing for the abnormal state is executed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected to suppress the rate of progress of deterioration as these movable decorative bodies.

(Operation button operation check period)
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) can be operated by driving the operation buttons 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) as effects according to the pattern game by the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, it is possible to execute an operation-time effect using a drive-type operation means (such as an effect in which an expectation level related to privilege provision is suggested not only by an operation but also by driving). However, if such operation-time effects can be executed, but if any abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the operation-time effects can be experienced by the player in the manner intended by the designer. As a result, there is a concern that it may lead to a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, as a part of the maintenance related to whether or not the operation-time effect can be performed, an operation confirmation period (an arbitrary operation confirmation period and an automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is confirmed that the player can experience the operation-time effect in the mode intended by the designer, so that the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

  Specifically, an operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described, but the same operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000. It should be noted that the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize a more reliable confirmation operation for each member, there is no overlapping period between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). And preferably generated sequentially. FIG. 356 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation check periods (arbitrary operation check period and automatic operation check period).

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. The lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is moved to the normal state by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projecting start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the projecting state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projecting position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 has been pressed. Based on such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. .

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, while the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 is being executed, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit according to the instruction. The pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. By pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 356, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operation confirmation whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state protruding from the normal state is performed by the operator (player or hall). This can be realized by the administrator). Specifically, when a condition for generating an operation confirmation period, which will be described later, is satisfied, an arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 in a normal state is maintained for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) that is the generation period. When the pressing detection state (operation detection state) is monitored, and the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 protrudes based on the pressing detection (operation detection) To change. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period is satisfied (even while the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is not detected for a predetermined time. In some cases, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated after the elapse of a predetermined time. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the optional operation check period. The confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be given, and the operation effect using the operation button 410 can be executed and provided with peace of mind.

  Then, after pressing the operation button 410 to make it protrude, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed and a normal state is detected before a predetermined time elapses. In this case, the normal operation state is restored again, and the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended when a predetermined time elapses. On the other hand, if the pressing of the protruding operation button 410 is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcedly returned to the normal state by driving after the predetermined time elapses. Will be returned. After the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to be in a protruding state, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended. In such a case, unnecessary time until a predetermined time elapses after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be prevented.

  The above-described operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) occurs when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the generation condition of the operation confirmation period is configured such that the generation condition is satisfied when the demonstration effect is executed in order to avoid occurrence of overlap with the operation effect. Specifically, in the demonstration production, there is no entry into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 for a certain time after the production set in the fluctuation pattern is finished, and the production set in the fluctuation pattern is performed. This is an effect waiting for the customer when it is not started (the information regarding the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received for a certain period of time on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side), and is suitable for avoiding duplication with the operation effect. In this way, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect, by generating an arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period, the operation button 410 represents the boring time that the effect set in the variation pattern is not started. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time as to whether or not it is normally detected and operated.

  The demonstration effect is started when an instruction (for example, demonstration effect) by the main control MPU 1310a is given when there is no time for entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 while the symbol game is not progressing. A start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side and received to generate a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) by the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and by receiving it, a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation) is performed. Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the operation effect and confirming whether the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. It is possible to perform and provide an operation-time effect using the operation buttons 410 with more peace of mind.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is mounted with LEDs (each LED of the operation button decoration member 432), whether or not an arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred, and the progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period). The light emission mode is changed in a plurality of stages according to the state of the operation button 410 in FIG. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. When an arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on with a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined light amount (a light emission mode A for confirmation period that suggests that an arbitrary operation is possible). ). Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that the operation button 410 is requested to be pressed. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded after the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 has the same color as when the operation button 410 is not pressed once. However, light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is being performed). Thereby, even after the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded, it is possible to notify the outside that further pressing of the operation button 410 is requested. Thereafter, when the operation button 410 is brought into a normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on at least once until the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) elapses. Although it is the same color as the case where it is not pressed, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is weaker than the above-described light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period (light emission mode C for the confirmation period suggesting completion of the optional operation). Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Note that even when the optional operation confirmation period has not occurred, the operation button 410 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner. For example, the operation button 410 may emit light in a manner different from any of the light emission modes A to C for the operation confirmation period. This can be illustrated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 356, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the completion of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player, and the operation button 410 is in a normal position. An automatic operation confirmation period is provided for confirming the origin so as to be located at the position. In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and is operated to return to the normal state from the protruding state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in the normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to grasp that the operation button 410 is operating at the normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced at the time of performing the effect using the operation button 410.

  The arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, while the predetermined time of “10 seconds” is set as the arbitrary operation confirmation period as described above, the time required for a series of operations is a short time of “5 seconds” as the automatic operation confirmation period. Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates to confirm the origin regardless of the player's pressing, in other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system proceeds automatically. On the other hand, in the optional operation confirmation period, if the player does not press down, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the protruding state, and if the player does not press down in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by making the arbitrary operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, the pressing of the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is changed by driving. While it is possible to allow players and hall managers to check carefully over a long period of time in a situation where there is no such situation, it is possible to quickly terminate the operation confirmation (automatic operation period) of the drive system that does not require such long-term confirmation This is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation operations of the drive type operation means can be increased.

  In the standby period between the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 or the second is selected by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (the LEDs on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423) is lit. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted when the effect is presented. In the peripheral confirmation period, when either the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 or the second button decoration unit 411b is lit, but either is pressed. Depending on how the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are turned on (for example, light emission modes such as brightness and color) are different. For this reason, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it can be confirmed whether or not the press is recognized normally, and the frame side lens 417 and the second It can be confirmed whether or not the two-button decoration portion 411b is normally lit, and the drive type operation means itself is confirmed by a series of operation confirmation periods (an arbitrary operation confirmation period, a peripheral confirmation period, an automatic operation confirmation period). In addition to this, it is possible to execute confirmation of related members in the vicinity thereof.

  In addition, if the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period and is not in the protruding state, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided thereafter. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b are not lit, and a series of operation check periods is shortened. It becomes.

  Further, before the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 is operated by operating the operation button 410. Yes. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. Therefore, in the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to confirm whether or not the presentation operation unit 400 vibrates normally by operating the vibration motor 424 by pressing the operation button 410. In addition, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods from being hindered by vibration during the vibration confirmation period, and various confirmation operations can be performed efficiently. realizable.

  In addition, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is established in the progress process of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a normal state. There is a case where the operation button 410 is not in a normal position because it is not detected as a normal state. As a cause, for example, when a malfunction occurs when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to the normal state. It is possible that this is the case. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally, and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 357 (A), during a period other than a series of operation check periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of a special game corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of an effect based on the variable pattern) and a special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally at the end of the symbol variation (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), at the timing of the demonstration production described above (at the timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods) If it is determined whether or not it is in a normal position, and if it is determined that the state is abnormally protruded (not in a normal position), control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed. Is called. According to this, even if the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing not related to the effect based on the variation pattern, and the variation pattern This prevents a misunderstanding that the operation button 410 may have been operated as part of the production based on the above. In addition, even if an effect using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates normally, and there is a decrease in interest in the effect. To prevent it.

  In addition, when it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period among the confirmation operation periods using the execution time of the demonstration effect as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when starting the demonstration effect. In the protruding state, when the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the start timing of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of the series of operation check periods), the operation check period even at the start timing of the series of operation check periods When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when it returns to the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed with priority. On the basis of this, the entire series of operation confirmation periods may be started in a delayed manner.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 357 (B), in a series of operation confirmation periods, it corresponds to the time of starting the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (when starting the effect based on the variation pattern) and the time of the end of the symbol game. It is not determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position) at the timing of the end of the change of the special symbol (at the end of the production based on the change pattern). Even in a protruding state (not a normal position), control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is to give priority to the operation confirmation whether or not the operation button 410 is pushed down during the arbitrary operation confirmation period described above, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation confirmation period. This is because the protruding state 410 is maintained so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded during the operation check period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation check period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control for returning the button 410 is performed. In addition, if the operation button 410 in an abnormally protruding state is pressed down to a normal state before the predetermined period as the operation confirmation period elapses, the abnormality does not occur without waiting for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state.

(Abnormality detection of sword decoration)
Next, although the blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 278 to 281) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword production operation unit 5000 described above should be in the sword insertion state, the abnormality is not in the sword insertion state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 358 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 and abnormality detection.

  The sword decorative body 5001 can be changed between a state where the blade portion 5011 is stored and a state where the blade portion 5011 is exposed (second blade state). In the above-described production example, the state between the sword state and the sword state (first sword state) is used as the production using the sword ornament 5001, but in this example, such a state is used. Do not use. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade part 5011 is in the sword state and a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade part 5011 is in the sword state. ing. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the sword state to the sword state. In this example, the sword state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can extract the blade part 5011, and the extracted state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot extract the blade part 5011. .

  In addition, an effect using the sword ornament 5011 is set as an effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 358 (A), in the production using the sword ornament 5001, an operation reception period during which the sword ornament 5001 in the state of sword can be extracted is generated within the production time. Within the operation reception period, the blade portion 5011 that is in the state of sword insertion is set in the sword state according to an instruction (for example, display of “Take out the sword”) in the display area or the like of the game side effect display device 1600, thereby providing a predetermined effect. The result can be obtained. When the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 and puts the blade part 5011 into the sword state within the operation reception period, control for returning the blade part 5011 to the sword state at the end of the production time is performed. Done. Also, if the player does not extract the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period and the blade part 5011 remains in the sword state, the sword state of the blade part 5011 at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is an effect that has a higher degree of expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410 described above. Yes. That is, when an effect using the sword ornament 5001 is performed, the sword ornament 5001 can be extracted with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in a normal state is pressed.

  As shown in FIG. 358 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be positioned in the bladed state except for the operation reception period, but a period other than the operation reception period that is not in the bladed state is a predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 when the blade part 5011 is in the sword state or in a state between the sword state and the sword storage state outside the operation reception period. It has become. In this example, the state of the sword position sensor described above is in the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the state of sword insertion), and the state of sword insertion in the above-described predetermined period (outside the operation reception period) Measurement) is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358 (C), in the operation reception period, unless the player removes the sword decorative body 5001, the blade part 5011 should be positioned in the sword state. Is determined to have reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. Done. That is, in the operation acceptance period, when the player removes the sword ornament 5001, the blade portion 5011 is positioned in the sword state, so that the sword ornament is only in the state between the sword state and the sword state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword position sensor is in the ON state (the state where the blade portion 5011 is in the sword insertion state). . In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade part 5011 to the state of the sword in the sword restoration control is set to “0.5 seconds”.

  Further, the operation reception period is set to a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001. In the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, sword restoration control is performed to return the blade part 5011 to the sword state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and the player can remove the sword decorative body 5001 during the remaining period. For this reason, even when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of extracting the sword ornament 5001 from being hindered.

  As described above, whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position) is determined at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), and at the timing of the start of the demonstration production described above. That is, during the operation reception period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). Not. On the other hand, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 is determined during an operation reception period during which the sword decorative body 5001 can be extracted. For this reason, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player cannot remove the sword ornament 5001 as much as possible. In addition, the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410. Thus, it is possible to prevent a performance result in such a highly expected performance from being missed.

  In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword state has reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), except when the player removes the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, but only when the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword state at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001. You may make it judge. For example, the blade part 5011 is in the state of being delivered at the start of the operation reception period, and after the operation reception period starts, the player does not know whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 should be completely removed, and the blade part 5011 is removed. Although there is a possibility that the blade is left for a predetermined period in a state between the state and the sword storage state, in such a case, it is possible to prevent the sword ornament 5001 from being determined to be abnormal. .

  Further, when an instruction is given on the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 regarding the extraction of the sword decorative body 5001, the instruction is continued regardless of the occurrence or resolution of the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period. You may make it perform. For example, in the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. The instruction in the display area or the like of the game side effect display device 1600 is continued even during “until time period” and “the remaining period of the operation reception period after the blade portion 5011 is returned to the blade state”. Also, if the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 according to the instruction during “until the end of the sword restoration control,” the sword restoration is performed because the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the production of extracting the sword decorative body 5001 from being hindered due to an abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, although the blade restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed in this example, it is possible that the blade portion 5011 cannot be returned to the blade state due to the catch of a foreign object or the like. In this case, one cycle of blade restoration control that should be completed in “0.5 seconds” may be repeated a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state will continue beyond the operation reception period. In such a case, the operation is performed while the sword restoration control is being performed. The result presentation may be derived at the end of the reception period, and the sword restoration control may be continued after the result presentation is derived. Thereby, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered without hindering the progress of the production.

(Operation button abnormality judgment timing)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 359 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that cannot be operated by the player.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And changeable. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. The lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (A), when a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), or when the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (the variation pattern). At the time of starting the demonstration production described above, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a normal state without satisfying the predetermined protrusion start condition, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruded state (not in a normal position), the operation button 410 is Control is performed to return to the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least when the change of the special symbol is started, so that an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the change pattern. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered.

  In the game board 5, around the game board-side effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper and middle-movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) waiting around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (appearance position) displayed on the front surface of the display area 1600. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the rear upper left movable motion effect unit 3200, the rear left movable motion effect unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable motion effect unit 3400, and the lower back front movable motion effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (B), when a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (when the effect based on the variation pattern starts), when the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (the variation pattern) At the timing of starting the demonstration production described above, the movable decorative body should be positioned in a non-operating state without satisfying a predetermined operation start condition, but at those timings, If it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and if it is determined that it is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position), an abnormality has occurred. Control is performed to determine and return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. In this way, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least at the start of the variation of the special symbol, so the effect using the movable decorative body as an effect based on the variation pattern When this is performed, the movable decorative body does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the production from being cut off. In addition, during the performance based on the variation pattern, if a movable decorative body remains in front of the display area of the game side performance display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the display area is not visually recognized. However, the occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by returning to the non-operating state at least when the change of the special symbol is started.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and at the timing of controlling to a normal state or a protruding state, the player can inhibit the change to that state, whereas the movable decorative body is It is a member that cannot be touched by the player, and the player cannot inhibit the change to that state at the timing of controlling to the non-operating state or the operating state. For this reason, the operation button 410 is more likely to be abnormal than the movable decorative body. In this regard, the operation button 410 increases the chance of abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred, compared to the movable decorative body, so that even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be used at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. For this reason, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 is performed. Inhibition can be prevented.

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, and an effect using a movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is controlled to a normal state or a protruding state. The possibility that an abnormality will occur increases. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred compared to the movable decorative body. For this reason, while the frequency of using the operation button 410 is high, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern, participation in the effect is hindered by the occurrence of an abnormality. Can be prevented.

(Operation button abnormality occurred during operation)
Next, an operation-time effect performed when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361. FIG. 360 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 361 is the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in FIG.

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. The lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is moved to the normal state by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projecting start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the projecting state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projecting position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 has been pressed. Based on such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. .

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

  First, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state 410 is changed to a protruding state. Further, in the operation acceptance period, as an instruction effect A at the time of the protrusion operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the protruded state, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, protruding) Display of the operation button 410 in a state, a message display such as “Press the protruding operation button!”, And an instruction from the speaker (for example, “Press the protruding operation button!”) Is performed in combination.

  In the operation reception period described above, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to a normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 360 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. In addition, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. Although the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is an abnormal protrusion, the instruction effect B notifies the player that the position is equivalent to the normal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display on the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (For example, a display showing a projection of the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display such as “This is a protrusion of the real thing! Press the operation button without worrying!”), Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, , "This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying!" As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 that is in a normal state does not change to a protruding state. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using a certain operation button 410 is being performed or an effect using an operation button 410 in a protruding state, and further an operation in a protruding state There is a possibility that the player may be hesitant to operate the button 410. However, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation is performed by the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 or the sound from the speaker, so that the operation button 410 that is at least protruded from the display or the sound. It can be recognized that the used effect is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the expectation level for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those composed of different effects as described above, but inform the player that the protrusion is an abnormal protrusion but is equivalent to a normal protrusion. If it is possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect content.

  In addition, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to a normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. In addition, when the operation button 410 that has abnormally protruded is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is moved to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. Control for returning to the state is performed. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  Next, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an operation reception period in which detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of this, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. In the operation acceptance period, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal operation instruction C for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in a normal state) The operation button 410 in a state is reproduced, a message “Press the operation button!”, Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, “Press the operation button!” Voice) is combined. Is called. In the operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in a normal state, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 361 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. Also, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D during the normal operation described above is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. This instruction effect D for normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 ( For example, a display showing a copy of the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as “This protrusion is irrelevant, but press the operation button!”, Or a voice instruction from a speaker (for example, “This protrusion is not related. Etc. ”is performed in combination. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, but the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 is performed. In addition, since the instruction effect at the time of normal operation is performed by the sound from the speaker, it can be recognized from the display and sound that the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. . Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above may be ended. Note that the instruction effects C and D at the time of normal operation are not limited to those having different effects as described above, and it is possible to inform the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion. If it is, you may comprise the instruction | indication effects C and D at the time of normal operation with the same effect content.

  In addition, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, The button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In addition, even at the end of the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 that is abnormally protruding to the normal state is not performed.

  As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is displayed within the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. When pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period. It is not locked to the mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, is the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? The operation button 410 in the protruding state cannot be recognized, but depending on whether or not the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state when it is pressed. Can be recognized.

  Note that when the operation button 410 is abnormal, the operation button 410 that is in an abnormally protruding state other than the operation reception period is displayed in the same manner as the operation reception period when the performance is performed using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even when the operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (when the effect based on the variation pattern starts), the symbol game Control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state at the time of the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern) at the start of the demonstration effect.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed during the operation reception period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. However, the instruction effect during such normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is a less expected effect than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, so the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the expectation for the performance cannot be confirmed due to failure, the player will hardly suffer any disadvantage.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is in a normal state during the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. The operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism to return to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked. It is possible to keep the abnormally protruding state from being locked. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an abnormal protrusion occurs regardless of whether an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state or an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not be returned to the normal state. This is because, for example, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, by leaving a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred in the operation button 410, You can call attention.

(Notification when operation button abnormality occurs)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 362 is a time chart illustrating the relationship between the operation state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And changeable. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. The lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 362 (A), when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored. Dont return. In such a case, although the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Even when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done.

  Even when the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality. It does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the operation acceptance period, the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts at the start of variation (based on the variation pattern, as will be described later). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), the timing at the start of the demonstration production described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods) Thus, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. Done. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 as described later is not performed. That is, during the operation reception period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that the player is not intentional. An attempt is made to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence noticeable.

  On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 outside the operation reception period, the response is different from that when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. For example, in addition to the operation reception period, the above-described automatic operation confirmation period is also provided when the demonstration effect described above is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated during the automatic operation confirmation period without being pressed by the player. The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is positioned at a normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 362 (B), in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is moved up and down several times near the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is moved. The origin is confirmed by a normal position sensor so that it can be detected that it is in a normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is brought into a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism by operating to return to the normal state from the protruding state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, Does not return to normal. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruded state, and the abnormally protruded operation button 410 is returned to the normal state unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state returns to the normal state. Control is repeatedly performed. If the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state when the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (in this example, five times), The automatic operation check period is ended, and after the automatic operation check period ends, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period and the abnormality continues after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, the pattern as after the end of the operation reception period described above At the start of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (when the production starts based on the variation pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the game of the game (when the production ends based on the variation pattern), At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

  In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is provided for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, display of “an abnormality has occurred in the operation button”), and blinking of a lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 Is notified to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 (for example, the lamp / LED blinks more intensely than in the normal production).

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period. Not done. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is provided to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. That is, outside the operation confirmation period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410 even though the operation button 410 is not requested to operate as in the automatic operation confirmation period. Since there is a high possibility that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, and is alerted to such an actor.

  In this example, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is performed. It may be. However, in such a case, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appeal to the outside is suppressed rather than the effect that is notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the automatic operation confirmation period. Thereby, even after the end of the operation reception period, it is possible not to be disturbed by the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, and to pay attention to the effect related to the game progress (effect based on the variation pattern). it can.

(Confirmation effect at the time of abnormality of movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect that is performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 363 is a time chart showing the flow of effects when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

  In the game board 5, around the game board-side effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper and middle-movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) waiting around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (appearance position) displayed on the front surface of the display area 1600. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the rear upper left movable motion effect unit 3200, the rear left movable motion effect unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable motion effect unit 3400, and the lower back front movable motion effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 363, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (based on the variation pattern) At the time of the start of the demonstration production described above (at the end of the production) (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the movable decorative body should be positioned in a non-operating state without satisfying a predetermined operation start condition However, at those timings, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and is determined not to be in a non-operating state (not in a normal position) In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed.

  However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is movable. An effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body is performed. Specifically, the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the display contents such as the displayed decorative symbols and background images are changed to non-display. Further, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is flashed violently. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the fact that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

  In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, it is confirmed whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600, a display such as “Press the operation button to end the abnormality notification and continue the game” is performed. Unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also display contents such as decorative symbols and background images remain hidden in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. In addition, effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided in the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker are not performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect that notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect that confirms whether or not to advance the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. End. Then, after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but display contents such as decorative symbols and background images are displayed in the display area of the game effect display device 1600. Thus, an effect accompanying the display content such as lighting of a lamp / LED provided in the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker is performed. For example, when an effect for operating the movable decorative body is performed after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, the display area display, lamp / Although the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker are not changed, the movable decorative body does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decorative body. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. Thereby, the fall of the interest by the movable decoration body not operating can be suppressed. The same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state but also when an abnormality such as the movable decorative body not operating from the non-operating state occurs. It has been broken.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation is performed during the operation reception period in the effect using the operation button 410 (the period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed). Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be displayed by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the used effect is performed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that a predetermined effect result can be derived without moving the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body as described above, the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected. An effect that is not present can be the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is An effect that notifies that an abnormality has occurred and a confirmation effect that confirms whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred, but when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, You may make it perform an effect. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operation state.For example, when the movable decoration body returns to the non-operation state during the execution of the confirmation effect, The confirmation effect may be ended even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Multiple movable object interference avoidance operation)
Next, an interference avoidance operation in the case where an abnormality has occurred in any one of the plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a time chart illustrating the relationship between the operation state of the operation button cover 419 and the operation state of the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case where it will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. It can be changed to an open state in which the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. The lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  In addition, an effect using the operation button 410 is set as an effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. When it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state. When the operation button 410 is not pressed, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state when the operation reception period ends. At the end of the operation reception period, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

  In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded, and the operation button 410 in the protruded state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, there may be a problem that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the opened state. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a relationship of interfering with each other when operated at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be protruded without leaving the operation button cover 419 open, the operation button 410 to be protruded and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other. There is a possibility that further troubles may occur between 410 and the operation button cover 419. For this reason, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control for avoiding the interference is performed so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 364 (B), when the operation reception period occurs, control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, If it is determined that there is no abnormality, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and control is not performed so that the operation button 410 in the normal state protrudes (control that causes the operation button 410 to protrude). Is prohibited). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Note that even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not enter the open state when the operation reception period occurs. Does not perform the control for setting the operation button 410 in the normal state to protrude (prohibits the control for the operation button 410 to protrude).

  Further, when the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger after the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of the operation reception period, Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, and the operation button 410 is allowed to be protruded, and control is performed so that the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded. As described above, when the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other but the interference state is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is projected. Thus, in the remaining period of the operation reception period, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in a protruding state. For this reason, even when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of the operation reception period, the player can press the operation button 410 in a protruding state by self-help efforts. It is possible to prevent the participation from being hindered. In addition, after pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to a normal state. The situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented from occurring again.

  When the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger even though the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of the operation reception period, However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, when the operation reception period ends, control to return the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed, and when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state thereafter, the operation button in the open state Control for returning the cover 419 to the closed state is performed. This prevents a situation in which the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere later again.

  On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time when the operation reception period occurs and the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not protruded. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in a protruding state. At the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is eliminated. This prevents the situation where the operation button cover 419 interferes.

(Operation when operation button abnormality occurs according to game state)
Next, an operation when the operation button 410 is abnormal when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-short-time state and the short-time state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case where it will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. It can be changed to an open state in which the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude and is positioned in the normal state, whereas in the short-time state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 protrudes by the spring mechanism. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state is performed when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state can be pressed. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In the non-short-time state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation reception period. However, as shown in FIG. 365 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state, the control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the opened state to the closed state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in a normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in an open state, only control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to a closed state is available. Is done. Also, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is the same as other than this example, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of the production based on the variation pattern), the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game This is the timing at the start of the demonstration effect described above when the change ends (when the effect based on the change pattern ends).

  On the other hand, in the time-short state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation reception period is in a protruding state when the operation reception period occurs. A predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction. As long as the time is short, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

  Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in an open state and the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 365 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is returned to the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is performed. Note that when the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruded state. Only done.

  As described above, the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state in the non-short-time state (normal state), whereas the operation button cover 419 is in the open state in the time-short state. At the same time, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-short-time state and the short-time state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is determined. When an abnormality occurs as described above, the operation button is used when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed at a position corresponding to the gaming state by changing the return destination position of the member where the abnormality has occurred. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of operating 410 from being hindered.

  The present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single function element (an element having one electrical function (such as a resistance element)) is encapsulated. For example, the number of elements having a specific function is two or three. It is a concept that includes parts that are enclosed in one package.

  That is, in the embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Even in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reservation number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reservation Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening

Claims (1)

A game board that is detachably attached to the gaming machine body;
A determination means for performing determination based on acceptance of a game medium in a start port provided in the game board;
Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on a result of determination by the determination means;
When a predetermined mode appears in the symbol variation, a privilege granting means that can grant a privilege to the player;
Production control means for performing control related to production,
A plurality of movable bodies operable by control by the effect control means,
The plurality of movable bodies include at least a first movable body and a second movable body provided at positions where the player cannot contact, and a third movable body provided at a position where the player can contact. And
The production control means includes
The specific state in which the movable body operation timing at which each of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body is operable is set in advance is related to the determination result by the determination means. Specific state generation means that can be generated based on the fact that no specific condition is satisfied,
When the movable body operation time comes within the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body, which are provided at positions where the player cannot contact, are sequentially operated among the plurality of movable bodies. However, with respect to the third movable body provided at a position where the player can contact among the plurality of movable bodies, the sequential movement by the first movable body and the second movable body is performed sequentially. It can be executed in parallel with the movement,
If the third movable body is not in a normal position when the movable body operation time comes within the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body even if they are within the symbol variation execution period. executable der processing for processing for sequentially operating the body to perform a restore operation with respect to the third movable member in the form of parallel to be successful is,
further,
The process for causing the third movable body to perform a restoring operation can be executed when a specific time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived when the specific movable state is not in the specific state, but is in the specific state. Sometimes, the game machine is not executed when a specific time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives .